JP7015741B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known in which a first special symbol is variablely displayed when a game ball wins a prize in a first starting opening, and a second special symbol is variablely displayed when a game ball wins a second starting opening. Then, when it is displayed that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a specific result, it is controlled to a special gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine using a function of simultaneously performing a variable display of a first special symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol is disclosed. For example, a specified number of variable displays are performed in a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which the small hit probability of the second special symbol is higher than that of the first special symbol, the lottery probability is high, and the winning of the first starting port is facilitated. Then, a gaming machine capable of increasing the number of balls to be played is disclosed by ending the facilitation of winning a prize at the first starting port and shifting to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state so that a small hit game can be easily executed. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-174800

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is provided with a new game property using a function of simultaneously performing a variable display of a first special symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol, but in recent years, it has been further developed. A gaming machine having playability is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
The first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs the first lottery (for example, the first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, and
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (for example, a second starting port) that can accept a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area, and when the game ball is accepted, a predetermined number of prize balls or prize ball data are given . For example, the second starting port 440) in FIG. 254 and
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, and
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 of FIG. 254) is used. ) Is activated and is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port, and when the game balls are accepted, it becomes easy to accept the prize balls or the winning openings to which the prize ball data is given more than the predetermined number. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a specific game (for example, a small hit game), and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
An effect control means that can execute a predetermined effect,
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, but the prize is won. Before the game ball is accepted in the mouth, the game ball is accepted in the second starting port, and the acceptance of the game ball in the winning opening is hindered, so that the number of prize balls per unit time or the number of prize balls or An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize ball data is less than 1 (for example, a high-probability time-shortening gaming state),
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning opening becomes easier than in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the game ball is launched per unit time. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state.
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state at a timing that may differ each time when the advantageous gaming state is controlled.
The effect control means is
When the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, the timing for shifting to the specific game state (the number of digested time-saving games, the specified number of times) is used by using the time provided for executing the specific game. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests (the number of remaining times of the time-saving game) by subtracting the number of time-saving games.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the advantageous gaming state, although the specific game is frequently executed based on the acceptance of the gaming ball to the second starting opening, the gaming ball to the winning opening is executed. It may cause discomfort to the player because the acceptance is hindered. Therefore, when the specific game is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the time used for executing the specific game is used to give an effect that suggests the timing of transition to the specific gaming state, which may be given to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability such as reducing pleasure.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

In addition, the "effect suggesting the timing of transition to the specific game state" is, for example, the number of remaining time-saving games obtained by subtracting the number of digested time-saving games from the specified number of times (determined time-saving number of times). The mode is not limited as long as the timing of transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state can be grasped.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an example of the figure which shows the operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment from the back side. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an example which shows the front disassembled perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment seen from diagonally above right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. This is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM of a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table stored in the main ROM of a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of a main control circuit. It is an example of the front view of the game board unit which shows the mode that the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member of a normal electric accessory is open. This is an example of a front view of a game board unit showing a mode in which a game ball flows down a right region when a blade member of an ordinary electric accessory is closed. This is an example of a front view of a game board unit showing a mode in which a game ball flows down a left side region when a blade member of an ordinary electric accessory is open. This is an example of the front view of the back unit. This is an example of the rear view of the back unit. This is an example of a perspective view of the back unit viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of a perspective view of the back unit viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back. This is an example of a rear perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from diagonally above to the right. This is an example of the front view of the attacker unit. This is an example of a side view of the attacker unit. This is an example of a plan view of the attacker unit. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from diagonally above the front right. It is an example of the front view which shows the base member of an attacker unit. It is an example of the rear view which shows the front side plate part 520 of an attacker unit. This is an example of a front sectional view of the attacker unit. This is an example of an exploded cross-sectional perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from diagonally above the front right. (A) An example of a plan view showing a large winning opening solenoid, (b) an example of a plan view showing a link arm, and (c) an example of a plan view showing a shutter. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an attacker unit when the shutter is in the second position, and (b) is also an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an attacker unit when the shutter is in the first position, and (b) is also an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory. It is an example of the plan view which shows the special electric accessory which concerns on another example. This is an example of a perspective view of the special electric accessory according to another example as viewed from diagonally above the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of a special electric accessory according to another example as viewed from diagonally above the front right. It is an example of (a) a plan view showing the accommodating portion, (b) an example of a perspective view of the accommodating portion viewed from diagonally forward right and above, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the accommodating portion viewed from diagonally above right. (A) An example of a plan view showing the big winning opening solenoid, (b) An example of a perspective view of the big winning opening solenoid seen from diagonally above right, and (c) A rear perspective of the winning opening solenoid seen from diagonally above right. This is an example of the figure. (A) An example of a plan view showing a link arm, and (b) an example of a rear perspective view showing a link arm seen from diagonally above to the right. (A) An example of a plan view showing a regulating member, (b) an example of a perspective view of the regulating member viewed from diagonally above right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the regulating member viewed from diagonally above right. This is an example of a front perspective view showing an assembly configuration of a special electric accessory in a state where there is no accommodating portion. This is an example of a front perspective view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member. It is an example of the rear perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid, the link arm and the regulation member. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a large winning opening solenoid, a link arm, and a restricting member, and (b) is an example of a diagram in which the link arm in (a) is not shown. (A) is an example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a large winning opening solenoid, a link arm, and a restricting member in a closed state, and (b) is an example of a diagram in which the link arm in (a) is not shown. (A) An example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a large winning opening solenoid, a link arm, and a restricting member when the driving force transmission unit of the large winning opening solenoid starts to move from the state shown in FIG. 46 (b). It is an example of the figure which omitted the illustration of the link arm of (a). (A) An example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a large winning opening solenoid, a link arm, and a restricting member when the driving force transmitting portion of the large winning opening solenoid continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 47 (b). It is an example of the figure which omitted the illustration of the link arm of (a). (A) An example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a large winning opening solenoid, a link arm, and a restricting member when the driving force transmission unit of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 48, (b). ) Is an example of the figure in which the illustration of the link arm in (a) is omitted. (A) is an example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being locked by a restricting member, and (b) is an example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being released by a regulating member. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of an ordinary electric accessory unit viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of an ordinary electric accessory unit viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is an example of the figure which shows the ordinary electric accessory, the second start port switch, and the accommodating member. This is an example of a rear view of an ordinary electric accessory. This is an example of a rear view of an ordinary electric accessory viewed from diagonally above to the right. The mode of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is in the closed state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and the mode of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is in the transition state from the closed state to the open state (solid line). It is an example of the rear view showing (shown in). Rear view showing the mode of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is in the transition state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and the mode of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is in the open state (shown by the solid line). This is an example. It is a rear view of the blade member and the power transmission mechanism for explaining the function of the flange connecting member, (A) the figure for explaining that the opening of the blade member is prevented, (B) the opening of the blade member. It is a figure for demonstrating that is permissible. It is an example of the front view of the upper front accessory in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the back view of the upper front accessory in a normal aspect. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory viewed from diagonally above the rear left. This is an example of the front view of the upper front accessory at the origin position. This is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory while the movable ornament is moving downward. It is an example of the front view of the upper front accessory when the movable decorative body moves downward to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the upper back accessory in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper back accessory in a normal aspect. This is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory viewed from diagonally above the rear left. (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 67, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of a portion X shown in (A). (A) is an example of a sectional view taken along line BB shown in FIG. 67, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of a portion Y shown in (A). It is a figure which shows an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position), (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode after the upper back part of a thing starts operation, and before the upper left arm and the upper right arm of a pantograph mechanism reach the limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a figure. It is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode when the upper left arm and the upper right arm of the pantograph mechanism reached the limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. When the upper left arm and the upper right arm of the pantograph mechanism are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor and the right motor are further rotated, and the movable decoration is operated downward by the left transmission arm and the right transmission arm ( It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect (when the covering decorative body starts operation with respect to a movable decorative body), (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode that the covering decorative body moved to the operation limit with respect to a movable decorative body, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the lower accessory in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the lower accessory in a normal aspect. This is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory viewed from diagonally above to the left. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory in the mode when it is in the origin position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. , It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory in the case of operating to an intermediate position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory in the case of operating to the operation limit, (A.) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. This is an example of the front view of the upper corner accessory. This is an example of the rear view of the upper corner accessory. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is an example in the rear view which shows the time when the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are in the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body start operating from the origin position. From the position shown in FIG. 92, it is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body are further operated. This is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body are operated to the operation limit position. This is an example of the front view of the lower corner accessory. This is an example of the rear view of the lower corner accessory. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back. This is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body and the fourth movable body are at the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body and the fourth movable body start operating from the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body and the fourth movable body are operated to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the mode when all of the 1st movable body, the 2nd movable body, the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body are operated to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit which shows the mode when the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body operate to the operation limit position, and the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body stand by at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit which shows the mode when the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body operate to the operation limit position, and the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body stand by at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory in a normal aspect. It is an example of the back view of the side accessory in a normal aspect. This is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of a side accessory viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory viewed from diagonally above the rear left. This is an example of a front view of a side accessory in which a movable decorative body is moving toward the front of a display area of a liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a rear view of a side accessory in which a movable decorative body is moving toward the front of a display area of a liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a front view of a side accessory when the movable decorative body advances most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a rear view of a side accessory when the movable decorative body advances most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a rear view of the side accessory when the motor for the side accessory is further rotated in the same direction from the state where the movable decorative body is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel viewed from diagonally above the rear left. (A) is an example of a front view of the second middle panel, and (B) is an example of a sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A). This is an example of a flowchart showing the power-on processing by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing the switch input detection process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a fluctuation pattern determination process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing the main control main process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing the time reduction number subtraction process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing the main processing by the sub CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a command analysis process by a sub CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the sub CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a message setting process by a sub CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing the direct table registration process by the sub CPU. This is an example of a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the sub CPU. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the state transition of a plurality of game state stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device in a secret A stage. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the example of the scenario preset setting process by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation between a battle attribute and a production map. It is a figure which shows an example of the production map used for a scenario lottery. This is an example showing the setting of the provisional fluctuation for each hold of the first hold to the fourth hold together with the time sequence. This is an example of a flowchart showing an effect determination process (confidential A stage) that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process. This is an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the effect determination process (confidential A stage) which continues from FIG. 142. It is a figure which shows an example of the start memory which is held in the 1st hold to the 4th hold. It is a figure which shows an example of the start memory which is held in the 1st hold to the 4th hold. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the effect determination process (confidential A stage) which continues from FIG. 144. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect which blocks three temporary fluctuations. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the effect determination process (confidential A stage) which continues from FIG. 147. This is an example of a sequence of provisional fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the third hold are the targets of the scenario lottery. This is an example of a sequence of provisional fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the fourth hold are subject to the scenario lottery. In step S326, it is an example of a flowchart showing a modification example when it is determined that there is a scenario effect being executed. This is an example of a flowchart showing the look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage). It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern at the time of determining the section which performs the look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example which selects the detail of the look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the detail of the look-ahead effect is a countdown effect. This is an example of a flowchart showing the background change control process. This is an example of a flowchart showing the background change continuous possible number of times determination process. This is an example of a table related to background change control and background change scenario. It is a figure which shows the specific example for demonstrating the flow of the background change control processing which concerns on this embodiment. This is an example of a flowchart showing the fluctuation scenario determination process. This is an example of a flowchart showing the chance-up control process. This is an example of a flowchart showing a pending change determination process. This is an example of a sequence chart showing lighting control of a character lamp. This is an example of a flowchart showing the control process of the character lamp effect. This is an example of a flowchart showing the control of full-screen effect. This is an example of a screen diagram showing a screen display. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of a sub-control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. This is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on processing by a main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game permission processing in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, (a) a flowchart showing an example of setting processing, and (b) a flowchart showing another example of setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backup clear process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game return processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-off occurrence in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening winning detection processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main processing by a main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by a main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving number subtraction process by a main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by a main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table setting process by a main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by a main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing by a sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing by a sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission processing by a sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message setting process by a sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process by a sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message transmission processing by a sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a table which shows an example of the selection rate of the limiter number in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of a mode in which a gaming ball passes through a right gate of continuous operation of an accessory in the pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 4. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which a gaming ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate in the pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu redisplay process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed. , (B) A screen indicating that an abnormal start port winning error has occurred and that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed, (c) Backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed, and This is the screen after the notification period has elapsed, indicating that the backup clear process has been executed in a state where both start port abnormal winning errors have occurred. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart when the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. .. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. This is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is the flowchart which continues from FIG. 59. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can perform page update in the setting change / confirmation history screen in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen which each history data was cleared in the setting change / confirmation history screen in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example of the initial screen. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing an example when "setting display" is selected. be. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, wherein the set value is newly added and displayed is shown. It is a figure. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected. .. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, which is an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated. Is. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the operation procedure until the setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set value can be confirmed is displayed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flow chart which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the maintenance process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example which is displayed in the display area. This is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the entered password is inappropriate. It is a figure which shows the example of. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the set value is confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. It is a flow diagram which shows an example of the operation procedure until the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the volume switch which generates the volume password applied to the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. .. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example which is displayed in the display area. This is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow diagram which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the gaming system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine which constitutes the gaming system which concerns on modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the portable wireless communication terminal and the server apparatus of the gaming system which concerns on modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the 2D code in the pachinko gaming machine of the gaming system which concerns on modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow diagram which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2D code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system which concerns on modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system which concerns on modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system which concerns on modification 3 in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a table stored in the main ROM and a variation time determination table of a special symbol for low start. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a table stored in the main ROM and a variation time determination table of a special symbol for high start. This is an example of a flowchart showing a small hit winning effect process executed by the sub CPU in the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. This is an example of a flowchart of the index effect processing executed by the sub CPU 201 in the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example showing a flowchart of the standby extortion suppression effect process executed by the sub CPU. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is another example of the flowchart of the small hit winning effect processing executed by the sub CPU. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example showing a flowchart of the premier effect control process executed by the sub CPU. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a table stored in the main ROM and a variation time determination table of a special symbol for high start. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 and the effect by the sub CPU 201 in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". It is a time chart showing the relationship with control, and (a) when the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of "loss"-> "small hit"-> "big hit" in the conventional pachinko gaming machine. One example is (b) in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of “miss” → “small hit” → “big hit”. In the second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit is a "high-accuracy time-saving game". It is an example of the table referred to in "state" and "low probability short game state". In the third embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the third embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the variable time determination table executed by the main CPU is triggered by the transition from the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process. In the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a flowchart showing a fluctuation time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 when the small hit gaming state ends. In the modified example of the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM and shows the variation time determination table of the special symbol for middle start. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU in the modification of 4th Embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the sixth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the sixth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a figure which is the table stored in the main ROM, and shows another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start. It is a figure which shows another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start in the 6th Example of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In the sixth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a table stored in the main ROM and a variation time determination table of a special symbol for high start. In the sixth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the fluctuation time executed by the main CPU is triggered by the determination of the fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extremely long. It is a flowchart which shows the decision table setting process. In the seventh embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the eighth embodiment and the modified example of the eighth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the modified example of the modified example of the eighth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the third embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit. In the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. In the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit.

[1. Pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment]
[Composition of gaming machines]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a group of operation buttons. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display units. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is the direction in front view. Therefore, for example, "left" in the right direction of the drawing is described as "left" in the front view because the drawing is a rear view. Similarly, in the case where "right" is described in the left direction of the drawing, the "left" on the drawing becomes the "right" in the front view for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a gaming board unit. 17. The payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 are provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launcher 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front surface side. Support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A protective glass 23 having transparency is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting means for producing a notification by light, an effect, or the like, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be performed, and may be, for example, a lamp or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when the term "select button 664" is used, it means a general term for the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hall menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, on the upper plate 26 or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is located in the lower front part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 stores a game ball, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 is launched from the launching device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on the result of a jackpot determination of a special symbol described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 26 is paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player in the launch device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device in response to the operation.

Although the details will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol (hereinafter, the big hit determination of the special symbol may be simply referred to as “big hit determination”) and various effect images related to the game. It is a thing. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of a big hit determination, an effect image during a big hit, and a demo effect image. The number of holdings of variable display (variable display) of special symbols is included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board unit 17 (inner peripheral side of the center rail 1742 described later).

In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but a plurality of liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images are displayed using the plurality of liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). A sub-control board 40 having a payout / launch control board 50 having a payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling payout / launch of a game ball, and a power supply circuit 338 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 60 having a power supply unit 60 (see FIG. 9), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) are provided, respectively.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

Inside the main board case that houses the main control board 30, there is a setting switch 332 that is operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 that is operated when changing or confirming the set value, and a performance display monitor. 334 and error notification monitor 336 (both see FIG. 9 described later) are housed. For example, the performance display data and set values described later are displayed on the performance display monitor 334. For example, an error code or the like described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. The setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security, and are referred to as a pachinko gaming machine 1 management manager (hereinafter referred to as "game machine management manager"). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The inside of the main board case means that the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and only the corresponding parts of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case are turned off. When there is a notch and the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine management manager to expose the back surface, the game machine management It also includes those that allow the responsible person to access the configuration switch 332 and / and the configuration key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. It includes a center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes each accessory such as an upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Each of these accessories 1000 functions as a directing accessory that can be operated based on the result of the special lottery.

The transparent panel 172 is formed with an opening 1722 at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, changes the traveling direction, and flows down toward the lower part of the game area 20.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 is provided with a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 is divided into left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flows down the game area 20, and the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The flow area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 52. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left-handed hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right-handed hitting". It is possible to distinguish by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which a first starting port 420, a large winning opening 540, and a special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later. It is done when it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later is the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it shall mean both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting port 420 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73, which will be described later, to display the result of the big hit determination. Is to give. A first start port switch 421 is arranged at the first start port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the first start port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are ejected from the payout port 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handed strike.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory unit 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view. Conventionally, most of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below, for example, the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it has become difficult to arrange the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74, which will be described later, to display the result of the big hit determination. Is to give. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected in the second start port switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are ejected to the payout port 61. It is discharged (discharged) from the upper plate to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 has a blade member 4620 that can rotate to the right, a start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ). The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the start port solenoid 4630. It is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball either wins a prize in the second starting port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the out port 450. Will be done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed only for a predetermined period and a predetermined number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passage gate switch 49a is arranged at the passage gate 49 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed striking.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which a first starting port 420, a large winning opening 540, and a special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 is that in recent years, it has been required to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and is shifted to the jackpot gaming state. Will be done in.

The general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning openings 56 are arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a are arranged in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When a game ball is detected in the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27). (Ejected).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 is 10, and the number of prize balls in the large winning opening 540 is 3. The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball). The out opening 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting openings or the winning openings.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a design hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to the open state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary hit"), the combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 71a / 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port is opened. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the reserved normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs repeatedly turn on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs repeatedly turn on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is shifted to the big hit game state in which the game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 determine the number of times the reserved special symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reservations for the special symbol variation display"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of hold of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

As shown in FIG. 7, the back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and has an upper front accessory 1000 arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and a rear portion of the upper front accessory 1000. An upper back accessory 1100 arranged on the side and above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 21), a lower accessory 1200 arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a liquid crystal display. A corner accessory 1300 (see, for example, FIG. 21) is arranged so that a movable body described later is located at four corners of the display area of the device 16, and is arranged at the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It includes a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attacker ball gutter 1600, a main board case 1700, and a rear box 1800 that accommodates each of the above accessories and is equipped with a main board case 1700 to form a unit. Details of each of the accessories 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400 included in the back unit 176 will be described later.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the outline of the internal processing by the main CPU 101 when the gaming ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the starting memory for the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442. Is withheld (variation display of the first special symbol is withheld). As for the hold of the start memory for the first special symbol, both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It will be canceled on condition that it does not exist. That is, if the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the start memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed. If the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 when the variable display is not performed for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start storage is released, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 is started.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the variation display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. The start memory of is suspended (the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended). As for the hold of the start memory for the second special symbol, both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It will be canceled on condition that it does not exist. That is, if the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the start memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed. If the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 when neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start storage is released, the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 is started.

In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while the variable display of the special symbol is performed on one of the display units 73 of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed on the other display unit. .. In the present embodiment, when both the start memory for the first special symbol and the start memory for the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is reserved regardless of which start memory is reserved first. The second special symbol display unit 73 performs variable display of the second special symbol, giving priority to the release of the hold for the start memory.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set up to 4 times each. Therefore, the maximum number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol is eight, which is the total number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440.

Further, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes in the liquid crystal display device 16 except in a specific case. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol that is being variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is stopped and displayed, and is stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as identification information for directing.

Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a hit. The effect image to be made is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. In addition, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the specific stop display mode is set according to the type of hit. In such a configuration, the combination of the identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. As a result, the player can recognize the type of the hit in addition to the hit. It should be noted that some of the types of hits have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that it is a hit and the type of the hit.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly has a main control circuit 100 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start storage, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start storage, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start storage, and the second special for the upper limit of four times. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start storage, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off (power is turned off).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol hold display unit 75. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the start port solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The external terminal board 323 to be used is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes a first start port switch 421, a second start port switch 441, a pass gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. Is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game hall is connected to the main control circuit 100.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that serves as an opportunity to execute a setting change process or a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is for changing the set setting value at the time of the setting change processing described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that a third party other than the game machine manager (for example, a player) cannot easily access the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out the game ball, a launcher 15 for firing the game ball, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

When the payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340. The payout device 340 is controlled to pay out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the launch solenoid (shown) is based on the rotation angle (rotation amount) thereof. It supplies power to the wheel and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to light of the LED 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned on / off by operating the main button 662, and each of the select buttons 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d, which are turned on and off by operation, are connected. In reality, select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided, respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as a select button switch 6641 for convenience.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the gaming effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as the storage means for storing the program, the table, or the like, but the storage medium is not limited to this and can be read by a computer equipped with the control means. If it is, another embodiment may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device or a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the program, the table, or the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering image data, and an image signal for image data. It is equipped with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data indicating a decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 24.

The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LED 25 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. And so on.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 208 receives the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out the game balls and a game. A launching device 340 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure according to an operation of a game hall administrator, and the like are connected.

The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

A power switch 35 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Although the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party other than the person in charge of managing the gaming machine (for example, a player) cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 in the above case correspond to each other. When the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine manager, and the back surface is exposed. , Also including those that allow the pachinko / pachislot machine manager to access the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 aggregates the base values based on the past game history, and stores the aggregated results in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. This specific work area will be described later, but it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear process described later is performed. It should be noted that the aggregation of the base values may be performed based on the performance of a predetermined operation, or the aggregation may be performed at all times so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a total history totaling means that aggregates all base values based on the total game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present. It is provided with a history aggregation means for each set value that executes aggregation of the base value for each set value based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the game machine management manager or the like, the all history totaling means executes the totalization of all the base values described above. All the base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the base value for each set value is performed, the history totaling means for each set value executes the total for the base value for each set value. The base value for each set value aggregated by the history aggregation means for each set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The history aggregation means for each set value can also aggregate only the base value for any set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set setting value but also the base value for other setting values other than the set setting value can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other set values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

The main CPU 101 has both a total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and a set value-specific base value aggregated by the set value-specific history aggregation means, for example, in response to an operation by a game machine management manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of these can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of a specific set value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base value of all the set values in a list. Further, both the total base value and the base value for each set value may be displayed in a list. To display the base values of all set values in a list, or to display both the base values by set value and the base values by set value in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes a total history totaling means and a set value-based history totaling means, and in addition to these or in place of the set value-based history totaling means, the setting change process described later is executed until the present. It is also possible to provide a post-change history totaling means for totaling the post-change base value based on the game history. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by making all or part of all the base values and the base values for each set value and / and the base values for each set value after the setting change displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game Information based on the past game history of the machine 1 can be easily confirmed.

In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering a special electric accessory (large winning opening) or an ordinary electric accessory. The ratio of the number of game balls issued (payout by the character) may be displayed. Further, it may be displayed with respect to the total number of shots, and may be displayed with the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning opening). Moreover, you may display them according to the setting.

Further, an error code described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may display a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing described later, a setting checking code indicating that the setting confirmation processing described later is in progress, and the like. can. It should be noted that during the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "normal hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the normal symbol in the ordinary symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random values (for example, jackpot determination random value and symbol determination random value) are used from various counters (for example, a jackpot determination counter and a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random values are stored by the special symbol start winning prize, and one condition is that various data such as random values are stored, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern). ) Is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. , And the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variation display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has been achieved, the big hit game state control process for performing the big hit game state is executed. In the big hit game state, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game state control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state in the normal time, which is different from the big hit game state, is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, the game state in which the "big hit" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as "normal game state") and the probability of being determined as "big hit" are A gaming state that increases from the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high probability gaming state") and a gaming state in which a special symbol start winning prize is easily obtained as a result of the normal hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "short-time gaming state"). ) And so on. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (random value for jackpot determination, random value for symbol determination, etc.) extracted at the time of the starting prize are obtained. ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data (for example, a random value for jackpot determination) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied is called "holding", and the holding various data is called starting storage.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is suspended. The variable display of the special symbols is started in order. In the following, various data on the reserved special symbols are also referred to as "reserved balls".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start mouth prize and second start mouth prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. It is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of the special symbol until. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a total of 8 of the 4 first special symbols and the 4 second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines the winning of the holding ball (whether or not the "big hit" is won) based on the above-mentioned information on the holding ball, and further, the winning of the holding ball is determined. It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on a determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 10). See the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning prize, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

Next, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the normal hit is set. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined normal hit determination result and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variation display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "normal hit", a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of the above-mentioned various winnings, in particular, the possibility of the special symbol start winning of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not obtained, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the game ball is paid out depending on the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as the extraction method of various random number values, a soft random number method that generates random number values within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random numbers may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in a predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is composed of a liquid crystal display, and performs various effect displays in the display area thereof.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image related to (corresponding to) the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) described later is displayed in the display area. Is displayed in. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), for example, 1 to 8 except for specific cases. A plurality of effect identification symbols (decorative symbols) composed of numbers and various characters are displayed in a variable manner in the display area.

Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. To.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"). , An effect image for making the player understand that it is a "big hit" is displayed in the display area.

As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed identification symbols are arranged in a specific mode (for example, the same identification symbols are arranged along a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect such as displaying an image notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76, which will be described later, is displayed. For example, in the display area, hold information (for example, the same number of hold symbols as the hold number) for notifying the hold number (starting storage number) of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 described later is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for causing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A function to display may be further provided.

[Special symbol display]
The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is configured by a 7-segment display that displays a special symbol as a symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, or the like.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is triggered by the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 (special symbol starting prize). , The variable display of the special symbol (identification information) is performed. Then, the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol.

In the following, the special symbol that is variablely displayed when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol. Further, the special symbol that is variablely displayed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 is called the second special symbol.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is a specific mode (“big hit” mode). The gaming state shifts from a general gaming state that is not a jackpot gaming state to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

That is, in the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. It is a "big hit".

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot 53 is open. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442, and the first special symbol is specified in the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74). When the stop display is displayed in the above mode, the large winning opening 53 is opened.

The open state of each large winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening that was in the open state becomes closed.

In the following, a game in which the large winning opening 53 is in a state where it is easy to accept a game ball (open state) is referred to as a round game. Between the round games, the big prize opening is closed.

Further, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

In the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), when the special symbol stopped and displayed is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of "missing"). , The game state does not change unless you win the fall lottery.

That is, in the special symbol game, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game is based on the result. A game in which the state is transferred or maintained.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable first special symbol corresponding to the winning is changed. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the reserved variable display of the first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. Is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the suspended display of the variation in the second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (number of reserved symbols) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending special symbols for variable display is eight in total.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. .. Specifically, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the first special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order.

[Ordinary symbol display]
The ordinary symbol display unit 71 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, in this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display unit 71 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) when viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) normal symbols in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs). .. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 represents a display pattern composed of turning on / off of each normal symbol display LED as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display unit 71 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then displays a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the normal symbol display unit 71, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is variablely displayed by the ordinary symbol display unit 71, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of ordinary symbols to be held (that is, "the number of holdings") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of holds for variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of normal symbol hold display LEDs, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes the normal symbol hold display device 63. , By turning on / off each normal symbol hold display LED, the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed.

Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display LED corresponds to the hold number of the variable display of the normal symbol. Up to 4 lights are turned on.

[1st special symbol hold display device]
The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol is a device for displaying information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol) that is held. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display unit 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

Specifically, the first special symbol hold display unit 75 displays the first special symbol hold display LED according to the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first. Up to 4 lights are lit according to the number of pending special symbols.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display unit 76 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The second special symbol hold display unit 76 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol) that is being held, and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 is , A plurality of second special symbol hold display LEDs are provided.

Specifically, the second special symbol hold display unit 76 displays the second special symbol hold display LED according to the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED is the second. 2 Up to 4 lights are lit according to the number of pending special symbols.

Next, the data structure of the main control circuit 100 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The hit random number determination table (first start port) is "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" based on the random number value for big hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 5442. It is referred to to determine one of the above by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second start opening) determines either "big hit" or "miss" by lottery based on the big hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins in the second start opening 440. It will be referred to when you do.

The jackpot determination random number value is a random number value for determining the lottery result performed when the starting opening prize is won. More specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is a value indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random value is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, one of "big hit", "small hit" and "missing" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the hit random number judgment table (at the time of winning the first start opening), "big hit" and "small hit" are set for each value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)"). The range (width) of the random number value for big hit judgment in which each of the winning of "missing" is determined, and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data", and "missing judgment value". The relationship with "data") is defined. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “high probability game state”. When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the winning random number value is any of "0" to "204" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "big hit" is won. , "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "big hit" in this case (big hit probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

If the probability variation flag is "0" and the winning random number value is any of "205" to "409" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "small hit" is won and "small hit" is won. "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Further, when the probability change flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "409" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any of "0" to "1637" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "big hit" is won and "big hit" is won. "Judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability (selection rate)) of the "big hit" in this case is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

If the probability variation flag is "1" and the winning random number value is any of "1638" to "1842" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "small hit" is won and "small hit" is won. "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319), which is the same as the case where the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, when the probability change flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "1842" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “high probability game state”. Specifically, the jackpot probability when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 when the game state is the "high probability game state" is about eight times as high as when the game state is not the "high probability game state". It gets higher.

Similarly, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the winning random number value is any of "0" to "204" at the time of winning the second starting port 440, "big hit" is won and "big hit" is won. "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "big hit" in this case (big hit probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

In addition, when the probability change flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "204" at the time of winning the second starting port 440, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any of "0" to "1637" at the time of winning the second starting port 440, "big hit" is won and "big hit" is won. "Judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability (selection rate)) of the "big hit" in this case is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

If the probability variation flag is "1" and the hit determination random value is neither "0" to "1637" at the time of winning the second starting port 440, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440, is the game state at the time of winning the "high probability game state" without winning the "small hit"? The jackpot probability fluctuates depending on whether or not, and the jackpot probability when the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state" is about eight times higher than when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state".

[Design judgment table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) is based on the symbol random value acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 and the above-mentioned determination value data. Then, it is referred to for selecting the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol specification command" that determine the stop symbol. The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the winning type at the time of winning, and the "symbol specification command" specifies a symbol to be displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is a command to do. The symbol random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "9", 10/100. With the probability of, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "10" to "19", "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "20" to "29", "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "30" to "39", "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "40" to "49", "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "50" to "95", "z5" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 46/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is "96" or "97", "z6" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol is specified. "ZA4" is selected as the command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is "98" or "99", "z7" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol is specified. "ZA5" is selected as the command. Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", "z8" is selected as the hit selection symbol command and is used as the symbol designation command. "ZA6" is selected. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA7" is used as the symbol specification command. Be selected.

Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "24", 25 With a probability of / 100, "z9" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "25" to "49", "z10" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 25/100. , "ZA8" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "55" to "99", "z11" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "ZA9" is selected as the symbol specification command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA10" is used as the symbol specification command. Be selected.

[Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The jackpot type determination table shows the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game according to the hit selection symbol command related to the jackpot, and the probability change flag in the game state after the jackpot game is completed and the jackpot game state is changed to the general game state. Is referred to to determine the type of jackpot, such as whether to turn on and whether to turn on the time saving flag. In this embodiment, if the jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot, the time saving flag is set to "1". The number of time reductions at this time is determined to be any of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times, and the determined number of time reductions is set. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “high probability game state”. When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0". Similarly, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time saving gaming state”. When the gaming state is the "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". The number of time reductions is the number of fluctuations in the special symbol game in which the time reduction game state can be continued. That is, if the special symbol variation (lottery of the special symbol) is performed for the number of time reductions (100 times) without winning the big hit in the time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time reduction game state. A gaming state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are "1" is referred to as a "high probability time saving gaming state" in the present specification. In this embodiment, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won. However, if the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol lottery) is performed for a predetermined number of times without winning the big hit, the high-probability gaming state may end and the game may shift to the low-probability gaming state.

According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "8", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z7", the number of rounds is "16", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z9", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z10", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z11", the number of rounds is "16", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot of the time saving flag on is determined regardless of the hit selection symbol command (that is, the jackpot determination value data), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot determination value data is not necessarily limited to this. The jackpot of the time saving flag off may be determined according to the situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 is designed to determine the number of time reductions to any one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times, but is not necessarily limited to this. , The time-saving gaming state may be controlled to continue until the next big hit is won, or the time-saving gaming state may be controlled to continue as long as the high-probability gaming state continues.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 is controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won, but the game is not necessarily limited to this, and up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (then shifts to the low-probability gaming state), or until the next big hit is substantially won (for example, 10,000) in relation to the winning probability of the big hit. It may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (up to the number of times), or it may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won.

[Flow of game ball]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game ball launched toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open. FIG. 15 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 16 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the left side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open.

As described above, the attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the gaming area 20 and below the passage gate 49. Therefore, in the big hit game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed. When the large winning opening 540 is opened by the shutter 610, the game ball hit to the right is likely to win the large winning opening 540. In addition, even if it is not in the big hit game state, right-handed hitting is performed even during the electric support.

However, when the player hits to the right, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area loses its expectation when it does not win the big winning opening 540, and just waits for it to flow into the out opening 57 as it is. Will be. Therefore, when the right-handed game ball does not win the big prize opening 540, the player feels a disadvantage and causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the current situation is that the place where the attacker unit 500 or the like can be arranged in the game area 20 is limited. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for larger size of the liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 must be arranged in the lower part of the gaming area 20 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged at the lower part in the game area 20, it is more remarkable that the right-handed game ball does not win the big winning opening 540 and flows into the out opening 57 as it is.

In this respect, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20. Furthermore, the attacker unit 500 is provided with a game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is a game area 20 in which an out opening 57 is arranged, including a guide nail 700, for a game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right area) and has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540. A member that leads beyond the center to the upstream of the blade member 4620 arranged in the left side region, and forms a path of the game ball extending on the extension line of the large winning opening 540 toward the flow direction of the game ball. Is. Here, the "upstream of the blade member 4620" is a region where the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter, "second starting port acceptance" in this specification. Area "). The second starting port receiving area is, for example, a peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG.

In the game area 20, the game ball guiding member is used as a flow path of the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the large winning opening 540 without winning the big winning opening 540. A flow path connecting the outlet side portion of the 580 and the outlet port 57 is formed by the guide nail 700. The game ball flowing down the flow path always passes through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the normal symbol determination shifts to the high-probability gaming state when the jackpot gaming state ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the electric support state during the time-saving gaming state, and the blades are frequently used. The member 4620 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open, if the right-struck game ball (flowing down the right area) does not win the large winning opening 540, the game is concerned. The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guiding nail 700 to the second starting port receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460.

Of the game balls hit to the right (flowing down the right area), the game balls that did not win the large winning opening 540 are always guided to the second starting port receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620, so that the second If the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened when the game ball is guided to the start port receiving area, the blade member 4620 is accepted by the blade member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the second start port 440. There is a high possibility of winning a prize. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is at the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the second out port 57 is replaced with the second out port 57. The starting port 440 is the most downstream position. As described above, the blade member 4620 has a function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20.

In this way, even if the game ball hit to the right (flowing down the right area) does not win the large winning opening 540, the game ball always reaches the second starting opening receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620). Since it is guided, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 will continue, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

In particular, right-handed strikes are performed in the electric support state. Therefore, although the large winning opening 540 is not opened during the electric support, the most downstream position is changed from the out port 57 to the second starting port 440 by the blade member 4620, so that the game progresses in the electric support state. It can be promoted and enhanced.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 15, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right area) and does not win the big winning opening 540. Although it is always guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, it flows into the out port 57 through the space between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

Of the game balls hit to the right (flowing down the right area), the game ball that did not reach the large winning opening 540 (for example, the game ball that flowed down the flow passage leading from the right side of the general winning opening 56 to the out opening 57). ) May be configured to be guided to the out port 57. At this time, among the game balls hit to the right, as the game balls that did not win the big winning opening 540, the game balls that reached the big winning opening 540 but did not win, and the game balls that did not reach the big winning opening 540. There are game balls that did not win a prize, but any game ball may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620. ..

By the way, as shown in FIG. 16, a left-handed game ball (a game ball that has flowed down the left side region) generally wins at the first starting opening 5442 or the general winning openings 53, 54, 55. It flows into the out port 57 or the out port 450. After the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball 224 that rolls on the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to be expected to win a prize at the first start port 5442, but heads toward the first start port 5442. Regarding the game ball 2226 that deviates from the flow path 222 and does not win a prize in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, the first starting opening (corresponding to the first starting opening 5442 of the present embodiment) in the conventional pachinko machine. The expectation of winning a prize is lost. Further, even if the game ball 224 is rolled on the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, if the first starting port 5442 is not won, the feeling of expectation for winning is lost at that point. In the present embodiment, when the left-handed game ball (the game ball flowing down the left side region) rolls the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 but does not win the first start port 5442, and In any case, even if the player deviates from the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and does not win a prize in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, these game balls reach the out opening 57. In the meantime, it always passes through the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620 is a region (second starting port receiving region) in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open. When the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 is rolled but the first start port 5442 is not won, and when the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 is deviated from the flow path 222 and further general winning openings 53, 54, 55 In any case, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 will continue, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, since the passing gate 49 is arranged in the right side region, there is little expectation that the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be opened when it is hit to the left. However, immediately after the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state ends, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol may be suspended. Further, even if the player hits the left side, the game ball that vigorously jumps out into the game area 20 may flow down the right side area. Therefore, even in the general gaming state, the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. Moreover, the guide nail 700 immediately flows into the out port 57 not only for the game ball that has flowed down the right side region but also for the game ball that has flowed down to the left side region and has rolled to the guide member 700 side. Since it has a function of suppressing, if the blade member 4620 is open, there is a possibility that the second starting port 440 will win a prize. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting opening 5442 and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, the expectation of winning the second starting opening 440 continues. , It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In the present embodiment, the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right side region, but instead, the passage gate 49 may be arranged in the left side region. In this case, the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened may be increased as compared with the case where the passing gate 49 is arranged in the right side region. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442, it is possible to continue with a higher expectation of winning the second starting port 440. ..

As a game ball hit to the left (a game ball that has flowed down the left side region), for example, a game ball that has not reached the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or has not reached the first starting port 5442. A game ball may be configured to flow down an out port 450 (see, for example, FIGS. 5 and 51) existing below the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 or a flow path leading to the out port 57. At this time, among the game balls hit to the left, as the game balls that did not win the first starting port 5442, the game balls that did not reach the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first starting port 5442, and the normal game balls. There is a game ball that has reached above the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first starting port 5442 but has not won a prize, but any game ball may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, and eventually. Only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620.

Further, when the game ball that has rolled in the direction of the large winning opening 540 among the game balls that have been hit to the left (the game ball that has flowed down the left side region) rolls the game ball guiding member 580, the game ball is the large winning opening 540. It is configured to collide with a rib provided on the shutter 610 or the game ball guiding member 580 to win a prize at the first starting port 5442 or to flow into the out 55 or the out port 450.

Further, in the present embodiment, a game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right side area) and has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540 is sure to pass the center of the game area 20 in which the out opening 57 is arranged to the left side. It is provided with a game ball guiding member 580 that guides the area to the second starting port receiving area. However, the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball (a game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and does not win the large winning opening 540) to the second starting opening receiving area. It is not necessary to have, and it may be limited to guiding beyond the center of the game area 20 to the left side area. For example, although the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball to the left side region, the game ball guided to the left side region is further distributed to a plurality of regions including the second starting port receiving region. It corresponds to what is configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right side area) and has not won the big winning opening 540 is guided to the left side area by the game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is not always essential, and for example, a game ball that has been hit right and has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540 may be guided to the left side region only with a guide nail.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball guiding member is used as a flow path of the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the large winning opening 540 without winning the big winning opening 540. A flow path connecting the exit side portion of the 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and the game ball flowing down the flow path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57. It is designed to do. In the present embodiment, since the second starting port 440 is formed in the left side region, the game ball flowing down the flow path is always guided to the left side region. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the above path always passes through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57, in such a case, the second starting port 440 is in the left side area. It is not mandatory to be in place.

[Structure of back unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the back unit 176 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176. FIG. 18 is an example of a rear view of the back unit 176. FIG. 19 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 20 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back surface. FIG. 21 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 22 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back surface.

As described above, the back unit 176 includes an upper front accessory 1000, an upper back accessory 1100, a lower accessory 1200, a corner accessory 1300, a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, and an attacker ball gutter 1600. And at least a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800. The corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350.

The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially in the center. A liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are arranged in the opening 1820.

The upper back accessory 1100 (details, the base member 1180 described later (see, for example, FIG. 69)) is mounted and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described later.

The lower accessory 1200 (detailed below, the lower accessory fixing base 1220 (see, for example, FIG. 77)) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. The details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

The side accessory 1400 (specifically, the mounting plate 1410 described later (see, for example, FIG. 107)) is mounted and fixed to the right side of the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the side accessory 1400 will be described later.

In the upper corner accessory 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 88), the first movable body 1330 is in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so as to be on the front side of the upper back accessory movable decorative body 110. The body 1340 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the lower corner accessory 1350, the third movable body 1355 is in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the fourth movable body 1357 is in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the lower corner accessory 1350 is on the front side of the lower accessory 1200. It is mounted and fixed to the rear box 1800 so that it is located at each position. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged so as to be substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

The upper front accessory 1000 (for details, the decorative accessory base member 1010 (see, for example, FIG. 61) described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be arranged in front of the upper back accessory 1000. To. Details of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described later.

The middle panel 1500 is arranged in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 on the back surface of the transparent panel 172, and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550. The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-shaped member having a pattern or pattern on the front surface, and the pattern or pattern on the front surface can be visually recognized via the transparent panel 172. The second middle panel 1550 is a plate-shaped member having an annular opening window 1552, which will be described in detail later, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears on the opening window when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

The attacker ball gutter 1600 is a gutter-shaped one that accepts a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 56 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 joins the gaming ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 540 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The lamp relay board 1710, the main control relay board 1720, and the like are housed in the main board case 1700.

The back unit 176 further comprises a first decorative design 1900 and a second decorative design 1920. The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the right side of the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the left side on the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both have a design function without being movable.

[Attacker unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 23 to 34.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front plate portion 520, a taxiway 530, a large winning opening 540, a rear case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

The base members 510 shown in FIGS. 23 to 28, and FIGS. 30 and 31, are members that form the basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction and the plate surface thereof is directed to the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

The slit 511 is formed so as to penetrate the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed on the upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while being gently inclined in a front view. A shutter 610 (more specifically, an induction portion 611 of the shutter 610) described later is arranged in the slit 511.

The front plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 23 to 27 and 29 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. The front plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction, and is arranged in a state of being separated forward from the base member 510. In this way, a gap (hereinafter referred to as "special electric accessory space R2") is formed between the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 to the extent that a game ball can enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front plate portion 520 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the rear of the front plate portion 520 is visible to the player.

The taxiway 530 shown in FIGS. 23 and 25 to 31 appropriately guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The taxiway 530 is formed by a shutter 610 and a substantially plate-shaped member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front plate portion 520. The taxiway 530 includes a first taxiway 531 and a second taxiway 532 and a third taxiway 533.

As described above, the taxiway 530 (more specifically, the first taxiway 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first taxiway 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510. Therefore, in the following, for convenience, the shutter 610 will be described as being in a state of advancing forward with respect to the base member 510 (a state in which the first taxiway 531 is formed).

The first taxiway 531 is arranged near the upper end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first taxiway 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The length of the first taxiway 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is formed to be slightly shorter than that of the base member 510. The left end portion of the first taxiway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The right end portion of the first taxiway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first taxiway 531 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first taxiway 531 includes a deceleration rib 534.

The deceleration rib 534 reduces the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first taxiway 531 (deceleration means). The reduction rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534a projecting forward from the base member 510, and a plurality of front projections 534b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 520. In this embodiment, six posterior projections 534a are provided. Further, five front protrusions 534b are provided. These plurality of posterior projections 534a and anterior projections 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first taxiway 531. The appropriate interval is set to be at least longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, these plurality of posterior projections 534a and anterior projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap each other in the front view (so as not to face each other in the front-rear direction but to be displaced in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first taxiway 531, the game ball (moved by the first taxiway 531) moves in a zigzag manner in a plan view while colliding with the posterior projection 534a and the anterior projection 534b. (Because the smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the movement speed will decrease.

By reducing the moving speed of the game ball moved by the first taxiway 531 in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531. In this way, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third taxiway 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. However, it is possible to win a prize in the large prize opening 540. That is, it is possible to quickly perform round digestion in a jackpot game. Further, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls are retained on the shutter 610, many prizes can be generated. In addition, since many game balls can be won at one time, it is easy to generate more prizes (so-called over prizes) than can be won in one round of big hit games.

The second taxiway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric accessory space R2. The second taxiway 532 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The inclination angle of the second taxiway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first taxiway 531. In this way, the second taxiway 532, together with the first taxiway 531 is configured as one substantially linear taxiway that gently slopes from right to left. The second taxiway 532 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (first taxiway 531 side).

The third taxiway 533 is arranged in the substantially central portion of the special electric accessory space R2 in the vertical direction. The third taxiway 533 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The third taxiway 533 is arranged below the first taxiway 531. The third taxiway 533 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the first taxiway 531 in front view.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, a wall portion connected to the third taxiway 533 is arranged between the left end portion of the third taxiway 533 and the left end portion of the first taxiway 531. Further, a wall portion connected to the third taxiway 533 is arranged between the right end portion of the third taxiway 533 and the right end portion of the second taxiway 532. In this way, the third taxiway 533 is formed in a concave shape in the front view.

The third taxiway 533 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (large winning opening 540 side). The third taxiway 533 includes a guide portion 535.

The guide portion 535 is formed at the bottom of the third taxiway 533. The guide portion 535 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in a plan view. The guide unit 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third taxiway 533 backward.

The large winning opening 540 shown in FIGS. 25, 28, 30 and 31 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The large winning opening 540 is formed behind the lowermost part of the third taxiway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The large winning opening 540 is provided with a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 27, the count switch 541 is arranged below the rear of the large winning opening 540.

The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 23, 25 to 27, 31, 33, and 34 includes various members (shutter 610, large winning opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 600. ) Is accommodated. The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow substantially box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 33, in the rear case 550, the upper space and the lower space are partitioned by a substantially flat plate-shaped mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed into a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in each of the upper space and the lower space. Specifically, a shutter 610, a link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. Further, a large winning opening solenoid 620 or the like is arranged in the lower space. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and the outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) are communicated with each other through the slit 511.

[Special electric accessory]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 according to another example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 35 to 50.

The special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 of the game ball (open state) and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 of the game ball (closed state). Although it is a member that operates for this purpose, the arrangement configuration and the like of various members will be described below assuming that the member is in a closed state unless otherwise specified.

As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the special electric accessory 6000 includes an accommodating portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a large winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005.

The accommodating portion 6001 shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 is a member accommodating various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, regulating member 6005, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 6000. The accommodating portion 6001 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side and the front side open. The accommodating portion 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 23, etc.) via a screw or the like. The accommodating portion 6001 includes a communication opening 6011, a support shaft 6012, a boss portion 6013, and an induction opening 6014.

The communication opening 6011 communicates the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating portion 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the accommodating portion 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround the boss portion 6013, which will be described later, from the rear to the right in a plan view.

The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports the link arm 6004 described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The support shaft 6012 is formed so as to project upward. The support shaft 6012 is the right rear portion of the accommodating portion 6001 and is formed behind the communication opening 6011.

The boss portion 6013 rotatably supports the regulation member 6005 described later. The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The boss portion 6013 is formed so as to project upward. The boss portion 6013 is near the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right from the center) in a plan view, and is formed on the left front side of the communication opening 6011. In the appropriate drawings such as FIGS. 35 to 37, the boss portion 6013 shows a state in which a screw is attached to support the regulating member 6005.

The guide opening 6014 is for inserting the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 described later. More specifically, as will be described later, the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is defined. The guide opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in a plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view bent in the middle from one end to the other end in the longitudinal direction. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the lead opening 6014 comprises a first lead opening 6016 and a second lead opening 6017.

The first guide opening 6016 is formed so as to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013. The length of the first guide opening 6016 in the left-right direction is formed to be substantially the same as the length of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later.

The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to extend in an arc shape in a plan view. More specifically, the second lead opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of the virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013 (see the arrow of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 38 (a)). In this way, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to extend along the outer shape of the boss portion 6013 in a plan view in the vicinity of the boss portion 6013. The rear end of the second lead opening 6017 is connected to the left end of the first lead opening 6016. The front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013.

The shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is a member (a member that switches between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the large winning opening 540 by the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 described later. The configuration of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as that of the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 (see FIGS. 31 and 32 (c) and the like). The shutter 6002 includes an elongated plate portion 6021, a connecting plate portion 6022, and a connecting shaft 6023.

The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first taxiway 531 (see FIG. 31 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction in a plan view and the elongated plate portion 6021 is downward to the left in a front view (so that the upper side surface faces the upper left side).

The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and the connecting shaft 6023 described later. The connecting plate portion 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in a plan view. The connecting plate portion 6022 is formed so as to extend rearward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the elongated plate portion 6021.

The connecting shaft 6023 is connected to the link arm 6004 described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed so as to project upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the connecting plate portion 6022.

In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 31 and the like) from the rear, and the connecting plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating portion 6001. It is housed in 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

The large winning opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 36, 37 and 39 is a member for driving the shutter 6002. The winning opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid accommodating unit 6031, a power generating unit 6032, a plunger 6033, a power transmission unit 6034, and a spring 6035.

The solenoid accommodating unit 6031 is a member accommodating various members constituting the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper side. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is attached to the accommodating portion 6001 from below.

The power generation unit 6032 is a member that generates power for the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The power generation unit 6032 is composed of a coil, a fixed iron core, or the like (not shown). The power generation unit 6032 can suck the plunger 6033, which will be described later, in response to the energization from the predetermined power source. The power generation unit 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generation unit 6032 is housed inside (left part) of the solenoid accommodating unit 6031 with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) facing left and right.

The plunger 6033 is a member (movable iron core) formed in a substantially rod shape. The plunger 6033 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is directed to the left-right direction. The plunger 6033 is arranged so as to extend to the right from the power generation unit 6032. The plunger 6033 is configured to be reciprocating in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032.

The power transmission unit 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission unit 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission unit 6034 is housed inside (right portion) of the solenoid accommodating portion 6031 and is attached to the right end portion of the plunger 6033. The power transmission unit 6034 includes a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037.

The connecting opening 6036 is connected to the link arm 6004 described later. The connecting opening 6036 is formed on the right side of the power transmission unit 6034 in a plan view. The connecting opening 6036 is formed so as to penetrate the power transmission unit 6034 in the vertical direction.

The connecting protrusion 6037 is connected to the regulating member 6005 described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-shaped portions formed so as to protrude upward. The pair of plate-shaped portions are formed so as to be parallel to each other on the left and right sides. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-shaped portions. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission portion 6034. In the following, the connecting protrusion 6037 refers to the gap.

The spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035 is arranged between the power generation unit 6032 and the power transmission unit 6034 in a state in which the plunger 6033 is inserted and is always compressed. In this way, the spring 6035 always gives a rightward urging force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission unit 6034).

In the large winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the right by the urging force of the spring 6035. On the other hand, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the left against the urging force of the spring 6035 by the suction force of the power generation unit 6032. As described above, in the large winning opening solenoid 6003, the plunger 6033 can be reciprocated in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 by turning on and off the power generation unit 6032 to generate power.

In the present embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generating unit 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward to move the game ball. It becomes difficult to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 (closed state). On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generating unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward to the large winning opening 540 of the game ball. It becomes a state where it is easy to win a prize (open state).

The link arm 6004 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 and 40 connects the large winning opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002 in an interlocking manner (interlocking connection), and transmits the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view by a portion extending substantially in the left-right direction (first link extending portion 6041) and a portion extending substantially in the front-rear direction (second link extending portion 6042). Will be done. The link arm 6004 includes a central cylinder portion 6043, a connecting opening 6044, a connecting shaft 6045, and a regulating protrusion 6046.

The central tubular portion 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed in a substantially center of the link arm 6004 (a connection portion between the first link extending portion 6041 and the second link extending portion 6042) in a plan view. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. When the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central cylinder portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the central cylinder portion 6043 in a plan view.

The connecting opening 6044 is inserted through the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. The connecting opening 6044 is formed at the left (front) end of the first link extending portion 6041. The connecting opening 6044 is formed so as to penetrate the first link extending portion 6041 in the vertical direction. The connecting opening 6044 is formed in a long hole shape extending linearly from the tip end side to the base end portion side (central cylinder portion 6043 side). The length of the connecting opening 6044 in the lateral direction in the plan view is formed so as to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002.

The connecting shaft 6045 is connected to the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (front) end of the second link extending portion 6042. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (length in the left-right direction) of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

The regulation protrusion 6046 is in contact with the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005, which will be described later, in a predetermined case. The regulation protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape so as to protrude downward. The regulation protrusion 6046 is formed in the vicinity of the base end portion of the first link extension portion 6041 and is formed on the front left side of the central cylinder portion 6043 in a plan view. The rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 is formed so as to be a flat surface facing rearward.

The restricting member 6005 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 and 41 is a member for restricting the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. The regulating member 6005 includes a central cylinder portion 6053, a regulating block portion 6054, a connecting shaft 6055, and an induction shaft 6056.

The central tubular portion 6053 is inserted into the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. The central cylinder portion 6053 is formed substantially in the center of the regulating member 6005 in a plan view. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. Further, the central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view.

Further, a plate-shaped portion (first regulation extension portion 6051) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed on the right rear side of the central cylinder portion 6053. Further, on the left side of the central cylinder portion 6053, a plate-shaped portion (second regulation extension portion 6052) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed. In this way, the central cylinder portion 6053, the first regulation extension portion 6051, and the second regulation extension portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L-shape in terms of their positional relationship with each other in a plan view. When the boss portion 6013 is inserted through the central cylinder portion 6053, the regulating member 6005 is pivotally supported clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylinder portion 6053 in a plan view.

The regulation block portion 6054 is in contact with the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The regulation block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion protruding upward. The regulation block portion 6054 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulation extension portion 6051 (that is, to the right rear of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. The front side surface of the regulation block portion 6054 is formed so as to be a flat surface facing forward.

The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulation extension portion 6051 (that is, to the right rear of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. In this way, the axis of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially overlap with the axis of the regulation block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to be smaller than the width of the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the power transmission unit 6034.

The guide shaft 6056 is inserted through the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001. The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the second regulation extension portion 6052 (that is, to the left of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the length of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) in the lateral view.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37 and FIGS. 42 to 46, the assembly configuration of the accommodating portion 6001, the shutter 6002, the large winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described. do.

In the drawings after FIG. 45, the accommodating portion 6001 is shown by a broken line, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening portion 6014 are shown by solid lines for convenience of explanation. Further, in the drawings after FIG. 45, the link arm 6004 is shown by a broken line, but the regulation protrusion 6046 is shown by a solid line for convenience of explanation. Further, in the drawings after FIG. 46, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified.

First, the outline of the assembly configuration of various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulation member 6005) with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 will be described.

The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

Further, the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the accommodating portion 6001 from below. In this way, the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating portion 6001 (power transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003) are communicated with each other via the communication opening 6011.

Further, the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted into the central tubular portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported by the accommodating portion 6001 clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001 in a plan view.

Further, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted into the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the regulating member 6005 is rotatably supported by the accommodating portion 6001 clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 in a plan view.

Next, the details of the assembly configuration of various members will be described.

As described above, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 moves downward to the accommodating portion 6001 via the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. Is projected. The connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 below the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the large winning opening solenoid 6003 are interlocked with each other via the connecting shaft 6045 and the connecting opening 6036.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged so as to be in contact with the left edge portion of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003. That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in a plan view between the connecting shaft 6045 and the right edge portion of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted from below into the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are interlockably connected to each other via the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023.

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is in contact with the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front surface of the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. Surface contact (not contact).

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is the central cylinder of the regulating member 6005 as shown in FIGS. It is arranged so as to be in contact with the left edge portion of the portion 6053.

Further, in a state where the restricting member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 protrudes downward of the accommodating portion 6001 via the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. Will be done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 below the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the restricting member 6005 are interlockably connected to each other via the connecting shaft 6055 and the connecting protrusion 6037.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is arranged in front of the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

Further, in a state where the restricting member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is inserted from above into the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guide opening among the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001. It is arranged so as to be located within the portion 6016 (more specifically, to abut the right end of the first lead opening 6016).

As described above, in the state where the left edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the first guiding opening 6016. It will be in contact with the right end of.

In the following, using FIGS. 46 and 50, unintentional opening (more specifically) of the shutter 6002 by the induction opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulatory member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Explains in detail the regulation of the unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and the unintentional movement of the shutter 6002).

In the present embodiment, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is not an opening according to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003, but an external force directly applied to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball to the shutter 6002). It refers to the opening in response to a collision (or a fraudulent act on the shutter 6002 performed by a fraudulent person).

In the following description, the rotation direction of each member is based on a plan view unless otherwise specified. Further, in the following description, a state in which the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 is referred to as a “locked state”.

In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force that slides the shutter 6002 backward) is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 is moved through the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023. , A force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004.

As shown in FIG. 46A, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is rearward (that is, the moving direction when the link arm rotates clockwise) with the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005. Be abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004, the link arm 6004 counterclockwise to the regulation member 6005 via the regulation protrusion 6046 and the regulation block 6054. A rotating force is transmitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, with the right end of the first guide opening 6016). Arranged (to abut). That is, an edge portion (hereinafter, front side edge portion) of the first guide opening 6016 is arranged in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 (movement direction when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). To. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first. The regulatory member 6005 cannot rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the guide opening 6016.

As described above, since the regulation member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting the force to the regulation member 6005 cannot rotate either. Further, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 transmitting the force to the link arm 6004 cannot also move. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain the closed state.

As described above, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016, the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulation member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 is used to intend the shutter 6002. It is in a state (locked state) in which the opening (more specifically, the unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and the unintentional movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted.

In the locked state, when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005, the rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 The front side surfaces are pressed against each other with a relatively strong force. However, since the rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front surface of the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are in surface contact with each other instead of point contact as described above, the durability of each is improved. Can be made to.

Hereinafter, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50.

As will be described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened in response to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003, the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 are different from the case where an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002. The locked state by the induction opening 6014 (locking means) is released.

When the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first induction opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when the shutter 6002 is opened, the power generation unit 6032 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is energized. Is done. When the power generation unit 6032 is energized, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plunger 6033 starts to move to the left, and power is generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003. Further, when the movement of the plunger 6033 to the left is started, the power transmission unit 6034 (connecting opening 6036 and connecting protrusion 6037) fixed to the right end portion of the plunger 6033 also moves to the left in the same manner.

When the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting protrusion 6037 and the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005. .. Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left. In this way, when the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted, the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

Specifically, the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 abuts on the boss portion 6013. Further, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the left end portion of the first guide opening 6016 (rear end of the second guide opening 6017). Part).

In the following, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 until the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is accommodated in the first induction opening portion of the accommodating portion 6001). The movement until it comes into contact with the left end portion of 6016) is referred to as "the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034". Further, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 after the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is accommodated in the first induction opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001). The movement after being brought into contact with the left end portion of the power transmission unit 6034 is referred to as "second movement of the power transmission unit 6034".

Further, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left due to the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 moves to the left with respect to the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Then, the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 comes into contact with the connecting shaft 6045. In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 does not press any of the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the grand prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the timing at which the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 abuts on the left end portion of the first induction opening 6016 (the rear end portion of the second induction opening 6017) and the regulation. The timing at which the right edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the member 6005 abuts on the boss portion 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 abuts on the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all. It is set to be almost the same.

Further, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is located in the first induction opening 6016, and the front of the guidance shaft 6056 (the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). In the case of moving direction), the front side edge portion of the first guide opening 6016 is arranged. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is used. Since it interferes with the front side edge portion of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 is continued.

Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission unit 6034 to the regulation member 6005, but not to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). In this way, although the restricting member 6005 moves to the left, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the posture when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Become.

In such a state, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, when the power transmission unit 6034 moves further to the left (when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement), the connecting protrusion of the power transmission unit 6034 Power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the 6037 and the regulating member 6005. Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left.

Here, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013. That is, the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. Therefore, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, the regulating member 6005 tends to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001.

Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 hits the left end portion (rear end portion of the second induction opening 6017) of the first induction opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001. Being touched. The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of the virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013. That is, an opening is formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 (movement direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) along a locus on which the guide shaft 6056 moves (). There is nothing to interfere with when the induction shaft 6056 moves).

In this way, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left and the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, FIG. 50 As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the second guide opening 6017 moves forward. When the restricting member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmission portion 6034. I will do it.

In the regulation member 6005, the position of the center of rotation is different in the left-right direction depending on whether the power transmission unit 6034 makes the first movement or the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement as described above. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the first movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 that is in contact with the left edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is positioned at the center of rotation. And. When the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 that is in contact with the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is set as the position of the rotation center.

In this way, the regulation member 6005 is moved to the front side of the guide shaft 6056 (the direction of movement when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) by shifting the position of the rotation center to the front side of the first guide opening 6016. It is switching whether there is an edge or the second lead opening 6017 is extended.

In this way, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the locked state of the induction opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulation member 6005 and the accommodation unit 6001 is released, and the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is accommodated. The second induction opening 6017 of the portion 6001 can be moved forward. That is, when the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. do.

Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the right edge portion of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Specifically, the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left. In this way, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

When the power transmission unit 6034 is performing the first movement (when it is in the locked state), when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, that is, with the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004. When a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005 via the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 opens the first induction opening. The regulatory member 6005 could not rotate because it interfered with the front edge of the portion 6016.

However, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 can move the second induction opening 6017 of the accommodation unit 6001 forward as described above, so that the regulation member The regulation block portion 6054 of 6005 will also move backward. When the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves rearward, it moves in a direction away from the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004.

Therefore, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement and the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 Does not interfere with. That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

Further, when the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 via the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. Specifically, the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward. In this way, when the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts sliding backward.

The second movement of the power transmission unit 6034 ends when the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second induction opening 6017 of the accommodating unit 6001, as shown in FIG. In this way, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 of the accommodating portion 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

As described above, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is released from the closed state has been described. However, when the shutter 6002 is closed from the open state, the shutter 6002 is opened after the energization of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is stopped. Various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulation member 6005) operate in the reverse order of the above.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a technique of providing a displaceable displacement member at a position where a game ball easily passes and a position where the game ball is difficult to pass, for example, with respect to a passing area. Is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103.

In the technique described in JP-A-2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. Further, a solenoid is adopted as a drive source for displacing the door member (moving it back and forth between the opening position and the closing position).

Further, in the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, the locking portion provided in the transmission means of the solenoid and the engaging protrusion provided in the door member come into contact with each other to close the door. It is possible to restrict (lock) the door member from being opened at the position.

However, since the locking portion and the engaging protrusion are required to have a certain degree of accuracy in their positional relationship with each other, if there is aged deterioration of the solenoid or foreign matter is mixed in the drive path of the solenoid, they are completely compatible with each other. Will not contact. In this way, if the lock portion and the engaging protrusion are not completely in contact with each other, the door member may be loosened or the door member may be slightly opened at the closed position (unintended displacement is performed). There was a possibility) and it was inconvenient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and when the displacement member is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, the unintended displacement of the displacement member is more reliably regulated. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be used.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which the game ball rolls, and a second starting port 440 provided in the game area 20 through which the game ball can pass. Displacement members (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) that can be displaced to the (passing area) and the position where the game ball can easily pass and the position where the game ball cannot easily pass with respect to the second starting port 440 (passing area). ), A gaming machine provided with a large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) for driving the displacement member, and a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) capable of controlling the large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means). The displacement member is displaced and controlled to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) is at a position where the displacement member can easily pass through the game ball. The displacement member is provided with locking means (regulatory member 6005 and induction opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) that can lock the displacement member at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through when the displacement is not controlled. The mouth solenoid 6003 (driving means) is a power transmission capable of transmitting the power generated by the power generation unit 6032 to the displacement member by coming into contact with the power generation unit 6032 that generates power and at least a part of the displacement member. The locking means includes a portion 6034, and the locking means defines a restricting member 6005 (regulating portion) that regulates the displacement of the displacement member and a displacement path of the restricting portion by contacting at least a part of the displacement member. The displacement path includes a guide opening 6014 (displacement guide), the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section) and the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section). The displacement member includes a different second induction opening 6017 (second displacement section), and the displacement member is in contact with the power transmission unit 6034 at least in a state where the game ball can easily pass through the position and the game ball. Displacement is controlled to a position where it is difficult, and the restricting member 6005 (displacement section) can be displaced along the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide section) with the displacement of the power transmission section 6034, and the lock can be controlled. When the restricting member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the first induction opening 6016 (first displacement section), the means maintains the locked state of the displacement member, and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) moves. When it is located in the second induction opening 6017 (second displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is released.

With such a configuration, the locking means (regulator 6005 and guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) is provided only when, for example, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulator 6005 is located at the right end of the first guide opening 6016. Instead, the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) can be kept locked while the lead shaft 6056 is located within the first lead opening 6016. That is, even when the positional relationship between the restricting member 6005 and the induction opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001 is slightly deviated (for example, even if the power transmission unit 6034 is not arranged in the normal position), the locked state. Can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, the unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably regulated. can do.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) includes movement and rotation, and the locking means is such that the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) is the first. When located in the one-lead opening 6016 (first displacement section), the regulation member 6005 (regulatory part) is locked by restricting the rotation of the regulation member 6005 (regulatory part) while being movable. When the state is maintained and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the second induction opening 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the rotation center of the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is regulated. By making the member 6005 (regulating portion) different from the case where it is located in the first induction opening 6016 (first displacement section), the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) can be rotated and the locked state is released. It is something to do.

With such a configuration, the regulating member 6005 (regulating unit), which is one member, can switch between maintaining and releasing the locked state by a combination of two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where, for example, a member that performs two operations (movement and rotation) is provided. In particular, in the special electric accessory as in the present embodiment, the space for arranging the parts is limited, so that it is useful to have such a configuration.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) for guiding the game ball and a link arm 6004 (link portion) connected to the game ball guiding portion. The power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link unit).

With such a configuration, since the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link unit) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guide unit), it does not come into direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guide unit). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) can be locked.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of the object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and is an ordinary electric accessory or the like. You may.

Further, when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is completed, the regulation block unit 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004. In this way, when the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are in contact with each other. It is possible to cancel the state. That is, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

According to such a configuration, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement and the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 and the regulation member 6005 of the link arm 6004 Interference with the regulation block portion 6054 (regulation of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

Further, even when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is completed, the regulation projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are maintained in contact with each other, and the link arm is maintained. When the 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 to assist the rotation of the regulation member 6005. ..

Further, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, in the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide), when the power transmission unit 6034 is performing the first movement (when it is in the locked state), the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise. In addition, it may be formed so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 in front of the guide shaft 6056 (the movement direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). From the viewpoint of smoothly promoting the movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Structure of ordinary electric accessory unit 400]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 52 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 includes a general winning opening 53, 54, 55, a second starting opening 440, a second starting opening switch 441 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 440, and an out opening 450. A housing member 443 that receives the game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 440 and the game ball that has been accepted in the out port 450 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the front surface of the second starting port 440 and the out port 450. The front cover 445 provided in the above and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are provided. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in a plate-shaped opening forming member 420. The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which the rotation shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, which will be described later, penetrates.

The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view.

On the back surface of the front cover 445, a wall 4452 that separates the second starting port 440 and the out port 450 is formed. The wall 4452 prevents the game ball (the game ball winning the second starting port 440) that has passed through the upper part of the blade member 4620 when the blade member 4620 is opened from being accepted by the out port 450, and also prevents the game ball from being accepted by the out port 450. It has a function of preventing the game ball from winning the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

The second starting port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second starting port 440 so that the game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 440 can be detected.

The accommodating member 443 is provided with an opening 4434 and an opening 4436 at locations corresponding to the second starting port 440 and the out opening 450, respectively, and is detected by the second starting port switch 441 by winning a prize in the second starting port 440. The game ball is housed in the opening 4434, and the game ball received in the out opening 450 is housed in the opening 4436. The game balls housed in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected by a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). Further, the accommodating member 443 has a hole 4432 through which the rotation shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, which will be described later, penetrates.

[Composition of ordinary electric accessory 460]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG. 53 is an example of a diagram showing a normal electric accessory 460, a second start port switch 441, and an accommodating member 443. FIG. 54 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. 55 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 as viewed from diagonally above to the right.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610, a blade member 4620, a start port solenoid 4630, and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620.

The base cover 4610 accommodates the starting port solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 with the accommodating member 443, and is attached to the back surface side of the opening forming member 420. The back side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A guide groove 4612 long in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610. Further, on the front side of the base cover 4610, a bearing (not shown) that rotatably supports the pin 4648 described later is formed.

The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotating shaft 4622 below the paper surface. The rotary shaft 4622 penetrates the hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and the hole 4432 formed in the accommodating member 443, and is rotatably supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 described later. The rotary shaft 4622 is notched at a portion pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power from the starting port solenoid 4630 is transmitted to the rotating shaft 4622 as a rotational force by the power transmission mechanism 4640, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotating shaft 4622 as the rotation center. In the present embodiment, the blade member 4620 is in a closed state when standing up, and is in an open state when rotated to the right with the rotation shaft 4622 as the rotation center from the closed state.

The starting port solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the left-right direction in the front view, and has a flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 (the tip on the right side in the front view). The start port solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) in a state where the plunger 4632 is extended to the right in the front view, and when excited, the plunger 4632 moves to the left in the front view (contraction direction).

The power transmission mechanism 4640 converts such power into rotational force and transmits it to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 as the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. The power transmission mechanism 4640 is connected to the blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 and the blade connecting member 4642. A link member 4644 provided between the and the flange connecting member 4646 is provided.

The blade connecting member 4642 has a bearing 46444 that pivotally supports the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620. The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotating shaft 4622 that supports the shaft. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates with the rotating shaft 4622 about the rotating shaft 4622 as the rotation center. Further, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 protruding toward the back surface side. The support shaft 46426 can rotate around a rotating shaft 4622 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 46424.

The link member 4644 is a member having a curved shape when viewed from the front, and an elongated hole 46442 is formed at an end portion below the front view. A support shaft 46426 of the blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the elongated hole 46442. At the end of the link member 4644 above the front view, a support shaft 46446 protruding toward the back surface is formed. Below the support shaft 46446, an engagement shaft 46448 projecting to the back surface side is formed. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports the pin 4648 is formed in the central portion of the link member 4644 (a portion where the angle of the dogleg is changed). The link member 4644 is rotatable about a pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 as a rotation center. When the link member 4644 rotates around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engaging shaft 46448 also rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444.

The flange connecting member 4646 has a flange holding portion 46462, a connecting hole 46464, and an engaging groove 46466. The flange holding portion 46462 sandwiches the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the expansion / contraction direction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 expands / contracts. A support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connecting hole 46464 so as to be able to move in the connecting hole 46464. The engaging shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engaging groove 46466. Here, the engaging shaft 46448 has a cross-sectional shape that crosses the longitudinal direction and has a drop shape having a tip portion. Then, the link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at the tip end portion. Further, the flange connecting member 4646 is formed with a guide piece 46468 long in the left-right direction on the back surface side (base cover 4610 side). The guide piece 46468 is guided by the guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610.

[Operation explanation of ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 57. FIG. 56 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 (shown by a long-dashed line) when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state, and a normal state when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state from the closed state to the open state. It is an example of the rear view which shows the aspect (shown by a solid line) of the electric accessory 460. FIG. 57 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (solid line). It is an example of the rear view showing (shown in).

When the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (leftward in front view (rightward in FIGS. 56 and 57)). When the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 51 and 52) moves in the contraction direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contraction direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that sandwiches the flange 4634 by the flange sandwiching portion 46462 moves in the contraction direction. When the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the contraction direction, the engaging shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engaging groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged in the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 faces the front with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation. It rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 56 and 57) visually. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward in the connecting hole 46464 of the flange connecting member 4646. When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 46426 slidably connected in the elongated hole 46442 of the blade connecting member 4642 becomes The blade connecting member 4642 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 4622, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

The operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state moves in the direction in which the plunger 4632 extends due to the start port solenoid 4630 being de-energized, and moves in the opposite direction to the operation from the closed state to the open state. It is done by. The portion of the engaging groove 46466 that comes into contact with the engaging shaft 46448 so that the engaging shaft 46448 can be smoothly engaged with the engaging groove 46466 when the blade member 4620 operates from the open state to the closed state. Is tilted diagonally downward to the right (diagonally downward to the left in FIGS. 56 and 57) in front view.

[Functional explanation of ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 58 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and is a diagram for explaining (A) the opening of the blade member 4620 is prevented. , (B) It is a figure for demonstrating that the blade member 4620 is allowed to open. In FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), the start port solenoid 4630 is not shown.

When the blade member 4620 is closed (when the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630 (both see, eg, FIG. 56) is non-excited), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engages the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 58 (a)). Therefore, unless the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (unless the start port solenoid 4630 is excited except for special circumstances such as failure), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened even if it is attempted to be opened. Therefore, even if an external force is applied to illegally open the blade member 4620, this can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction as described above, the engagement between the engagement shaft 46448 and the engagement groove 46466 is released, and the blade member 4620 is released (FIG. FIG. 58 (b)).

In this way, the link member 4644 constituting the engaging shaft 46448, the flange connecting member 4646 constituting the engaging groove 46466, and the starting port solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. It functions as a means to prevent unauthorized opening.

[Structure of upper front accessory 1000]
The configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 60 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal embodiment. FIG. 61 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 62 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The upper front accessory 1000 can be operated with respect to the base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, the decorative plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and the base plate 1010. A movable decorative body 1040 configured, a drive motor 1050 as a drive source for operating the movable decorative body 1040, and a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040. A force transmission member 1020 that transmits power from the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040 via the plurality of gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. , A photo sensor 1080 (see FIG. 62) that detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040. The gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism for transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040.

The base plate 1010 is a plate-shaped member that is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above so as to be located on the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. On the front surface side of the base plate 1010, a first support shaft 1011, a second support shaft 1012, a third support shaft 1013, and a fourth support shaft 1014, which are connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020, are formed. Further, in the base plate 1010, when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the cutout portion 1016 formed at the portion where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is located, and the movable decorative body 1040 are at the origin position. A notch 1017 formed at a position corresponding to a coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower end portion of the coil spring 1070) formed on the back surface side of the movable decorative body 1040 is formed. In this specification, the notch 1016 and the notch 1017 are referred to as a back side first notch 1016 and a back side second notch 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 that pivotally supports a hollow boss 10662 formed in the center of the first gear 1062 described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to the movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 described later. A hole 1018 corresponding to the movable range of the position detection piece 10682 of the position detection gear 1068, which will be described later, is formed.

Although not shown, the decorative plate 1030 is decorated on the front side. The decorative plate 1030 is formed at a portion (a position on the front side corresponding to the first notch on the back side 1016) where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is located when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The cutout portion 1036 is formed, and the cutout portion 1038 formed at the portion where the lower end portion of the coil spring 1070 is located (the position on the front side corresponding to the second notch portion 1017 on the back surface side) is formed. In this specification, the notch 1036 and the notch 1038 are referred to as a front side first notch 1036 and a front side second notch 1038, respectively.

The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 pivotally supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later, and a description thereof, which will be described later. A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

The drive motor 1050 is mounted and fixed to the base plate 1010 via the motor mounting member 1054. Further, the drive motor 1050 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the drive motor 1050 is reduced to output power from the motor output shaft 1052.

The gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062, a second gear 1064, a third gear 1066, a fourth gear 1067, and a position detection gear 1068. Of these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have a function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020, but the position. The detection gear 1068 does not have such a function.

A hollow shaft 10622 is formed at the center of the first gear 1062. The motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 10622. As a result, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates with the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052) as the rotation center.

In the fourth gear 1067, a boss 10672 is formed at a portion on the front surface side radially separated from the center 10674 by a predetermined distance. The position detection gear 1068 is formed with a position detection piece 10682 at a portion on the front surface side radially separated from the center 1068 by a predetermined distance. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067. Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates in the opposite direction by the same rotation angle in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067. In this way, the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected. In the present embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 in which the power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via the gear 1060, a rack 1024 in which the power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member. It includes a second transmission member 1026 in which power from 1022 is transmitted via the rack 1024.

The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate-shaped member, and a bearing 10222 is formed at the center in the radial direction. The bearing 10222 pivotally supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010. The first transmission member 1022 is located from the outside to the inside in the radial direction (that is, the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the side 1022a on the left side of the front view among the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b. An elongated hole 10224 is formed in the direction toward the direction. A boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 penetrating the hole 1015 is movably connected to the slot 10224 in the slot 10224. Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022, the bearing 10226 is formed at the end portion on the outer side in the radial direction along the side 1022b on the right side in the front view. The bearing 10226 pivotally supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decorative body 1040. The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 becomes substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is in the origin position. Further, the first transmission member 1022 includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022.

The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-shaped member that becomes substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, and the bearing 10262 is formed at the end on the left side in the front view and at the right end in the front view. Bearing 10264 is formed. The bearing 10262 pivotally supports the fourth support shaft 1014 of the base plate 1010. The bearing 10264 pivotally supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decorative body 1040. Further, the second transmission member 1026 includes a gear 10266 coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). The gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022.

A rack 1024 for transmitting power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 is a rod-shaped member provided substantially horizontally, and the gear 10244 is formed on the right side of the front view (first transmission member 1022 side), and the gear 10248 is formed on the left side of the front view (second transmission member 1026 side). Is formed. The gear 10244 meshes with the gear 10228 and converts the power in the rotational direction of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 in the rotational direction and transmits the power to the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 has a substantially horizontal elongated hole 10242 formed on the right side (gear 10244 side) of the front view, and a substantially horizontal elongated hole 10246 formed on the left side of the front view (gear 10248 side). The second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the slotted hole 10242, and the third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the slotted hole 10246.

The coil spring 1070 urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. The upper end of the coil spring 1070 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the base plate 1010, and the lower end is attached and fixed to the coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back surface of the movable decorative body 1040. When the movable decoration body 1040 is in the origin position, the lower end portion of the coil spring 1070 is located in the front side second notch portion 1038 and the back side second notch portion 1017.

The photo sensor 1080 is provided so as to be located in the photo sensor arrangement region 1019 formed on the base plate 1010. The photo sensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040 by detecting the position detection piece 10682 provided on the position detection gear 1068. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Operation explanation of upper front accessory 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65. FIG. 63 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 64 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decorative body 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 65 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. In FIGS. 63 to 65, the constituent members and the like of the force transmission member 1020 are shown by broken lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view. do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1064 that meshes with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1066 that meshes with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1067 that meshes with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10674 of the fourth gear 1067 as the center of rotation. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise with the center 10674 as the center of rotation in the front view, the boss 10672 also rotates in the circumferential direction with the center 10674 as the center of rotation and moves clockwise along the inside of the hole 1015. Since the boss 10672 is movably connected in the slotted hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10674 as the center of rotation, the first transmission member 1022 (that is, the gear 10228) becomes the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise with 1011 (bearing 10222) as the center of rotation in front view. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 1044 pivotally supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation. Move to.

When the gear 10228 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in the front view. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the slotted hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the slotted hole 10246 function as guides for moving the rack 1024 in a substantially horizontal direction. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in front view, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise in front view with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 1046 pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation. Move to.

Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10122) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226), and the distance from the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft. The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the support shaft 1044 and the support shaft 1046 synchronize with each other, and the clock in front view with the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014 as the rotation centers, respectively. Works around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 operates downward (that is, toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while drawing an arc clockwise in the front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state.

When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the position detection gear 1068 that meshes with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise with the center 1068 of the position detection gear 1068 as the center of rotation. Rotate. The position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067, but the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter and both mesh with the third gear 1066. Therefore, the rotation angle of the 4th gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same, and the position of the position detection piece 10682 formed on the position detection gear 1068 is detected by the photo sensor 1080 to obtain the fourth gear. The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected.

When the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1040 arcs counterclockwise in front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state by the reverse movement of the above-mentioned movement. It works upward while drawing.

In this way, the movable decorative body 1040 can be operated between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body effect) is when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. It is performed based on the result of the hit judgment performed in. On the other hand, the movement from the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable body effect based on the result of the hit determination this time is completed, and is based on the result of the hit determination from the next time onward. It will be prepared for the movable body production to be performed.

[Structure of upper back accessory 1100]
The configuration of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. FIG. 66 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 67 is an example of a rear view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal embodiment. FIG. 68 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 69 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 70 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). 71 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 67 in FIG. 71, and an enlarged view of a portion X shown in FIG. 72 is an example of a sectional view taken along line BB shown in FIG. 67 in FIG. 72, and an enlarged view of a portion Y shown in FIG.

The line AA shown in FIG. 67 is a vertical line passing through the center of the bearing 11724 (described later) formed on the extended portion 11741 (described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. 67. The BB line is a line that vertically crosses the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172.

The upper back accessory 1100 is made of a substantially flat plate metal and has a substantially frame shape without a lower side. A left drive mechanism having a base member 1180 on which various members are mounted and a left motor 1151 and the like. The 1150, the right drive mechanism 1160 having the right side motor 1161 and the like, the decorative cover 1130 that covers the left side motor 1151 and the like from the front so as not to be visible to the player, and the right side motor 1161 and the like from the front so as not to be visible to the player. A movable decorative body 1110 that can be moved up and down by a decorative cover 1140 to be covered, a left side drive mechanism 1150, and a right side drive mechanism 1160, and a pair of left and right covered decorative bodies 1120 that are axially supported and movable by the movable decorative body 1110. The pantograph mechanism 1170 and the pantograph mechanism 1170, one end of which is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end of which is connected to the covering decorative body 1120 and operates (contracts in a substantially diamond shape) with the vertical movement of the movable decorative body 1110. A member that regulates operation and is attached to a substantially central portion of the base member 1180, and a static decorative body 1196 that is a member decorated on the front surface and is fixedly attached to the base member 1180. Be prepared.

The base member 1180 has a central plate portion 1182 extending in the left-right direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end portion of the central plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end portion of the central plate portion 1182. It has 1186 and.

A static decorative body 1196 is attached to the front surface of the central plate portion 1182 as a decorative body that is decorated on the front surface and does not operate. A horizontally long rectangular central plate 1188 is provided at the upper end of the substantially center of the central plate portion 1182 so as to face upward. The front surface of the central plate 1188 has a pair of left support shafts 11882 and right support shafts 11884 that project forward.

On the front surface of the central plate 1188, a regulatory member 1190 that regulates the operation of the pantograph mechanism 1170 beyond a certain level is attached below the left support shaft 11882 and the right support shaft 11884. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member and has a left contact surface 1192 inclined toward the lower left and a right contact surface 1194 inclined toward the lower right.

The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured so that the left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted can be mounted. A hole 11842 is formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor mounting member 1152 is attached. Further, a left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm mounting shaft 11884 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184. A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 when viewed from the front. This hole 11846 is formed corresponding to the locus of movement of the support shaft 11562 formed in the driven gear 1156 when the driven gear 1156, which will be described later, rotates.

The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured to be capable of mounting the right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted. A hole 1186 is formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161 when the right motor mounting member 1162 is attached. Further, a right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186. A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 when viewed from the front. This hole 11866 is formed corresponding to the locus of movement of the support shaft 1166 formed in the driven gear 1166 when the driven gear 1166, which will be described later, rotates.

The left drive mechanism 1150 includes a left motor 1151, a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, a drive gear 1157, a driven gear 1156, a left arm member 1155, and a left transmission arm 1154. Of these, the left arm member 1155, the driven gear 1156, and the drive gear 1157 function as a left drive transmission member that transmits power from the left side motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154. The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the left outer side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the front view, and is provided in the vertical direction of the movable decorative body 1110. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11544 formed at one end (right side) of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11884 in the above-mentioned installation area of the left transmission drive member.

The left side motor 1151 is a motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation. The left motor 1151 is attached to the left motor mounting member 1152. In the left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the drive gear 1157 and penetrates the hole 1184 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. Attached to. Therefore, when the left side motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left side motor 1151.

The driven gear 1156 meshes with the drive gear 1157. When the drive gear 1157 rotates, the driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation. The driven gear 1156 is a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 1157. As a result, the rotational force of the left side motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1156 has a bearing 11564 in the center and a support shaft 11562 separated from the center by a predetermined distance on the front surface. The driven gear 1156 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11564 on the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate about the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844.

The left arm member 1155 is a member having a substantially anti-C shape (substantially C shape when viewed from the rear) when viewed from the front, and has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper) and the other end. It has a left arm bearing shaft 11554 at the portion (the end on the lower side of the paper). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156.

The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1157, the driven gear 1156, and the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 protruding forward at one end (left side) and an elongated hole 11542 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1112 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the left transmission arm 1154 has a left arm bearing 11548 that is rotatably supported by the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155. The hollow shaft 11544 rotates on the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the installation area of the left drive transmission member so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (circular motion) around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848. It is possible to support the axis. Further, a coil spring 1153 is extrapolated to the hollow shaft 11544 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation direction).

The right drive mechanism 1160 includes a right motor 1161, a right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted, a drive gear 1167, a driven gear 1166, a right arm member 1165, and a right transmission arm 1164. Of these, the right arm member 1165, the driven gear 1166, and the drive gear 1167 function as the right drive transmission member that transmits the power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164. The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the right outer side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the front view, and is provided in the vertical direction of the movable decorative body 1110. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11644 formed at one end (right side) of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 within the installation area of the right side drive transmission member.

The right side motor 1161 is a motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation. The right motor 1161 is attached to the right motor mounting member 1162. The right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted is located in the right vertical plate portion 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and penetrates the hole 1186 formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right side motor 1161 rotates, the drive gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right side motor 1161.

The driven gear 1166 meshes with the drive gear 1167. When the drive gear 1167 rotates, the driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation. The driven gear 1166 is a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 1167. As a result, the rotational force of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the drive gear 1167 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1166 has a bearing 11664 in the center and a support shaft 11662 separated from the center by a predetermined distance on the front surface. The driven gear 1166 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11664 on the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate about the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864.

The right arm member 1165 is a member having a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear), has a right arm bearing 11652 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper), and the other end. It has a right arm bearing shaft 11654 at the portion (the end on the lower side of the paper). The right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 11662 of the driven gear 1166.

The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1167, the driven gear 1166, and the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 that projects forward at one end (right side) and an elongated hole 11642 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the right transmission arm 1164 has a right arm bearing 11648 that is rotatably supported by the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165. The hollow shaft 11644 rotates on the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the above-mentioned installation area of the right drive transmission member so that the right transmission arm 1164 can rotate (circular motion) around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868. It is possible to support the axis. Further, a coil spring 1163 is extrapolated to the hollow shaft 1164 as an example of an elastic member that urges the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (right rotation direction).

In this way, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 support the movable decorative body 1110 from both the left and right sides, and the power from the left side motor 1154 and the right side motor 1161 is transmitted to the left side drive transmission member and the right side drive transmission member described above. It is transmitted through.

The pantograph mechanism 1170 has an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178. The pantograph mechanism 1170 constitutes a substantially diamond-shaped side by four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178, and deforms the shape of the substantially diamond (upper left arm 1172). And the lower left arm 1174 (the angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) are changed). The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of a colorless and transparent resin. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin.

As the above "substantially diamond shape", of the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, for example, two sets of arms facing each other are parallel (for example, the upper left). The lower right arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 have the same length, and the four parallel sides. It is also assumed to be a shape or a square. Also, of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, for example, two pairs of arms facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, and the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right part. It does not have to be the same length as the arm 1176), and further, for example, one of the two sets of arms facing each other has the same length and the other set of arms. The lengths of the may be different. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to a specific length, and various variations can be adopted. Further, considering that each arm, that is, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) operates, the arms facing each other do not always have to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120). The arms facing each other may change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state, or may change from a parallel state to a non-parallel state according to the drive of the above. Further, regarding the above-mentioned "opposite arms are parallel", it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism in consideration of the structure when the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) is driven. Since it is assumed, if the tilting directions of the facing arms are oriented in the same direction, it is considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Further, even when each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 has a different length, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) can be moved (for example, the operation limit position from the origin position). The lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be varied in various ways.

The upper left arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, has a bearing 11722 at the end on the center side, and has a bearing on the left end. It has a bearing 11724 in the portion. The bearing 11722 is rotatably supported by the left support shaft 11882.

The lower left arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. An extension portion 11741 extending upward (on the upper left arm 1172 side) is formed. The thickness of the extended portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. The extension portion 11741 is formed with a support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. Further, a hollow shaft 11744 is formed at the central end of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction.

The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 11724 on the support shaft 11742. The left upper arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 are connected to each other at the origin position (the position where both the upper left arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 are in a horizontal state, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 67). Except for the bearings 11724 and the support shafts 11742), they are arranged side by side substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions (the portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. Further, the hollow shaft 11744 penetrates the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110 and is pivotally supported by the guide shaft 11224. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174.

The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, has a bearing 11762 at the end on the center side, and has a bearing on the right end. It has a bearing 11764 in the portion. The bearing 11762 is rotatably supported by the right support shaft 11884.

The lower right arm 1178 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. An extension portion 11781 extending upward (on the right lower arm 1178 side) is formed. The thickness of the extended portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. The extension portion 11781 is formed with a support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178. Further, a hollow shaft 11784 is formed at the central end of the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction.

The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 11864 on the support shaft 11782. The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other (bearing) at the origin position (the position where both the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are in a horizontal state, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 67). Except for 11764 and the support shaft 11782), they are arranged side by side substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (the portions excluding the bearing 1176 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161. Further, the hollow shaft 11784 is pivotally supported by the guide shaft 11244 through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178.

In the above, it has been described that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane as the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172 and 1174 when viewed from the side surface. A detailed positional relationship between the 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction will be described.

The front left position of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F1, and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion in the front-rear direction is B1 (FIGS. 71 (B) and 72 (B). reference). Further, in the lower left arm 1174, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) is F2, and the rearmost surface position in the front-rear direction is B2 (see FIGS. 71B and 72B). ). Here, the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 is located behind the frontmost position F2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174, and the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction is located behind the rearmost surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174. However, the rearmost surface position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 is rearward of the foremost front position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the last in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. It is located in front of the surface position B1 (between the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172). That is, when the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are viewed in a cross section that vertically crosses the longitudinal portion of each arm 1172, 1174, the thickness portion of each arm 1172, 1174 is in the vertical direction (width direction of each arm). ) (The positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of each of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface).

In the present embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface, but more specifically, than the lower left arm 1174. The upper left arm 1172 is configured to be located slightly rearward. However, instead of this, the upper left arm 1172 may be configured to be slightly located on the front side of the lower left arm 1174. That is, in the present embodiment, the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 is located behind the frontmost position F2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174, and the upper left arm The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the 1172 in the anteroposterior direction is located posterior to the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the anteroposterior direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the anteroposterior direction. Although the position B2 is configured to be located behind the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and in front of the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. Instead, the foremost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the anterior-posterior direction is located posterior to the foremost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the anteroposterior direction, and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. The position of the rearmost surface in the front-rear direction is located behind the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the anteroposterior direction, and the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the anteroposterior direction is the lower left arm 1174. Behind the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and in front of the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is the lower left arm). It may be configured to be located between the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of 1174 and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction).

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearmost surface position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 is behind the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal axis of the upper left arm 1172. Positioned in front of the rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the portion (between the foremost front position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172). is doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (from the position of the frontmost arm to the position of the rearmost arm among the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174). As long as the thickness) can be reduced, the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush with each other. The frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush with each other. Further, the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction are substantially flush with each other, and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. The frontmost position in the front-rear direction and the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are configured to be substantially flush with each other (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You may.

Since the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction is the same as the positional relationship between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are in the vertical direction (width direction of each arm). The total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the front-back direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) without reducing the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. The thickness from the frontmost position to the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction) can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in the pachinko hall, it is restricted by the length in the front-rear direction, but by reducing the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, other roles can be obtained in the front-rear direction of the pantograph mechanism 1170. It is possible to arrange objects, and it is possible to perform a dynamic movable effect using a plurality of accessories that overlap in the front-back direction.

Further, in the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extended portion 11741 is extended upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11734 of the lower left arm 1174, so that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are at the origin position. It becomes almost horizontal. Similarly, since the extended portion 11781 is extended upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are in a substantially horizontal state at the origin position. Since the extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781) is formed, the movable range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178) can be further increased. Become. Moreover, since each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 can be made thick, the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 can be increased and the arms can be stabilized during operation. Furthermore, by making it possible to increase the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory that operates with the operation of each of these arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. It will be possible to perform more dynamic movable effects.

In this way, by setting the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) as described above, a plurality of accessories overlapping in the front-rear direction can be obtained. It is possible to execute the dynamic movable effect used and the dynamic movable effect by increasing the size of the movable accessory, and it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment by the movable effect.

The movable decorative body 1110 is decorated on the front surface and has openings 1101 and 1105 formed at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 is slidable up and down by the left side drive mechanism 1150 and the right side drive mechanism 1160 together with the cover decorative body 1120. The movable decorative body 1110 has a hole 11102, an elongated hole 11104, a hole 11106 and an elongated hole 11108, and a boss 1112 and a boss 1114. The holes 11102 and 11106 are holes provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other, and are vertically elongated elongated holes. The boss 1112 and the boss 1114 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other on the back surface side of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the movable decorative body 1110 has an LED substrate 1116 in which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, and is configured to be capable of emitting light according to the progress of the game. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1116 emits light, the light emission is displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107.

The covering decoration body 1120 has a covering decoration body 1122 arranged on the left side of the movable decoration body 1110 and a covering decoration body 1124 arranged on the right side of the movable decoration body 1110. The covering decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224. The covering decoration 1124 has a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244.

In the covering decorative body 1122, the support shaft 11222 is rotatably supported by the hole 11102 of the movable decorative body 1112, and the guide shaft 11224 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the covering decoration 1122 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, it is rotatably supported by a bearing 11744 at the central end of the lower left arm 1174). As a result, the covering decorative body 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decorative body 1110 and is movably arranged with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 with the support shaft 11222 as the center of rotation.

In the covering decoration body 1124, the support shaft 11242 is rotatably supported by the hole 11106 of the movable decoration body 1114, and the guide shaft 11244 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration body 1114. Further, the covering decoration body 1124 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, it is rotatably supported by a bearing 11784 at the central end of the lower right arm 1178). As a result, the covering decorative body 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decorative body 1110 and is movably arranged with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 with the support shaft 11242 as the center of rotation.

The covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 are arranged so as to be substantially symmetrical with each other.

[Operation explanation of upper back accessory 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 77. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position), where FIG. 73 is a front view and FIG. 73 is a rear view. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of an embodiment in which the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 have reached the limit position after the upper back accessory 1100 has started to operate. Is a front view and (B) is a rear view. 75 is a view showing an example of an embodiment when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. .. In FIG. 76, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are movable decorations. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode when the body 1110 operates toward the lower side of a paper surface (when the covering decorative body 1120 starts operating with respect to a movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, (B). ) Is the rear view. 77 is a view showing an example of a mode in which the covering decorative body 1120 is moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the upper back accessory 1100 is in the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is in a closed state (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 are all in a substantially horizontal state). be. Here, with respect to the members (lower left arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 is operated toward the lower side of the paper surface, the back surface of the movable decorative body 1110 is used. The members (upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176) that are difficult to hide with the movable decorative body 1110 are made of colorless and transparent members so as to be positioned on the side and hidden as much as possible. As a result, there is little possibility that the visual recognition of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is hindered by the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, and it is difficult for the player to notice.

Then, as the movable decorative body 1110 operates toward the lower side of the paper surface, the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 The angle formed by is increasing. When the movable decorative body 1110 is operated toward the lower side of the paper, the longitudinal direction of each of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 is directed in the vertical direction, but until the movable decorative body 1110 exceeds a certain operating range. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 remain located on the back side of the movable ornament 1110.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. When the drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. The support shaft 11562 is located above the paper surface when it is in the origin position (when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are in the origin position), and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left). It orbits clockwise around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844). When the support shaft 11562 orbits clockwise around the bearing 11564 (left driven gear mounting shaft 11844), the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left, a clockwise pressing force centered on the hollow shaft 11544 (left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) acts on the left transmission arm 1154. When a clockwise pressing force centered on the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise with the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the slot 11542 moves in the slot 11542 while moving the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. When the drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. The support shaft 11662 is located above the paper surface when it is in the origin position (when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are in the origin position), and when the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( It orbits counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 11662 orbits counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (right driven gear mounting shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed down toward the lower right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed down toward the lower right, a counterclockwise pushing force centered on the hollow shaft 11644 (right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868) acts on the right transmission arm 1164. When a counterclockwise pressing force centered on the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. .. When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the slot 11642 moves within the slot 11642 while moving the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the covering decorative body 1122, 1124 also moves downward along with the movement of the movable decorative body 1110. This is because the guide shafts 11224, 11244 of the covering decorative body 1122, 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104, 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110, so that gravity occurs when the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward. This is because the covering ornament 1122, 1124 also moves downward by the action.

When the left side motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the right side motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view in synchronization with this, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 maintain a substantially horizontal state on the paper surface. It works downward.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move toward the lower side of the paper surface, the lower center side hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covering decorative body 1122 moves below the paper surface. Pushed down towards. As a result, the lower left arm 1174 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11742 as the fulcrum, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise with the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 1182) as the fulcrum. When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move toward the lower side of the paper surface, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covering decorative body 1124 pushes down toward the lower side of the paper surface. Be done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11782 as the fulcrum, and the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise with the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884) as the fulcrum. In this way, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

By the way, when the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise with the bearing 11722 (central left support shaft 11882) as a fulcrum, the upper left arm 1172 eventually comes into contact with the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise with the bearing 11762 (central right support shaft 11884) as a fulcrum, the upper right arm 1176 eventually comes into contact with the right contact surface 1194 of the regulating member 1190. The position of the upper left arm 1172 when it comes into contact with the left contact surface 1192 is the operating limit position toward the lower part of the paper surface, and the position of the upper right arm 1176 when it comes into contact with the right contact surface 1194 is the position of the paper surface. It is the operating limit position facing downward.

When the left upper arm 1172 moves to the operating limit position and then the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 moves further downward on the paper surface, and the hollow shaft 11744 has the elongated hole 11104. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration 1122 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 moves to the operating limit position and then the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 moves further downward on the paper surface, and the hollow shaft 11784 has a long hole 11108. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration body 1124 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. In this way, the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 operate together with the movable decorative body 1110 from the origin position toward the lower side of the paper surface, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 operate toward the lower side of the paper surface. When the movable decorative body 1110 operates to the limit position and further moves toward the lower side of the paper surface, the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110. When the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and become visible to the player. The amount of exposure of the lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative working range of the covering decorative body 1120 with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 increases.

In this way, the upper back accessory 1100 can move in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 73) and the descending end position (see FIG. 75). Specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 is movable between the origin position and the descending end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 is between the origin position and the operation limit position of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. Can be moved. The operating limit position is such that after the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 have moved to the descending end position, the covering decorative body 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 while the movable decorative body 1110 is in the descending end position. It is the activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the descending end position and the operating limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they stand by at a position that does not interfere with the visual recognition of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is in the descending end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 includes the case where the covering decorative body 1120 is in the operating limit position. Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position moves toward the descending end position, the upper back accessory 1100 (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance forward. The advance of the upper back accessory 1100 toward the front from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 762 or the second starting port 752. ) Is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed under the condition).

When the upper back accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed at positions visible to the player, but the upper right arm 1176 and the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed. Since the upper left arm 1172 is made of a transparent resin, it does not interfere with the visual recognition of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) moves up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left. The fulcrum with the portion arm 1174 is on the side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and not only does not hinder the player's visibility (the player tends to gaze at the central portion), but also the left drive mechanism. The 1150 and the right side drive mechanism 1160 can be compactly provided in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back accessory 1100. Although the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right even if the upper back accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, it is difficult for the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 to enter the player's view. Further, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, the upper back accessory 1100 can be made thinner as a whole (in the present embodiment, the thickness is about the width of the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161). ing).

Further, at the beginning of the operation of the movable decorative body 1110, both the movable decorative body 1110 and the coated decorative body 1120 start to operate from the origin position, and the covered decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body) with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 from the middle. 1122 and the covering decoration 1124) will start operating relatively. That is, since the covering decoration body 1120 is not operating with respect to the movable decoration body 1110 at the beginning of the operation of the movable decoration body 1110, the covering decoration body 1120 is operated from the beginning of the operation of the movable decoration body 1110. It is difficult to predict the final shape, and the movable decorative body 1110 will operate beyond the player's expectation from the middle, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the present embodiment, the coated decorative body 1120 (coated decorative body 1122 and the coated decorative body 1124) is not operating with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 at the beginning of the operation of the movable decorative body 1110, and is movable from the middle. The covering decorative body 1120 is configured to start operating relative to the decorative body 1110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the covering decorative body 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decorative body 1110. May be.

By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut on the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194 (after reaching the operating limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even so, the postures of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 each face) do not change. On the other hand, regarding the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178, even after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut on the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 and the lower right arm, respectively. Each longitudinal portion of the arm 1178 changes its posture in the vertical direction. If the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 will eventually be exposed from the back side of the movable decoration body 1110. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122) is opposed to the movable decorative body 1110 before the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. And the covering decoration body 1124) is made to operate relatively. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward on the paper surface, the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, so that the lower left arm 1174 from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. And the lower right arm 1178 will appear in a position that can be visually recognized from the front, and at that timing, the covering decorative body 1120 is operated relatively upward with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm are operated. The arm 1178 is located on the back side of the covering decoration body 1120. When the covering decoration body 1120 operates relative to the movable decoration body 1110, the accessory area (the area where the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120 are combined) that can be visually recognized from the front becomes large. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 from being exposed in a natural manner without discomfort for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position starts operating toward the descending end position, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 each have a left contact surface. When abutting on the 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, the movable decorative body 1110 continues to operate toward the descending end position, and the coated decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122 and the coated decorative body 1122 and the coated decorative body) is attached to the movable decorative body 1110. The body 1124) operates upward. Here, the operation of the covering decorative body 1122 with respect to the movable decorative body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the left side motor 1151 counterclockwise in a front view. Similarly, the operation of the covering decoration body 1124 with respect to the movable decoration body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the right side motor 1161 clockwise in a front view. That is, for both the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124, the corresponding motors (the left side motor 1151 for the covering decoration body 1122 and the right side motor 1161 for the covering decoration body 1124) are simply rotated in a specific direction. With one simple motion control, it is possible to operate the movable decorative body 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decorative body 1100 while continuing the operation of the movable decorative body 1100. Moreover, since each of the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 only rotates one motor, the movable decoration body 1100 can be operated while continuing the operation of the movable decoration body 1100 with a simple configuration and space saving. It is possible to operate independently of the operation of. In particular, in recent years, it has become mainstream to increase the size of movable accessories and arrange multiple movable accessories, so the contribution to space saving is a great effect.

By the way, conventionally, when the accessory is operated substantially linearly in the vertical direction, drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism is used to perform linear motion in the vertical direction. When the drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the drive mechanism at least over the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and the installation of the drive mechanism requires a large area. Space can be saved if the accessory can be operated by the circular motion, but in this case, the accessory is also operated by the circular motion. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise with the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the slot 11542 moves in the slot 11542. While moving the movable decorative body 1110 downward. In synchronization with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the slot 11642 moves in the slot 11642. While moving the movable decorative body 1110 downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 is moved in an arc with one end as a fulcrum, while the posture of the movable decorative body 1110 is held substantially horizontally. The movable decorative body 1110 can be moved substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operating range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 perform an arc motion, the installation area of the drive mechanism (left drive mechanism 1150, right drive mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decorative body 1110 in the vertical direction is set in the movable decorative body 1110. It can be made smaller than the operating range of the above, which can greatly contribute to space saving.

Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface of the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120, the decorative cover 1130, the decorative cover 1140, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the static decorative body 1196 is decorated with the same system. Is given. The same type of decoration means, for example, a decoration that evokes the same idea, and if a decoration that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, or shape in appearance is given, the same idea can be recalled. In the present embodiment, the front surface of each of the above members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 has the same color in appearance and the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). It is decorated so that it can be recognized as being there. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 is a character shape related to the concept of the game machine, the same members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 are decorated in the same system on the front surface. A character shape is formed.

In conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a drive member that drives the movable member (left transmission of the present embodiment). (Equivalent to the arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164), there was a possibility that the movable accessory could be visually recognized when it advanced to the front side of the liquid crystal display device. In this respect, in the present embodiment, unlike such a conventional gaming machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally made visible in front view, and then other members (movable decorative body 1110). , Covered decorative body 1120, decorative cover 1130, 1140 and static decorative body 1196) so as to be recognized by the player as a member constituting the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members regardless of the position between the origin position and the operation limit position due to the operation of the movable decorative body 1110 (for example). , (A) of FIGS. 73 to 77, respectively). More specifically, the left transmission arm 1154 is decorated to have continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transmission arm 1164 is decorated with the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover. It is decorated to have continuity with 1140. Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the front surfaces of the other members are decorated in the same system to form one character shape. In this way, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally visible from the front, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decorative body 1110 to support the movable decorative body 1110. It is difficult for the player to grasp that the member is a member. Further, while the movable decorative body 1110 is shaped like an eye, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are shaped so that the outer corners of the eyes are imaged from the left and right ends of the movable decorative body 1110. .. Therefore, it seems more difficult for the player to understand that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members for driving the movable decorative body 1110.

[Structure of lower part 1200]
The configuration of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. FIG. 78 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 79 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal embodiment. FIG. 80 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 81 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above to the left. FIG. 82 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 83 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixing base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, and a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The left guide 1260 member and the right guide 1270 member that guide the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 on both the left and right sides, and the auxiliary that exerts an upward urging force on the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 that moves up and down. The power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 as a drive source for operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the arm 1280 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is movable. It comprises a gear 1240 transmitted to the decorative body 1210 and a transparent resin rear cover 1250 disposed behind the gear 1240. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. 79 and 81 so that the shape of the rear cover 1250 can be easily grasped. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 function as an actuating mechanism for moving the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 up and down.

The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory drive motor 1230 is attached to substantially the center of the lower portion on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220. On the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220, a support shaft 12202 that pivotally supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed so as to face forward. A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed on the back surface side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 toward the rear. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204, 12206 that are substantially symmetrical with respect to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outward above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. It is formed. The hole 12204 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12203. The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12205. A photo sensor 12208 for detecting the position of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is arranged on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory drive motor 1230. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a decorative member that is long in the lateral direction. It is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to be able to operate in the vertical direction with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 has a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of transparent resin that can be operated in the vertical direction with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and a lower accessory fixed base 1220 that is decorated on the front surface. A lower accessory decorative cover 12104 that moves up and down together with the lower accessory movable base 12102 is provided. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to allow light from the rear to pass forward.

A pair of elongated holes 12106, 12108 are formed on the left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102. The elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are elongated holes that are long in the lateral direction. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 toward the front on the right side of the elongated hole 12106.

Further, on the lower accessory movable base 12102, an LED substrate on which an LED (not shown) as a light emitting source is arranged is mounted on the front side. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. As a result, for example, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect according to the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210.

The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-shaped member, and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 in the attachment portions 1264 and 12606. The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220. Then, the groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. ..

The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-shaped member, and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 in the attachment portions 1274 and 12706. The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220. Then, the groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. ..

The auxiliary arm 1280 is a rod-shaped member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 at the left end end that is pivotally supported by a support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The auxiliary arm 1280 has an elongated hole 12802 formed at the right end thereof to engage with the boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102.

An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided as an example of an elastic member between the support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280. The auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges the auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with the bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The urging force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290 toward the counterclockwise direction assists the upward movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220.

The lower accessory drive motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207.

The gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The gear 1240 includes a drive gear 12402 provided coaxially with the lower accessory drive motor 1230, and a left driven gear 12404 and a right driven gear 12406.

The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, and left and right so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. They are arranged side by side. Further, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other.

The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a in the center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. The teeth of the left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a in the center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. The teeth of the right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of the left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the drive gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this way, the rotation of the drive gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in synchronization with each other.

The left driven gear 12404 has a boss 12405 formed on the front surface at a portion radially separated from the center of the left driven gear 12404 by a predetermined distance. Similarly, with respect to the right driven gear 12406, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface at a portion radially separated from the center of the right driven gear 12406 by a predetermined distance. The distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407.

It should be noted that "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter", "the center height direction position of the left driven gear 12404 is the same as the height direction position of the center of the right driven gear 12406", and "the left driven gear 12406". The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same. " Instead, when the power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is stably (balanced in the left-right direction) while maintaining the same posture in appearance. It suffices as long as it is within a range in which a colleague can be transmitted substantially evenly to the left and right of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 so that it can move up and down.

The boss 12405 penetrates the hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12204 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12405 orbits around the support shaft 12203 when the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

The boss 12407 penetrates the hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12206 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12407 orbits around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

In the normal state, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 are respectively located at the lowermost lowermost positions (positions shown in FIG. 84).

The holes 12204 and 12206 also have a function of defining the movement range of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (that is, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406), respectively.

When the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated is set as the uppermost position, the holes 12204 and the hole 12206 are both at least the lowermost position and the uppermost position. It needs to be formed so that the bosses 12405 and 12407 can move between them. In the present embodiment, the hole 12404 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 84) to a position that exceeds the uppermost position clockwise. Further, the hole 12206 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 84) to a position exceeding the uppermost position counterclockwise.

Here, of the two positions where the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper part is the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the lower part is the lowermost position of the boss 12405. Of the two positions where the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 and the hole 12206 intersect, the upper end is the uppermost position of the boss 12407, and the lower end is the lowermost position of the boss 12407 (whichever). Also see FIG. 86). However, in FIG. 86, both the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 have moved to a position slightly beyond the uppermost position.

The "position slightly beyond the uppermost position" of the boss 12405 is the right side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (right side of FIG. 86 (A), FIG. 86). (Left side of (B)), which is a position where the substantially uppermost position can be maintained. Further, the "position beyond the uppermost end position" of the boss 12407 is the left side of the front view (left side of FIG. 86 (A), FIG. 86 (B)) with respect to the line of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406. ) On the right side). However, it is preferable that the degree of the "exceeding position" is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 has been lowered when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 has moved upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost end position, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 descends to a position lower than the uppermost end position.

[Operation explanation of the lower accessory 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (a mode when the position is at the origin), where FIG. 84 is a front view and FIG. 84 is a rear view. FIG. 85 is a view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it is operated to the intermediate position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it is operated to the operating limit, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. In addition, in FIG. 86, these are illustrated so that the mode of the boss 12407 and the elongated hole 12108 can be grasped.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 84) and the operating limit position (see FIG. 86). When the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, which makes it difficult for the player to see it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is in the operation limit position, it is located in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 faces forward from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance. The advance of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the game to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752). It is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed on the condition that the ball wins (passes).

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405, which is located at the lowermost position in the normal state, rotates clockwise while drawing an arc having a linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. Rotate and move to. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407, which is located at the lowermost position in the normal state, reverses while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate and move clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operating limit position.

While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the origin position (see FIG. 84) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 85), the boss 12405 moves leftward (see FIG. 84) in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right in FIGS. 84 (B) and 85 (B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward. The boss 12407 moves the lower accessory movable base 12102 upward while moving to the right (leftward in FIGS. 84 (B) and 85 (B)) in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Push up. At this time, the holes 12204 and 12206 function as guide grooves for guiding the operation of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, respectively, and as described above, the operating ranges of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear). It also has a function to specify the rotation range of 12406).

Further, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 85) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 86), the boss 12405 enters the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 85B and 86B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward, and the boss 12407 is an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the left direction (right direction in FIGS. 85 (B) and 86 (B)). Since the auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise urging force with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum to the auxiliary arm 1280, the auxiliary coil spring 1290 exerts a force to push up the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 upward. Supported.

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc having a linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc having a linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 as a radius. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends toward the origin position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 operates from the operating limit position (see FIG. 86) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 85), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the slot 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the right in FIGS. 85B and 86B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 enters the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 85 (B) and 86 (B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward. Further, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 85) to the origin position (see FIG. 84), the boss 12405 is right in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving in the direction (to the left in FIGS. 84 (B) and 85 (B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 is inside the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Pushes the lower accessory movable base 12102 downward while moving to the left (to the right in FIGS. 84 (B) and 85 (B)).

As described above, the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same, and the diameter of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are the same. The diameter is the same. Further, the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. Here, since the LED substrate is mounted on the lower accessory movable base 12102, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 to be raised has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a long accessory in the left-right direction. When raising such an accessory, there is a possibility that power will be transmitted biased to either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the ascending object is a little heavy or has a long accessory in the left-right direction, only the rotational force (power) of one lower accessory drive motor 1230 is sufficient. The lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is stable (balanced in the left-right direction) while maintaining the posture when it is in the origin position (see FIG. 84) without the power being transmitted unevenly to either the left or right side. It is possible to operate in the vertical direction.

By the way, when operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 is necessary for operating the lower accessory drive motor 1230 from the origin position to the operation limit position. The pulse signal is output so that the rotation speed exceeds the maximum rotation speed (rotation beyond the operating limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, which has started to operate by the rotation of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, physically collides with the boss 12405 at the end of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 collides with the end of the hole 12206. It will be stopped. In this way, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be quickly operated from the origin position to the operation limit position.

Here, the hole 12204 is formed up to the center side of the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (on the right side of the paper surface of the vertical direction line LL in FIG. 86A). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed up to the center side of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (on the left side of the paper surface of the vertical direction line LR in FIG. 86A). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeds the uppermost end position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the center side of the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (on the right side of the paper surface of the vertical direction line LL in FIG. 86A), and is the center of the right driven gear 12406. The boss 12407 is located on the center side of the vertical ship LR passing through the OR (on the left side of the paper surface of the vertical line LL in FIG. 86 (A)).

When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly above the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly above the uppermost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) with respect to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210. However, the holes 12204 and 12206 regulate the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406. Therefore, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in any direction, and the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is locked at this position.

In this way, when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 moves to the operating limit position, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 does not descend due to gravity, and of course, external vibration or the like with respect to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210. Even if a strong force is applied, it does not descend and is held at the operating limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction toward the origin position (clockwise). As a result, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. It is possible to maintain the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 above.

If the boss 12405 is not on the left side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (if the boss 12407 is not on the right side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406) , The movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 downward is locked. Therefore, even when the boss 12405 is on the line of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the line of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), it is also downward. The movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 toward is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the line of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the line of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the rotation direction of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

In the present embodiment, when the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The rotation is restricted, because it is desired to hold the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). The moving range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be appropriately changed according to the position where the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment is desired to be held. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is set to a position rotated 90 degrees further to the right side of the front view (the right side of FIG. 86 (A) and the left side of FIG. 86 (B)) from the line of the vertical direction line LL. When the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated 90 degrees to the left side of the front view (the left side of FIG. 86 (A) and the right side of FIG. 86 (B)) from the line of the vertical direction line LR, it is the most. The lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost position position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated to rotate the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, and the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). ) Is moved up and down, but the mode in which the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is moved up and down is not limited to this, and a force acting member that exerts a force on the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (in the present embodiment). The bosses in the form (corresponding to 12405 and 12407) may move up and down in an arc to move the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 up and down. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 of the present embodiment) for the movement of the force acting member, for example, the above-mentioned portion is radially separated from the center by a predetermined distance. A rotating member or the like on which a force acting member is formed may be used.

Further, the above-mentioned force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment) can be moved by drawing a perfect circular arc by using a gear, but is not necessarily moved by drawing a perfect circular arc. It is not necessary, and you may move it by drawing an elliptical arc. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes the horizontal direction, the symmetrical accessory in the moving direction (horizontal direction) of the force acting member (lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment (more specifically, the lower accessory movable). The component force of the load (corresponding to the base 12102) becomes 0, and the force acting member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment). Therefore, unless the drive source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is driven in the direction in which the target accessory is lowered, a simple configuration is performed without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. Then, the target accessory can be locked upward in a series of actions for moving the target accessory upward.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (movement of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407) is not stopped by stopping the drive of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, but is a hole. It is physically stopped by 12204 and 12206. For example, if the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 of the present embodiment) is stopped upward by controlling the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 of the present embodiment), the target accessory is stopped. There is no choice but to decelerate the rotation of the motor near the upper position to be desired, and there is a possibility that the ascending speed of the target accessory in the vicinity of the upper position will decrease. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, by physically restricting the movement of the force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment), the target accessory is used unless the rotation of the motor is decelerated. High-speed movement can be achieved with a simple configuration without stalling near the upper position where you want to stop. Moreover, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetrical accessory has a horizontally long shape that is long in the left-right direction, the target combination is maintained in the left-right direction. You can move things up and down.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other. That is, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other. As a result, even if an external force (for example, vibration) is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) in either the left or right direction, the lower accessory drive motor As long as the 1230 is not driven, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the uppermost end position. This is because the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 does not descend unless the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner character 1300]
As described above, the corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350. Here, the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described first, then the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operation limit position will be described.

[Structure of upper corner accessory 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG. 87 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 88 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 89 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 90 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The upper corner accessory 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner accessory 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322. A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. And a photo sensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

The fixing plate 1322 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member that is on the back side of the upper front accessory 1000 and the front side of the upper back accessory 1100, and is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. Support shafts 13222, 13224, 13226 are formed on the front surface side of the fixing plate 1322. A hole 13225 is formed between the support shaft 13222 and the support shaft 13224 in the left-right direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224. Around the support shaft 13226, a hole 13229 is formed in substantially the upper half of the circumference of the support shaft 13226.

The first movable body 1330 includes a decorative portion 13302 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13304 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13302. A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13304. A support shaft 13308 is formed on the upper right side of the bearing 13306 when viewed from the front. The first movable body 1330 can rotate around the bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). Further, on the back surface of the first movable body 1330, a long linear slope 13307 is formed along the moving direction of the first movable body 1330. The slope 13307 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The second movable body 1340 includes a decorative portion 13402 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13404 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13402. A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13404. A support shaft 13408 is formed on the upper left side of the bearing 13406 in the front view. The second movable body 1340 is rotatable around the bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). Further, on the back surface of the second movable body 1340, a long linear slope 13407 is formed along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340. The slope 13407 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The motor 1332 is mounted and fixed to the fixing plate 1322 via the motor mounting member 1331. Further, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322.

The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334, a second gear 1335, a third gear 1336, a first transmission arm 1337, and a second transmission arm 1338. The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are meshed with each other, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are meshed with each other. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via the gears 1334 and 1335, respectively. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via the gears 1334 to 1336.

A hollow shaft 13342 is formed in the center of the first gear 1334. The hollow shaft 13342 is pivotally supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13322. The hollow shaft 13342 pivotally supported by the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225.

A hollow shaft 13352 is formed in the center of the second gear 1335. The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13224. Further, on the front surface side of the second gear 1335, a boss 13354 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance.

A hollow shaft 13362 is formed in the center of the third gear 1336. The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13226. Further, on the front surface side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13364 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. On the back surface side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13366 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. The boss 13366 moves in the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. The boss 13364 and the boss 13366 are formed on opposite surfaces to each other substantially diagonally with respect to the center of the third gear 1336. A detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photo sensor 1345 is formed on the front surface of the third gear 1336.

The first transmission arm 1337 has a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a rod-shaped portion 13371. A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13371 side. The bearing 13372 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308. A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. The bearing 13374 is rotatably supported by the boss 13354.

The second transmission arm 1338 has a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a rod-shaped portion 13381. A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13381 side. The bearing 13382 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13408. A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13380 side. The bearing 13384 is rotatably supported by the boss 13364.

The photo sensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and in the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are the origin positions (see FIG. 91 described later). ), It is attached so that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Operation explanation of upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. FIG. 91 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 92 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 93 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 92. FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are in the origin position, the first movable body 1330 is located in the upper left corner portion of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is located in the upper right corner portion of the liquid crystal display device 16. Is located in. At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 21), so that they are difficult to see in front view.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are located at the origin position (see FIG. 91), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 is counterclockwise in front view (clockwise in FIGS. 91 to 94). When rotated to, the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view.

When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13324 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the boss 13354 (see FIG. 89) rotates clockwise with the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13324) as the center. Orbit to. When the boss 13354 orbits clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 in front view, the bearing 13374 pivotally supported by the boss 13354 also orbits clockwise around the support shaft 13224. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves to the left (to the right in FIGS. 91 to 94) in the front view. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves to the left in front view, the support shaft 13308 is attached to the fixed plate 1322. It rotates counterclockwise in front view with the formed support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) as the center of rotation. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the first movable body 1330 rotates from the origin position to the lower right (display area of the liquid crystal display device 16). Move toward (in front of).

Further, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13324 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise with the hollow shaft 13362 (support shaft 13326) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the support shaft 13326 as the center of rotation, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 89) orbits counterclockwise in front view around the hollow shaft 13362. When the boss 13364 orbits counterclockwise in front view around the hollow shaft 13362, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 91 to 94) in front view. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably externally attached to the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves to the right in front view, the support shaft 13408 becomes the fixing plate 1322. It rotates clockwise with the formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) as the center of rotation. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves from the origin position toward the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) with the support shaft 13228 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be operated synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1332.

Further, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see from the front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside to the inside of the field of view in the front view.

When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in the direction of returning to the origin position due to the movement opposite to the above-mentioned movement. do.

By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the fixed plate 1322 interfere with each other, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a risk that it will not be possible to recover. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1322, whereby the first movable body 1330 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the second movable body 1340 is smoothly moved to the origin position. It is possible to make a good return.

[Composition of lower corner accessory 1350]
The configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. FIG. 95 is an example of a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 96 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 98 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back surface.

The lower corner accessory 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner accessory 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352. A motor 1354 as a drive source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. And a photo sensor 1375 for confirming the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

The fixing plate 1352 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member which is the back side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200 and is fixedly attached to the lower part of the rear box 1800. Support shafts 13522, 13523, 13524, 13525, 13526, 13527, 13528, 13259 are formed on the front surface side of the fixing plate 1352. Around the support shaft 13527, a hole 13530 is formed in substantially the lower half of the circumference of the support shaft 13527.

The third movable body 1355 includes a decorative portion 13552 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13554 integrally configured with the decorative portion 13552. An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13554. A hole 135592 is formed at the central end of the arm cover 13559. A bearing 13556 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13554. A support shaft 13558 is formed at the lower right of the front view of the bearing 13556. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable about a support shaft 13524 on which the bearing 13556 is pivotally supported. Further, a coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559. The coil spring 1395 is urged clockwise with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise urging force with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation acts on the third movable body 1355. Further, on the back surface of the third movable body 1355, a long linear slope 13557 is formed along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355. The slope 13557 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decorative portion 1357 that is decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13574 that is integrally formed with the decorative portion 1357. An arm cover 13579 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13574. A hole 135792 is formed at the central end of the arm cover 13579. A bearing 13576 that supports the support shaft 13259 is formed at the base end of the arm portion 13574. A support shaft 13578 is formed in the lower left of the front view of the bearing 13576. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable about a support shaft 13259 on which the bearing 13576 is pivotally supported. Further, a coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579. The coil spring 1396 is urged counterclockwise with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise urging force with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation acts on the fourth movable body 1357. Further, on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357, a long linear slope 13557 is formed along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357. The slope 13757 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The motor 1354 is mounted and fixed to the fixing plate 1352 via the motor mounting member 1356. The power of the motor 1354 is output from the motor output shaft 1354.

The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1376, and each gear. A third transmission arm 1370 that transmits power from all or part of 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367 to the third movable body 1355, and each gear 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366. , 1372 includes a fourth transmission arm 1372 that transmits power from all or part of the 1367 to the fourth movable body 1357.

A hollow shaft 13612 is formed in the center of the first gear 1361. The motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13642 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13542.

The power from the motor 1354 is transmitted in the order of the first gear 1361, the second gear 1362, the third gear 1363, the fourth gear 1364, the fifth gear 1365, the sixth gear 1366, and the seventh gear 1367. In the sixth gear 1366, a hollow shaft 13662 is formed in the center, and a boss 13664 is formed in a portion radially outward from the center at a predetermined distance. Further, in the sixth gear 1366, a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photo sensor 1375 is formed on the front surface at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. Further, in the 7th gear 1367, a hollow shaft 13672 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13528 is formed at the center, and a boss 13674 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance.

The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a rod-shaped portion 13704. A bearing 13706 is formed at the end of the rod-shaped portion 13704 on the side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355. A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13702 side. The bearing 13708 rotatably supports the boss 13664 of the sixth gear 1366.

The fourth transmission arm 1372 has a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a rod-shaped portion 13724. A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13724 side. The bearing 13726 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578. A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. The bearing 13728 rotatably supports the boss 13674.

The photo sensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and in the present embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are the origin positions (see FIG. 99 described later). ), It is attached so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Operation explanation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 99 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. FIG. 100 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 101 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are in the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is located in the lower left corner portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in the lower right corner of the display area. At the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550, so that they are difficult to see in front view.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 99), the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 13542 is clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 99 to 101). When rotated to, the 1st gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the 4th gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the 5th gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise in front view.

When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 99 to 101) with the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the boss 13664 (see FIG. 97) centers on the hollow shaft 13662. It orbits counterclockwise in front view. When the boss 13664 orbits counterclockwise in front view around the hollow shaft 13662, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves to the left (right direction in FIGS. 99 to 101) in front view. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the third movable body 1355 support shaft 13558, when the bearing 13706 moves to the left in front view, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352. It rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) as the center of rotation. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

Further, when the 6th gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 13327 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the 7th gear 1367 watches with the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the 7th gear 1367 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13528 as the center of rotation, the boss 13674 (see FIG. 97) rotates clockwise with the hollow shaft 13672 as the center. When the boss 13672 orbits clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 in a front view, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 99 to 101) in the front view. Since the bearing 13726 of the 4th transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the 4th movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves to the right in front view, the support shaft 13578 becomes a fixed plate 1352. It rotates counterclockwise in front view with the formed support shaft 13259 (bearing 13576) as the center of rotation. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 can be operated synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1354.

Further, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see from the front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside to the inside of the field of view in the front view.

When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 return to the origin position due to the movement opposite to the above-mentioned movement. Operate.

By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fixed plate 1352 interfere with each other, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a risk that it will not be possible to recover. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1352, whereby the third movable body 1355 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13377 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1352, so that the fourth movable body 13570 is smoothly moved to the origin position. It is possible to make a good return.

[Aspect when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operating limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, an embodiment when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operation limit position will be described. FIG. 102 is a back unit showing an aspect when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of 176. FIG. 103 shows when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position in the corner accessory 1300. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. FIG. 104 shows when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position in the corner accessory 1300. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. However, in FIGS. 102 to 104, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker ball gutter 1600 is omitted.

Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, Chinese characters, hiragana, katakana, alphabet). ) Is attached.

As shown in FIG. 102, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) In the front, the letters attached to each movable body 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357 form one design (for example, a compound word).

Further, as shown in FIG. 103, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5), one design (for example, a compound word) is formed by the characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5), one design (eg, a compound word) is formed by the characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

In this way, for example, the drive of the motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 89) and the motor 1354 (for example, see FIG. 98) by the accessory control circuit 207 (both see FIG. 9) of the sub CPU 201 is subjected to the jackpot determination process. By controlling according to the result of the above, all the characters of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are one design (hereinafter referred to as "the first design"). One design (hereinafter referred to as "second design") is formed by forming a part (referred to as) or having a part (two) characters of the upper corner accessory 1320 (first movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340). Or form one design (hereinafter referred to as "third design") with a part (two) characters of the lower corner accessory 1350 (third movable body 1355 and fourth movable body 1357). It becomes possible to do. As a result, it is possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effect by the operation of the accessory with only a limited number of the accessory.

Further, the design formed by two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is information related to the progress of the game (for example, a big hit). It is also possible to make the player recognize it as execution suggestion information of a specific reach with high expectation. For example, when a specific reach effect that makes a player expect a big hit is executed as a result of a big hit determination by a start winning prize for the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440, the specific case. In front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, two or more movable bodies (first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355, and fourth movable body) are expressed with a compound word indicating (or related to) the reach effect of. It may be represented by a design (for example, a compound word) that can be recognized when any two or more movable bodies of the movable body 1357 are arranged in close proximity to each other.

In the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see from the front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side of the field of view in the front view.

Further, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see from the front view, in the direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side of the field of view in the front view.

Here, characters are applied to the front surfaces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively, but the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, respectively. Each single character on each of the 1357s does not make sense, and information about the progress of the game is not shown to the player.

Further, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all arranged at positions that are difficult to see at the origin position, and are arranged at positions that are difficult to see at the origin position, and are located at the upper left and front of the front view, respectively. It is located at a location distant from the upper right of the view, the lower left of the front view, and the lower right of the front view. Therefore, two or more of the 1 movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355, and the 4th movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the player's view in front view. In the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, a compound word) formed by the characters attached to the two or more movable bodies, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. It can be recognized only when it is stopped in close proximity in front of the display area of the device 16.

In this way, two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in front view. By doing so, the player's gaze can be moved from the back (the effect image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the front side (the character of the movable body advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 16). As a result, conventionally, for example, information related to the progress of the game has been shown to the player by, for example, an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, but according to the present embodiment, the information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that advance to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 without relying on the effect image to be produced. It is possible to show the player information related to the progress of the game only with the movable body. As a result, not only the rhythm of the production can be changed, but also the production that has an impact on the player can be performed, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5). In the front, it is preferred, but not limited to, that one design is formed by the letters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357, but not necessarily limited to this, attached to two or more partial movable bodies. It does not matter if one design is formed only by letters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, one design is made only by the characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355. It corresponds to the case where the second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters may not be attached) are formed and exist as mere separate movable bodies without forming a design.

Further, in the present embodiment, one character is attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, but the present invention is not limited to this. Two or more letters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

Further, in the present embodiment, the characters attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are not necessarily limited to the characters, but the liquid crystal. In front of the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5), a design may be formed or a meaningful shape (for example, a device reminiscent of a specific idea) may be formed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are located in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5). , There is a gap between the movable body and other movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all or a part of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of one motor 1332 (see, for example, FIG. 89) causes the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 to operate in synchronization with each other, and the rotation of one motor 1354 causes the third to operate. The movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body are not limited to this. Each of the bodies 1357 may be configured to operate independently.

[Composition of side accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. FIG. 105 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 106 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal aspect. FIG. 107 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 108 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). In FIG. 106, various members such as the link member 1420 are shown through the mounting plate 1410 so as to be easily visible, but they are actually opaque members.

The side accessory 1400 is for operating the mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, the movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and the movable decorative body 1450. Positions of the side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, the movable piece 1430 and the L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable decorative body 1450, and the movable decorative body 1450. It is equipped with a photo sensor 1464 for confirming.

The mounting plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-shaped member that is mounted and fixed to the right side of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that pivotally supports the link member 1420 is formed on the upper portion of the mounting plate 1410 on the front surface side. At the lower part of the mounting plate 1410, a movable decorative body support shaft 1414 that pivotally supports the movable decorative body 1450 is formed.

The movable decorative body 1450 is a single movable body configured to be operable together with a vertically long patterned main body portion 1452 with a decoration on the front surface and the main body portion 1452 and also to be independently operable with respect to the main body portion 1452. It is equipped with 1454. The main body portion 1452 of the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative bearing 1458 that pivotally supports the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 at the lower portion of the main body portion 1452. The movable decorative body 1450 is pivotally supported by the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 in the movable decorative body bearing 1458, and is configured to be rotatable around the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative body bearing 1458) as a rotation center. The movable decorative body 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Further, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 that projects rearward on the right side of the front view.

The side accessory motor 1440 is mounted and fixed to the mounting plate 1410 via the motor mounting member 1444. Further, the side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is decelerated and power is output from the motor output shaft 1442.

The movable piece 1430 has a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by pivotally supporting the motor output shaft 1442, and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420. When the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, the movable piece 1430 rotates about the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) as the center of rotation.

The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that pivotally supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 14, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and is long in the downward direction. And have. The link member 1420 can rotate about the link support shaft 1412 pivotally supported by the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center. The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece slot 1424 to which the link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the slot direction of the movable piece slot 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation. The second link 1425 is formed with an elongated hole 1426 for a movable decorative body to which the movable decorative boss 1455 of the movable decorative body 1450 is slidably connected. The movable decorative boss 1455 is slidable along the long hole direction of the long hole 1426 for the movable decorative body when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation.

The photosensor 1464 is mounted and fixed to the lower part of the mounting plate 1410 via the photosensor mounting member 1460. The photo sensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1450. As described above, in the present embodiment, the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 is provided at the lower end of the movable decoration body 1450, and the photo sensor 1464 has the origin confirmation movable piece when the movable decoration body 1450 is in the origin position. The piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photo sensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position.

[Operation explanation of side accessory 1400]
Next, the operation of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105, 106 and 109 to 113. FIG. 109 is an example of a front view showing the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 110 is an example of a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 111 is an example of a front view showing the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 112 is an example of a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 113 is a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. This is an example. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as a “most advanced position”.

The degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 106) when viewed from the rear, and the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the most advanced position. The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 112). In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that the motor output shaft 1442 moves from about 1 o'clock to about 4:30 when the side accessory motor 1440 makes one rotation (movable decorative body 1450). Moves from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the reduction ratio is not limited to this.

At the most advanced position shown in FIG. 112, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the movable decorative body slot 1426. This is because the rotation direction centered on the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative body 1450) and the long direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 are different from each other. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is restricted by the side surface (longitudinal surface) of the movable decorative boss.

When the movable decorative body 1450 is located at the origin position (the position where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in the front view. When rotated (counterclockwise in FIGS. 105, 109 and 111, clockwise in FIGS. 106, 110, 112 and 113), the movable piece 1430 is centered on the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432). Rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise with the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece slot 1424, and the link bearing 1422 (with respect to the link member 1420) A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 109, counterclockwise in FIG. 110) acts in front of the link support shaft 1412) as the center of rotation. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise with the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation in front view, a force for pushing the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 via the movable decorative boss 1455 is applied. It works. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 112) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 is stopped, the movable decorative body 1450 is stopped at the most advanced position.

From the state where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 112), the side accessory motor 1440 further rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 is counterclockwise in the front view (FIGS. 105 and 109). And when rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 111 and clockwise in FIGS. 106, 110, 112 and 113), the movable piece 1430 is counterclockwise in front view with the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the center of rotation. Rotate to. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise with the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece slot 1424, and the link bearing 1422 (with respect to the link member 1420) A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 109, counterclockwise in FIG. 110) acts in front of the link support shaft 1412) as the center of rotation. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise with the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation in front view, a force for returning the movable decorative body 1450 to the origin position acts on the movable decorative body 1450 via the movable decorative boss 1455. do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 106) in the rear view and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 is stopped, the movable decorative body 1450 is stopped at the origin position.

In this way, the movable decorative body is simply rotated in the same direction (counterclockwise in front view in the present embodiment) without rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the forward or reverse direction. The 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view (see FIG. 106) to approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 112), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from about 4:30 in the rear view to about 1 o'clock in the back view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be realized only by moving the link member 1420 from about 1 o'clock in the rear view to about 4:30 in the rear view, but from the most advanced position to the origin. The movement of the movable decorative body 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 moves from about 4:30 to 1 o'clock in the rear view.

Therefore, not only when the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also from the origin position to the most advanced position unless the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 fluctuates significantly. The movement of the movable decoration body 1450 is performed relatively quickly, and the movement of the movable decoration body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position is performed relatively slowly. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position (movable body effect) is a hit determination performed when the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. Although performed on the basis of the results, the movement of such movable ornaments 1450 is required to be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require a quicker movement than the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, the movable decorative body 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position simply by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (the same direction), but the movable decorative body. The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position, and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decorative body 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making it smaller than the angle, the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is compared with the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It becomes possible to move quickly.

The independent movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By making the 1454 operate in accordance with the main body portion 1452, the operation effect of the side accessory 1400 can be made more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is waiting between the origin position, the most advanced position or the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independent movable body 1454 is attached to the main body portion 1452. It may be activated.

[Structure of the second middle panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. 114 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 115 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). FIG. 116 is an example of a front view of (A) the second middle panel 1550, and an example of a sectional view taken along line CC shown in (B) and (A).

The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel mounting case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are mounted, an LED substrate 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, and an inner. It comprises a lens 1583, a decorative sheet 1584, a half mirror 1585, a window edge 1586 having the above-mentioned opening window 1552, and a panel cover 1590.

The panel mounting case 1556 is a case-shaped member that is fixedly mounted to the lower right portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above.

The LED substrate 1560 is a plate-shaped member having an annular protrusion 1561 having a shape corresponding to the above-mentioned opening window 1552 and having a plane region 1563. On the LED substrate 1560, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) LEDs 1562 are arranged in an annular shape inside the annular protrusion 1561 in the radial direction, and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in the plane region 1563. The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light toward the outside in the radial direction. The LED 1564 is provided so as to emit light toward the front in a front view.

The light guide lens 1570 is provided so as to accommodate the LED substrate 1560 between the light guide lens 1570 and the panel mounting case 1556. The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing the light emitted forward from the LED 1564 arranged on the LED substrate 1560 and emitting the light in a planar manner. Further, the light guide lens 1570 is formed with a hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of the panel cover 1590. The front side of the black sheet 1580 is black, and the back side is watermarked with characters or the like. The watermark cannot be visually recognized from the front in the normal state (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but when the predetermined conditions are satisfied and the LEDs 1562 and 1564 emit light, the watermark appears on the panel cover 1590. The black sheet 1580 is formed with holes having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The half mirror 1585, the decorative sheet 1584, and the inner lens 1583 are stacked in this order from the front and arranged so as to face the opening window 1552. At this time, the inner lens 1583 is arranged so that the LED 1562 fits inside the radial direction (so that it is located outside the radial direction of the LED 1562).

The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 116 (B)) that projects toward the back side in front view along the outer circumference. A part of the light emitted from the LED 1562 toward the outside in the radial direction is absorbed by the inner lens 1583, and the unabsorbed light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583. Further, the inner lens 1583 is divided into five fan-shaped regions 15831,15833,15835,13837,13839 (see FIG. 115). Further, a plurality of notches are formed in each of these five regions 15831,15833,15835,13837,13839 in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. Further, since the boundaries of each of the five regions 15831,15833,15835,13837,13839 are inclined so that the height decreases from the peripheral edge toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 can be obtained. It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the center of the inner lens 1583 in the radial direction. When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the intensity of the light is stronger at the outer peripheral portion than at the center portion in the radial direction, but by collecting the incident light toward the center in the radial direction, the surface of the inner lens 1583 can be gathered. It is possible to make the surface emit light more uniformly.

The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmitting sheet on which a picture of a character or the like is drawn on the front surface. The character drawn on the decorative sheet 1584 cannot be visually recognized from the front by the half mirror 1585 in normal times (when the LED 1562 is not emitting light), but when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the LED 1562 emits light, the area inside the opening window 1552 is displayed. Appears to emerge. As described above, when the LED 1562 emits light, a character appears in the area inside the window frame 1552. Therefore, in this specification, the LED 1562 is also referred to as a character lamp.

The window rim body 1586 is gloss-plated and is configured to reflect light. Further, the opening window 1552 described above is formed on the window edge body 1586, and the outer peripheral portion is decorated so as to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-shaped member, and as described above, a black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface side. Further, the panel cover 1590 is formed with a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The light emitted from the LED 1562 emits light outward in the radial direction. A part of the light is incident on the flange 15832 of the inner lens 1583 (see FIG. 116), a part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and the other light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and has a diameter. It emits light toward the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted outward in the radial direction is reflected on the radial inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 116) of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge body 1586. The light reflected on the radial inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge 1586 changes the traveling direction of the light toward the radial inward direction and is incident on the inner lens 1583. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible, and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. Further, since the light is incident on the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583 including a part of the above light, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583 and the surface can be uniformly distributed. It is possible to make it emit light.

Hereinafter, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117 to 135.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 117 shows an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON (step S12). The power failure detection signal is turned on, for example, when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the power failure detection signal is ON, the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the power failure detection state, and repeats the process of S12 until the power failure detection signal is turned OFF. When the power failure detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the power failure detection state, and proceeds to the process of step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices having a built-in CPU (step S15).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing the clearing of the backup contents of the main RAM 103 provided in the main CPU 101 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / emission control circuit 300. .. When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection flag is set on. The power failure detection flag is a flag indicating that the power failure process has been executed in response to the occurrence of the power failure. When the power failure detection flag is set on, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S18. When the power failure detection flag is set off, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S23.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 checks the main RAM 103 for work area damage using, for example, a checksum.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs the initial setting of the work area that requires the initial value at the time of restoration of the power failure.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a notification about the high-probability gaming state (probability-changing gaming state) at the time of restoration of the power failure (step S21).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200 (step S22). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of initializing the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200 (step S25).

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows an example of the system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S31).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S32).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S34).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S35).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer, and the like. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the value of each saved register (step S37). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection process]
FIG. 119 shows an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S41). The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S42). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is acquired according to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 120 shows an example of a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472 (step S51). When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52. If the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S59.

In step S52, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the number of reserved pieces is less than 4, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S54. When the number of reserved pieces is 4, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S59.

In step S54, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the first start opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random value and a symbol random value, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 103 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table (first start port), the symbol determination table (first start port), and the jackpot type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. , Determines the symbol designation command, the hit selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state, and the table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces for winning the first start opening (step S58). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S57. Is sent.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S59). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second start opening switch 441, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

In step S60, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of holdings of the second start opening winning (the number of holdings of the second special symbol) is less than four (step S61). If the number of reserved pieces is less than 4, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S62. When the number of reserved pieces is 4, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

In step S62, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second starting opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random value and a symbol random value, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 103 (step S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). In the second special stop symbol determination process, as in the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table (second start port) and the symbol determination table (second) are based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. With reference to the start port) and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S65). This variation pattern determination process also refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state, and the table pattern, and determines the variation pattern related to the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces for winning the second start opening (step S66). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S65. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination process]
FIG. 121 shows an example of fluctuation pattern determination processing by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the table pattern, the hit determination random value, and the symbol random value, which will be described later, and selects the variation pattern type. (Step S71).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns from the selected fluctuation pattern types based on a predetermined lottery probability (step S72). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern determination process.

Since the variation pattern is stored in association with the variable display time of the identification symbol, the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process can substantially represent the variation time. It becomes.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 122 shows an example of the main control main process by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S81), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, depending on the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S83 and S84. A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit). The symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to the game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 123 shows an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S92 to S100 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S92 to S100 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S92 to S100. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 118) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the reserved number of variable display of the special symbol when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, and when the reserved number is not “0”. (When there is a reserved ball), the hit determination result obtained in the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variable display time management process described later is executed after the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 124.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variable display time management process (step S93). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process, and when the variable display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol described later is added to the control state flag. A value (“02”) indicating the symbol display time management process (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S94). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S93 has elapsed, the hit determination is made. Determine if the result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later in the control state flag. , Set the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and is large when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S96), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S96). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S97) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the residual ball in the large winning opening set in step S97 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S97 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the jackpot end interval process described later is executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S98). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S96) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S99). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, and the value indicating the special symbol game end process when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed after the process of step S99. When the hit-time selection symbol command described above is any one of "z5", "z6", "z7", "z10", and "z11", the main CPU 101 shifts the gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state. When the hit selection symbol command described is any one of "z0", "z1", "z2", "z3", "z4" and "z9", the gaming state is changed. Controls the non-probability change game state. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (when the random value for big hit determination is "small hit determination value data"), the main CPU 101 controls to maintain the gaming state.

Next, when the big hit game state or the small hit game state ends, or when the "miss" is won, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of pending numbers (start storage information) by “1”. do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S100, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various values are sequentially set in the control state flag to advance the special symbol game. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", and ". Set in the order of "02" and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and special symbol game end process (step S100). ) Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00" and "01". , "02", "03" in this order. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and jackpot start interval management process (step S95). ) Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S96), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S57), and large winning opening reopening waiting time management processing (step S98) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and a big hit game or a small hit game is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S96), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S97), big hit end interval processing (step S99), and special symbol game end processing (step S100). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 129 described later) in step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 122 also branches the process flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 124 shows an example of the special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00", the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the reserved number of the second start opening winnings is not "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S114. When it is determined that the reserved number of the second start opening winnings is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S119.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed or pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the second special symbol for four times reserved. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a hit determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the second start port 440. Is done.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit / small hit determination process (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 101 is set to the jackpot determination random value that is extracted at the time of winning the start opening and is set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the hit judgment table (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (hit determination) which of the "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" is won based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S118). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S120. When it is determined that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S122.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the data is stored. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during or pending variable display. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the first special symbol for four times reserved. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a hit determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the first start port 5442. Is done.

Next, the special symbol storage transfer process is performed based on the first start opening winning (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 125 shows an example of the special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variable display start waiting time) after the variable display confirmed set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S142. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S134.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "small hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "small hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "small hit", that is, when the special symbol game is "missing", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S136). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S138.

In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S140). As a result, a big hit start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 13), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (the upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (type of the symbol designation command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S143.

In step S143, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction number counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S138.

[Time reduction number subtraction process]
FIG. 126 shows an example of the time reduction number subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction that counts until the set time reduction (in the present embodiment, determined to be 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, or 100) becomes 0. It is a counter. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as a time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 127 shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step S168). If it is a probabilistic jackpot, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S169. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions (100 times as an example in this embodiment) in the time reduction counter (step S172).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 128 shows an example of the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the probability change flag is "1" (step S183). When the value of the probability change flag is "1", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S184. When the value of the probability change flag is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 129 shows an example of a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 129 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 129, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any process of steps S162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 118) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending normal symbols for variable display, and the number of reserved symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and the variable time determined in this process. Is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is executed after the determined normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed by the process of step S192.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 is hit when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is "hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag (step S195). "03") is set. That is, by this process, it is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the hit determination is determined to be "hit" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes while the normal electric accessory 460 is being opened when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of pending variable display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. To update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable variable display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 will execute the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 130. The main process of this sub control circuit is a process started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 130, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). The watchdog timer is set to a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) at the time of starting, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power failure process is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the operation means input process (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process includes scenario presetting process, effect determination process (confidential A stage 2002), look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004), background change control process (high accuracy stage 2004), and number of possible background changes. Judgment processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), fluctuation scenario determination processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), chance-up control processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), pending change determination processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), character lamp effect control processing, full screen It is composed of subroutines such as effect control processing. These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 136 to 167.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes the drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes the voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes the lamp control process (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or blinking the lamp 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes the accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 131 shows an example of command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 after receiving from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data has no errors or omissions.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of effect (whether or not there is a dialogue notice, whether or not there is a SU notice, etc.) is selected as the effect pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process that is separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission process]
FIG. 132 shows an example of command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the direct table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the corresponding direct table in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 135.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 133 shows an example of message setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence / absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direct table registration process]
FIG. 134 shows an example of the direct table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

[Message sending process]
FIG. 135 shows an example of message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is performed (step S281).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary direct table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Production mode determination process by sub CPU 201]
Next, the details of the effect mode determination process (step S205) of the sub CPU 201 will be described. The effect mode is formed with features for each of the plurality of effect stages.

[Direction stage]
First, with reference to FIG. 136, state transitions of a plurality of production stages will be described. FIG. 136 is a block diagram showing an example of state transitions of a plurality of gaming state stages.

In the normal stage 2000, the winning probability of the hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "big hit determination") performed as the processing of the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins in the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 is relatively high. It is a low-probability state with no electric support (that is, a normal gaming state). If the effect state is the normal stage 2000, the player can grasp that the game state is the normal game state (low probability state).

The high-probability stage 2004 is a high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the jackpot determination is relatively high, and is a state with electric support. If the production state is the high-probability stage 2004, the player can grasp that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state.

Both the secret A stage 2002 and the secret B stage 2006 are in a high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the big hit judgment is relatively high, and there is an electric support, or the winning probability of the big hit judgment is relatively low. It is a low-probability state and a state with electric support. In the secret A stage 2002 and the secret B stage 2006, the player cannot grasp or grasp whether the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state even by looking at the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 16. Have difficulty. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the secret A stage 2002, whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state is disclosed according to the final result of the battle effect described later. .. Further, since the subtraction effect of the character described later during the battle effect is an intermediate effect toward the final result of the battle effect, it depends on whether it is the subtraction effect of the ally character or the subtraction effect of the enemy character. It can make the player happy and sad.

In the normal stage 2000 (low probability game state, no time reduction), if an 8R big hit (a big hit in which the big winning opening 540 opens and closes for 8 rounds) is drawn, after the big hit game ends, the game state stage is the secret A stage 2002 (high). There is a specified number of electric support in the probability game state, or there is a specified number of electric support in the low probability game state). In addition, "with electric support" is a state in which the time-saving game is executed, and "without electric support" is a state in which the time-saving game is not executed.

In the secret A stage 2002, when the result of the big hit determination is a 5R big hit, or when the predetermined number of time-saving games are digested in the high-probability game state, the production stage shifts to the high-probability stage 2004. On the other hand, in the secret A stage 2002, when the predetermined number of time-saving games are digested in the low-probability game state, the transition to the normal stage 2000 occurs. In the normal stage 2000, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot or a 15R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the high accuracy stage 2004.

In the high-accuracy stage 2004, if the result of the jackpot determination is 8R jackpot, the production stage shifts to the secret A stage 2002. In the secret A stage 2002, if the result of the big hit determination is a 5R big hit, the production stage shifts to the secret B stage 2006. In the secret B stage 2006, if the result of the big hit determination is 8R big hit, the production stage shifts to the secret A stage 2002. In the secret B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 15R jackpot, the production stage shifts to the high accuracy stage 2004. In the high-accuracy stage 2004, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, the production stage shifts to the secret B stage 2006. In the secret B stage 2006, when the specified number of time reductions are exhausted, the production stage shifts to the normal stage 2000.

The number of jackpot rounds mentioned above is an example. In the above-mentioned explanation, when the result of the big hit determination is 8R big hit, the transition to the game state of the secret A stage 2002 is made, but it is not limited to this, and when it is 5R big hit or 15R big hit. , The effect of transitioning to the secret A stage 2002 may be performed, the sub CPU 201 may perform a promotion effect during the jackpot game, and may transition to the high accuracy stage 2004 after the jackpot is completed.

The secret A stage 2002 may have a higher expectation of a high-probability gaming state than the secret B stage 2006, for example. In each of these secret stages, a unique production form is realized. For example, in the secret A stage 2002, a battle production in which a plurality of characters are divided into enemies and allies to win a battle is executed.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the concealed A stage 2002. In FIG. 137, the ally character CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the enemy character CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen. In addition, the type of ally character currently fighting and the number of ally characters (remaining number of people) are displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and the type of enemy character currently fighting and the number of enemy characters are displayed in the upper part on the right side of the screen. (Remaining number of people) is displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 137, other information such as variable display information of the identification symbol and reserved start storage number information may be appropriately displayed.

The above battle effect is an indicator of whether there is a high probability of being in a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state in the secret A stage 2002, and if certain requirements are met. Whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state is determined. For example, when the enemy group is annihilated, the high-probability gaming state is confirmed, and when the ally group is annihilated, the low-probability gaming state is determined. Therefore, the effect of the process until one of the enemy and ally groups is completely destroyed is an index effect indicating which of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is more likely. For example, if a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of enemy groups is reduced, the player can be given the expectation that the player is likely to be in a high-probability gaming state, and a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of ally groups is reduced. It can give the player the impression that it is unlikely to be in a high-probability state (highly likely to be in a low-probability gaming state). In the secret A stage 2002, a rough scenario of such a battle production is determined in advance before the secret A stage 2002 starts, and in the secret A stage 2002, the predetermined scenario is changed, corrected, etc. The production will proceed. Hereinafter, the scenario effect selection process (confidential A stage 2002) will be described.

Further, for example, in the secret B stage 2006, a battle effect is executed in which the main character and the enemy character among the ally characters fight one-on-one. When the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, the effect that the main character wins in the battle effect is executed. In the battle production in the secret B stage 2006, for example, a) a production zone where the enemy character can always be defeated if the main character attacks, and b) either the main character or the enemy character makes the first strike. There is a production zone where you do not know, c) a production zone where the enemy character makes a first strike. Further, in the secret B stage 2006, it is notified whether or not the game is in a high-probability gaming state by the operation of the movable decorative body 1040 of the upper front accessory 1000. For example, in the final variable display (the last variable display in the time-saving gaming state (special symbol game) or the final variable display in which it is concealed whether or not the game is in the high-probability gaming state (special symbol game)), the upper front role. If the movable decorative body 1040 of the object 1000 falls (moves) toward the operation limit position, it is in a high-probability gaming state, and if the movable decorative body 1040 does not fall, it is in a low-probability gaming state. However, in the final variable display, a fall precursor effect may be performed in which the movable decorative body 1040 is expected to fall. Further, when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, in addition to the fall of the movable decorative body 1040, all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated. By operating to the limit position (see, for example, FIG. 102), it is notified that the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot.

Further, in the secret B stage 2006, the variable display (special symbol game) is changed at any time between the zones of a) to c) described above according to the number of executions of the variable display (special symbol game). For example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the special symbol game is executed 1 to 10 times in the production zone of a) above, and stays in the production zone of b) 11 to 90 times. However, during the 91st to 99th times, the player stays in the production zone of c) above, and in the 100th special symbol game, a production indicating that it is the final game in the secret B stage 2006 is performed. Needless to say, the production on the secret B stage 2006 is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the index effect can indicate which of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is more likely in the secret A stage 2002, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be used for other productions that show the degree of high degree. For example, the above index effect can be adopted for the following effects, but it goes without saying that the following effects are merely examples and can be adopted for other effects.
-Although it is disclosed that it is a high-probability gaming state, when the duration of the high-probability gaming state is concealed, an effect indicating the length of the duration (expectation that the duration is long). Directing to show the degree).
-Although it is disclosed that it is a time-saving game state, when the duration of the time-saving game state is concealed, a production showing the length of the duration (expectation that the duration is long) Direction to show).
-An effect that indicates the degree of expectation that an effect section is set for one or more start memories and that the start memory included in the effect section includes a reach variation effect or a big hit.

The degree of expectation (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a big hit or a high-probability gaming state of each advance notice effect is the "big hit" or "high-probability gaming state" when each advance notice effect is executed. The probability of becoming "big hit" or "high probability gaming state" when each advance notice effect is executed, and the probability of becoming "missing" or "low probability gaming state" when each advance notice effect is executed are predetermined. It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of becoming an internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) of. However, since the "expectation degree" can include the case where the degree of expectation is 100% and the case where the degree of expectation is 0%, there are cases where the above division does not hold strictly (for example, the production is executed). It is not suitable to divide 1 by 0 because it may include the case of deterministically notifying the game state or winning, and in this case, the expectation includes 100%, 0%, or the concept of presence or absence. Will be).

[Scenario production selection process (confidential A stage)]
The sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the defeated character in the battle of the enemy and the ally from the number of participating characters, and erases the defeated character from the screen. The production form related to the secret A stage 2002 will be described more specifically.

The processing for the production form is a step of predetermining the scenario production before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game), and a variable pattern when the secret A stage 2002 starts. It consists of steps to change, correct, etc. the scenario according to the effect selected based on. The "scenario" is a development at which point in the progress of the game (time reduction number of times) in the secret A stage 2002 the character is subtracted. Since the "scenario" includes the correspondence between the number of time reductions and the character subtraction, it may be paraphrased as a "directing map". When the secret A stage 2002 starts, the sub CPU 201 advances the character subtraction process by executing the determined scenario.

The sub CPU 201 determines the team composition and the scenario in advance due to the nature that the production of the secret A stage 2002 is a team battle. The sub CPU 201 sets the scenario according to the combination of the attributes of the opposing team, the expectation of the high-probability game, and the number of time reductions. FIG. 138 is an example of a flowchart showing the scenario presetting process. The sub CPU 201 repeatedly executes this flowchart as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205) at a predetermined timing. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the jackpot determination process is the 8R jackpot, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario presetting process of FIG. 138. According to FIG. 136, it can be seen that the transition from the stage other than the secret A stage 2002 to the secret A stage 2002 is triggered by the result of the big hit determination process being an 8R big hit.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario presetting process of FIG. 138 when the result of the big hit determination process is 8R big hit, but the result of the big hit determination process is not limited to this. When it is a big hit other than 8R, the scenario preset processing of FIG. 138 may be executed.

The sub CPU 201 draws a parameter suggesting the degree of expectation of a high-probability game in the secret A stage 2002 (step S300). This parameter includes, for example, four stages A to D, and it is assumed that A has the lowest probability change expectation. B has a medium probability change expectation, and C has a high probability change expectation. D corresponds to the confirmation of a high-probability game. The sub CPU 201 records the determined parameter in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM (not shown in FIG. 9).

Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for each of the enemies and allies in the order in which the characters appear in the secret A stage 2002, that is, in the order in which they participate in the battle (step S302). The appearance order of the character ROMs selected by lottery is also recorded in the work RAM 203. When the information in the order of appearance is lost from the work RAM due to the power failure, the sub CPU 201 sets a one-to-one battle effect between specific characters. At this time, as the "specific character" that confronts one-on-one, the character that confronts one-on-one finally may be set when the normal effect is executed without the occurrence of power interruption. For example, the mode of the battle production selected by lottery is a battle production between the ally group of "hero character + α" and the enemy group of "hero rival character + β", and finally the hero character and the hero. When the information is lost due to a power failure when the rival character of the hero confronts one-on-one, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the rendition of the confrontation between α and β, and the hero character and the hero's rival. It can be controlled so that the confrontation with the character is set.

Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a combination (2 × 2, 6 × 5, etc.) of the number of ally characters and enemy characters (step S304). Further, the sub CPU 201 selects the above-mentioned effect map 2102 by lottery based on the attributes of the ally team and the enemy team. The attributes of the team may be determined by the probability variation parameter and the combination, or may be determined by the probability variation parameter, the combination, and the number of time reductions. The sub CPU 201 refers to the conversion table based on the attributes, determines the pattern value, and determines the effect map 2102 based on the pattern value.

FIG. 139 shows an example of the correspondence between the battle attribute 2100 and the effect map 2102. The sub CPU 201 determines a pattern value (the pattern value is 4 in the example of FIG. 139) based on the battle attribute 2100, and assigns the effect map 2102 to the battle attribute 2100 using the pattern value as a key. A plurality of pattern values may be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. The sub CPU 201 refers to the table and determines the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100. The sub CPU 201 increases the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by including the number of time reductions in addition to the expectation parameter and the combination in determining the pattern value, and thus can be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. The 2102 can be diversified.

As shown in FIG. 139, the effect map 2102 is composed of a set of a plurality of small maps 2110, and the small map 2110 has a predetermined number (for example, 6) of time reductions as one unit in the secret A stage 2002, and has a range thereof. From information on the number of enemy and ally characters that are subtracted in the variable display (for example, the number of characters in the range of 1 to 3 for each enemy and ally) and which variable display number of the variable display number is subtracted. It is composed. "Friend-1" indicates that the ally character is subtracted by "1". "Friend-0" indicates that the ally character is not subtracted. "Enemy-1" indicates that the enemy character is subtracted by "1". "Enemy-0" indicates that the enemy character is not subtracted. The number of small maps 2110 combined with the effect map 2102 varies depending on the specified number of times (time reduction number of times).

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of the effect map 2102 used for the scenario lottery. In the present embodiment, the effect map 2102 is composed of a plurality of parts, for example, two combinations of the first half map and the second half map, and the sub CPU 201 has the same pattern value, for example, by using the pattern value as a key. The first half map and the second half map are selected respectively (step S306, step S308), and these are combined to form the entire effect map 2102. As a result, the sub CPU 201 can form a scenario in which the number of characters according to the combination of the number of players is uniformly subtracted over the entire time-saving gaming state. In this specification, an effect in which the number of characters is subtracted is referred to as a "subtraction effect".

When the sub CPU 201 completes (or selects) the overall effect map, at least one of the small maps 2110 included in the overall effect map is subtracted from the small map 2110. It is determined based on the lottery table whether to perform the subtraction process (subtraction effect) of the ally character or the enemy character (step S310). The sub CPU 201 combines the time reduction number of times for performing this subtraction process and character information with the effect map 2102, and records the effect map 2102 in the work RAM. The sub CPU 201 may switch the lottery table for the small map 2110 according to the contents of the overall effect map. The map is recorded in the work RAM.

The mode in which the probability variation parameter, the number of time reductions, and the number of people combination are combined is as shown in FIG. 140, for example. The range of this aspect is defined as a table for each category in which the degree of expectation for high-probability games in the concealed A stage is low, medium, high, and confirmed. FIG. 140 shows an example in which the first half map and the second half map are applied to this aspect.

When the table does not have a pattern in which the probability variation parameter (step S300) and the combination of the number of people (step S302) are combined in the sub CPU 201, for example, the probability variation parameter is "D" and the combination of the number of people is defined in the definite category. In cases other than the above-mentioned mode (2 × 2, etc.), any one of A to C, which is a probability variation parameter other than D, may be re-lottered and determined. The sub CPU 201 may give priority to the probability variation parameter and change the number combination by re-lottery.

The sub CPU 201 has a specific character A appearing at the end of the ally team and a specific character B appearing at the end of the enemy team. It is possible not to include the subtraction processing information of. For example, if the combination of the number of people is 6x4 (6 allies, 4 enemies), the number can be reduced to 5 allies and 3 enemies. The sub CPU 201 causes characters to appear at the start of the secret A stage 2002 according to the combination of the number of people, but the combination of the number of people and the number of displayed characters may not match. For example, if the enemy team has a number of people including a specific character, the number of ally characters displayed at the time of entering the secret A stage 2002 is one less, assuming that the specific character appears in the final variable display without participating in the battle. However, the specific character can be prevented from being included in the effect map 2102 as the target of the subtraction process.

When the sub CPU 201 finishes the process of selecting the small map 2110 (step S310), the sub CPU 201 determines the BGM in the game of the secret A stage 2002 (step S312). Depending on which BGM is selected, the degree of expectation for the high-probability gaming state in the secret A stage 2002 is suggested. As a result, the scenario preset processing by the sub CPU 201 is completed.

Next, the process for determining the effect in the secret A stage 2002 will be described. In the secret A stage 2002, the subtraction of the enemy and ally characters determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game) according to the mode of the production determined for each time reduction of the time reduction game. By adjusting and reinforcing the processing scenario, the scenario can be developed in various ways according to the game result in the secret A stage 2002. In the initially determined scenario, the character subtraction process is performed evenly over the entire time reduction period, and the sub CPU 201 is universally executed in the process of determining the production mode in the secret A stage 2002. By adjusting the scenario within the range that does not spoil the story of the subtraction process of the character that is executed without any problems, the player can enjoy the versatility of the scenario development while maintaining the outline of the story decided before the start of the secret A stage 2002. Can be made aware of.

Further, in the concealed A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 straddles the display of the reserved information (starting memory information) and the digestion of the plurality of reserved starting storages while preventing the time saving number information from being displayed on the liquid crystal display device. By executing the scenario, the player can pay attention to how a series of scenarios are continuously developed during the period of the secret A stage 2002 without being aware of the pending information and the number of time reductions. can.

In addition, in this specification, a reserved start memory may be simply referred to as a hold. Further, the variable display of the identification symbol for the reserved start memory is referred to as reserved digestion. Further, a maximum of four start memories based on the winning of the first starting port 5442 and the starting memory based on the winning of the second starting port 440 can be held, and each of these four holdings can be held first. It is called hold, second hold, third hold and fourth hold, and hold digestion is performed in this order.

In the secret A stage 2002, in order to develop the scenario production in various ways according to the mode of the production determined for each time reduction, the provisional fluctuation determined for each start memory within the range of the scenario production target (provisional variation ( (Variable display corresponding to one start memory) is converted into one or more blocks, and the effect can be set for each block. It should be noted that this fluctuation is hereinafter referred to as "provisional fluctuation" for convenience in the sense that it is different from the variable display of hold.

FIG. 141 is an example showing the setting of the provisional fluctuation for each hold of the first hold to the fourth hold together with the time sequence, and assuming that four holds are recorded, the sub CPU 201 has a variable display at the time of hold digestion. Set the number of provisional fluctuations according to the time. For example, if the variable display time is 3.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations is 1, if the variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations is 2, and if the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations is 1. : Set to 3. In the present embodiment, the selection ratio between the variable display time of 3.5 seconds, the variable display time of 7.5 seconds, and the variable display time of 11.5 seconds is 1: 1: 1. However, this selection ratio is appropriately changed. You may.

According to FIG. 141, when the variable display time of the first hold is 3.5 seconds, the provisional fluctuation is set to 4.0 seconds, which is the sum of 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0.5 seconds). When the variable display time of the second hold is 7.5 seconds, the first provisional fluctuation is 4.0 seconds, the second provisional fluctuation is 3.5 seconds, and the interval period (0.5 seconds) is totaled. When the variable display time of the third hold is set to 4.0 seconds and the variable display time of the third hold is 11.5 seconds, the provisional fluctuations of the first and second are 4.0 seconds, and the provisional fluctuation of the third is 3.5 seconds. And the interval period (0.5 seconds) are set to 4.0 seconds, and when the variable display time of the 4th hold is 3.5 seconds, the tentative fluctuation is 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0. It is set to 4.0 seconds, which is the sum of 5 seconds). The reason why the interval period is included in the provisional fluctuation is that this period is used for the processing of the production. FIG. 141 shows that the tentative variation number is determined according to the variable display time (variation pattern), but this is an example, and the sub CPU 201 selects an arbitrary tentative variation number for the variation pattern. You can also do it. Further, the sub CPU 201 can set the fluctuation time of one temporary fluctuation to a predetermined value, and can also prevent the fluctuation time of the provisional fluctuation from including the interval period, but in the hold unit (starting storage unit). From the viewpoint of making the player aware that it is not the production of the above, it is preferable to include the interval time in the fluctuation time of the provisional fluctuation.

Next, the process of determining the effect in the secret A stage 2002 will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is an example of a flowchart showing an effect determination process (confidential A stage 2002) that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). The sub CPU 201 refers to the effect stage flag and checks whether or not it is the secret A stage 2002 (step S320). Here, if it is not the secret A stage 2002, the effect determination process is terminated, and if it is the secret A stage 2002, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 440 (step S322). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S322 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 440, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect determination process, and determines that the game ball has entered the second starting port 440. The number of temporary fluctuations is determined, selected, or set based on the fluctuation pattern as the analysis result of the command of the main control board (step S324). The tentative variation number is uniquely determined by the variation pattern (see, for example, FIG. 143), but is not limited to this, and may be determined to be any tentative variation number as described above. Note that FIG. 143 is an example of a variation pattern table. In this example, this variation pattern table is stored in the program ROM 202 mounted on the sub control circuit 200, and the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table according to the variable display time in which a command is transmitted from the main CPU 101. The variation pattern is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table is stored in the main ROM mounted on the main control circuit 100, and the main CPU determines the variation pattern table and the sub control circuit 200. You may send a command to.

When the temporary variation number is selected, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a scenario effect being executed (step S326). The sub CPU 201 performs a scenario lottery within the range of the number of reservations. The scenario lottery means that the character subtraction process is determined by lottery at which position in the holding number range the holding fluctuation is performed. For example, assuming that there are four reserved start memories, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for which hold of the first hold to the fourth hold to perform the character subtraction process. However, in the scenario lottery, in addition to the lottery at which position in the pending number range the character subtraction process is performed, a battle effect between the enemy character and the ally character is performed although the character subtraction process is not performed (battle effect that becomes a draw). It may include a lottery as to which position to perform.

At the time of this lottery, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 and checks whether or not the character subtraction is recorded in the small map 2110 covering the number of time reductions from the first hold to the fourth hold, and the character subtraction is performed. If it is determined that the character subtraction is recorded, the character subtraction process is performed within the range of the reserved number, and if it is determined that the character subtraction is not recorded, the character subtraction process is not performed. The sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326 until the variable display of the first hold to the fourth hold, which is the target of the scenario lottery, is completed. When the variable display of the first hold to the fourth hold, which is the target of the scenario effect, is completed, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is no scenario effect during scenario execution, and then the first hold to the fourth hold. It is determined whether or not the start storage is reserved in any of the above (step S328).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S328 that the start storage is held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the sub CPU 201 performs a scenario lottery for the held start memory, but is based on the fluctuation pattern. As one means for adjusting the character subtraction processing position according to the determined effect pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory. (Step S330). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S330 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines up to the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded as the scenario lottery target (step S332). For example, even if the start memory is held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold, if the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is held in the third hold, the sub CPU 201 is set to the first hold. The start memory of the hold to the third hold is determined as the scenario lottery target (step S332), and the start memory held in the fourth hold is not the scenario lottery target. Further, for example, when a plurality of start memories in which the reach variation effect is recorded are held, for example, the second hold and the fourth hold, the hold is released first (variable display is performed first). The start memory up to the hold (start memory of the first hold and the start memory of the second hold) is determined as the scenario lottery target (step S332), and the start memory held in the third hold and the fourth hold is not subject to the scenario lottery. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S330 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines all of the reserved start memories as the scenario lottery target (step S334). In step S330, when it is determined that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory, control such as preventing the subtraction effect of the character and the reach variation effect from overlapping is performed. Since it is unnecessary, the control load is smaller than that in the case where it is determined in step S330 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory. ,

The sub CPU 201 performs the processing after step S328 as the scenario lottery in the start memory (to enter the second start port 440) which is held in the first hold to the fourth hold when the scenario effect being executed is completed. It is performed for the originally reserved start memory). That is, although the next scenario lottery is not performed when there is a running scenario effect, when the running scenario effect is completed, one or more starts that are held in the first hold to the fourth hold at that time. Since the scenario lottery is performed for the memory, in the secret A stage 2002, as long as the start memory is held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the scenario production will be repeatedly executed without interruption. .. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware of the production in the starting memory unit and to make the player interested in the scenario production, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a relatively long period of time. Become.

In this example, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the next scenario lottery when there is a scenario effect being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if there is an executing scenario effect, the first scenario is produced. As long as at least one start memory is held between the hold and the fourth hold, a scenario lottery may be performed.

The reason why the sub CPU 201 targets the start memory up to the hold including the reach variation effect as the target of the scenario lottery and does not target the start memory of the hold after the reach variation effect by the lottery is that the character is not included in the reach variation effect. This is because even if the subtraction process is performed, the player's interest in the result of the battle between the characters is reduced. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can adjust the subtraction processing position of the character based on the effect of the secret A stage 2002.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S322 whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 440, and if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 440, the processing after step S324 is performed. However, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 5442 instead of the second starting port 440, the ball has been suspended based on the entry into the first starting port 5442. A scenario lottery is performed with only one start memory. In this case, a plurality of provisional fluctuations may or may not be set for one start memory reserved based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 5442. Then, if it is determined in the scenario preset processing that the subtraction effect is performed in the variable display of the start memory reserved based on the entry into the first start port 5442, the first start port 5442 is reached. The subtraction effect may be performed in the variable display of the start memory reserved based on the entry of the ball. However, the variable display (or provisional variation set for the one start memory) of one start memory reserved based on the entry into the first start port 5442 and the next of the one start memory. The subtraction effect is not performed over the provisional fluctuation set for the start memory reserved based on the entry into the second start port 440 to be digested. Further, when the start memory is suspended based on the entry into the first start port 5442, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery only when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, and when it is not a big hit, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery. It may be controlled so that the identification symbol is only variably displayed at the screen edge of the first special symbol display unit 73 or the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, without selecting the effect.

The sub CPU 201 processes the hold of the scenario lottery range as the effect adjustment target, such as determining the character subtraction processing position for each hold range that is the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 may check the degree of expectation of the effect in the final hold of the scenario lottery range, for example, the heat of the effect (step S336), and reflect the result in the hold effect belonging to the scenario being executed. good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 determines the heat of the effect for the final hold of the range of the scenario lottery, the look-ahead effect or the continuous advance notice effect according to the heat of the effect may be applied to the hold effect of the scenario lottery target.

After the above processing, the sub CPU 201 performs a process for allocating an effect such as a character subtraction process effect to the provisional variation for the hold effect of the scenario lottery target. Therefore, in order to determine the number of provisional fluctuations required for the character subtraction process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 and holds the scenario in the start storage (for example, the first hold to the fourth hold) of the lottery target. With respect to the start memory), it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the subtraction process is executed (step S338).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S338 that there is a start memory in which the subtraction process is executed within the range of the scenario lottery target, the sub CPU 201 divides the characters into enemy and ally and counts the characters to be subtracted (step S340). Next, when the number of subtraction processes combined with the enemy and the ally is 2 or more (step S342: Y), the sub CPU 201 records the order of the subtraction processes of 2 or more characters (step S344). The order between the characters of the enemy and the ally may be determined in the effect map 2102, or may be determined by lottery.

Next, as a result of the determination of the scenario lottery target (step S332, step S334), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a hold that is the scenario lottery target in which the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect overlap. The determination is made with reference to the effect map 2102 (step S346). Based on this result, the sub CPU 201 can perform effect adjustment processing such as determining the number of temporary fluctuations that can be used for the reach precursor fluctuation, or adjusting the position of the temporary fluctuation in which the subtraction processing is performed.

145 and 146 are diagrams showing an example of start storage held in the first hold to the fourth hold. In FIG. 145, the start storage is held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold, neither the subtraction process nor the reach variation effect is executed in the first hold and the fourth hold, and the subtraction of the enemy character in the second hold. It indicates that the process (process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) is performed, and that the reach variation effect is performed in the third hold. In FIG. 146, the start memory is held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold, and neither the subtraction process nor the reach effect is executed in the first hold, the second hold, and the fourth hold, and the enemy side in the third hold. It shows that the character subtraction process (the process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) and the reach variation effect are performed in duplicate. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that there is a overlap between the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect, the sub CPU 201 sets the overlap flag of the work RAM area (step S348).

When the sub CPU 201 confirms the set of duplicate flags, if the character to be subtracted is an enemy character, the sub CPU 201 allows the duplicate execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process, and for example, reaches the effect of the subtraction process. Perform in a variable production. On the other hand, although the sub CPU 201 has confirmed the set of duplicate flags, if the character to be subtracted is a ally character, it is expected that the ally character will be defeated in the reach variation effect. Since the degree is unnecessarily reduced, the overlap execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process is unacceptable, and the effect of the subtraction process is not executed in the reach variation effect. At this time, it does not prevent the subtraction processing effect of the ally character from being executed by the provisional variation immediately before the reach variation effect, but the defeated ally character is revived and the compensation effect such as adding an attack is reached. It may be done by variable production. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may allocate the subtraction process of the ally character to the provisional variation that is separated from the reach variation effect by a predetermined number within the holding range of the target of the scenario lottery. When the character to be subtracted is a ally character, instead of not allowing the duplicate execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process, the duplicate execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process is allowed, but the reach is allowed. If the variation effect and the subtraction process overlap, the subtraction process may be reassigned to another provisional variation.

The sub CPU 201 includes a hold in which the reach change effect and the subtraction process overlap (for example, the third hold in FIG. 146) in order to allocate the reach precursor effect to the provisional variation, and the hold (for example, the third hold in FIG. For example, the reach precursor effect can be assigned to the provisional fluctuation of FIG. 146 (first hold and second hold) (step S350). This is because the effect of the subtraction process of the enemy character is executed by the reach variation effect. That is, the sub CPU 201 can use [(total number of pending temporary fluctuations subject to scenario lottery)-(number of subtraction processing-1)] as the number of provisional fluctuations that can be applied to the reach precursor effect. When the subtraction process is performed by the ally character, the sub CPU 201 executes step S352, which will be described later, without executing step S350.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect do not overlap, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S352 without setting the overlap flag. The sub CPU 201 is a temporary variation number obtained by subtracting the temporary variation number to which the effect of the subtraction process of the character (not limited to the enemy and the ally) is assigned from the total temporary variation number determined for the hold subject to the scenario lottery. (Residual provisional fluctuation) can be used for reach precursor production. Here, the sub CPU 201 determines that the reach precursor effect is performed only when it is determined that the residual tentative variation number is 0 or more, and that the reach precursor effect is not performed when the residual tentative variation number is 0. The control process can be made smooth, and the effect of expecting a reach fluctuation effect can be expected by this reach precursor effect. When the number of residual provisional fluctuations is 1, it may be determined not to perform the reach precursor, or it may be determined whether or not the reach precursor can be executed up to once.

The start memory held within the range of the scenario lottery target does not include the start memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded, and the start memory next to the start memory that is digested last among the scenario lottery targets is In the case of the reach variation effect, the next start memory is not the target of the scenario lottery, but the sub CPU 201 is the reach precursor effect to the provisional variation set for the start memory to be digested last among the scenario lottery targets. May be assigned to perform the reach variation effect in the variable display of the start memory stored in the next hold.

The sub CPU 201 determines the number of executions of the reach precursor effect, and the number of executions of the determined reach precursor effect is provisionally subtracted from the total number of provisional fluctuations determined for the hold subject to the scenario lottery. The variation may be used to produce the subtraction process of the character.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the sub CPU 201 selects the effect of the reach precursor depending on whether or not the duplicate flag is set. Specifically, in step S354, the sub CPU 201 checks whether or not there is a duplicate flag set, and if it determines that there is a duplicate flag set, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach precursor effect as a specific effect (step S356), and the enemy character. Gives the player a sense of expectation that he will be defeated in the reach fluctuation production. Here, the specific production is a production with a high expectation that can be given to the player. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that there is no duplicate flag set, the reach precursor effect is determined to be an effect in which the expectation that can be given to the player is smaller than the specific effect (step S358). The sub CPU 201 may select the reach precursor effect from a plurality of effects set in the table. When the sub CPU 201 performs the reach precursor effect a plurality of times within the range of the scenario effect target, the sub CPU 201 changes the table so that the same effect does not continue. However, the specific effect may be continuous.

Next, the sub CPU 201 selects the temporary fluctuation number to be used for the reach precursor from the counted temporary fluctuation numbers in step S350 or step S352 (step S360). For example, since the required tentative variation number differs depending on the reach precursor effect content of the sub CPU 201, the tentative variation number may be selected by changing the table. The sub CPU 201 selects the tentative variation used for the reach precursor effect from the tentative variation of the hold of the scenario lottery target, which has a slow digestion order. As a result, the reach precursor effect can be arranged at a position close to the reach variation effect. When "0 fluctuation" is selected, the sub CPU 201 does not assign the reach precursor effect to the provisional variation and does not perform the reach precursor effect. This concept of "0 fluctuation" includes both a 0 provisional fluctuation and a case where the start storage is not held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold. That is, the sub CPU 201 assigns the reach precursor effect to the provisional fluctuation in both the case where 0 temporary fluctuation is selected and the start storage is not reserved in any of the first hold to the fourth hold. No, it will not produce a reach precursor. In addition, if there is no reach fluctuation effect in the start memory of the scenario lottery target, the reach precursor effect becomes the reach precursor effect of Gase. When the start memory is not held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the reach precursor effect of Gase is not performed.

By the way, as described above, if the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is not reserved in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the sub CPU 201 sets all of the held start memories in the scenario lottery. I try to decide on the target. However, since the secret A stage 2002 is in a time-saving game state, the start memory is often held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold when the target of the scenario lottery is decided. Therefore, if the player understands that the scenario production of this time is intended for four start memories, it is possible that the reach fluctuation production is not included in the range of the scenario production target of this time at that time. It may be difficult for the player to detect the high price and maintain the expectation. Therefore, when deciding the target of the scenario lottery, when there is no start memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the number of start memories to be the target of the scenario lottery is different each time. For example, by randomly determining by lottery, it becomes difficult to detect that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario effect this time. In particular, there is a possibility that it will be extremely unpleasant if the reach precursor effect of Gase is performed even though the player has detected that there is a high possibility that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of this scenario effect. .. However, by making it difficult to detect that the target range of the scenario production this time does not include the reach fluctuation production, the reach precursor production of Gase will keep the player's expectation and perform effective production. be able to.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the temporary variation number used for the reach precursor effect is larger than 0 (step S362), and determines that the temporary variation number started for the reach precursor effect is larger than 0, the reach precursor effect. The number of temporary fluctuations used for is blocked, and a block pattern to which the reach precursor effect is assigned is selected (step S364). Next, the sub CPU 201 allocates the reach precursor effect to the block to which the reach precursor effect can be assigned among the selected block patterns (step S366). For example, if the number of provisional fluctuations that can be used for the reach precursor is 3, and 2 provisional fluctuations are required for the reach precursor effect, the sub CPU 201 blocks the three provisional fluctuations and (1) 1 block + 1 block. A pattern of +1 block and a pattern of (2) 1 block + 2 blocks are formed. The sub CPU 201 can select the pattern (2) and assign the reach precursor effect to the two blocks. In this way, an aspect of blocking the three provisional fluctuations is shown in FIG. 148.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S368 that the effect of the subtraction process is to be performed, it is determined, for example, by random lottery which block of the provisional variation the subtraction process effect is to be performed (step). S370). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines the provisional variation to which the effect of the subtraction process is assigned by lottery or the like from the provisional variation of the hold of the scenario lottery target to which the reach precursor effect is not assigned (step S372). When there is an order of subtraction processing of a plurality of characters (step S342), the provisional variation of the subtraction processing effect is determined so as to follow this order. The following is an explanation using an example.

For example, by determining the scenario lottery target (step S332, step S334), the start memory in which the subtraction process of the ally character is recorded and the start memory in which the subtraction process of the enemy character is recorded within the range of the scenario lottery target. Is held in this order. Then, in step S370, it is assumed that the sub CPU 201 determines the subtraction process of the enemy character to be a medium attack effect for a relatively long time, and the subtraction process of the ally character is determined to be a weak attack effect for a relatively short time. At this time, the sub CPU 201 allocates the medium attack effect to two temporary variations, the weak attack effect to one temporary variation, and these provisional variations are digested before the latter temporary variation. The position of the fluctuation can be determined. As described above, the sub CPU 201 allocates the subtraction effect to, for example, one or a plurality of provisional fluctuations according to the effect content of the subtraction process.

Here, an example of allocating the effect of one subtraction process to the provisional variation will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is an example of a sequence of provisional fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the third hold are subject to the scenario lottery. Since the fluctuation time is 3.5 seconds for the start storage stored in the first hold, the number of provisional fluctuations set is one (# 1). Since the variable display time is 11.5 seconds for the start memory stored in the second hold, the number of provisional fluctuations set is three (# 2 to # 4). As for the start memory stored in the third hold, since the variable display time is the time of "11.5 seconds + reach fluctuation effect", the number of provisional fluctuations set is three (# 5 to # 7). As for the start memory stored in the third hold, since the reach fluctuation effect is performed when the variable display is performed, the target of the scenario lottery is the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold. .. Further, in the example of FIG. 149, the number of subtraction processes in the effect map 2102 determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game) is held in the first hold. 1 time (weak attack effect), 0 in the start memory held in the 2nd hold, 2 times in the start memory held in the 3rd hold (medium attack effect, 1 time in the order of weak attack effect, total 2) An example of times) is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 150, since the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold is the target of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 has a weak attack effect, a medium attack effect, and a weak attack effect in this order. Redetermine the timing to execute the production. In the example shown in FIG. 150, the weak attack effect recorded in the start memory held in the first hold is assigned to the provisional fluctuation # 2, and the medium attack effect recorded in the start memory held in the second hold is assigned. Is assigned to the blocked # 4 provisional fluctuation and # 5 provisional fluctuation, and the weak attack effect recorded in the start memory held in the third hold is assigned to the # 6 provisional fluctuation. In this way, the subtraction effect of the character is applied to the temporary fluctuation set for one start memory and the start memory to be digested next to the one start memory, regardless of the reserved start memory unit. It may straddle the set temporary fluctuation. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game (lottery result). In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times of digestion in a short time. Moreover, in the secret A stage 2002, as an indicator of the degree of expectation of being in a high-probability gaming state, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the provisional fluctuation divided into predetermined units (blocked) is determined. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed toward the subtraction effect rather than the remaining number of times of shortening the time, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In the example shown in FIG. 150, all three subtraction effects recorded in the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold are executed by any of the provisional fluctuations (# 1 to # 7). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 201 may control the subtraction effect to be executed last so as to be executed in the reach variation.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect for the provisional variation to which the effect is not assigned (step S374). FIG. 151 is an example of a sequence of provisional fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the fourth hold (see, for example, FIG. 141) are subject to the scenario lottery. Subtraction processing effects are assigned to provisional fluctuations # 2 and # 4, reach precursor effects are assigned to provisional fluctuations # 7, and provisional fluctuations # 1, # 3, # 5, and # 6 to which effects are not assigned, for example. , It is possible to arrange a one-shot effect that gives a weaker impression to the player than the subtraction process effect or the reach precursor effect. Temporary fluctuations The contents of the effects arranged in # 1, # 3, # 5, and # 6, and the provisional changes to which the effects are assigned may be determined by lottery. The one-shot production is placed on the temporary fluctuation side of the younger number than the reach precursor production. By assigning the effect to all the provisional variations in the sequence, the execution position of the subtraction process is determined. The number of provisional fluctuations to be assigned changes depending on the content of the production. The sub CPU 201 generates the effect designation information including the information of the sequence to which the effect is assigned to all the temporary fluctuations.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reach variation effect exists in the hold of the scenario lottery target (step S376), and determines the reach effect when the reach variation effect exists in the hold of the scenario lottery target (step S378). Then, the production determination process is completed. The sub CPU 201 can select the reach effect by referring to the result of the subtraction process, for example. You can select a reach effect in which the characters remaining in the battle appear.

Further, the sub CPU 201 calculates the combination of the number of allies and the remaining number of allies of the allies with reference to the counter for the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, and the combination of the number of people and / or the number of times shortened (or the number of times of digestion) are exhausted. Based on the remaining number of time reductions), it is possible to set whether or not the reach effect is executed and the mode of the reach variation effect. For example, when the number of remaining players is less than 2 × 2 and the hold is other than the final rotation of the specified short-time rotation speed, even if the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a special mode of reach (SP reach) is executed. Instead of doing so, for example, in the battle production, the boss of the enemy group may be defeated to execute the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the combination of the remaining number of people is 1 × 1 and the hold is the final variable display of the specified time and short number, the sub CPU 201 may execute the effect of the dedicated SP reach.

Further, when the target range of the scenario effect includes the start memory in which the final variable display is performed in the secret A stage 2002 (for example, when the number of time reductions is 48 times, the 48th variable display in the time reduction game state). If the start memory in which is performed is included), if the reach fluctuation effect or the jackpot effect is not performed in the final variable display of the time-saving game state, the victory or defeat of the battle effect is settled in the final variable display. A subtraction effect may be performed. In this case, it is not the impression that the secret A stage 2002 has ended because the time-saving game state has reached the specified number of times (whether or not it is a high-probability game state has been disclosed), but the victory or defeat of the battle production has been settled, so the secret A It is possible to give the player the impression that the stage 2002 has ended.

The sub CPU 201 is a production map determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game) by the process of determining the holding range of the target of the scenario lottery (FIG. 142: S332, S334). The number of times that the subtraction process in 2102 is executed can be moved within a range of ± 3 according to the fluctuation pattern of the secret A stage 2002. For example, when it is determined in the calculation map that the subtraction process is to be executed when the time reduction rotation is 8, the subtraction process can move within the range of 5 to 11 time reduction times. More specifically, when the start memory having a time reduction number of 8 is held in the 4th hold, it can be moved within the range of the time reduction number 5 to 8, and the start memory having a time reduction number of 8 is held in the 1st hold. At times, it is possible to move within the range of 8 to 11 time reductions. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 fluidly changes the execution timing of the subtraction process according to the development of the game of the secret A stage 2002, thereby increasing the variation of the production and performing the subtraction process of the character accompanying the battle between the teams of the characters. It can be surely executed.

In the above-described embodiment, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, the sub CPU 201 does not draw a new scenario effect until the scenario effect created by the lottery is completed. Therefore, in order to diversify the scenario effect during execution, the sub CPU 201, for example, pre-reads the hold within the range of the scenario effect being executed, and sets this as the effect executed during the variable display of the hold digestion. May be applied. For example, if the reach variation effect is recorded in the start memory of the scenario effect target being executed, the sub CPU 201 performs a look-ahead lottery for the start memory up to the reach variation effect. If there is no reach variation effect, a suggestion effect suggesting the existence of a specific variation pattern (reach variation effect) is applied to the effect being executed. The sub CPU 201 does not perform the suggestion effect when the hold does not exist.

Further, the sub CPU 201 does not pre-read the start memory held at the time of the start winning and applies it to the pre-reading effect at the time of winning, but may apply this to the effect executed during the fluctuation of the hold digestion. good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 is executing the scenario effect for the first hold to the third hold and the start memory is held in the fourth hold due to the start winning, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the effect of the fourth hold, for example, the first. 2 The look-ahead effect of the 4th hold can be superimposed on the effect of the 2 hold and / and the 3rd hold.

Further, in the secret A stage 2002, since the hold is not shown on the LCD screen, the look-ahead effect is not performed at the time of the start prize, but the hold look-ahead effect set at the start prize is from the start prize to the display of the effect. Since it does not take much time, the production with few processing branches has to be a simple processing such as changing the reserved color, for example. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 uses a part or all of the pre-reading effect data (for example, scenario effect data) of the first hold to the third hold to perform the look-ahead effect of the start memory held in the fourth hold. If this is possible, the control load can be reduced, and as a result, the mode of the look-ahead effect of the start memory held in the fourth hold is more diverse than the monotonous one that only changes the hold color. Can be realized as.

Note that FIG. 152 is an example of a flowchart showing a modified example when it is determined that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326 (see FIG. 142). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 152, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, it determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 440 (step S400), and the game is played. When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 440, it is determined whether or not there is a reach variation effect in the starting memory of the scenario target being executed (step S402). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the start memory in which the winning is later than the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded. The look-ahead effect is selected as the target of (step S404). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is already being executed (step S406). If the look-ahead effect is already being executed, the already-executed look-ahead effect is continued (step S408), and if the look-ahead effect is not being executed, it is held within the target range of the executed scenario effect. A look-ahead effect is selected for all start-up memories (step S410).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the conventional pachinko machine in which the effect is performed for each start memory, the number of executions of the provisional change once or a plurality of times for each reserved start memory. Is determined, so that although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed in appearance. Moreover, the tentative variation determined for each start memory is blocked into a predetermined unit using a plurality of tentative variations regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the provisional fluctuation blocked in this predetermined unit is determined. Further, as described above, a part of the plurality of provisional fluctuations determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the provisional fluctuation is determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In this way, since the effect mode is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is possible to determine the effect mode so as to span a plurality of start memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start memory unit, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player aware of the game result for each start memory.

In addition, for a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state or high-probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the player separately from the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot determination is made if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened. There is no choice but to lower the winning probability in the processing, and there is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations are set for each start memory, it is difficult for the player to grasp such suppression while suppressing the number of time reductions. At the same time, since the winning probability in the jackpot determination can be made appropriate, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling given to the player and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each starting memory, the player can grasp the period of the secret A stage 2002, that is, the end timing of the time-saving gaming state. It can be difficult to do. That is, for example, the number of time reductions is predetermined at the time of winning, and in the conventional pachinko machine, even if it is concealed whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed is a high-probability gaming state, the winning is not performed. When a certain number of time reductions were digested, it was disclosed whether or not the game was in a high-probability gaming state. However, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the period of the secret A stage 2002 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of time reductions that have been digested, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation. Become. Moreover, during the secret A stage 2002, the subtraction effect of the character is performed as an index showing the degree of expectation that the game is in a high-probability game state. Rather, it can be directed to the subtraction effect of the character, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the secret A stage 2002 by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each start memory, the secret A stage 2002 In the above, the subtraction effect of the character which can be an index as to whether or not the game is in a high probability gaming state is performed. In this subtraction effect scenario, the high-probability gaming state is determined when the enemy group is wiped out, and the low-probability gaming state is determined when the ally group is wiped out in the scenario production including the final round of the time reduction. The outline has been decided before. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, it is not a production that discloses whether or not it is in a high-probability gaming state when a certain number of time reductions are exhausted, but a high probability when the victory or defeat of the battle production is settled. It is possible to perform an effect such as disclosing whether or not the game is in a gaming state.

Next, the change effect of BGM will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot gaming state ends and then the secret A stage 2002 is entered, the time reduction of the timing (for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 48 times)) at which the secret A stage 2002 ends is shortened. At the digested timing), the final result of the battle effect described above discloses whether the game is in a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state. When the disclosed result is in the high-probability gaming state, it then shifts to the high-probability stage 2004 (when the disclosed result is in the low-probability gaming state, it then shifts to the normal stage 2000).

The sub CPU 201 performs a BGM change lottery during the jackpot game state in which the probability change flag is turned on and during the secret A stage 2002 when the hidden game state is the high probability game state. That is, when the jackpot with the probability change flag turned on is won, the BGM change lottery is performed twice between the start of the jackpot gaming state and the transition to the high probability stage 2004 via the secret A stage 2002. Become. However, when the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit game state is won, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the BGM change lottery in the subsequent secret A stage 2002.

When the BGM change lottery is won, the sub CPU 201 outputs a high-probability confirmed BGM that is determined to be in a high-probability gaming state from the speaker 24 through the voice control circuit 205. Therefore, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is not always output when transitioning from the secret A stage 2002 to the high-accuracy stage 2004, and even when transitioning from the secret A stage 2002 to the high-accuracy stage 2004, it was a part. Highly confirmed BGM is not output.

Although the sub CPU 201 controls to output the highly accurate BGM according to the winning of the BGM change lottery, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the winning of the BGM change lottery. Does not change. Therefore, even if the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output, the flow of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 does not change and remains as it is.

When the sub CPU 201 wins the BGM change lottery, it also determines the timing of outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM (that is, the timing of changing from the normal BGM to the high-accuracy confirmed BGM). The timing for outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is, for example, during the jackpot game state or during the secret A stage 2002.

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit game state, when outputting the highly accurate confirmed BGM during the big hit game state, the sub CPU 201 also shifts to the secret A stage 2002 after the big hit game state ends. , Continue to control so that the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output. However, with respect to the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 controls to display the effect image normally displayed in the secret A stage 2002.

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit game state, when the high accuracy confirmed BGM is output during the secret A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 determines at which timing of the secret A stage 2002 the big hit game state is to be output. Pre-determined during. The output timing of the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is first determined in increments of a fixed number of time reductions, and then a random lottery is performed within the range of the determined number of time reductions. More specifically, for example, when the number of time reductions is 48, 1 to 6 times, 7 to 12 times, 13 to 18 times, 19 to 24 times, 25 to 30 times, 31 to 36 times, 37 to 42 times, 43 times. Predetermine to one of each group of ~ 48 times. Next, it is determined in advance at which timing in the determined group the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is to be output. For example, when the group is determined to be in the group of 13 to 18 times, the sub CPU 201 predetermines the timing of outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM within the range of the 13 to 18 times. For example, if it is determined to be 16 times, the sub CPU 201 outputs a highly accurate confirmation BGM in the variable display of the 16th time reduction.

When the start memory is reserved in the secret A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 sets a temporary variation for each start memory as described above. The sub CPU 201 also determines in which provisional variation the output of the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output, as in the case of the subtraction effect of the character. For example, when the timing for outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is predetermined at the 16th reduction of working hours, the sub CPU 201 may use all or part of the provisional fluctuation set for the start storage held at the 16th time. Is used to output a highly accurate BGM. At this time, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM has the provisional fluctuation set for one start memory and the start memory to be digested next to the one start memory, as in the medium attack effect as the subtraction effect of the character. It may be executed across the provisional fluctuation set for it. In this way, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM can be executed regardless of the variable display in the start storage unit, and the variable display in the start storage unit can be further prevented from being conscious of the player. ..

[Look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage)]
Next, the look-ahead effect selection process in the high-accuracy stage 2004 will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 156. FIG. 153 is an example of a flowchart showing the look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current effect state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (step S500 in FIG. 153). When it is determined that the current production state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a start winning (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). Discrimination (step S502). When it is determined that there is a start winning (YES in step S502), the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for which system to produce for the reserved start memory (step S504). The effects include, for example, a reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a lamp effect, a so-called movable effect of a character, a pseudo lotus effect, a change of a reserved image, and a look-ahead effect described later.

In step S506, it is determined whether or not the effect selected by the lottery in step S504 is a look-ahead effect (step S506 in FIG. 153). The look-ahead effect in the present embodiment is an embodiment in which an effect related to the start memory held during the high-accuracy stage 2004 and the start memory (including a plurality of start memories) won before the start memory is performed. Is. The details of the look-ahead effect will be described later. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be performed (YES in step S506), the look-ahead effect section determination process is performed (step S508). Here, "determining that the look-ahead effect is to be performed" means that the lottery for the look-ahead effect has been won.

Here, the look-ahead effect section determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern for determining a section for performing the look-ahead effect. Here, the upper frame of FIG. 154 (A) indicates a holding frame, and the numbers 1 to 4 in the holding frame indicate the first holding to the fourth holding. The lower frame located below the hold frame indicates the effect type frame, and what kind of effect is planned to be performed in each hold is described. In the present embodiment, the fourth hold is a hold (YES in step S502 of FIG. 153) in which the fourth hold is decided to perform the look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 of FIG. 153). be. Then, in the first hold, it is decided to perform the sumi effect (FIG. 154 (A)). The sumi effect is, for example, an effect that instantly darkens the entire screen as if the ink was spilled on the screen on the liquid crystal display device 16, or an "opportunity" or "chance" by overlaying the spilled ink. The effect is that characters such as "" are written with a brush.

Since the look-ahead effect section determination process is performed by lottery for all the stored start memories, all of these starts as long as the start memories are held in the first hold to the fourth hold in this embodiment as well. It can be done in memory. However, in the present embodiment, since it has already been decided that the black ink effect is performed in the first hold, in this case, the corresponding section should not be included in the target section determined in the look-ahead effect section determination process. May be. In addition, the target section determined in the look-ahead effect section determination process also for the start memory held next to the start memory for which the sumi effect is determined (corresponding to the second hold in FIG. 154 (B)). Not included in. This is stored as the first hold because the sumi effect performed by the variable display of the start memory stored as the first hold may be expected by the player by the effect alone. It is preferable to clearly separate the black ink effect performed by the variable display of the start memory and the look-ahead effect related to the start memory of the 4th hold (the look-ahead effect performed by the 3rd hold and the 4th hold). Because. That is, the ink effect is performed in the first hold, and the effect is not particularly performed in the second hold, so that the look-ahead effect related to the fourth hold (the effect performed in the third hold and the fourth hold) is performed. It can have the effect of increasing expectations and fun.

It should be noted that, assuming that the look-ahead effect related to the fourth hold including the sumi effect performed in the first hold is performed, that is, the look-ahead effect is performed in the section from the first hold to the fourth hold, there are a plurality of pre-reading effects for the player. While you can have a sense of expectation by performing the productions of There is a demerit that it is difficult to determine whether it is damaged, and on the contrary, it may result in less fun as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), when it is determined that the section for performing the look-ahead effect is the third hold and the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153), the effect scenario to be performed in these holds is set. (Step S510 in FIG. 154). As for the production scenario, a large lottery is performed for each hold, and the production scenario is set only for the hold that wins the lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, when the third hold is won by a large lottery (see the third hold in FIG. 154 (D)), the production scenario is set for the third hold, and the fourth hold is the first. 3 The production will be performed based on the scenario decided by the hold.

The effect scenario includes an effect that affects the development of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and an effect that does not affect the development of the hold by the development of the look-ahead. The fact that the development of the look-ahead affects the development of the hold means that the same effect as the look-ahead effect is also performed in the hold, and for example, the above-mentioned ink effect is equivalent. An effect that does not affect the development by the look-ahead development corresponds to an effect that is performed only on hold, such as a movable effect of a character. For the effect of pre-reading development that affects the development, a scenario lottery is performed for the hold before the hold (corresponding to the third hold in the present embodiment). On the other hand, for the effect that does not affect the development by the pre-reading development, the scenario lottery is performed including the holding (corresponding to the fourth holding in the present embodiment).

When the effect scenario is set for the hold won in the large category lottery (step S510 in FIG. 153), the details of the look-ahead effect are selected (step S512). An example of selecting the details of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of selecting the details of the look-ahead effect. FIG. 155 (A) is determined to perform a look-ahead effect by winning a start prize in the fourth hold in the high accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500 and YES in S502 in FIG. 153) (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). , An example of the state in which the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario are determined is shown.

To elaborate on the determination of the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario, since the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is drawn for all the stored start memories, the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is first reserved in the present embodiment. It has been determined to be the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153). There are at least two types of look-ahead effects, the first is a production that affects the development of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and the second is the look-ahead. There is a production that does not affect the development depending on the development. As an effect that affects the development of the hold by the development of the look-ahead, a lottery is performed for the hold other than the hold (first hold to third hold). Here, the hold is drawn as a variable effect. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the sumi effect is performed in the second hold and the third hold. For the effects that do not affect the development due to the pre-reading development, lottery is performed for the first hold to the fourth hold including the hold. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory is moved from the first hold to the fourth hold.

In this case, when the start memory held in the first hold to the fourth hold is exhausted, the ink effect is performed while the accessory is continuously moving, and the ink effect is completed, but the accessory is finished. The player will encounter a situation where the player can move. Then, it is difficult for the player to judge whether these series of productions are individual productions or related productions. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), when it is determined that the ink effect such as the third hold is not performed in the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment), the fourth hold is performed. In, the effect that does not affect the development (in the present embodiment, the accessory is movable) is canceled (rewritten to "none") by the development of the look-ahead.

<Countdown production>
It is determined whether or not the details of the look-ahead effect selected in step S512 of FIG. 153 are countdown effects (step S514). The countdown effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example when the details of the look-ahead effect are the countdown effect. FIG. 156 (A) wins the fourth hold during the high accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500 and YES in step S502 in FIG. 153), and it is determined that the look-ahead effect is performed (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). ), An example of the state in which the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario are determined is shown.

To elaborate on the determination of the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario, since the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is drawn for all the stored start memories, the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is first reserved in the present embodiment. It has been determined to be the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153). There are at least two types of look-ahead production scenarios, the first is a production that affects the development of the relevant (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and the second is the pre-reading. There is a production that does not affect the development depending on the development. It has been decided that a countdown effect will be performed in the first hold to the third hold as an effect that affects the development of the hold due to the development of the look-ahead. Here, the hold is drawn as a variable effect. For the effects that do not affect the development of the look-ahead, a lottery will be drawn for (first hold to fourth hold) including the hold. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory is moved from the first hold to the fourth hold.

In this case, when the 1st hold to the 4th hold are exhausted, the countdown effect is performed while the accessory is continuously moving, and the accessory is not performed in the 4th hold. The player will encounter the situation of being movable. When it is set that the big hit is confirmed (winning in the main CPU 101) when the countdown becomes 0 (zero), the pattern in which the countdown does not become 0 is the loss confirmation. In the case of the movement of the character in the 4th hold), it is not only difficult for the player to judge whether these series of productions were individual productions or related productions, but also other productions. There is a possibility that (movable characters in this embodiment) will be perceived as meaningless to the player.

Therefore, when it is determined that the effect selected in step S514 of FIG. 153 is a countdown effect (YES in step S514), it is determined whether or not the result of the selected countdown effect is a false effect (step S516). .. When it is determined that the result of the selected countdown effect is disappointing (YES in step S516), it is determined whether or not another effect scenario has been determined until the hold (step S518). When it is determined that the other effect scenario has been determined up to the hold (YES in step S518), the other effect scenario in the hold is canceled (step S520).

That is, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), when it is determined that the countdown effect performed over the first hold to the third hold is not performed in the change (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment). In the fourth hold, the effect (movable of the accessory in the present embodiment) that does not affect the development by the pre-reading development is canceled (rewritten to "none").

<Background change control processing>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the game in the normal stage 2000, the pre-reading effect of the reserved start memory accompanied by the change of the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is performed. The look-ahead effect of the reserved start memory accompanied by the background change is the background change as an effect for the start memory (the hold) held by the start prize (winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440). When it is decided by lottery to perform, the effect is based on the background change scenario of the hold, straddling the start memory held before the hold, and the background change of the hold is made continuous. Is. Variations of the look-ahead effect include not only an image notice, but also a lamp notice, a character notice, and the like. The background change control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160.

FIG. 157 is an example of a flowchart showing the background change control process. FIG. 158 is an example of a flowchart showing the background change continuous possible number of times determination process. FIG. 159 is an example of a table relating to background change control and background change scenario. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of the background change control process according to the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the start memory (the hold) held by the start prize (winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440) has won the background change lottery (FIG. FIG. Step S530 of 157). When it is determined that the hold has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530), the background change continuous possible number of times determination process is based on the start memory held before the hold before the background change of the hold. It is determined how many fluctuations the effect can be performed (step S532). The background change continuous possible number of times determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 158.

When the sub CPU 201 determines the number of times the background can be continuously changed in the background change continuous possible number of times determination process, the sub CPU 201 performs a background change scenario lottery for the hold (step S534). The background change scenario lottery is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. 159 (A). When a predetermined background change scenario is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. 159 (A) (step S534 of FIG. 157), the sub CPU 201 is set to the effect information set in each start memory related to the background change scenario, for example. , Information related to fluctuation effects such as "normal loss" and "reach loss" is rewritten into a background transition table based on a background change scenario (step S536 in FIG. 157). An example of the background change scenario will be described later.

The background change continuous possible number of times determination process in the background change control process of FIG. 157 will be described with reference to FIG. 158. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S530 in the background change control process that the start memory (the hold) held by the start winning prize has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530 of FIG. 157), the background change of FIG. 158. In the continuous possible number of times determination process, the number of times that can be continuously produced before the background change of the hold is determined (step S540 in FIG. 158). The number of consecutive possible times is the number of start memories of the section that goes back from the hold (the hold) that is the target of the background change and is not normally won in the background change lottery due to the deviation change.

A case where the winning start memory (the hold) is 4 (the fourth hold) will be described with reference to FIG. 160. In FIG. 160 (A), when the hold is won, the start memory is held from the first hold to the third hold, and the effect content of "normal loss" is set for each of the first hold to the third hold. It is in a state of being done. That is, the number of reserved items is "4". In the background change continuous possible number of times determination process of FIG. 158, the sub CPU 201 is capable of continuously producing the background change of the hold for three start memories excluding the start memory of the hold. Is determined.

When the reserved number is decremented (subtracted) in step S542 of FIG. 158, the sub CPU 201 becomes 4-1 = 3. That is, it is determined whether or not the third hold can be continuously performed among the first hold to the third hold. In step S544, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved items is 0 (step S544 in FIG. 158). As described above, since the number of holds 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), the sub CPU 201 then determines whether or not the third hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). The continuous possibility condition is a condition described in the continuous possible condition table of FIG. 159 (B).

The continuous possibility condition of FIG. 159 (B) is "2" in the background change scenario of FIG. 159 (A), in which the referenced hold (starting memory) is "1" and the variation display of the identification symbol is a normal variation. The "3" hold change lottery, which is "(none) or normal system", has not been won, that is, the hold display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a mode different from the default display mode by the hold change lottery. It is not that the "4" look-ahead effect lottery has been won, that is, it is not the target of another look-ahead effect. The sub CPU 201 determines that continuous possibility is possible only when all the above conditions "1" to "4" are satisfied.

Here, since the third hold in FIG. 160 (A) is a "normal loss", all of the continuously possible conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. Therefore, the third hold is a start hold that allows a look-ahead effect. Then, the number of continuous possible times is incremented (added) in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158). That is, the number of continuous possible times is 0 + 1 = 1. The process of incrementing the number of continuous possibilities is repeated until the number of pending items becomes zero or the continuous possible condition cannot be cleared.

In the present embodiment, when the number of holdings is decremented, 3-1 = 2 (step S542 in FIG. 158), and it is determined whether or not the second holding can be continued. Since the number of holds 2 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the second hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). Since the second hold in FIG. 160 (A) is a "normal loss", all of the continuously possible conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. That is, since the second hold can also be pre-reading effect, the number of continuously possible times is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158), so that the number of continuously possible times is 1 + 1 = 2.

Further, when the number of reserved pieces is decremented, 2-1 = 1 (step S542 in FIG. 158), and it is determined whether or not the first hold can be continued. Since the hold quantity 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the first hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). Since the first hold in FIG. 160 (A) is a "normal loss", all of the continuously possible conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. That is, since the first hold can also be pre-reading effect, the number of continuously possible times is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158), so that the number of continuously possible times is 2 + 1 = 3. Next, when the reserved number is decremented, 1-1 = 0 (step S544 in FIG. 158) and the reserved number = 0 (NO in step S544). Therefore, in the background change continuous possible number determination process, the continuous possible number is 3. It is determined that there is.

When it is determined in the background change continuous possible number of times determination process that the continuous possible number of times is 3 (step S532 in FIG. 157), the background change scenario is drawn based on the background change scenario table in FIG. 159 (A). Since the number of continuously possible times indicates the number of times that can be read ahead, in the present embodiment, the number of times that can be read ahead is 3 in FIG. 159 (A). 3, No. 7-No. 9, No. 13-No. 15, No. 19-No. It is selected from 21.

For example, the background change scenario No. When 3 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 fluctuations, 2 fluctuations, and 1 fluctuation are all "normal". Further, for example, the background change scenario No. When 20 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 fluctuations, 2 fluctuations, and 1 fluctuation are "normal", "evening", and "evening" in that order. It has become. It is expected that the background will change from the normal system to the evening background by the time of the change of the hold (fourth hold), and some kind of story production will be continuously performed.

In addition, for example, the background change scenario No. When 9 is selected, the background change scenario type is "Japanese style", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, 2 changes before, and 1 change before are all "Japanese style mansions". This can be used as an effect that has a higher expectation than "normal" in the background change scenario type. Further, for example, the background change scenario No. 13-No. When 15 is selected, the background change scenario type is "attack", and it can be used as an effect with a higher expectation than the above-mentioned "Japanese style" state. In particular, with regard to the background change scenario type "invasion", since the effect of "enemy invasion" is made in the background change scenario, it may indicate the transition to some special mode (zone).

An example of FIG. 160 (B) will be described. In FIG. 160 (B), when the hold is won, the start memory is held from the first hold to the third hold, and the effect content of "normal loss" is set for each of the second hold to the third hold. However, it can be seen that the "background change", that is, the background change scenario is set in the first hold. In this case, the number of holds is "4", and in the background change continuous possible number of times determination process of FIG. Is possible or not.

In step S542 of FIG. 158, when the number of holds is decremented, 4-1 = 3, and it is determined whether or not the third hold can be continuously performed. As described above, since the number of holds 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the third hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). Since the third hold in FIG. 160 (B) is a "normal loss", all of the continuously possible conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. Therefore, since the third hold can be read ahead, the number of consecutive possible times is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158). That is, the number of continuous possible times is 0 + 1 = 1. Since the same applies to the second hold, the number of consecutive possible times is 1 + 1 = 2.

Then, when the number of holds is decremented in step S542 of FIG. 158, 2-1 = 1, and it is determined whether or not the first hold can be continued. As described above, since the number of holds 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the first hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). Since the first hold of FIG. 160 (B) is "background change", in the background change scenario of FIG. 159 (A) of FIG. ) Or a normal system "does not meet the condition.

Then, since it is determined that the continuous possibility condition is not cleared in step S546 of FIG. 158 (NO in step S546 of FIG. 158), it is determined that the continuous possible number of times is 2 in the background change continuous possible number of times determination process. Will be done.

<Variation scenario determination process>
The variation scenario determination process performed at the start of the variation of the reserved start memory (for example, the first hold to the fourth hold) will be described with reference to FIG. 161. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the starting memory held by the starting prize (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440) is a background performance change effect related to the starting memory held after the holding. Or, by the look-ahead effect, it can be rewritten with the effect information different from that at the beginning of the prize. Therefore, a predetermined effect is selected according to the conditions given at the start of the fluctuation.

FIG. 161 is an example of a flowchart showing a variation scenario determination process. In the fluctuation scenario determination process, it is determined whether or not the start winning or the reserved start memory is at the start of the change when the change is digested by the change (step S550 in FIG. 161). When it is determined that the fluctuation has started (YES in step S550), it is determined whether or not the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a normal system (step S552). The normal system is different from the production that affects the player in some way, such as the invasion and the assault described later.

When it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a normal system (YES in step S552), it is determined whether or not the background is an exception target among the normal systems (step S554). The exception target is, for example, "1" among the effects determined by the background change scenario lottery in the above-mentioned background change control process, when it is determined that the effect is to enter the Japanese-style mansion, "2". If it is determined that the change is a production that rushes into the enemy invasion effect, "3" The change may correspond to the final next change in the evening background.

When it is determined that the exception target is determined (YES in step S554), the effect according to the exception condition is executed in the normal background exception handling (step S556). For example, if it is determined that "1" is a production that rushes into a Japanese-style mansion due to the fluctuation, a scenario lottery for a Japanese-style background is executed, and "2" is a production that rushes into an enemy invasion production with the fluctuation. If it is decided, in the normal background scenario lottery, the effect related to the enemy invasion is set, and "3" If the change corresponds to the final next change in the evening background, nothing is done. Be done. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not an exception target (NO in step S554), a normal background scenario lottery is performed (step S558).

When it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is not a normal system (NO in step S552), it is determined whether or not the background is in the evening (step S560). When it is determined that the background is evening (YES in step S560), an evening background scenario lottery is performed (step S562). On the other hand, when it is determined that the background is not evening (NO in step S560), it is determined whether or not the background is Japanese style (step S564). When it is determined that the background is Japanese (YES in step S564), a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is performed (step S566).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not Japanese (NO in step S564), it is determined whether or not the background is invading (step S568). When it is determined that the background is an invasion (YES in step S568), an invasion background scenario lottery is performed (step S570). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not an invasion (NO in step S570), an assault background scenario lottery is performed (step S572). Expectations in the production performed as a result of these scenario lottery are higher in the order of normal background time, evening background time, normal background time exception, Japanese style, invasion, and assault.

<Chance up control process>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the normal stage 2000 or the high-accuracy stage 2004 is used, the chance of generating a production related to the first production is increased as a variable production that develops into super reach. Control processing is possible. The chance-up control process will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an example of a flowchart showing a chance-up control process.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect displayed during the current change is the effect during change (step S580 in FIG. 162). When it is determined that the effect displayed during the current change is the effect being changed (YES in step S580), it is determined whether or not to execute the chance up (step S582). When it is determined that the chance up is executed (YES in step S582), it is determined whether or not the chance up has already been performed in the fluctuation. That is, it is determined whether or not the chance-up flag is 1 (step S584).

When it is determined in step S584 that the chance-up flag is not 1 (YES in step S584), the chance-up introduction effect is set (step S586). This means that the chance-up flag is not 1, which means that the chance-up effect has not yet been performed in the fluctuation. Therefore, select a normal production that can be an introduction to the chance-up production. When the chance-up introduction effect is set in step S586 (step S586), the chance-up flag is set to 1 (step S588).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S584 that the chance-up flag is 1 (NO in step S584), a chance-up effect related to the previously executed effect is set (step S600). For example, if the effect executed last time, that is, the effect executed based on the chance-up introduction effect is a conversation effect in which the character instep appears, the character instep appears again as a chance-up effect, and the previous conversation. There is a production that makes the conversation develop while being related to the character, and a production that develops into a super reach with the appearance of character B related to the character instep. In this way, by controlling the effect to be generated later to be related to or developed from the effect to be generated first, it is possible to raise the expectation for the super reach effect.

When the chance-up flag is set to 1 in step S588 (step S588) or the chance-up effect related to the previously executed effect is set in step S600 (step S600), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation ends (step S590). .. When it is determined that the fluctuation has ended (YES in step S590), the character lamp flag is set to 0 (step S592). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the end of fluctuation (NO in step S590), the chance-up control process ends.

<Pending change determination process>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the starting memory is held by the starting winning prize (winning to the first starting opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440), the player can visually recognize that the holding has been made. Display (or notify) in a mode. As a display mode, for example, a part of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the number thereof. Further, the display (design) of the reserved start memory can be changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Hold change is to change the hold image. The pending change determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is an example of a flowchart showing the pending change determination process.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the prize is on hold (step S610 in FIG. 163). Whether or not there is a hold prize is not whether or not there is a start prize (a prize for the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440), but as described above, the start memory is held and the hold is made. It indicates that the state can be displayed in a manner that can be visually recognized by a person. If it is determined that the prize is on hold (YES in step S610), a hold change scenario lottery is performed (step S612).

In the hold change scenario lottery in step S612, a scenario related to the hold change is drawn. What is the scenario related to the hold change? Specifically, how many times will the confrontation be held under the condition that the display of the hold is changed only when the instep wins due to the confrontation between the instep power and the second power (number of battles n). Decide), decide whether to make a pending change, etc. Examples of the confrontation mode include a ninjutsu confrontation. In this embodiment, the maximum number of battles is eight. When a predetermined scenario is determined by the pending change scenario lottery in step S612 (step S612), then it is determined which character is selected from the instep forces (step S614). Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always wins the instep (holding change confirmed).

Next, in step S616, the B character and the scenario that confront the instep are drawn. Here, in the present embodiment, there is only one character of the instep power selected in the instep character lottery in step S614, but a maximum of eight confrontation characters are selected as the B power to confront. Then, the story, cut-in, and other scenarios when they appear will also be decided by the confrontation B character scenario lottery. Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always wins the instep (holding change confirmed).

Next, the confrontation process is performed in step S618 (step S618). When the instep wins (YES in step S6620), the hold image is changed by the hold change process. Changes in the hold image include, for example, changing the image of the start memory displayed in the red shuriken image to a yellow shuriken image, changing what was displayed in the shuriken image to a ninja book (roll), etc. The display may be different from the current display. When one battle is completed, 1 is subtracted from the number of battles n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of confrontations after the subtraction in step S624 is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations becomes zero.

When the number of confrontations subtracted in step S626 becomes 0 (YES in step S626), the development effect processing is performed in step S628 (step S628). In the development production process, there is a production that develops into super reach after the confrontation between the instep power and the second power.

On the other hand, in step S620, if A is not a winner in the confrontation between A and B (NO in step S620), it is determined whether or not it is a draw (step S630). If it is determined that the game is a draw (YES in step S630), 1 is subtracted from the number of confrontations n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of confrontations subtracted in step S626 is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations becomes zero.

When it is determined in step S628 that the development effect process ends or in step S630 it is not a draw (NO in step S630), the hold change determination process ends. It should be noted that the pseudo-ren may be used in the production of the confrontation between the instep power and the second power in the pending change.

[Character lamp]
In the present embodiment, when the character lamp (LED1562) emits light, a picture of a character or the like appears inside the opening window 1552. In the following, the character lamp (LED1562) is simply referred to as a character lamp.

While the sub CPU 201 selects an effect in which the character lamp lights up at the start of variable display of the identification symbol, the sub CPU 201 may draw a lottery to determine whether or not the character lamp lights up in the effect lottery when the effect button 62 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed. ..

Then, since the timing at which the character lamp selected at the start of the variable display of the identification symbol lights up and the timing at which the character lamp selected by the lottery when the effect button 62 is pressed exist, the variable display is performed once. It is possible that there is a timing in which the character lamp lights up multiple times. Therefore, regarding the lighting of the character lamp, the earliest timing is adopted, and the sub CPU 201 is controlled so that once it is lit, it is not lit thereafter.

FIGS. 164 (A) to 164 (C) are examples of sequence charts showing lighting control of the character lamps, respectively. In FIGS. 164 (A) to 164 (C), the first effect lottery is executed at the start of the variable display as an effect between the start of the variable display of the identification symbol and the end of the variable display, and as a result, the conversation notice is given in the first half. Is executed, and a second production lottery is executed in the middle, and as a result, a special reach (hereinafter referred to as "SP reach") is executed in the latter half.

The example shown in FIG. 164 (A) shows a case where the timing of lighting the lamp twice is selected during one variable display as a premise. In the illustrated example, in the first half of the conversation notice, there is an executable period of the character lamp effect, and in the latter half of the SP reach, there is also an executable period of the character lamp effect.

The example shown in FIG. 164 (B) shows the case where the effect button 62 is pressed. In the illustrated example, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect when the effect button 62 is pressed in the first half of the conversation notice, and does not execute the character lamp effect in the latter half of the SP reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 164 (C), the case where the effect button 62 is not pressed is shown. In the illustrated example, in the first half of the conversation notice, the effect button 62 is not pressed, while in the second half of the SP reach, the sub CPU 201 indicates that the character lamp effect is executed.

If it is determined that the character lamp is turned on when the effect button 62 is pressed at the start of variable display, if the effect button 62 is not pressed at the time of button effect, the character lamp is identified without the lighting timing. It is conceivable that the variable display of the symbol will end, but the lottery for the effect that the character lamp drawn at the start of the variable display lights up and the lottery for lighting the character lamp when the effect button 62 is pressed can be executed separately. Since it is controlled in this way, various lighting timings of the character lamp can be prepared.

FIG. 165 is an example of a flowchart showing the control process of the character lamp effect. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect is during variable display (step S801), and if the effect is not during variable display, determines whether or not the variable display is finished (step S807), while the variable display is displayed. In the case of the middle effect, it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S802).

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended when it is not the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S807), while the character lamp flag is 1 when it is the execution period of the character lamp effect. It is determined whether or not there is (step S803).

When the character lamp flag is 1 (character lamp effect has been executed), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807), while when the character lamp flag is not 1 (character lamp effect not yet executed). In (execution), it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the character lamp effect is satisfied (step S804). The execution condition of the character lamp effect means, for example, that the effect button 62 is pressed or a predetermined variable display time elapses.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is terminated when the execution condition of the character lamp effect is not satisfied (step S807), while the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect when the execution condition of the character lamp effect is satisfied. (Step S805).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the character lamp flag to 1 (step S806). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807). The sub CPU 201 ends the process when it is determined that the variable display has not ended, while the character lamp flag is set to 0 when it is determined that the variable display has ended (step S808).

The above content has been described as an embodiment during variable display as an example, but is not limited to this, and the execution of the character lamp effect is controlled by setting the effect during the look-ahead effect or the effect during the look-ahead effect + variable display as one period. You may try to do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), when the effect button 62 is operated, as a specific notification mode, for example, a conversation notice (first effect execution) capable of executing a character lamp effect is performed. Means) and SP reach (second effect executing means) capable of executing the character lamp effect when the variable display of the identification symbol reaches a predetermined time during the same variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), in the conversation notice, the character lamp effect is not executed when the effect button 62 is not operated, while in the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 164 (C). , When the character lamp effect is executed in the conversation notice, the character lamp effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 164 (C), when the character lamp effect is not executed in the conversation notice, the character lamp is not executed. Perform the production.

In addition, it can be paraphrased as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and draws a lottery to execute the character lamp effect under the first condition (for example, when the effect button 62 is pressed). Each can be executed by a first lottery that can be performed and a second lottery that can perform a lottery that is executed under a second condition (for example, the passage of time) different from the first lottery. When each of the above becomes feasible, the first condition may be unsatisfied depending on the game situation. If the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed under the condition that the first condition is satisfied, and the establishment under the second condition is invalidated. If the first condition is not satisfied or invalid. Only occasionally, when the second condition is satisfied, for example, a predetermined effect can be executed at an execution timing different from that of the first condition.

In addition, it can be paraphrased as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and executes the character lamp effect as the first condition, for example, by pressing the button in FIG. 164 (A). Each can be executed by the first lottery in which the lottery can be performed and the second lottery in which the lottery can be executed at the time shown in FIG. 164 (A) as a second condition different from the first lottery. sell. When each of the above becomes feasible, the character lamp effect is executed when the second condition is satisfied, while the first condition is a condition which is unsatisfied or invalid depending on the game situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), when the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed under the condition of the first condition and is satisfied under the second condition. Is invalid (or discarded).

[Full screen notice]
166 is an example of a flowchart showing the control of the full screen effect, and FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 are screen views showing an example of the screen display. In the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command to execute the full-screen effect in the state of the normal effect shown in FIG. 167 (A), the sub CPU 201 outputs a message (effect designation information) to the voice control circuit 205. By doing so, the voice control circuit 205 is controlled, and the volume of the specific channel (the channel on which the sound of the symbol is reproduced) is set to 0.

The voice control circuit 205 is controlled so as not to output the symbol sound during the full-screen effect, but the error screen after the power failure is restored (that is, the full-screen error screen indicating that the variable display is in progress). ) Is displayed while the design sound is output.

However, in this example, the full-screen error screen is the error screen after the power is restored, but the full-screen error screen does not necessarily have to be the error screen after the power is restored. For example, when an error occurs. The purpose is to include a full-screen display of information screens related to gaming machines that are not related to the jackpot judgment, such as the message screen of the above and the warning screen when fraud is performed, in a manner in which the variable display of the identification symbol cannot be visually recognized. ..

The voice control circuit 205 has a 4-channel (execution system) sound source for performing voice control such as a notification sound, a design sound, a sound effect, and a BGM, and is based on a message (effect designation information) from the sub CPU 201. For example, each of these can be reproduced on four channels (execution systems). In the present embodiment, a channel number is assigned to each channel, for example, channel number 1 is a notification sound, channel number 2 is a symbol sound, channel number 3 is a sound effect, and channel number 4 is a BGM. be.

Explaining according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 166, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the full-screen effect is being executed (step S901), and ends the process if it is not the full-screen effect. On the other hand, in the case of full-screen effect, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is restored as shown in FIG. 167 (B) (step S902).

If it is not a power failure recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets a full screen effect (step S903). Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message specifying channel number 2, which is a symbol sound channel, to the voice control circuit 205, and sets the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0 to the voice control circuit 205 that receives the message. (Step S904).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), in the case of power failure recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets the screen during power failure recovery (step S905). This is because the effect is not memorized at the time of recovery from power failure, so that the screen during recovery from power failure is simply displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message to the voice control circuit 205, and causes the voice control circuit 205 to output the volume of the symbol channel for the symbol sound channel number 2 (step S906). This may be changed to a sound louder than the stop sound of the symbol at the time of normal production.

In the above processing, the sound of the symbol is not emitted during the full-screen effect as an effect, but after that, if a power failure occurs, the full-screen effect command is transmitted again when the power is restored. In such a case, by controlling the volume of the symbol sound channel (channel number: 2) to be output, the screen for recovering from power failure is covered and the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed. Even when the displayed identification symbol cannot be seen, it is possible to grasp that the identification symbol has stopped by the symbol stop sound.

In other words, in the case of the display effect, the effect sound can be output by a plurality of channels according to the system, and the channel (for example, channel number 2) can be output according to the change in the mode of the display effect. While changing the production tone output from the 3rd and 4th symbol sound channels, effect sound channels, and BGM channels), the symbol system channels (for example, the symbol channel of channel number 2) are fixed and fixed. , The output sound from the channel of the symbol system is muted according to the mode of the symbol display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing that is not necessary for the production while enhancing the interest of the player in the production, so that the processing can be smoothly performed.

Further, from a different point of view of the embodiment as described above, it is produced by a plurality of channels, for example, a notification sound channel of channel numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, a symbol sound channel, a sound effect channel, and a BGM channel. A shared channel that can output the sound color according to the system and can change the effect sound output from the channel according to the change of the display effect mode, for example, the channel with the symbol of channel numbers 2, 3 and 4, the effect. It has a sound channel, a BGM channel, and a warning system and a symbol system channel, for example, a notification sound and a symbol sound channel of channel numbers 1 and 2, and a sound effect through a shared channel depending on the mode of display effect. On the other hand, when a specific display effect, for example, the full screen display shown in FIG. 167 (B) is executed, the state of the warning system channel is maintained and the output sound from the symbol system channel is muted. It can also be said that.

In the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the channel number of the symbol sound channel is fixed to 2 is exemplified (hereinafter, also referred to as “fixed channel method”), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice control circuit 205 is a sub. Based on the message (effect designation information) from the CPU 201, for example, an vacant unused channel among the four channels (execution system) may be dynamically assigned to reproduce each sound.

In this case, the sub CPU 201 stores a specific channel number representing a specific channel playing the symbol sound, and for example, when executing a full-screen effect, the specific channel with respect to the voice control circuit 205. A message with a specified number is transmitted, and the voice control circuit 205 that receives the message is made to set the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0. Even in this way, the same effect as that of the fixed channel method can be obtained.

[2. Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment]
Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, for example, the pachinko gaming machine having a setting function may be used. A pachinko gaming machine having this setting function will be described below as a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The appearance configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is the same as the appearance configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Further, the description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

First, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 171. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a jackpot of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment, and FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a hit type when the result of a jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot (hereinafter, “main”). It is a figure which shows an example about the selectivity (big hit type determination table) of (referred to as a symbol "), and FIG. 170 is a figure which shows an example of the variation time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. be. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 not shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

In explaining the probability of the jackpot shown in FIG. 168, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts the big hit determination random number of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. 1 With reference to the special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), jackpot determination (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts the big hit determination random number of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), the jackpot determination (hereinafter referred to as “second special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing" as in the big hit determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)” is set in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ) Relationship between the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data"). Is stipulated.

In this second embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for a range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “high probability game state”. When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time saving gaming state”. When the gaming state is the "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". In the time saving game state, the time saving number is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the time saving number is subtracted by 1 every time the special symbol changes once.

In the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined to be a normal hit (normal hit probability) in the normal hit determination is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric accessory 46 changing from the closed state to the open state, that is, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. However, in the time-saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability as compared with the non-time-saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric motor can be used. The frequency with which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 46. Further, two or three aspects of the above three aspects may be combined.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the normal game state in which both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are OFF, the probability change time reduction game state in which the probability change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, and the probability change flag OFF and the time reduction flag are ON. It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 in any of the time-saving gaming states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start storage until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether the second special symbol is a jackpot or a loss.

[Big hit probability]
As shown in FIG. 168, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 for setting 1, about 1/290 for setting 2, and about 1/20 for setting 3. It is 1/280, setting 4 is about 1/270, setting 5 is about 1/260, and setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and setting 3. Is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in this second embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, so the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set. By changing according to the value, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the first special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. The number of jackpot determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 for setting 1, 22 for setting 2, 23 for setting 3, 24 for setting 4, 25 for setting 5, and 26 for setting 6. It has become.

Further, also in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 for setting 1, 1/290 for setting 2, and 280 minutes for setting 3. 1. Setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 for setting 1, 1/29 for setting 2, and 28 for setting 3. It is 1/27, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

That is, with respect to the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high-probability gaming state, setting 1 is 21 pieces, setting 2 is 22 pieces, setting 3 is 23 pieces, setting 4 is 24 pieces, setting 5 is 25 pieces, and setting 6 is 26 pieces. It is an individual.

It should be noted that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination of the second special symbol have the same jackpot probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, in the case of setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability gaming state (1/28 in the high probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low-probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high-probability gaming state).

In this second embodiment, the set value has 6 stages from setting 1 to setting 6, but it is not always necessary to be 6 stages, and any plurality of stages can be set arbitrarily.

Further, in this second embodiment, the jackpot probability is configured to be different when the set value is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be common to a plurality of set values. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 and The jackpot probability common to setting 6 (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set.

Further, in the second embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the big hit determination random number which is a fixed value. On the other hand, by changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the method for differentiating the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this, and the jackpot is not limited to this. By making the number of judgment value data common to all settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment as a total random number according to the set value, the big hit probability may be made different according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218 common to all settings, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (big hit probability is about 1/300) and in setting 2. The range from 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range from 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability is 1/280), and the range from 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability is 1/270). , Setting 5 is in the range of 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), setting 6 is in the range of 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot determination), which has more digits than the molecule (number of jackpot determination value data). Compared with the method of changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value with the range as a fixed value, the jackpot probability for each set value can be set in detail.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value, but the number of big hit judgment value data is set to all. It is not always necessary to make it common. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, the jackpot determination value data is set. The number is 219, the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the big hit probability is about 1/290), and in setting 3, the number of big hit judgment value data is 220, and the random number for big hit judgment is The range (width) is in the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of jackpot determination value data is 221 and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 59669. (The jackpot probability is about 1/270), and in setting 5, the number of jackpot determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1/260). In setting 6, the number of jackpot determination value data is 223, and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even if both the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is changed according to the set value, the method of changing the number of big hit judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the big hit judgment random number as a fixed value. In comparison, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 is set in step S3072 or step S3082 described later (see FIG. 188). , In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5", for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number is set as the set value. It may be checked whether or not it is within the corresponding range, and / and whether or not the number of jackpot determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number or / and the number of jackpot determination value data is out of the range according to the set value) (step to be described later). (When it corresponds to NO in S3721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[Big hit distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 169, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 169 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 169, when the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability) based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. 25.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), and Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 25.0%) ) Is decided. Special figure 1-1 is a big hit with 4 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time reduction of 100 times. In Special Figure 1-2, the number of rounds is 4, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed (the time reduction flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started). It's a big hit. Special figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time reduction number of 100 times. Special figure 1-4 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 variablely displays the first special symbol over a fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 170 described later, and then the determined main symbol. Executes the control to stop with.

In this second embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this second embodiment, as in Special Figure 1-2 and Special Figure 1-4). It is a so-called "probability variation loop machine" in which the high probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started after the jackpot gaming state is completed (when the probability variation flag is ON). In such a probabilistic loop machine, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the next jackpot gaming state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is played. Then, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in this second embodiment, as in Special Figure 1-1 and Special Figure 1-3). (If it is a big hit that does not turn on the probability change flag), after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to the low probability gaming state without being controlled to the high probability gaming state.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or the special figure based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Determined to be 2-2 (distribution probability 50.0%). Special figure 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time reduction number of 100 times. Special figure 2-2 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 variablely displays the second special symbol over the fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 170 described later, and then the determined main symbol. Executes the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes a control to stop the special symbol at the determined lost symbol.

The number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state. If the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the jackpot game state is controlled. The gaming state after the end of is controlled to the low probability gaming state (the gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF). In the following, the jackpot with 4 rounds, the probability variation flag OFF, and the number of time reductions of 100 times (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-1) is referred to as "4R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, and the next jackpot game are A jackpot that continues to shorten the time until it is executed (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-2) is called a "4R probability variation jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is OFF, and the number of time reductions is 100 times (for example, Special Figure 1-). 3. The jackpot in Special Figure 2-1 is called "10R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, Special Figure 1-4, The jackpot in Special Figure 2-2) is referred to as "10R probability variation jackpot".

Further, in the second embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but this is not always limited to this, and it is based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Depending on the main symbol determined by the method, it may be determined whether the time saving flag is set to ON or OFF.

[Variation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the flow until the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the variation time of the special symbol corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201). The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined can be different depending on the set value (that is, the fluctuation time and the effect content). The contents of the table shown in FIG. 170 are stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, the execution probability of the reach effect may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, or the fluctuation time in normal fluctuation may become shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. 170. ..

As shown in FIG. 170, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 170, in this second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined using a table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be determined by using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol is the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the effect selection. It defines the relationship between the random number range, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern), the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time, and the effect content. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probabilistic time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are not distinguished. Further, as for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, different random number ranges are set according to the set values.

The reach determination random number range is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from the reach determination counter, and the extracted reach determination is performed. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit determination using the random number value for big hit determination when starting the variation display of the special symbol, but when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect using the reach determination random number. In this second embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

For example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 in settings 1 and 2. It is specified in ~ 25, it is specified in 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and it is specified in 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variation time reduction game state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set 1. In 2, it is specified in 0 to 10, in settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 0 to 11, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 0 to 12.

As described above, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2. Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than settings 3 and 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

In this second embodiment, when deciding whether or not to execute the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, and is common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and the setting 5 is used. And setting 6 are common, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all settings may be different.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is an explanation of the case where the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, but when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The random number range for effect selection is a random number used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter, and selects the extracted effect. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 is a random number for effect selection stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state and the result of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss). To determine the variation time of the special symbol using. In this second embodiment, the effect selection random value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. When the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and the reach effect is executed is determined. It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach), is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and the reach effect is not executed is as follows. Will be decided. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B), is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is executed. When determined, the variation time of the special symbol is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is not executed. When determined, the variation time of the special symbol is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

Since the main symbol is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, what is the determination of the fluctuation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a jackpot is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

Further, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a jackpot is Common to all main symbols, it is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach B) is defined as 50 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect are the same, the special symbol The fluctuation time of setting 3 and 4 is more likely to be determined to be shorter than that of setting 1 and 2, and further, the fluctuation time of setting 5 and 6 is more likely to be determined to be shorter than that of setting 3 and 4. There is. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lottery). As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of executions of the jackpot game state when viewed in a unit time will increase, and the probability that the jackpot game state will be executed within a unit time will also increase. It is possible to execute an advantageous game.

In this second embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6. Although it is common to, but not limited to this, it may be different for all setting values.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot is determined in common for all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of is different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the content of the effect. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents a normal medium super reach B with a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the variation time and the effect content. For example, if the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is "05H", the variation pattern designation command of "83H05H" is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designation command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[Stop design of decorative design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, an example of a stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selectivity shown in FIG. 169 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot will be described. .. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 171 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

When the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201) receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) sets a stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command regardless of the set value. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special figure 1-2, the sub CPU 201 has all the decorative symbols having the same specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol). Since the distribution probability of each aspect is 0%, all the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in this second embodiment) are the same even-numbered symbols (distribution probability 30.0%), or all. It is determined that the decorative symbols of the above are the same odd-numbered symbols (distribution probability 70.0%). In this second embodiment, the specific symbol is a "7" symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the player can recognize that the jackpot has a high degree of profit, another symbol (for example, the "V" symbol) is specified. It may be used as a pattern.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 171 is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 171 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, FIG. 171 A symbol other than the symbol shown in is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbol other than the symbol shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to, for example, a symbol in which at least one of all the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

As described above, according to FIG. 171, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is the jackpot determination of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Whether it is the result of the big hit, whether the game state after the big hit game state is finished is a big hit controlled to the high probability game state, and whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state is 10R. Can vary depending on.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 169 is a special figure 1-1, a special figure 1-3, or a special figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON). Regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols always stop in the same even-numbered symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first embodiment").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol (other than the specific symbol "7" symbol) regardless of the set value. (Hereinafter referred to as "second aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol regardless of the set value, or all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as "specific mode").

Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the player stops in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are 10R probability variation big hits, but since Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, it is a big hit in the normal gaming state. It is highly possible that you won. Further, since the special figure 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, it is highly possible that the big hit was won in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this way, when stopped in a specific mode, the 10R probability variable jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is determined, and when stopped in a mode in which all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, the probability variable jackpot (4R probability variable jackpot or 10R) is determined. Probability change jackpot) is confirmed. On the other hand, when stopped in the first aspect, it is confirmed that the profit degree for the player is not the maximum 10R probability variation jackpot, but the possibility of the 4R probability variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the player may be notified of which jackpot the jackpot is when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or the jackpot game. It may be notified while the state is being executed, or it may be notified when the jackpot game state ends. Further, although it is not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the high-probability game is the high-probability game even though the game state after the big-hit game state is finished is controlled to the high-probability game state. It may be controlled to a so-called "latent probability change state" in which the player is not clearly shown to be controlled by the state.

[Other examples of basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment]

The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment are as described above, but the specifications are not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, it goes without saying that the following explanation is an example and is not limited to this.
[Variation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, a modification of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As described above, there are cases where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation example of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 172 counts the number of times the special symbol is changed (that is, the number of times the special symbol is drawn). It is equipped with a counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means is reset, for example, at the start of the big hit gaming state, and starts counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 172, in another example, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect is performed. It is performed according to both the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the time when the jackpot game state ends and the set value.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time when the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, a random number range for reach determination is determined to execute the reach effect. Is specified in 0 to 25 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG. 170.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends becomes 1001 or more, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 to 10 in the settings 1 and 2. In settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 0 to 5, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is lost, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the settings 1 and 2 as compared with the settings 3 and 4, and in the settings 3 and 4 as compared with the settings 5 and 6. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (in the settings 1 and 2, the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 as compared with the settings 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of changes of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the number of changes of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000 times. Compared with the above, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the jackpot game is also performed for the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where the number of fluctuations is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000, the random number range for effect selection is determined so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 20000 msec (normal medium reach). Is specified in 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG. 170.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends becomes 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is set to 1. It is not specified in 4 to 4, but is specified in 0 to 99 in settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4, but not in settings 5 and 6. .. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B), is specified in 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 4, and is specified in settings 5 and 6. do not have. Therefore, in a so-called big hit situation where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the set value set is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is lost and it is determined to execute the reach effect, the starting point is the time when the jackpot gaming state ends. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of executing the reach effect. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of executing the reach effect that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state becomes 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit. The number of changes in the special symbol per hour (that is, the number of lottery) becomes even higher. As a result, the expectation that the number of times the big hit game is executed when viewed in a unit time is higher is higher, and the probability that the big hit game is executed within the unit time is also higher.

Further, when the number of changes of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the big hit game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect will be significantly different depending on the set value. There may be room for it. As a result, when a so-called big hit is made, the set value set for the player is set without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving the game ball to the player). By giving a guessable opportunity, it is possible to give the player fun. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect, but in this second embodiment, the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value may be. Since the player can have expectations, it is possible to reduce the decrease in motivation to continue the game even if the reach effect is executed infrequently.

In the second embodiment, the starting point at which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted is set to the time when the big hit game state ends, but the game is not limited to this, and for example, a high-probability game occurs after a predetermined period has elapsed. The starting point can be any time point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends in the so-called ST machine, which ends the state, or when the time-saving gaming state ends.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value. It does not necessarily have to be 1001 times or more. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that it is addictive.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes a predetermined number or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value. What is significantly different depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol is determined to be a big hit and the time when the game is actually controlled to the big hit game state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as “ending time”) from the end of the big hit game state to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 at the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 at the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production showing that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production to congratulate the fact that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method in a big hit game state (for example, right-handed). The production to teach is performed. In the ending production, the production showing the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state, the production showing the number of times the big hit game state is continued (the number of consecutive villas), and the game state after the big hit game state is over are high-probability games. A production showing that the state is controlled, a production that teaches a game method in the game state after the jackpot game state is completed (for example, returning to left-handed), a production that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine, etc. Is done.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the jackpot gaming state increases as the set value increases. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average number of fluctuations (that is, the number of lottery) of the special symbol per unit time, and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed by the player.

Further, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine in which the higher the set value is, the higher the expected ball output value is (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is), a large amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. Considering the possibility, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value becomes higher. In this case, the higher the set value with the higher expected ball output value, the longer the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time, all or at least one of them. However, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in unit hours.

Even when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the above-mentioned opening time, ending time, and jackpot gaming state, the game ball wins a prize in the starting port (first starting port 420, second starting port 440). When it is detected, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check process (see FIG. 188) in step S3074 and step S3082, which will be described later, is executed. When it is determined in this setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S3721 described later), even if it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. , The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[Deformation example of jackpot distribution and stop symbol of decorative symbol]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175, a first modification example and a second modification example regarding jackpot distribution (selection rate of the main symbol) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these first modification. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the 1st modification and the 2nd modification will be described. In the first modification and the second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. Note that FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a first modification example of the selection rate (big hit type determination table) of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, and FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the big hit determination of the special symbol. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity (big hit type determination table) of the main symbol when the result is a big hit. Further, FIG. 175 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[First modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 175. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 173 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 175 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the first modification, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. With probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 Decide on one of -8. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability change jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 10.0%). Minute probability 15.0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbols are set to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 (both are 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit types are common, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in Special Figure 1-6 and Special Figure 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7 as shown in FIG. 175. , Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 75) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at 0.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both 4R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, there is a high probability that the decorative symbol will stop in the second aspect (a mode having a higher expectation for the player than the first aspect).

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selection rate 50.) Regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-. The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, there is a high probability that the decorative symbol will stop in a specific mode (a mode having the highest expectation for the player).

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selection rate of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific mode is high.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is feasible to enable the stop mode of the decorative symbol to be different depending on the set value even if the jackpot type is the same. Become. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), it is assumed that the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

[Second modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 174 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modification, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the second modification, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. do not have. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a probability variation attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker is detected while being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the high probability gaming state, and the probabilistic attacker is reached. When the jackpot gaming state ends without the entry of the game ball being detected, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine controlled to the high-probability gaming state based on the entry of the gaming ball into the probabilistic attacker is also a so-called “probability-changing loop machine”.

As shown in FIG. 174, in the second modification, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the game ball is controlled in the jackpot game state in the mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker. Is controlled by. In this second embodiment, the number of time reductions when the jackpot is a big hit in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is 100 times, and the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". If it is a big hit at, the time reduction will continue until the next big hit game is executed.

In this second embodiment, the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball enters the probabilistic attacker while being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (almost). It is controlled to a low probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%). In addition, the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability change attacker" is a big hit game state as long as the game ball is fired toward the placement portion of the probability change attacker (for example, the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probabilistic attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high-probability gaming state with a probability of almost 100%). Therefore, in this second modification, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". The jackpot is called a "probability change jackpot".

However, if it is "a mode in which it is easy for a game ball to enter a probabilistic attacker", it is controlled to a high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "a mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a probabilistic attacker". Instead of being controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker when the mode is such that the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker. The mode may be controlled to a high probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the mode.

As a method of creating an aspect in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the probabilistic attacker and an aspect in which the game ball is easy to enter, for example, apart from the large winning opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 5) having the probabilistic attacker inside, the probabilistic attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another big winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-4, Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-8, Special Figure 2-2, Special Figure 2). In the case of -4), the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is controlled, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1). -5, Special Figure 1-7, Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3) By controlling the game to a big hit game state in which the other big prize openings are opened without opening the big prize opening 540. It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect as long as it is possible to create an aspect in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probabilistic attacker and an aspect in which the game ball is easy to enter.

Further, as described above, when a large winning opening 540 having a probabilistic attacker inside and another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a probabilistic attacker are provided, a large winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state. You may make the setting difference in the mouth. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easier to select a big hit game state in which other big winning openings are opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is easier than other big winning openings. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened, such as the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 174, in such a second modification, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1-4, Special Figure 1-5, Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-7, and It is decided to be one of the special figures 1-8. However, in this second modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability change jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 10.0%). Minute probability 15.0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbols are set to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 (both are 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit types are common, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in Special Figure 1-6 and Special Figure 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7 as shown in FIG. 175. , Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability change flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 75) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at 0.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both 4R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, there is a high probability that the decorative symbol will stop in the second aspect (a mode having a higher expectation for the player than the first aspect).

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selection rate 50.) Regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-. The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, there is a high probability that the decorative symbol will stop in a specific mode (a mode having the highest expectation for the player).

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selection rate of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpot), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific mode is high.

As described above, in the second modified example as well, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the jackpot type is the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make it possible for the stop mode of the symbol to be different. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the composite probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

In both the first modification and the second modification described above, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value by making the selection rate of the main symbol different according to the set value. is doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol is controlled according to the set value. The stop symbol of is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different depending on the set value by the control by the sub CPU 201.

According to the first modification and the second modification described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the time saving inrush rate. It will be possible.

[Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 197. However, in the following description (explanation of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[Power-on process]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 has a power-on processing (step S3010), a setting processing related to the set value (step S3020), and a game return processing (step S3030). ) And are executed in order. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when a power failure occurs or the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to an OFF operation of the power switch 35 or the like, Performs the processing when a power failure occurs, which will be described later.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (step S3011).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S3012), and then performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S3013). After that, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices having a built-in CPU (step S3014).

Next, the main CPU 101 activates the switch related to the set value (step S3015). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S3020, for example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 activates the switches related to the setting (step S3015), then performs a read process (step S3016) for each switch, and then performs a game permission process (step S3017).

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S3017 (see FIG. 177), the game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of the game, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. .. The game permission process (step S3017) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON (step S31710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag that identifies the status at the time of the previous power failure. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, there is a high possibility that the power is cut off before the setting change process is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game is allowed to be executed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure can be identified. In this second embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON until the power is cut. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power is cut off. Further, even when a power failure occurs during the abnormal state of steps S3722 to S3727 described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. In the initial state where the power has not been turned on yet, or when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long period of time, the power failure status identification flag is OFF. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S31710, the main CPU 101 moves to step S31720 when the power cut status identification flag is ON (YES in step S31710), and when the power cut status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S31710), the game permission flag. Is turned OFF (step S31750), and then the process proceeds to step S31720.

In step S31720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The check of this work area also includes a check of whether or not the set value data set is within the specified range (within the range of “0” to “5” in the second embodiment).

The work area of the main RAM 103 is a general work area in which data is cleared when the backup clear process described later is performed, and data is retained without being cleared in principle even when the backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. For example, performance display data, set value data, and the like are stored in this specific work area. It is the data which shows the set value. In this second embodiment, the set value data of "0" to "5" corresponds to each of the set values "1" to "6" in the six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S31730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if it is normal (YES in step S31730), it moves to step S31740, and if it is not normal, that is, it is abnormal (NO in step S31730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S31760), and then the process proceeds to step S31740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of “0” to “5” in this second embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S31740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S31740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S31710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S31730), the game permission flag is turned ON. Is determined to be. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or an abnormal state (NO in step S31710), and when the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S31730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31740), the game permission process is terminated. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31740), the process proceeds to step S31770.

In this specification, the power failure that occurs during the normal game, the power failure that occurs during the setting confirmation process, and the power failure that occurs during the setting change process are regarded as normal power failures, and are defined as normal power failures, and steps S3722 to S3727 described later. The power failure that occurs in the above is regarded as an abnormal power failure.

In step S31770, whether or not the power of the main CPU 101 is turned on (the operation of turning on the power switch 35 is performed) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. When it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S31770), the process proceeds to step S31780, and when the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S31770), the process proceeds to step S31810.

In step S31780, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780). And step S31790, and if the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S31810.

In step S31790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S31800.

As described above, even if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31740), the main CPU 101 turns on the setting key switch signal (NO in step S31740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the previous power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. If YES in step S31770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S31790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the game permission flag is turned ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

In step S31800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process, which will be described later, needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S31810, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. When the main CPU 101 performs the process of step S31810, the game permission process ends. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the hall personnel are not in a state where the game can be executed by checking the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 (the game permission flag is OFF). Is). In this second embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, only when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key switch 328 is ON-operated, the game is played. It is possible to set the permission flag to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. In the above, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S31810 is performed. However, instead of this, the condition of returning to step S31740 and turning on the game permission flag after performing the process of step S31810. Is satisfied (in FIG. 178, YES is determined in step S31780), the processes of steps S31740 to S31810 may be looped.

[Setting process]
FIG. 179 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S3020 (see FIG. 176), and FIG. 179 (b) is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S3020. The difference between FIG. 179 (a) and FIG. 179 (b) is that the process when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF in step S3021 (NO in step S3021) is different, and other processes (step). The processing of S3022 to step S3028) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the main CPU 101 first determines in step S3021 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. The main CPU 101 moves to step S3022 when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S3021), and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3021), the setting change process (step S3024) and the setting confirmation process (step S3024). The setting process ends without executing any of steps S3026).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S3023), the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S3024) and turns on the setting key switch signal (YES in step S3022). ) And the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S3023), the setting confirmation process (step S3026) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S3024) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S3026) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S3027), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S3028) and changes the setting (step S3028). The setting process is terminated without executing either S3024) or the setting confirmation process (step S3026). If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S3027), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S3028 (setting change). The process (step S3024) and the setting confirmation process (step S3026) are also not executed).

That is, if the previous power failure is a normal power failure that occurred during the normal game or the setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, it is determined as YES in step S3021. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S3024) and a setting confirmation process (step S3026) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S3028) is executed. If the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S3024), the setting confirmation process (step S3026), and the backup clear flag process (step S3028). The game returns to the game return process (step S3030) without executing any of the above, and after the game return process (step S3030) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, even if the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure or the previous power failure is a normal power failure, if the power failure occurs during the setting change process, it is determined as NO in step S3021. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S3024) and a setting confirmation process (step S3026) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. And, the setting process is terminated without executing any of the backup clear flag ON (step S3028). Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S31770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780). (That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and controlled to the setting change state), the set value is confirmed. Only in the case, the setting change process (step S3024) is executed to move to the game return process of step S3030, and after this game return process (step S3030) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S3024) and the setting confirmation process (step S3026) are performed. ) And the backup clear flag process (step S3028) are not executed, and the game returns to the game return process (step S3030). However, in this game return process (step S3030), the abnormal time process (see step S3038 in FIG. 183 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 179 (a), if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the power is turned on. Either the setting change process (step S3024), the setting confirmation process (step S3026), or the backup clear flag ON (step S3028) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 at that time or the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in other examples of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 179 (b), when a power failure occurs during the setting change process and / or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure. In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S3024) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. You may do so. If a power failure occurs during the setting change process or if the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on By forcibly executing the setting change process (step S3024) regardless of this, when the power is turned on without operating the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a decision.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 179 (a), if NO is determined in step S3021, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. It is finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 179 (b), if NO is determined in step S3021, neither the operation status of the setting key 328 nor the operation status of the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 is determined. The change process (step S3024) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and regardless of the determination result, the setting process is terminated or the setting change process (step S3024). May be executed.

[Setting change processing]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process may be terminated with the same setting value as the set setting value. .. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S32410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S32410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S31790 (see FIG. 178) when the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON. Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S32410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32420 and executes the backup clear process. This backup clear process will be described later.

After executing the backup clear process in step S32420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S32430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in a register, and moves to step S32440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing from the start to the end of the setting change process.

In step S32440, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323. The setting change security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S32450, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays the set value "4" corresponding to the set value data "3". However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set correspond to each other, the number does not necessarily have to be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data "0" to "5" are associated with "A" to "F", respectively, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, "3", the corresponding "D" is used. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In this step 2450, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but it is determined in advance because the previous data is discarded. The initial value (for example, "1") may be displayed. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on for the first time, the main CPU 101 has a performance display monitor 334 such as a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8"). It may be controlled so that it is displayed in. When the main CPU 101 displays a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S32510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. You may do it.

In step S32460, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can know that the setting change process is in progress by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S32470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S32470), the process proceeds to step S32510.

In step S32510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S32510), the process proceeds to step S32520 and the set value stored in the register. After updating the data, the process returns to step S32440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S32510), the process returns to step S32440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless it is YES in step S32470), steps S32510, step S32520, and steps S32440 to S32470 are looped (step S32510, step S32520, step). The process from S32440 to step S32470 is repeated).

When the setting switch 332 is pressed (determined as YES in step S32510), the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in the subsequent step S32450. ..

Further, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register is set to "0" to "5". (If the setting switch 332 is pressed while the set value data is "5", it returns to "0"). As a result, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased from "5" to "0", or the circulation may be increased and circulated depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. It may be possible to perform both reduction and reduction.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S32470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32480. Moving to step S32480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of step S32510, step S32520, and steps S32440 to S32470.

In step S32480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S32480 is executed, the set value is fixed. That is, in the setting change process, the set value is determined based on the execution of the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determined as YES in step S32470), and the setting key switch signal is turned off. If the setting switch 332 is only pressed without executing (step S32510, step S32520, and step S32440 to step S32470), the setting value data stored in the register is only updated. The set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Even if the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S32470) in step S32470 and then the setting key 328 is returned again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). The set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when the operation of returning the setting key 328 is performed again after the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S32470) in step S32470), the main CPU 101 is set to be stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal is turned off.

By the way, the operation status and backup of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on after the power is turned on (when the power is restored) when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure. When the setting change process (see FIG. 180) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the press operation of the clear switch 330 (the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 179 (b)). The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned on (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). As described above, when the setting change process (step S3024) is executed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 uses the setting key in step S32470. It is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then turned OFF without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470). Move to S32480 (determine the set value). In this case, the main CPU 101 detects that the setting key switch signal is turned on, and further detects that the setting key switch signal is turned off, so that it can be determined as YES in step S32480. Alternatively, even if it is not detected that the setting key switch signal is turned on, it may be determined as YES in step S32480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal is turned from ON to OFF. In the above, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is stated that the setting change process is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. In addition, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure recovery is performed in the setting change state when the power failure occurs (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, and then the state is maintained. At the time of recovery from power failure, the process of returning to the held state may be executed regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from power failure).

In step S32490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S32500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. End the process.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S32470) in step S32470, it is a command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed. The initialization command will be sent to the sub CPU 201.

When the setting change process of step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is completed, the setting process of step S3020 (see FIG. 176) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176).

If the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is executed, the game can be executed for a certain period after the game is started, or the game. Information that suggests that the setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of, information that suggests that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change process, the setting value has been changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process (for example, the setting value has been changed by two or more steps such as setting 6 to setting 4). The information related to the setting change process, such as information suggesting that there is a possibility, may be displayed on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the effect or decorative pattern performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like different between when the setting change process is executed and when the setting change process is not executed, or to make the setting value higher by the setting change process. It is possible to make it different when it is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, and when the setting value is changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed by multiple steps or more. May be.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting change security signal and the period during which the setting changing code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end process of the setting change process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. Further, a command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S3024 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in step S32510, or when the process of step S32480 is executed. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, etc. may be notified that the setting is being changed, that the setting value has been changed, that the setting change has been completed, and the like. ..

[Backup clear process]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear process in step S32420 (see FIG. 180). This backup clear process is a process of clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear process, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

First, the main CPU 101 determines in step S32421 whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S32421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S32421), step S32422. Move to.

In step S32422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear process was executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, the work area of the main RAM 103 should be cleared together with the backup clear process executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. In this backup clear process, it may be only partially cleared.

In the process of step S32422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. To. Further, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game permission flag is turned off and the game is permitted unless the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 180) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

In step S32423, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S32424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF and ends the backup clear process. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is, for example, a command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 180), in step S32450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the setting value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Set notification. Similarly to this, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, it is preferable to set the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S3026 (see FIG. 179) is a process for confirming the set value. The set value is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S32610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S32610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S32610), the main CPU 101 moves to step S32620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S32630, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating the set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays "4" corresponding to the set value data "3" as information indicating the set value.

In step S32640, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting confirmation process is in progress by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S32650, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S32650), the process returns to step S32620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless it is YES in step S32650), the processes of steps S32620 to S32650 are looped (the processes of steps S32620 to S32650 are repeated). It will be.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S32650 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32650), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32660. When the process proceeds to step S32660, the main CPU 101 ends each process from step S32620 to step S32650.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S32650) in step S32650, a power failure recovery command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed in step S37 described later. Will be done.

In step S32660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S32670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and performs setting confirmation processing. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process of step S3026 (see FIG. 179) is completed, the setting process of step S3020 (see FIG. 176) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176).

[Game return processing]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176), a process of returning to a state in which the game can be executed is performed on the premise that the game permission flag is ON. The game return process will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines in step S3031 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3031), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormality processing in step S3038. This abnormal processing will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S3031), the main CPU 101 moves to step S3032 and performs a process of activating all the switches.

In step S3033, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S3033), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S3034.

In step S3034, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON. If the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S3034), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3035. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If a power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power failure occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S3035 is performed.

In step S3035, the main CPU 101 performs the initial setting of the work area that requires the initial value at the time of restoration of the power failure.

Next, in step S3036, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power failure is a high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs a notification setting indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S3037, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also contains the setting value information about the set value that is set. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S3030 (see FIG. 176), and a series of power-on processes are completed. This makes it possible to execute the game. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure recovery has occurred or a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S3033 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S3033), the main CPU 101 shifts to the backup clear process in step S3039. Since this backup clear process is the same as the backup clear process (backup clear process shown in FIG. 181) in step S32420 shown in FIG. 180, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear process in step S3039 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S3040 and performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when the RWM (main RAM 103) is initialized.

Next, in step S3041, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S3030 (see FIG. 176), and a series of power-on processes are completed. This makes it possible to execute the game. The above initialization command is a command indicating that the setting change processing is completed (the backup clear processing is also executed) or a command indicating that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed. Function.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end process of the setting confirmation process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

[Processing when abnormal]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of abnormality. As described above, the abnormal processing in step S3038 (see FIG. 183) is executed when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF (NO in step S3031) in the processing in step S3031 (see FIG. 183). It is a process.

First, in step S3381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the sub CPU 201 receives an abnormal command, it determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to send an abnormal command. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective when it cannot receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may try to do it.

In step S3382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323.

In step S3383, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the game cannot be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S3384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. Then, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S3384), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3385 and executes a power failure occurrence process. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S3384), the main CPU 101 loops from step S3382 to step S3384 (the processes of steps S3382 to S3384 are repeated).

[Processing when power is cut off]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, it performs a process when a power failure occurs.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S33851). Then, a checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S33852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly held at the time of power recovery. In this way, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to retain various game data stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power failure status identification flag in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S33853). That is, as described above, if the power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process, the main CPU 101 identifies the situation at the time of the power failure. Set the flag to ON and set it to OFF if it occurs during the setting change process.

When the main CPU 101 finishes the processes of steps S33851 to S33853, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S33854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of the power supply.

When the game permission flag is OFF in this way, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. It has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process when a power failure occurs is started, it is possible to recover from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but when the processing when a power failure occurs is entered, the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process is entered when the power is cut off due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop shown in FIG. 185 is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main CPU 101 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

In addition, instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103), a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is an advantage that a constant power supply is not required to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constantly supplying electric power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is cut off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area, so that the load required for these processes can be reduced.

[Flow of power-on processing as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process as seen from the operator (for example, a person related to the hall) will be briefly described.

[Flow of setting change process]
First, the setting change process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value, it is first necessary to perform a power off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned ON.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled and the setting is changed. The process is started and the settings can be changed.

When the setting change process is started, the error notification monitor 336 displays the setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands at the time of initializing the RWM). When transmission) is executed, a voice indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the display indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is not performed, but the liquid crystal display device 16 displays that the backup clear processing has been executed in place of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24. It may be displayed in the area.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is displayed in a circular increase. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but when the set value is "6", the information indicates the setting switch 332. When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

When the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state ends and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting changing code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

In this way, during the setting change process, only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled among all the switches, and all the other switches remain disabled. .. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[Flow of setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process executed on the condition that the game permission flag is ON internally, and is not executed when the game permission flag is OFF internally.

In order to confirm the set value, the setting key 328 is turned ON while the power is not turned on, provided that the game permission flag is ON internally, and the backup clear clear switch 330 is used. The power switch 35 is turned on without pressing.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 is enabled among all the switches, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. Will be.

When the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Appears and all switch operations are enabled.

As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, in the setting confirmation process, the process may be a process that can be executed during a normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[Flow in abnormal processing]

As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally turned off, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear clear switch 330 is pressed. However, if the operation for executing the setting confirmation process is performed without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35, the backup process that does not involve the setting change process (details will be described later) is performed, or just If only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the error processing is executed. The flow of processing at the time of abnormality will be described below.

After turning on the power switch 35, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and then only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled (internal). The processing at the time of abnormality is started). The reason why the operation related to the setting is enabled is to enable the game permission flag to be turned ON by executing the setting change process.

When the error processing is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating that the error has occurred.

Furthermore, when the abnormal processing is started, the operations related to the setting are also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal processing is started, no response is made regardless of which operation is executed, and the pachinko game is in a state where the game can be executed unless the above-mentioned setting change processing is performed after turning off the power switch 35. The machine cannot be restored. It should be noted that the invalidation of the operation of all switches means that each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, and each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example,). LED25) includes those in a controllable state.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S3051).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S3052).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S3053. The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 187.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S3054).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S3055).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S3056). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer 700, and the like. To.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the value of each saved register (step S3057). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection process]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S3061). The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 188.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S3062). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S3063). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S3064). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game (not shown) is based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the ball passage detector (not shown). Random value) is extracted. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (step S3071). When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (YES in step S3071), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3052. When the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 421 (NO in step S3071), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3081.

In step S3072, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S3073, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S3074). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S3074), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3075. When the reserved number is four (NO in step S3074), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the process of step S3080.

In step S3075, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. (Step S3076). As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the starting condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S3077). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination for the first special symbol are based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S3078). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172), and selects the variation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , Perform the process of determination.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 172, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process. The pattern specification command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (step S3079). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S3078. Is sent.

In step S3080, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold number overflow command for the first start opening winning, and proceeds to step S3081. The hold quantity overflow command for the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the first start opening prize has been given when the hold number of the first special symbol is the upper limit (for example, 4), and the command is sent to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 188, the reason why the hold number overflow command for the first start opening prize is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is that the set value data is normally determined in the setting check process in step S3072 described later. Is a prerequisite.

In step S3081, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S3081). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (YES in step S3081), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3082. When the game ball is not detected by the second start opening switch 441 (NO in step S3081), the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

In step S3082, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as in step S3072.

In step S3083, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S3084). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S3084), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3085. When the reserved number is four (NO in step S3084), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S3085, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. (Step S3086). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S3087). The second special stop symbol determination process is also the same as the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the random number value for symbol determination extracted for the second special symbol, and the second special symbol. With reference to the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the jackpot selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S3088). This variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above, as in step S3078, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). Then, as a result of the jackpot determination, a process of selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces for the second start opening winning (step S3089). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S3088. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

If the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check process in step S3072 or the setting check process in step S3082 is performed. You may try to do only one of them.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441 (YES in step S3081), the number of reserved second start opening prizes is four (NO in step S3084). Even so, the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 without transmitting the hold number overflow command of the second starting opening winning to the sub control circuit 200. The start opening prize detection process has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[Setting check process]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101, and this setting check process is the same process in step S3072 and step S3082 (both see FIG. 188). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set setting value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S31720 (see FIG. 178) may be performed, but in this second embodiment, the set settings are set. The emphasis is on checking if the values are normal.

As shown in the figure, first, in step S3721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the second embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the setting value data corresponding to the setting values “1” to “6”. Therefore, here, the setting value data is stored. Is determined to be within the range of "0" to "5". When the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S3721), the setting check process is terminated. If the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S3721), the process proceeds to step S3722.

In step S3722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S3723.

In step S3723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is in the variable display (YES in step S3723), the process proceeds to step S3724, and when it determines that the special symbol is not in the variable display (NO in step S3723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3725.

In step S3724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S3078 or step S3088 (both see FIG. 188) with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172) has elapsed. The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S3726.

For example, if a game ball wins a prize in the start ports 5442 and 440 while the special symbol variation display is being performed by the main CPU 101, the step is performed during the variation display of the special symbol (before the variation display of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S3072 (or step S3082) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol being displayed is not displayed even if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Even), the game permission flag is turned off, and abnormal processing is executed. In this case, the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off and the setting change process is executed. Therefore, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol in the variable display is cleared in the backup clear process including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S3726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, it is controlled so that power is not supplied from the payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) to the launch solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired and it is impossible to play the game.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball in step S3726, the main CPU 101 shifts to the abnormality processing in step S3727.

In step S3725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, even if the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. When the main CPU 101 finishes the process of step S3725, the main CPU 101 moves to step S3726.

In the abnormality processing in step S3727, the main CPU 101 performs the same processing as the abnormality processing in step S3038 (see FIG. 183). That is, the processes of steps S3381 to S3384 shown in FIG. 184 are performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence process of step S3385, that is, the figure. The processes of steps S33851 to S33854 shown in 185 are performed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 If the set value data stored in is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the set value data is not normal, it becomes impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. Unable to play the game. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed, for example, in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S3721 that the set value data is not appropriate, even if the variation display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless it is input and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 regarding the above hold will be cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data on hold are based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 or the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, all of them are used. It will be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various data related to the hold from being processed based on the abnormal set value, and it is possible to improve the security.

Further, as described above, the setting check process is the same in step S3072 and step S3082 (see FIG. 188). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S3072) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S3721), the main CPU 101 is set in step S3724. Prohibits the stoppage of the second special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S3082) performed when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S3721), the setting value data is also determined in step S3724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol is the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S3072) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S3721), in step S3725. , The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is reserved is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S3082) performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S3721), the setting value data is also determined in step S3725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is reserved is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Further, in this second embodiment, the setting check process is performed not only when the power is turned on (see step S31730 in FIG. 178) but also when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. Not limited to this, for example, during the setting confirmation process (see step S3024 in FIG. 179), during the setting change process (see step S3026 in FIG. 179), and when the backup clear process is executed (see FIG. 181), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. When is started, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, when the passage is detected by the passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9), when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, etc. The processing may be performed. The above predetermined timing is an example list. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or part of the above timings). Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, the game permission flag is immediately turned off and the game is advanced regardless of whether or not the jackpot game state is in progress. However, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process and the timing at which the game cannot be executed may be staggered. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable to perform various judgment processes (for example, big hit judgment process) in a state where the set value data is not normal, the change display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time without performing various judgment processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol by losing it.

Although not shown in FIG. 189, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S3722, it is preferable that the normal symbol is also prohibited from stopping if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. .. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a main control main process by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S3091). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S3092). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S3093). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 191.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S3094). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 197.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S3095). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, depending on the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S3093 and S3094. A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 74). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S3096). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S3097). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S3092.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 191, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S3101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S3102 to S110 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S3102 to S110 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S3102 to S110. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 186) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S3102). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, and the number of pending items is not “0”. (When there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained in the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S3093) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 192.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S3103). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag is set to the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S3104) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S3103 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S3104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is determined when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S3103 has elapsed. Determine if the result is a "big hit". When the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S3105) described later in the control state flag, and sets the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the jackpot start interval management process described later is executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S3104 has elapsed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S3110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S3105). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and is large when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S3104 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S3106), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S3106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S3107) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the residual ball in the large winning opening set in step S3107 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S3107). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3107 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the jackpot end interval process described later is executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S3108). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S3106) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S3109). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, and the value indicating the special symbol game end process when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed after the process of step S3109. When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-8, and Special Figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 controls to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. , When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, and the special figure 2-1 the control to set the gaming state to the low probability gaming state (probability change flag OFF) is performed. conduct.

Next, when the big hit game state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process (step S3110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of pending numbers (start storage information) by “1”. do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the variation of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S3110, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S3102) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the jackpot gaming state and the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 sets the control status flags to "00", "01", "02", and "08". Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S3102), special symbol variation time management process (step S3103), special symbol display time management process (step S3104), and special symbol game end process (step S3110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", "03". do. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S3102), special symbol variation time management process (step S3103), special symbol display time management process (step S3104), and jackpot start interval management process (step S3105). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S3106), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S3107), and large winning opening reopening waiting time management processing (step S3108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S3106), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S3107), big hit end interval processing (step S3109), and special symbol game end processing (step S3110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 197 described later) in step S3094 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 190 also branches the process flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the second embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in the second embodiment as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S3111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S3112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S3112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S3112), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3113.

In step S3113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the reserved number of the second starting opening prize is "0" (YES in step S3113), the process proceeds to the process of step S3114, and the reserved number of the second starting opening winning is not "0". If it is determined (NO in step S3113), the process proceeds to step S3121.

In step S3114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the reserved number of the first starting opening prize is not "0" (NO in step S3114), the process proceeds to the process of step S3115, and the holding number of the first starting opening winning is "0". If it is determined (YES in step S3114), the process proceeds to step S3120.

In step S3115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the first start opening winnings. In this second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Therefore, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is pending. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four reserved fluctuation displays (reserved balls) of the first special symbol is performed. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. Is included.

Next, in step S3116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3117.

In step S3117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S3118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is extracted at the time of winning the start opening, and is set to the jackpot determination random value previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot judgment table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a "big hit" or a "miss" (big hit determination) based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S3119, the main CPU 101 sets in the waiting time timer the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S3078 or step S3088 (both see FIG. 188). .. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S3120, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S3121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings. In this second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Therefore, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed or is pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variation display (reserved ball) of the second special symbol is performed. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the second start port 440. Is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S3122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3117, executes the processes of steps S3118 and S3119, and then ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S3131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S3131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S3131), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3132.

In step S3132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the variation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S3132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S3132), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3133.

In step S3133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S3133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S3133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3140.

In step S3134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3135.

In step S3135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction number counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3136.

In step S3136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S3137).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S3138). As a result, the jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 169, FIG. 173 or FIG. 174), and the upper limit of the number of rounds corresponding to the special symbol (type of the symbol designation command) (upper limit of the number of open winning openings). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S3139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S3140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S3141). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[Time reduction number subtraction process]
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S3151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction becomes 0. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S3151), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S3151), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, the number of times set as the time reduction counter is 100 times or 10000 times.

In step S3152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S3153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S3153), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3154. When the value of the time reduction number counter is not 0 (NO in step S3153), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

In step S3154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as a time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S3161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S3161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S3161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3162.

In step S3162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S3162), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S3162), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3163.

In step S3163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S3164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S3165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S3166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S3166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3167. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S3166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3174.

In step S3167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step S3168). If it is a probabilistic jackpot (YES in step S3168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3169. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S3168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3171.

In step S3169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S3171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction counter (step S3172). In this second embodiment, with reference to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 169, FIG. 173 or FIG. 174), the jackpot with 100 time reductions (for example, Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 2) When it is (-1, etc.), 100 times are set in the time reduction counter, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8, special figure 2). -2 etc.), set 10000 times to the time reduction counter. However, the reduction of working hours continues until the next big hit game state is executed. The time reduction counter set when the jackpot is a big hit is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall. Any number of times that cannot occur realistically will do. In this way, by setting the number of times that cannot actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall in the time reduction counter, the time reduction is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. Will be done. Furthermore, when the jackpot is 100 times of time reduction, counter processing is performed (100 times is set in the time reduction counter), and when the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game state is executed, flag processing is performed. (As long as the time saving flag is ON, the time saving game state is continued).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S3173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 196. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S3174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF.

In step S3175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S3175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S3181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S3181), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S3182. When the power is not turned on (NO in step S3181), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S3183.

In step S3182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). The table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S3183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S3183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S3183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3185.

In step S3184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is OFF (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172).

In step S3185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172).

[Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 197 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S3191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S3192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any process of steps S3162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S3162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 186) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S3192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol, and the number of reserved symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S3193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is executed after the determined normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed by the process of step S3192.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S3193). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S3194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed by the process of step S3193.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S3194). In this process, the main CPU 101 is a big hit when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S3193 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S3195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag (step S3195). "03") is set. That is, by this process, it is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S3195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the big hit determination is determined to be "big hit" in step S3194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S3195). In this process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes while the normal electric accessory 460 is being opened when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S3196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S3196). In this process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of pending fluctuation display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. To update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S3196, the above-mentioned normal symbol storage check process (step S3192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 will execute the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process by the sub CPU 201. The main process of this sub control circuit is a process started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 198, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S3201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S3202). The watchdog timer is set to a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) at the time of starting, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power failure process is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the operation means input process (step S3203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the command analysis process (step S3204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect mode determination process (step S3205). The effect mode determination process is a process for determining the effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the above effect mode determination process (step S3205) also includes a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value. This setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the overflow points of the first start winning opening, and when the pending number overflow command of the first starting opening winning is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, 1 is added to the overflow points of the first starting winning opening. do. Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines that the setting suggestion effect is executed in the above-mentioned effect mode determination process. In a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is OFF, such as in a normal gaming state, it is not easy to win a game ball in the first starting opening 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's disappointment cannot be measured. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player without directly causing a loss to the hole by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state. It will be possible. In addition, some players interrupt the launch of the game ball when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this respect, it is possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball of the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the overflow point of the first start winning opening reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggestion effect is not necessarily limited to this, and the first start winning opening winning is performed. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the hold quantity overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to guess only once. For example, it is difficult to guess the setting only from the information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to guess the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

Further, as described above, the hold number overflow command for the first start opening winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 on the premise that the set value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process in step S3072. be. Therefore, when it is not determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is exceeded the holding upper limit. , Sub CPU 201 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the first starting winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, a predetermined point) when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. When the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit at 49 points with respect to 50 points), the setting check process of step S3072 (FIG. 188). If it is determined that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, making it impossible to proceed with the game. ..

Further, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 188), on condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is the same as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make a suggestion effect.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the sub CPU 201 may select a specific winning opening among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all of which are, for example, see FIG. 5), for example. Randomly decided by lottery. Then, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 during the execution of the reach effect, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect. For example, among the players, there is a player who interrupts the launch of the game ball when the reach effect with a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. Further, in the reach production, it may be immediately found that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, the player may not start the variable display next time until the reach effect is completed, and the interest may be reduced. In this respect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. Moreover, if the person in charge of managing the gaming machine can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine in which he / she plays the game is low. According to the example of, such a fear can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the specific winning opening is randomly determined from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (all of which, for example, see FIG. 5), for example, by lottery. It is preferable to keep it confidential without disclosing which is a specific winning opening. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning openings are the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all of which are, for example, see FIG. 5). Among them, for example, it is decided at random by lottery, but it is not always limited to randomly determining a specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as a specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect, but the main CPU 101 may determine.

If the game ball wins in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 (both refer to FIG. 188) is performed if the specific winning opening is the starting opening. Will be. The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined to be normal in the above setting check process (YES in step S3721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the above setting check process (NO in step S3721), it not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect, but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner by the process of step S734. do. Further, even if the sub CPU 201 is in the process of changing the decorative symbol accompanied by the reach effect, the variable effect of the decorative symbol is continued. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the voice control circuit 205, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S3206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes the drawing control process (step S3207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes the voice control process (step S3208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes a control process regarding the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S3209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes the accessory control process (step S3210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S3201 is completed, each process of steps S3202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) (step S3241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S3242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data has no errors or omissions.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S3243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of effect (whether or not there is a dialogue notice, whether or not there is a SU notice, etc.) is selected as the effect pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process that is separately made into a subroutine. In this second embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. It has become.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the setting check process is performed in step S3072 and step S3082 (see FIG. 188) during the execution of the game, and the set value data is "0" to "0" in this setting check process. If it is not within the range of "5" (NO in step S3721 of FIG. 189), the processing of steps S3722 to S3726 is executed, and then the processing at the time of abnormality in step S3727 is executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the setting check process in step S3072 or step S3082 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the set value data is "0" even though the setting check process is not executed in step S3072 or step S3082, or the set value may have been changed illegally. ”To“ 5 ”(for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S3721), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbol at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, and the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. A command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the sub CPU 201 that has received this command determines the suitability of the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "this time set value") indicated by the command received this time. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “previous set value”) indicated by the command received last time and the set value this time match.

Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and if the previous set value and the current set value do not match, the set value is abnormal. Is determined.

Further, when the received set value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes the set value abnormality processing. In this abnormal execution process, for example, an image notifying that the set value is abnormal is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and in place of or in addition to this, the setting value is abnormal. It is a process to output the voice to be notified.

The suitability determination of the above-mentioned set value information is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, all of the set value information received three times or more match. It may be determined whether or not the setting value information is present, or some of the setting value information received multiple times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received two times before and the setting value this time) match. It may be determined whether or not it is present. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S3024 in FIG. 179) has been executed, the setting value is stored in the work RAM 203 this time. However, it does not determine whether or not the past setting value including the previous setting value and the current setting value match.

Further, it is preferable to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (adequacy determination of the set value information) not only during the execution of the game but also when the power is turned on after the power is cut off as long as the setting change process is not executed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 213.

The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S3204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[Command transmission process]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S3251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the direct table registration process (step S3252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the corresponding direct table in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 202.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the message transmission process (step S3253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 203.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S3261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence / absence of system operation (step S3262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S3263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (step S3264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direct table registration process]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a direct table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a single table (step S3271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S3272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S3273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S3274). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

[Message sending process]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is performed (step S3281).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary direct table after the message transmission is completed (step S3282). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Expandability of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, etc.) are set according to the set values. The time saving inrush rate) was changed, but it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of these may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "normal hit"), the normal electric accessory 46 is used. It goes from closed to open for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the open state to the closed state (that is, the launch timing of the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the launch timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of notifying the launch timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S3039) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. Since this backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S3024) is executed, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always performed. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process is set. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, the game is set to a high-probability game state until a predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed variable a predetermined number of times), and the game state is low after the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed. In a pachinko gaming machine (so-called "ST machine") that shifts to a stochastic gaming state, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to a high probabilistic gaming state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change process is performed. When the backup clear process is performed without the above, the probability change flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probability change flag is set to ON (the rest of the high probability gaming state). You may try to keep the memory of the number of games). Furthermore, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the ON setting of the probability change flag is continued, and when the setting value is different from the previous time. May set the probability change flag to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the big winning opening 540 is opened when the count of the gaming balls winning in the big winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls. When either of the conditions when the state time reaches 30 sec is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the big winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions are prepared in which the large winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state (for example, a plurality of games with different expected values that allow the large winning opening 540 to win a game ball during one round). (Preparing conditions), and by changing the conditions according to the set value, it may be easier to select the condition having the higher expected value as the set value is higher. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the large winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the higher the setting value is, the longer the opening time of the large winning opening 540 is likely to be. Be done. In addition, by changing the count of the game balls from which the large winning opening 540 is closed from the open state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the setting value, the more the number of game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to make it.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in the normal hit mode, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, but it is normal. By making the time (opening time) for the electric accessory 46 to be in the open state different according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the normal electric accessory 46 may be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the jackpot is a jackpot in which the probability change flag is turned on as in Special Figure 1-2 and Special Figure 1-4, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the next jackpot game is performed. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is executed, but it is not always limited to this, and when the gaming ball wins a prize at a specific timing (for example, the first starting port 420 / second starting port 440, a variable display of a special symbol is displayed. A transition lottery for whether or not to transition from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed at the time when the special symbol is suspended or when the variable display of the special symbol is started). In this case, the transition probability from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state differs according to the set value, so that the higher the setting value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability gaming state (from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state). (Lower the probability of transition to). In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, for example, a setting check process (step S3072, step S3082) is performed at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. When it is determined that the check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), the result of the transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S32420) by executing the setting change process (step S3024) (the probability change flag is also OFF). Is set to).

As described above, in this second embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction inrush rate) are set according to the set values. Although the pachinko gaming machine is described so as to be changed, the setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a partial configuration may be changed. An example of another extension with a partial configuration changed will be described below. The configurations not particularly mentioned in the description of the following other extended examples are the same as the configurations of the second embodiment, but in the following, the reference numerals are given to each member such as the main CPU except for the step number. Not attached.

[Expansion example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the high-probability game is started until the next jackpot gaming state is started. A so-called "probability variable loop machine" in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the jackpot gaming state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number") can be different depending on the set value (such a gaming machine is a "limiter"). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. 204. Note that FIG. 204 is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the expansion example 1 has a loop count checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a limiter count for drawing a limiter count when the loop count is 0. The lottery means, the loop number counting means that increments the number of loops when the number of loops is within the specified range (within the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the number of loops is the specified value (5, which is the upper limit of the limiter in this example). If this is the case, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the jackpot game state ends to a low probability state, and the loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value are provided. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, at the start of the big hit game state, during the big hit game state, or at the end of the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 204, in setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and three times with a probability of 25%. There is a 15% chance that it will be decided 4 times, and a 5% chance that it will be decided 5 times. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 25% probability, twice with a 25% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 20% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 15% probability, twice with a 25% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 20% probability. It is decided to be decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 15% probability, twice with a 20% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 25% probability. It is decided to be decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 5%, twice with a probability of 20%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 25%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 5%, twice with a probability of 10%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 30%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expectation that the number of limiters will be determined.

In this way, by making the expectation for the number of limiters different according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, one chance (big hit). It is possible to make the amount of prize balls given to the player different according to the set value in the opportunity until the player is controlled to the low probability gaming state when he wins once. Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters differs depending on the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the set value from being guessed by the player depending on the number of limiters. It has become.

In the above extended example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installed value, but the lottery is not always essential, and for example, although there is a concern that the set value may be guessed by the player, the setting value is set. The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for 1 and 2, 4 times for settings 3 and 4, and 5 times for settings 5 and 6.

The number of limiters described above may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, when the number of times of the above limiter is separately determined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the number of first limiters for the first special symbol is set. Is determined, and when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is controlled during the above loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is not incremented, and the number of second limiters for the second special symbol is not incremented. To decide. In this case, the loop may be terminated (controlled to a low probability gaming state) when either the first limiter count or the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, or the first limiter count and the second limiter count may be terminated. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of times of the above limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The number of limiters is determined when is a big hit, and when the loop is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the loop is performed. Increment the number of times. Then, when the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 1 is a so-called probabilistic loop machine, but it does not necessarily have to be a probabilistic loop machine. For example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine". You can also do it. The "ST machine" controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number of times"). It is a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the variable display of the special symbol (referred to as) is performed, and when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be different depending on the set value. That is, the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that one chance (the chance of being controlled to the low-probability gaming state when one big hit is won). ), It is possible to make the prize ball amount given to the player different according to the set value.

In the so-called "ST machine", the "ST number of times" can be set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), but the number of STs can be changed according to the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the "ST machine" may determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and setting 6 By setting the number to 75, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of STs. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of STs is different depending on the set value, it is preferable to make the number of time reductions common to all the set values. For example, when the expected value of the number of STs or the number of STs is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. , It is conceivable to set the number of time reductions to, for example, 60 times, which is common to all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect of grasping that the game is in a high-probability gaming state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games) on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games. Regardless of whether or not the game is in the high-probability gaming state, it is preferable to perform an effect in which it is difficult to grasp the high-probability gaming state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. This makes it possible to make the ST number of times and the expected value of the ST number of times different according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, a setting check process (step S3072, step S3082) is performed, for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), even during the loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The number of loops does not reach the number of limiters, and the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S32420) by executing the setting change process (step S3024) (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[Expansion Example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 2 has a specific area in which a specific mouth is provided. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 2, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving gaming state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. Based on the small hit game execution means for executing the small hit game to be opened from the beginning and the game ball winning a prize in the specific area which is the open mode due to the execution of the small hit game, via the payout / launch control circuit. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

Further, in the extended example 2, the number of time reductions is set to, for example, 5 times, and a specific opening is provided in the specific area. Then, for example, when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening as a normal hit in a time-saving game state of 5 times, a predetermined movable piece operates and a specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific mouth, the main CPU executes the big hit game. Further, when the normal hit is not obtained in the time-saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time-saving game state and controls to the non-time-saving game state. In the short-time game state, the game is played by right-handed firing toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time-saving game state, the left-handed game is fired toward the left side area of the game area. A game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the extended example 2, at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game is made different according to the set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly performed, for example, a time-saving gaming state. In the above, it is possible to make the opening frequency of a specific area and thus the payout different according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and setting 6. To make it a quarter. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of winning the game ball in the specific area, and by extension, it becomes possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability change flag may be set to ON in the time-saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability change flag to ON.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize in the first start port or the second start port while the special symbol variation display is performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is also executed in this case. .. When the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the above small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit.

[Expansion example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 2-2 includes a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU makes a big hit determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening, and wins the game ball to the second starting opening. Based on this, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed.

Further, the main CPU is in the first gaming state (for example, the probability change flag) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. And the second game state (for example, the probability change flag is ON) in which both the time saving flag is set to OFF and the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed. It is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states including (an advantageous game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF). In this pachinko gaming machine, if a jackpot is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the second gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, a normal drawing gate is provided in the right side area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. When the result of this ordinary lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), which facilitates winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Will be done. Therefore, when the game is played by firing the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, the second start port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area and the game is played. The frequency of winning game balls is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to a set value, and when the result of this jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is used for a plurality of rounds. A first jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a number of numbers is provided.

Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of this jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is used. A second jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU performs a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, and when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit. It also has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU has a first big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds, and a second special lottery result. It has a second big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when the big hit is made. Even if the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit are common big prize openings. It may be good or it may be a different big prize opening.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, and 1/7 for setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. , Setting 4 is 1/6, and setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set value set, but any set value is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same large winning opening as the large winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins a prize in this large winning opening, the payout / launch control circuit operates a payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, so that the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU performs the small hit determination with the small hit probability of 0. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU is based on the first special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. The second special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the second special symbol is provided. The first special symbol variation display control means changes and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time, and then stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the game ball wins the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. However, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If the game ball wins in the first starting port when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port, even if the second special symbol is in the variable display. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Further, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the variation display control means is significantly different between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first gaming state and 10 sec in the second gaming state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first gaming state. It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. The special lottery (1st special lottery, 2nd special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the second starting port in the first game state, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable amount of time for the result of the second special lottery to be displayed. Will be.

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area and the game ball wins the second starting port, the second special symbol is displayed. It takes time until the fluctuation display of is stopped. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit). Even if the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is confirmed to be a small hit. Therefore, it is also difficult to make a so-called aim, such as having a game ball win a prize at the large winning opening aiming at the timing when it is confirmed that the second special symbol is a small hit. Further, in the first gaming state, when the gaming ball is launched toward, for example, the right side region of the gaming region, a warning sound is output from the speaker, for example, under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, the game is played by firing the game ball toward, for example, the left side area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, by passing the game ball through the normal drawing gate, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated through the normal lottery, but also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. It is as short as 1 sec, and in the second special lottery, there is a higher probability of winning a small hit than 1/10 of any set value, so a game that shoots a game ball toward, for example, the right side area of the game area is Will be done.

The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first gaming state (for example, 1000 sec) is, for example, 50 times or more the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first gaming state (for example, 10 sec). Is preferable, but it is preferably at least 10 times or more.

The sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means for controlling the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). To prepare for. However, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins a prize in the second starting opening, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation of the decorative symbol in a conspicuous manner in synchronization with the second special symbol. 1 When a game ball wins a prize at the starting opening, the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the example of the above "conspicuous aspect", in the liquid crystal display device, for example, in the substantially center of the display area, the left symbol (first symbol), the middle symbol (second symbol), and the right symbol (third symbol) It is possible to display the result of the special lottery by changing the display. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ○ or Δ) that can be variablely displayed (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first symbol to the third symbol occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is focused on the first symbol to the third symbol rather than the fourth symbol. It will be suitable. Then, for example, in the first game state, when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port, the sub CPU does not change the first symbol to the third symbol and displays only the fourth symbol in a variable manner, while the sub CPU displays the fourth symbol in a variable manner. 1 When a game ball wins a prize at the starting opening, the 1st to 3rd symbols are varied and displayed, and the 4th symbol is also variablely displayed. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins in the second start opening, the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not conspicuously displayed, and the game ball is in the first start opening. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner when the prize is won.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 2-2, in the first gaming state, even if the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second game state, when the game ball wins at the second starting port, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. Since it is higher than the probability of becoming (1 / 30th to 1 / 25th depending on the setting), the big winning opening is frequently opened by the small hit game, and the time saving flag is not set (that is, the normal lottery). It is possible to increase the chances that the game ball as a prize will be paid out (without increasing the frequency of execution). Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit differs depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the ball is ejected according to the set set value. Can be made different.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize in the first start port or the second start port while the special symbol variation display is performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is also executed in this case. .. Therefore, the main CPU performs the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 even when the game ball wins the first starting port during the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, in the second game state. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), the game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time process is executed. That is, in the second game state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined by the setting check process that it is not normal, the main CPU uses the above small hit. The game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed without executing the small hit game based on the hit. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol being displayed in the second game state is a small hit, the information indicating that it is in the second game state and the information indicating that it is a small hit are included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and has a specific area provided with a specific opening for that purpose. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 3, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving gaming state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece and operates the inside of the specific area. It is provided with a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area due to the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way and the game ball that has entered the inside of the specific area is detected to enter (accept) the specific port, the main The CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, when the result of the big hit determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a big hit, the main CPU performs the first big hit game in which the round game for opening the big winning opening is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state and the game ball entering the specific mouth when the small hit game is executed, the round game for operating the predetermined movable piece is performed over a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state to be performed.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this expansion example 3, the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of a small hit game and the opening pattern of an ordinary electric accessory) is set as a set value. It is different according to. In addition, also in this extended example 3, the result of the normal symbol determination performed based on the fact that the main CPU detects the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits the right is a normal hit. Occasionally, the normally electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it becomes easy to win a game ball at the starting port. As a method of making the execution frequency of the small hit game different according to the set value, for example, if the probability of the normal hit in the normal symbol determination is different according to the set value, or if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value. It can be realized by letting it go.

As a method of making the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port different according to the set value, a method of making the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination different according to the set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and setting 6. To 1/10. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the small hit game, and by extension, the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

Also in this extended example 3, if the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port or the second starting port while the in-CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is performed. Will be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit.

[Expansion example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is not immediately controlled to the jackpot gaming state by itself. The condition device is operated based on the above, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device has been operated. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the bonus continuous operation right gate, and FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the bonus continuous operation left gate.

As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4 includes a bonus continuous operation left gate 3100 and a bonus continuous operation right gate 3110 in the gaming area. Further, the distribution device 3120 capable of distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the bonus continuous operation left gate 3100 or the bonus continuous operation right gate 3110 is a bonus continuous operation gate 3100. It is located above 3110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110 are provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (neither shown) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball, respectively. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor normally have the passage detection of the game ball disabled, and are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, and then the game ball selects either the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110. It is invalidated based on the detection that it has passed.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100, the main CPU controls, for example, an 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110 in which the accessory is continuously operated, the main CPU is in a 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which a two-round round game is executed, and 16 rounds. The 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the jackpot game state determined in the lottery is controlled.

It should be noted that the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the game state is the same.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the continuous operation left gate 3100 or the continuous right gate 3110 of the accessory flows down the game area as it is, but instead of this, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 3120 distributes the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 3120 to either the bonus continuous operation left gate 3100 or the bonus continuous operation right gate 3110 by regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 3120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the right gate 3110 (see FIG. 205), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 3120 is tilted to the right, the game ball is useful. Object continuous operation It is easy to pass through the left gate 3100 (see FIG. 206).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing the game ball differs between the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110 according to the set value. For example, the operation of the distribution device 3120 is repeated in setting 1 for 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture, and in setting 2, 0.7 seconds in the first posture and 1.3 in the second posture. The operation of repeating seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. Operation, in setting 5, the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture of 0.7 seconds, and in setting 6, the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

In this extended example 4, the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuously operated left gate 3100, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuously operated right gate 3110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the big hit game state is the same as when it is done. That is, although it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot gaming state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left gate sensor. Is paid out in the jackpot game state when the player detects the passage of the game ball to the bonus continuous operation left gate 3100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the bonus continuous operation right gate 3110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100, either the 2R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 30%). Is determined by a lottery performed at the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110, which is a continuous operation of the accessory, the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). It is also possible to decide which of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the big hit game state in which a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls. It is possible to increase the possibility of

Further, in the extended example 4, when the game ball passes through any one of the two gates (the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110) under the condition that the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation is performed. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. However, even if the condition device is activated based on the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball can be used for both of the above two gates. A game ball may win a prize at the starting opening before passing. In this case, under the condition that the condition device is activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process (for example, based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port). (See step S3072 in FIG. 188) may be executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S3721 in FIG. 189). In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

Further, in the extended example 4, two gates (continuous operation of the accessory) in which the continuous operation of the accessory is activated when the passage of the game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating below the distribution device 3120. The left gate 3100 and the right gate 3110) for continuous operation of the accessory are provided, but the one provided below the distribution device 3120 is not necessarily limited to the continuous operation gate of the accessory, for example, a starting port and a general winning opening. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 3120 has a starting port that triggers a big hit determination of a special symbol and a general prize that does not trigger the big hit determination of the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 3120 by regular operation. Distribute to one of the mouths. Then, the operation of the distribution device 3120 is repeated, for example, in the setting 1 for 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture, and in the setting 2, the first posture is 0.7 seconds and the second posture is 1. The operation of repeating 3 seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. In setting 5, the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture of 0.7 seconds, and in the setting of 6, the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value, regardless of the set value, the player launches the game ball at the same time. It is possible to have the fun of being able to aim for a prize at the starting point.

[Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not make the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but makes it possible to change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. .. In this extended example 5, the set value is configured to be set to any one of the five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five stages, and may be a plurality of stages. Can be determined arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a probability special symbol of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 5 rounds. Control to the jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to setting 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, but the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is relatively small, so-called Amadeji. It becomes possible to execute a game in a game-like manner.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball output). It is controlled to the jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to the high-probability gaming state, and when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state ends and becomes the low-probability gaming state. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to the jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The gaming state after the state is completed is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until the next big hit gaming state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probabilistic loop machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to the jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The gaming state after the state is completed is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until the next big hit gaming state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the jackpot gaming state. The game state is controlled to the low probability game state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called limiter machine. In the above game characteristics, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, the present invention may be a so-called ST machine in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed is terminated after a predetermined period has elapsed and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to the jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU always or with a certain probability sets the probability variation flag ON when the jackpot gaming state ends, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , Control to a high probability gaming state. Further, in the high probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when making a big hit determination of a special symbol, and when it is determined to shift the game state in the game state transition lottery, the probability change flag is set to OFF. , Execute control to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it becomes possible to execute the game in a game-like manner in which the lottery for shifting to the low-probability gaming state is performed in the high-probability gaming state.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine can be changed according to the set value, for example, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, and the pachinko with a wide variety of game characteristics can be changed. It is possible to run the game with one machine.

In the above, in setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called Amadeji game, in setting 2 it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine, and in setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine. It is possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called a probabilistic loop machine, and in setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called a so-called limiter machine, and in setting 5, it is possible to execute a game with a high probability game state. Transition to a stochastic game state It is possible to execute a game in which a lottery is performed, but it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game characteristics according to a set value. However, it is preferable that the game can be switched between the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine according to the set value. The game characteristics of the so-called ST machine and the game characteristics of the so-called probabilistic loop machine are common in that they may be controlled to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the high-probability gaming state is the same. It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends halfway. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics, the pachinko gaming machine can be used by the manager of the gaming machine, etc., in a wider range of ways. At the same time, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can improve the interest.

[Other extended examples]
As the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the present invention can be applied to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and benefits are given based on the result of the game. That is, not only the form in which the game medium is launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player to play the game and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also the main control circuit 100 itself is used. The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player.

When managed by a game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a bidirectional communication function via a medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). Operation) or when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout action of the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player is performed, and the necessary game medium is acquired. It may be possible to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game. Further, the gaming medium management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of gaming media possessed on the front of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, the recording medium is not limited to being discharged, and cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall, storing it in the member recording medium, and making it possible to replay the game at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko gaming machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachi-slot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium can be managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball is configured to be launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the enclosed gaming machine can avoid a so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the gaming ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. Further, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the gaming medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by a game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game field or the like where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening may be continuously detected by the door opening sensor. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with either one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsifying transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set aside from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is not only confirmed that the regular signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the regular signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

[Hall Menu Task]
First, the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 210. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 at a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in this second embodiment.

FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of a hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 207, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S3301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received the setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it determines that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S3301), the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu display process of step S3302. This hall menu display process (step S3302) is a process of displaying the hall menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. The hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 even when the process of step S3310 described later is executed, but the hall menu screen displayed in step S3302 and the hole displayed in step S3310. There are some differences from the menu screen, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S3302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S3302 is executed. 209 and 210 are diagrams showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S3302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, when the hall menu display process (step S3302) is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 209 and 210, the hall menu screen has a hall menu item display area 31610 in the left side area of the screen, an operation explanation area 31620 in the lower left-right direction, and a preview arranged in the center of the screen. It has a display area 31630 and.

Each item of the hall menu is displayed in the hall menu item display area 31610. For convenience, only time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hall menu items in FIGS. 208 to 210, but these items are shown. In addition, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume control setting may be displayed. However, since step S3302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, it is not possible to end the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items in the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 31620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. In the hall menu screen, the activated operation buttons and the disabled operation buttons in the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be distinguishable. For example, in FIGS. 208 to 210, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b are enabled), and the disabled operation buttons are displayed. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

By operating the activated select buttons (up / down select buttons 664a, 664b), one of a plurality of hall menu items can be selected. In FIGS. 208 and 209, the hall menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hall menu item. For example, FIG. 208 shows that the “time setting” surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 210, it is shown that the “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item. However, the highlight display is not always limited as long as the selected item can be easily grasped by the operator. The screen in which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 208 and 209) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 31630, a preview screen for a selected item among a plurality of hall menu items is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 208 and 209), and when the "setting change / confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is made. The change / confirmation history screen is displayed in preview (see FIG. 210). However, it is preferable not to display the set value on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It should be noted that the operation cannot be performed in the above preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is previewed, the time setting operation cannot be performed on the preview displayed time setting screen, and the time setting displayed as a hall menu item is selected and decided. You can set the time on the time setting screen displayed by.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 together with the hall menu screen, for example, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. "Inside" is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice such as "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed" to be output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator is made to know whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without disturbing the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 207, the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu process in step S303. Details of this hall menu process (step S3303) will be described later.

After executing the hall menu process (step S3303), the sub CPU 201 executes a command (initialization command) or a setting confirmation indicating whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, the setting change process is completed. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the process has been completed (a power failure recovery command) has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S3304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command has been received (NO in step S3304), the sub CPU 201 continues to execute the hall menu process in step S3303.

Further, when transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

The changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timings if it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command, it is not necessary to transmit the set value information to the sub CPU 201 because the set value has not been changed, but the set value information is also transmitted to the sub CPU 201. You may do it.

When the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed in step S3304, that is, when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S3304), the sub CPU 201 has the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined number N or more (step S3305). This is to record the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data to the free area according to the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. This is to prevent the situation that sometimes the data cannot be recorded. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, but is set to 500, for example, in this second embodiment.

If the number of histories of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is a predetermined number N or more (YES in step S3305), the process proceeds to step S3306, and the history information overwriting process (step S3306) is executed. The history information overwriting process in step S3306 is overwritten in order from the earliest stored history (oldest history information) among the histories stored in the work RAM 203.

In the history information overwriting process in step S3306, the history information already stored in the work RAM 203 is overwritten with new history information, and as a result, the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is erased. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if there is a risk that the predetermined upper limit will be exceeded if new history information is stored in the work RAM 203 when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received, at least a part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203. The history information may be stored after deleting. Further, even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 when there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the work RAM 203. The part may be erased.

If the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is less than a predetermined number N (NO in step S3305), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3307 and records the history information in the free area of the work RAM 203 (step). S3307) is executed.

In the present specification, the history information overwriting process in step S3306 and the history information recording process in step S3307 may be collectively referred to as history recording process.

The history information includes time information measured by RTC209 and operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or setting confirmation) when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101. Information that the process has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information that the setting change process is executed, and the setting value information after the setting change sent from the main CPU 101 are used. The information associated with is the history information. Further, when the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information that the setting confirmation process is executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 correspond to each other. The attached information is history information. When the power recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the history information, but it was transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process. It is preferable to include the current setting value information in the history information. Further, the browsing history is also included in the above history information, and if the setting change / confirmation history is browsed in the hall menu process (step S3303), is the browsing history overwritten as history information in step S3306? Alternatively, in step S3307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the free area of the work RAM 203.

In a normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, a power failure recovery command, a setting operation command, etc.) is immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the sub CPU 201 is started. When the command from the main CPU 101 is not received even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the sub CPU 201, it is determined that the sub CPU 201 is abnormal, and the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side. Each aspect of the display output, the audio output, and the LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the work RAM 203, stores not only the date and time information but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour, minute and second.

The sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S3306 or step S3307, and then moves to step S3308.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3308 whether or not the setting has been changed, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S3304 (step S3308). When the setting operation command received in step S3301 is the setting change start command, the power failure recovery command is not received in step S3301, and the setting operation command received in step S3301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S3304. Further, in the process of step S3308, since it is sufficient for the sub CPU 201 to determine that the setting has been changed, for example, the setting after the change is performed instead of determining whether or not the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command. It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the value information.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change has been performed (YES in step S3308), the sub CPU 201 performs the setting change initialization process (step S3309), and proceeds to step S3310.

The sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu redisplay process in step S3310. At this time, the hall menu screen that is redisplayed is different from the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S3302) that is displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation, and the setting change process is completed and the game is played. It is a screen displayed in a state where it can be executed (or during the game return process in step S3030), and as shown in FIG. 211, for example, an item for ending the hall menu is displayed in one of the items in the hall menu. Will be done. Note that FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu redisplay process of step S3310 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen (hole menu screen displayed in step S3302) displayed during setting change or setting confirmation, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the operator's will, but the setting change process. The hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S3310) that is redisplayed after the completion of is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be ended at the will of the operator. The hall menu screen displayed in step S3302 (see, for example, FIG. 209) and the hall menu screen displayed in step S3310 (see FIG. 211) can be operated by selecting and determining one of the items. (For example, the functional aspect such as being able to browse the setting change / confirmation history screen) and the like are common.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change has been made in step S3308 (YES in step S3308), in the hall menu redisplay process of step S3310, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is combined with the hall menu screen. , For example, a character such as "Setting has been changed" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, in the same way, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the screen, "setting change". "It was done" is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized" to be output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). This makes it possible for the operator to know that the settings have been changed (and the backup clear process has been executed) without disturbing the operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Will be. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S3308), that is, when the command received in step S3304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 is set to step S3309. -The game screen return process of step S3315 is executed without executing the process of step S3314. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hall menu redisplay process (step S3310) is not executed. In addition, characters indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed are not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

By the way, when the process of step S3302 is executed and when the process of step S3310 is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the process of step S3302 is executed. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, the game cannot be executed, whereas when the process of step S3310 is executed, the game can be executed. However, as described above, the mode of displaying characters on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not displayed at the end of setting confirmation) when the process of step S3302 is executed and when the process of step S3310 is executed. ), The mode of the sound output from the speaker 24, and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are significantly different. Therefore, even if the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, operations on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the hall menu item). It is easy to grasp from the appearance whether the pachinko machine is in a state where it is possible to perform a game or not, without hindering the operation of selecting or refreshing the page. It is possible.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S3310, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3311 and executes the hall menu process. The hall menu process in step S3311 is basically the same process as step S3303, but the process when YES in step S33072 in FIG. 217, which will be described later, is different, which will be described later.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not "End of Hall Menu" is selected on the redisplayed Hall Menu screen in step S3312. When it is determined that "End of Hall Menu" is selected (YES in step S3312), the sub CPU 201 performs the game screen return display process (step S3315). In this game screen return display process, the sub CPU 201 did not operate the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the firing handle 32) or the effect image to be displayed when playing the game in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 for a predetermined period. Display the initial image displayed when. Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return process of step S3315, and then moves to step S3316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3312 that "end of hall menu" is not selected (NO in step S3312), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S3313). ). Although not shown in FIG. 207, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S3304) and the hall menu redisplay processing (step S3310) is executed, the hall menu processing (step S3311) is performed. When any of the hall menu items is selected in the above, the time counting is started based on the operator performing some operation, and in the process of step S3313, is the time counting time elapsed? It is a process of determining whether or not, and if the operator does not execute any operation for a predetermined time or longer, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S3313.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S3313), the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and performs the game screen return display process of step S3315. Execute.

Further, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S3313), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step S3314). .. The command to generate the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed, for example, a symbol fluctuation start command, a symbol fluctuation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game. A command indicating the number of rounds in the above, a round interval command in a big hit game, an end command of a big hit game, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3314 that any of the commands for generating these effect control objects has been received, the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and displays the game screen return in step S3315. Execute the process. As a result, the game screen corresponding to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, an image unrelated to the game is displayed even though the game by the main CPU 101 is progressing. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S3314), the process returns to step S3311.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display process (step S3315), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3316 and executes the hall menu display prohibition process. This hall menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hall menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) is executed, the hall menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, and the power OFF operation is performed to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless this is done, the hall menu display process (step S3302) cannot be executed.

As described above, the hall menu screen is, in principle, a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 during the execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the "hole menu end" item on the hall menu screen (NO in step S3312), none. Under certain conditions such as the operation time not elapsed for a predetermined time (NO in step S3313) and the command to generate the effect control object not received (NO in step S3314), the processes of steps S3311 to S3314 are repeatedly executed. And the hall menu screen will be displayed continuously. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen), the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "End Hall Menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item ends and the game is played. Since the screen return process (step S3315) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) can easily browse confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. It is not possible to do so, and it is possible to ensure security.

In this second embodiment, in step S3314, when it is determined that the command to generate the effect control object has been received, the game screen return process (step S3315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on receiving a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as receiving a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated. The game screen return process (step S3315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) may be performed.

Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process that does not involve a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, where (a) a screen showing that a backup clear process without setting change process has been executed, and (b) a start port. A screen indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred and a backup clear process without setting change processing has been executed, (c) a backup clear process without setting change processing has been executed, and a start port abnormal winning error It is a figure which shows the screen after the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) which shows that the backup clear process was executed with both occurrences.

As shown in FIG. 212, when a plurality of errors occur, the sub CPU 201 displays all the error contents generated in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the voice control circuit 205 (in the order of higher priority error). The sound is output from the speaker 24 via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9), and the light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

When the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, if no other error has occurred, the sub CPU 201 is in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as shown in FIG. 212 (a). In addition to controlling the display of characters such as "RAM cleared", the speaker 24 controls the sound such as "RAM cleared", and the LED control circuit 206 (FIG. 9). A control is performed to fully turn on the LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red via the reference). In addition, the character such as "RAM has been cleared" is displayed using an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 211) in which the character such as "setting has been changed" is displayed.

That is, in this second embodiment, the backup clear process is always executed when the setting change process is performed (see FIG. 180), and the hall menu redisplay process in step S3310 executed after the setting change process is completed is as described above. , "Settings have been changed" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed. The sound such as "It has been converted" is only output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the sub CPU 201 uses an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 211) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition to controlling the display of characters such as "RAM cleared", control is performed so that a voice such as "RAM cleared" is output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 212 (a)). Here, while the main purpose of the backup clear process that involves the setting change process is to change the setting value (not the backup clear process), the main purpose of the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is the backup clear process. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the backup clear process is conservatively notified in such a manner as not to hinder the operation of the redisplayed hall menu screen. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the execution of the backup clear process is notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the backup clear process from being executed illegally.

If, for example, a start port abnormal winning error has occurred as another error after the backup clear process has been executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (b), the starting port abnormal winning error has occurred. Both that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. At this time, since the order in which the backup clear process is executed has a higher priority than the start port abnormal winning error, the character indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed at the top. .. Further, a voice notifying that the backup clear process having a high priority has been executed is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is emitted in a mode indicating that the backup clear process has been executed.

In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed while both the backup clear process has been executed and the start port abnormal winning error has occurred, the backup clear process has occurred. Is deleted from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start opening abnormality winning error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. To. Further, the voice output from the speaker 24 changes from the voice notifying that the backup clear process has been executed to the voice notifying that the start opening abnormality winning error has occurred, and the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is also backed up clear. The mode changes from the mode indicating that the process has been executed to the mode indicating that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the error that has occurred.

In the above, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S3301), the hall menu display process (step S3302) is executed. However, it is advisable to execute it even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed. In the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process, when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. It is executed (see FIG. 179). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the sub CPU 201. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 that receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command is the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process. Can be determined, and the hall menu display process (step S3302) and the hole menu process (step S3303) can be executed.

[Other examples of hall menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 177). (See step S31730 in FIG. 178), for example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in this second embodiment), the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. (NO in step S31730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S31760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the work area check process (step S31720) of the RAM 103 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, similarly to the above-mentioned setting determination process executed during the execution of the game, the set value may not be executed in step S31720, or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is in the range of "0" to "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S31730), the setting determination process (step 317 and step 317) for determining the suitability of the set value information by the sub CPU 201 The process of step S3318) may be executed. The hall menu task in this case is shown in FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is another example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart in the case where the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. In the following, another example of the hall menu task will be described. However, the description of the process common to FIG. 207 will be omitted, and only the setting determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 uses the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game even when the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed is transmitted. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 that has received the power failure recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S3308), and proceeds to step S3317. In step S3317, the sub CPU 201 executes the set value check process. In this set value check process (step S3317), the current set value information (the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power failure and stored in the work RAM 203) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 (step S3317) are performed. This is a process for confirming the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power failure. When it is determined in step S3308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S3308), the processes of steps S3309 to S3314 are not executed.

After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S3317), the sub CPU 201 determines the set value suitability determination process, that is, whether or not the set value is appropriate. (Step S3318). At this time, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined to be appropriate (YES in step S3318), and the process proceeds to step S3315. The processing after step S3315 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined that the setting value information is inappropriate (NO in step S3318), the process proceeds to step S3319, and the sub CPU 201 is in the event of an abnormality in the setting value. Execute the process.

The above-mentioned processing when the set value is abnormal is a process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this set value abnormality processing (step S3319), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image for notifying that the set value is abnormal, a voice for notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. The process may be executed.

As described above, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process (process of step 317 and step S3318) and sets the value. When it is determined that is not appropriate (NO in step S3318), the game machine manager can be notified that the set value is not appropriate by executing the set value abnormality processing (step S3319).

The above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S3317 and step S3318) is executed when the setting confirmation process is completed, but the setting change process is performed without executing either the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. When the backup process (when the power is not turned on, the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328) is executed, or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only inputting. Unless the setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure, and the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting value information is appropriate or not. This is because it is possible to determine.

[Hall menu processing]
Next, the hall menu process (step S3303) in the hall menu task (see FIGS. 207 and 213) will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of the hall menu process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 selects a hall menu item that is a target for confirming various information / settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 664 and / and the main button 662 by the operator. Perform selection processing (step S33001). In the hall menu selection process of FIG. 214, the hall menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, and so on. The case of the accessory operation check, the liquid crystal brightness setting, and the volume control setting will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "time setting" (step S33001). When it is determined in step S33002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S33002), the sub CPU 201 performs a time setting process (step S33003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S33002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "prize ball information". (Step S33004). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "prize ball information" (YES in step S33004), the sub CPU 201 performs prize ball information processing (step S33005). In this prize ball information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and enables the operator to confirm the prize ball information. The prize ball information is, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, information on the difference between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of prize balls paid out every day in the past few days. Information, difference information (daily) between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of prize balls fired in the past few days, etc.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "prize ball information" (NO in step S33004), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "setting change / confirmation history". Discrimination (step S33006). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "setting change / confirmation history" (YES in step S33006), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change / confirmation history processing (step S33007). In this setting change / confirmation history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) described later in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the operator confirms the setting. It is possible to check the history, change history and browsing history.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is operated while the select button 664 is operated and the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the sub CPU 201 sets the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) is displayed, and the operator can change the setting (setting value), confirm the setting (setting value), browse history, and confirm the setting (setting value). And it is possible to check the changed settings (set values). The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "setting change / confirmation history" (NO in step S33006), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "error information history". Discrimination (step S33008). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is the "error information history" (YES in step S33008), the sub CPU 201 performs error information history processing (step S33009). In this error information history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 215) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check or change the error information history. do.

The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as an error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective when an abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. ) May not be able to receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the main CPU 101 is started.

As shown in FIG. 215, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a cancellation date and time column in which the date and time when the error is cleared are displayed. Further, in the lower left of the error information history screen, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up / down / left / right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and the determination can be made by operating the main button 662. It is shown that it can be done.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not the "error information history" (NO in step S33308), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is the "monitoring history" (NO). Step S33010). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "monitoring history" (YES in step S33010), the sub CPU 201 performs monitoring history processing (step S33011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "monitoring history" (NO in step S33010), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "warning display setting" (NO). Step S33012). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "warning display setting" (YES in step S33012), the sub CPU 201 performs the warning display setting process (step S33013). In this warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the warning display setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not the "warning display setting" (NO in step S33012), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is the "notification setting" (NO in step S33012). Step S33014). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "notification setting" (YES in step S33014), the sub CPU 201 performs the notification setting process (step S33015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not the "notification setting" (NO in step S33014), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is in the "power saving mode" (NO in step S33014). Step S33016). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "power saving mode" (YES in step S33016), the sub CPU 201 performs the power saving mode process (step S33017). In this power saving mode process, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode. ..

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not the "power saving mode" (NO in step S33016), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "maintenance" (step). S33018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S33018), the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance processing (step S33019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 229.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S33018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "accessory operation check" (NO in step S33018). Step S33020). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "accessory operation confirmation" (YES in step S33020), the sub CPU 201 performs the accessory operation confirmation process (step S33021). In this accessory operation confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the operation of the accessory.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "confirmation of accessory operation" (NO in step S33020), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "LCD brightness setting". (Step S33022). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "liquid crystal brightness setting" (YES in step S33022), the sub CPU 201 performs the liquid crystal brightness setting process (step S33023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. And.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not the "LCD brightness setting" (NO in step S33022), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is the "volume adjustment setting". (Step S33024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S33024), the sub CPU 201 performs the volume adjustment setting process (step S33025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16 and enables the operator to confirm and change the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 24. And.

After processing step S33003, step S33005, step S33307, step S33009, step S33011, step S33013, step S33015, step S33017, step S33019, step S33021, step S33023, step S33025, and the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "volume". When it is determined that it is not "adjustment setting" (NO in step S33024), the sub CPU 201 ends the hall menu process and returns the process to step S3304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 207).

[Modes of various devices when changing / confirming settings]
The modes of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change / setting confirmation are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. explain.

First, the time when the setting is changed will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are not turned on unless the power is turned on. 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and sends a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been controlled to the setting change state (the setting change state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204 and displays a character such as "setting is being changed". Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" from the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205, and lights the LED 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, the set value has not been finalized yet at this stage. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Further, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the hall menu screen is displayed and characters such as "setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a voice such as "setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In this second embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is only stored in the register and not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is confirmed, but the updated setting is made even if the set value is not confirmed. The value may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the second embodiment, the set value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the set value is updated by operating another operating means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). It may be done.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, the sub CPU 201 has a display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) unless the game execution is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received). In addition to displaying the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by 204, the characters such as "setting has been changed" are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized" by the voice control circuit 205 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the speaker 24 and the LED. The control circuit 206 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. Such display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red continue as long as some operation is performed on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. , It ends when the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, it was decided not to display that the backup clear process was executed, but the sub CPU 201 has a display that "RAM has been cleared" in addition to the display that "the setting has been changed". You may try to do it.

In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, the character display such as "The setting has been changed", the voice output such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized.", And the red color of the LED 25 are all. By lighting for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to suppress fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen by an unauthorized third party. Become. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above is an aspect of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change.

Next, the time of checking the settings will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are not turned on unless the power is turned on. 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state (the setting confirmation state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204, and says "setting is being confirmed". Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "setting is being confirmed" from the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205, and lights the LED 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power failure recovery command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has ended based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the game can be executed. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display process (step S3316) based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the sub CPU 201 fully lights the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and ends all the red lighting of the LED 25 when the execution of the game is started. The performance display monitor 334 displays the base value by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, by performing all the red lighting of the LED 25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen or the like is authorized. It is possible to suppress what is done by a third party who does not have. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, when the sub CPU 201 is determined to be abnormal without receiving any command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start, it is determined that the game is stopped. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 204 and the voice control circuit 205 output a display and a voice saying "Please determine a set value", and the LED control circuit 206 outputs an LED 25 (for example, FIG. 1) is all white blinking. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above is an aspect of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S33007) in the hall menu processing (see step S3303 in FIG. 207) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the setting change / confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as the setting change history, the setting value confirmation history, and the browsing history of setting changes and confirmations. It is displayed as a general term for "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information"). In the following, before explaining the setting change / confirmation history processing, first, the setting change, the setting confirmation, and the browsing will be described.

In this second embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, for example, by pressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of "1" to "6", and when the desired setting value is reached, the setting key switch signal is output. When the operation is turned off, one of the plurality of set values to be used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process is completed.

In order to make it possible to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 performs the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed after executing the setting change processing, and the changed setting value information. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed), the setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, Then, the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received, is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 3" and "No. 4" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218, which will be described later. do.

Further, in the second embodiment, when confirming the set value, it is necessary to execute the setting confirmation process by the main CPU 101 as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated so as to be OFF, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned on again. As you did.

Further, in order to enable the display of the setting confirmation history, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed after the setting confirmation process is executed. do. At this time, although the set value has not been changed, the set value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S3317 and step S3318, see FIG. 213). Is preferable.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed) and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209 That is, the date and time data when the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the “No. 1” column in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218, which will be described later. As shown in the "No. 1" column in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218, the setting value information is associated with the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed and the time information. May also be displayed.

The work RAM 203 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned off by the operator or when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of, for example, setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

In the second embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 209 and 210), and the work is performed. It means that the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) showing the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 is displayed.

In order to be able to display the browsing history (browsing history), the sub CPU 201 executes the following processing. That is, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (YES in step S3301), the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S3301). Then, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), the sub CPU 201 highlights the "setting change / confirmation history" (see FIG. 210). ). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203, and displays the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and the operation type information (information indicating that the browsing has been performed) and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209, that is, when the browsing has been performed (the information indicating that the browsing has been performed). The date and time data (when the main button 662 is pressed) is associated with the date and time data and stored in the work RAM 203. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-mentioned history recording process (step S3306, step S3307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the work RAM 203 when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress. When the browsing history is stored in the work RAM 203, the sub CPU 201 integrates the browsing history into the already stored setting change / confirmation history information and stores the browsing history in the work RAM 203. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 2" and "No. 5" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218, which will be described later.

Here, the history recording processing of step S3306 and step S3307 can be summarized as follows. First, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The sub CPU 201 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S3303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At that time, the sub CPU 201 performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the settings. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (NO in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 sets the sub CPU 201. Of the setting change history and browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, but only the setting change history is performed. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (NO in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is a power failure recovery command, the sub CPU 201 , Of the setting confirmation history and browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, but only the setting confirmation history is performed. Therefore, in the history recording process of step S3306 and step S3307, "setting change / confirmation" is performed in the hall menu process (step S3303) regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command. When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S33006), browsing recording is performed.

In addition to the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, the hall menu display processing (step S3302) and the hall menu processing (step S3302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above. When the step S3303) is executed, the above-mentioned browsing record is performed, so that the fraudulent monitoring of the amusement shop clerk can also be performed. That is, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key that has a notch only in the corresponding part of the setting key 328 and is managed by the game machine management manager) is required, and this dedicated key is used. For example, a general clerk who does not have a key cannot browse, but a general clerk who does not have a dedicated key or an unauthorized player performs a backup process to browse the backup clear process that does not involve a setting change process. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, by making it possible for the sub CPU 201 to record browsing even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed, the security camera corresponding to that time (normally the security camera installed in the store). It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the video such as.

In the history recording process of step S3306 and step S3307, regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), browsing recording is performed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the sub CPU 201, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is a power failure recovery command, Both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are performed, but the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is initialized. When it is a command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from being unnecessarily increased and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not in the memory of the game machine manager, but the setting confirmation history can be checked. Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it was browsed, and when the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is recorded if it is browsed (at least the setting value information is browsed). I tried to record it. This is because it is considered that the person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the settings rather than browsing after changing the settings. That is, in the same time zone, if there is no browsing history and only the setting confirmation history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if the number of history of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large, it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud. .. Regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (step). YES in S33006), the setting confirmation process is performed when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by recording both the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. When it is the operation type information indicating that it has been executed, the browsing history may also be displayed, and when it is the operation type information indicating that the setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

Further, the history recording process of step S3306 and step S3307 was browsed a plurality of times between the start of the hall menu display process of step S3302 and the execution of the game screen return display process of step S3315. However, the browsing record is executed only once in step S3306 or step S3307 which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210) (YES in step S3046), the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 218) is displayed. However, if you select and confirm "Back" on this setting change / confirmation history screen, you will return to the hall menu screen again. Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on this hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed a plurality of times between steps S3302 and S3315, the browsing record is only once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the browsing record performed between steps S3302 to S3315 to one time is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes settings, confirms settings, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase browsing records to increase the number of histories and make it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an act is performed, even if the setting change, setting confirmation, or browsing is performed a plurality of times between steps S3301 and S3312, these histories are recorded only once and the power supply is supplied. It is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily by preventing the history from being recorded unless the is turned off and then turned on again.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the hall menu redisplay process (step S3310) is executed after the setting change process is completed, and the hall menu redisplay process is not executed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The game screen return process (step S3315) is executed. For example, even after the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed by turning off the setting key 328, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hall is opened. If the specifications are such that the menu screen is displayed, the hall menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, every time the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen displayed again, or the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328 is repeatedly executed, the user browses the screen. Even if there is, it is preferable to record the browsing once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine has operating means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330. There is. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player, but the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine administrator.

Further, in the second embodiment, the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) in which the setting value can be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting value is not displayed. The setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 223 described later) may be stored as a browsing history.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216, 217, and 218 to 222, the liquid crystal display device 16 is executed when the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 and the setting change / confirmation history process are executed. The explanation will be given in comparison with the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

Note that FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 217 is an example of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 216. FIG. 218 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen (a screen when the screen is changed to the setting change / confirmation history screen) of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing an example when "Clear" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 222 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared in the setting change / confirmation history screen.

When "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 214) (YES in step S33006 in FIG. 214), the sub CPU 201 performs the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S33051). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. "Back" is highlighted on the initial screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen.

The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 218) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 includes a setting change / confirmation history display area 31640, an operation explanation area 31650, and a first selection area 31660a. It has a second selection region 31660b. FIG. 218 shows an example in which "Page" is displayed in the first selection area 31660a and "Clear" and "Return" are displayed in the second selection area 31660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 218, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are associated with each other and displayed in a list in the setting change / confirmation history display area 31640. In the date and time column, the date and time when the setting was changed, confirmed, or browsed is displayed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, when the setting is changed, the changed setting value is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and "confirmation" is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. To. Further, when the operation type is a setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

The sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history screen display procedure (step S33051), and then executes the timekeeping process (step S33052). This timekeeping process is a process for starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Here, the timer is started to be timed after the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S33051) is executed (setting change / confirmation history screen initial screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (FIG. 218). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the display (see) is displayed.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the select button 664 has been operated in step S33053. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33053), the process proceeds to step S33071 described later, and it is determined whether or not "return" is determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the select button 664 is not operated and the main button 662 is pressed, it is determined to be "Back". Will be done.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33053), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33054). For example, if the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which "Back" is highlighted, the highlight display moves from "Back" to "Page" (see FIG. 218). See Figure 219).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33054) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S33055). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33052 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S33054). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33056 whether or not it has been determined to be "Page". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Page" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 is set to ". It is determined that "Page" has been determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that it has been determined to be "Page" (YES in step S33056), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update screen display process (step S33057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 220) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the page update screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen, images imitating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, and "next page" and "previous page" are displayed on the left and right of the notation of "Page". As a result, the operator understands that when the left select button 664c is operated, the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page, and when the lower select button 664d is operated, the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the next page. can do. If the left select button 664c is operated while the first page of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, the final page is displayed, and if the right select button 664d is operated while the final page is displayed, one page is displayed. Cyclic display so that the eyes are displayed can enhance convenience.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "Page" (NO in step S33056), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S33065, which will be described later, and determines whether or not it is determined to be "Clear" on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the page update screen display process (step 3057), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S33058). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33055 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timer clears the time and starts the time again after the page update screen display process (step S33057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 220) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed). ), The hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33059 whether or not the page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S33059), the process proceeds to step S33062 described later.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33059), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process (step S33060). When the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 220) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 is said to have performed the page update process. The determination is made, and the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated and displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page. The setting change / confirmation history screen when the setting change / confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is omitted.

In the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 operates the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen (see FIG. 220) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. However, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b, one of "No. 1" to "No. 5" in the setting change / confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated. Moreover, the page update process may be performed when it is determined to be the last line. The same applies to the page update process in the modified example of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process (step 3060), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S33061). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33058 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timer is cleared and restarted for a predetermined time (after the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed) after the page update process (step S33060) is executed. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within (for example, 30 seconds).

After executing the timekeeping process of step S33061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S33059 and determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the select button 664 has been operated in step S33062. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33062), the process proceeds to step S33072, which will be described later. In this case, moving to step S33072 instead of step S33071 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Because it is not.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33062), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 220), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “Clear” (see FIG. 221).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33063) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S33064). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33061 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is that no processing was performed within the specified time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is sometimes displayed.

After executing the timekeeping process of step S33064, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S33065 and determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear”. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 is set to ". It is determined that "Clear" has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S33065), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S33066). This setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 31640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are deleted (see FIG. 222). When the setting change / confirmation history data clear process in step S33065 is executed, the item of "return" is highlighted.

In the above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203 are deleted, but not necessarily all the data. It is not limited to erasing, but it may be possible to erase only a part of the data. As a mode for erasing a part of the data, for example, No. 221 in FIG. 221. 1 to No. A mode in which the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5 are deleted, a mode in which the setting change / confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, and a plurality of operation types (setting change). , Setting confirmation, browsing), out of the mode for deleting the date and time (time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, and the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information. A mode of erasing only specific information (for example, set value information) can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without entering the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clear process is executed only when the correct password is entered. Can be done. This makes it possible to prevent accidentally clearing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data. Further, for example, a person who performs a setting change process or browsing for the purpose of fraud may delete the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data in order to hide his / her fraud. Therefore, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S33067). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33064 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timekeeping of the timer is cleared and the timekeeping is started again after the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S33066) is executed (setting change / confirmation history display area 31640). This is so that the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all are erased.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the select button 664 has been operated in step S33068. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33068), the process proceeds to step S33072, which will be described later. In this case, the reason for moving to step S33071 instead of step S33072 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, unless the select button 664 is operated. .. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S33072.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33068), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33069).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33069) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S33070). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S33067 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S33069). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to "return" in step S33071. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 is set to ". It is determined that "return" has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S33071), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S33073), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. This hall menu screen display process is a process of displaying an initial screen (see FIG. 209) of the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.

If it is not determined to "return" in step S33071 (NO in step S33071), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S33072).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S33072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S33072), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S33073, exits the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and exits the hall menu. The initial screen (see FIG. 209) is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not select and decide the "return" item, if the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the setting change / confirmation history screen is finished and the initial screen of the hall menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S33072 (NO in step S33072), the sub CPU 201 returns to step S33053 and continues the processing after step S33053.

In this way, on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without any operation being performed. However, it is configured to display the hall menu screen. However, on the hall menu screen, the sub CPU 201 controls the display of the hall menu screen to continue without ending as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed even if there is no operation. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

The process of moving to step S33073 when it is determined in step S33072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S33072) is the hall menu process (that is, the setting is being changed or is being changed) in step S3303 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) described above. It is a process in (during setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S3311 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S33007) in the hall menu processing in step S3311, the predetermined time has elapsed in step S33072 in the hall menu processing in step S3311 (step S33072). When it is determined to be YES) in), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3315 (see FIGS. 207 and 213), ends the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen, and performs the game screen return display process (step S3315) and the hole. The menu display prohibition process (step S3316) is executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again. You will not be able to.

Further, regarding the process of returning to step S33053 when it is determined in step S33072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S33072), the hall menu process (that is, setting) of step S3303 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) described above is also performed. It is a process during change (during change or setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S3311 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) (not shown). Specifically, even if the non-operation period does not reach the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S33007) in the hall menu process of step S3311, for example, an effect control object is generated. Based on the fact that a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received is satisfied, the game screen return process (step S3315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) are executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again even if the non-operation time has not reached the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the above-mentioned predetermined end condition Unless is satisfied, the processes of steps S33053 to S33072 are repeatedly executed.

In this way, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator has a grace period for viewing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and the predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds), the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends and the game screen return process (step S3315) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S3316) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) cannot easily browse confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, and it is possible to ensure security.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218, time information and operation type information and settings are set regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing). A list screen showing all of the value information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 218) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is changed is displayed, and the time information and the set value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. The second information to be displayed (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 218) and the third information in which the time information and the set value information at the time of browsing are displayed (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 218). 2, No. 5) and are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, the game machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to display the specific operation type information. Therefore, a screen in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list (see, for example, FIG. 218), the above-mentioned first information, the above-mentioned second information, and the above-mentioned third information Of these, it is preferable to configure the narrowing down screen narrowed down to only specific information so that it can be selectively displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is highly convenient in terms of business because it is possible to know not only fraudulent detection but also information such as how many days the business has been performed with the set value. Since the above narrowing screen can be displayed by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information unrelated to the operation type (for example, current time information) may be displayed.

[Other examples of display screens displayed in setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 227. However, the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 is the same as in FIGS. 216 and 217. Therefore, in another example, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described and the sub. The description of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the CPU 201 will be omitted.

FIG. 223 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. FIG. 224 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when "setting display" is selected. FIG. 225 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when a set value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 226 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 227 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 223, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 31670, an operation explanation area 31680, a first selection area 31690a, and a second selection area 31690b.

On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 223, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 31670, but the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 223 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed. In addition, the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed is displayed in the date / time column where the time information is displayed, and the operation type (setting change, setting change,) is displayed in the operation type column where the operation type information is displayed. Setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed.

Further, on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, in addition to "clear" and "return", "setting display" is also displayed in the second selection area 31690b. In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, "Back" is selected and displayed (highlighted). In another example as well, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the select button 664.

When the select button 664 is operated to select "setting display", "setting display" is highlighted (see FIG. 224). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting display" is selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information is displayed. Instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen that is not displayed, the setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen) in which the time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list is displayed (see FIG. 225). ). In this way, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and deciding "Setting display", it is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The new setting values will be displayed in a list. When the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. 225, " Back is highlighted.

On the setting change / confirmation history screen (see Fig. 225) where the time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, when the select button 664 is operated and "Page" is selected, "Page" is highlighted. (See FIG. 226). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process. When this page update process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 227) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this page update screen, the next page or the previous page can be updated by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d.

In addition, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 223) of the setting change / confirmation history screen where the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. Also, the page update process is executed by the sub CPU 201. However, when this page update process is executed, the time information and operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the setting value information is not displayed. The page update screen on the setting change / confirmation history screen. Is displayed. On this page update screen, by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed.

In this other example, for example, as shown in FIG. 223, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen, and as shown in FIG. 225, the time information and the operation type information are used. And the screen in which the setting value information is displayed in a list can be selectively displayed, but the screen in FIG. 223 is one or two of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

In addition, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by those who meet specific conditions (for example, those who have entered an appropriate password). This may be done, but this will be described later.

FIG. 228 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set value can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure up to. As shown in FIG. 228, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, but the operation is not limited to this. It may be an operation performed when executing at least one of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210). Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed. The preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the setting change / confirmation history information. (See FIG. 210) is displayed (the set value is not displayed).

As a third step, the pachinko gaming machine presses the main button 662 while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 210) displayed in the second step. By doing so, the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this setting change / confirmation history screen, date / time data, an operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and a setting value are associated with each other.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting / change the setting of the confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) displayed through the first to third steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that regulates the payout rate, confirmation of setting change, setting change and viewing of confirmation and the corresponding setting value. .. In addition, the person who has the authority is the person who has the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention controls the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit, and the sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, which is a setting means for enabling, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201 are provided, and the display control unit includes a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory capable of storing and holding the written information, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 changes the setting or confirms the setting, and changes the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 to the work RAM 203 when the data received by the data receiving means is changed or confirmed. -It has a setting display function that stores as confirmation history information and displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data are displayed. In this state, it has a configuration for displaying the set value stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, the main button is displayed with the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data displayed. When the 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment also has a configuration in which the date and time data for which the set value is received is acquired from the RTC209, and the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other. good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. It is possible to identify the fraud when the fraud such as changing the set value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and browsed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other, so that each history related to the setting value can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. A setting means including a main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 which is a display control unit for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The setting switch 332 is provided with a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201, and the display control unit writes the reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means even in a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the stored information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from RTC209 are stored as the setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, and the work RAM 203 is stored. It has a setting display function to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data. Is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC209, and associates the date and time data with the information indicating the browsing history. It may be configured to be memorized.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[Maintenance process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231, a maintenance process (step S33019) executed by the sub CPU 201 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed are displayed. I will explain while comparing. Note that FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing an example of the maintenance process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 231 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 201 displays the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this maintenance process, devices connected to the sub CPU 201 (for example, various sensors, various accessories that operate, etc.) such as the effect button switch 621, the effect accessory 1000, and the like are targeted for the maintenance process. It is possible to have the operator confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 230 and 231 the sub CPU 201 displays an operation status display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the substantially center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231). In this operation status display table, for example, a name column in which the names of 28 various devices are displayed and a number string in which serial numbers (1 to 28) attached to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. And an operating state column indicating the operating state of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operating status column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is input from various devices, the display of the operation status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, when the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is being displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the effect button 1 from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above-mentioned "input from each device" is based on the detection of an input port or the like by the sub CPU 201. In addition, each of the effectors has a sensor that detects that it exists at least in the normal position (standby position), and when the sensor that detects the normal position is ON, the display is turned off and the sensor that detects the normal position is turned off. When it is OFF, that is, when the effect is moved, the display is turned ON.

Further, the sub CPU 201 displays the operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the hall menu screen is returned to the initial screen (see FIG. 209) (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 231, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 229), the sub CPU 201 first acquires the sub device input information (step S33081). The sub-device input information is the detection result of the operating state of various devices assigned serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. 231. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state with an input or an off state with no input.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub input state information editing process for reading the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (step S33082).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a maintenance screen display process for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub input status information read in step S33082 (step S33083). ). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen and the update of the display (for example, the change from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display) are performed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (step S33084). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (YES in step S33084), the sub CPU 201 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 214), and performs the process. Return to step S3304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 207).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S33084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S33081.

By the way, some pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines in recent years have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the effect button 62 is provided with a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the lottery result of a special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 executes maintenance on the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "effect button 2" of the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 projects and moves the effect button 62 upward to perform maintenance on the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is a normal determination, the sub CPU 201 executes the maintenance screen display process (step S33083) and executes the maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display). When the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the "main button 2" is determined to be normal, for example, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. 231. If this is done, the sub CPU 201 is controlled to return to the normal state (the state before protruding upward) when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time and the maintenance mode ends. To.

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines, there are some pachinko machines and pachislot machines that are provided with a plurality of effecting objects having different driving means. Maintenance may be executed, a plurality of effectors having different drive means may be operated at different timings to perform maintenance, or they may be independently operated to perform maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a production accessory 1 to a production accessory 3 having different drive means, for example, when the "directing accessory 1 + 2" of the serial number 14 shown in FIG. Maintenance is performed by simultaneously operating the object 1 and the effect object 2. Further, for example, when the "directing accessory 1 → 2" of the serial number 17 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 first operates the directing accessory 1 and then operates the directing accessory 2. Perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing accessory 1” having the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 operates the producing accessory 1 independently to perform maintenance. In addition, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable. For example, the "effect 1 + 3" of the serial number 15 in FIG. (The operation of the main button 662 is not enabled). In FIG. 231, the serial number 15 “directing accessory 1 + 3” is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 are operated at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, the effect 1 is first operated and then the effect 1 is operated). If it does not interfere with the effect (when operating the effect 3), for example, it is preferable to enable selection and determination of the “effect 1 → 3” of the serial number 18 shown in FIG. 231. In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of production objects by a plurality of objects, to operate them at different timings, or to operate them independently, and at the same time when they interfere with each other when they are operated at the same time. By making it inoperable, it is possible to improve maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of troubles.

Although not shown in FIG. 231, a game ball or medal payout sensor, a payout collateral ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a CR card return button, and a pachislot settlement button are enclosed. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables games by circulating the game balls, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game balls is also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201 have been described as targets for maintenance processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the devices are connected to the main CPU 101. Devices (eg, power switch 35, first start port switch 421, second start port switch 441, etc.) may be subject to maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, it is simulated between the ball lending machine and the pachinko gaming machine (in the case of CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card. Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from "OFF" display to "ON" display).

[Mobile terminal cooperation function]
Next, the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 232 to 234.

The mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko gaming machine is a function of linking the pachinko gaming machine and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko machine, you can record detailed information about the game played by the player, or customize the function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko machine by satisfying certain conditions. can do.

As the predetermined conditions, for example, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit without the operation of the condition device, or a specific effect is executed. Further, as a function of customizing a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high-probability game state may be changed to a special song, or the liquid crystal display device 16 may be used. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed on the screen.

When using the mobile terminal linkage function, first, the guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When, for example, a pressing operation is performed on the main button 662 in a state where the decorative symbol displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not variablely displayed, the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example when a guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)", the characters "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 232, the items of the guide menu include "start uni-memo", "big hit symbol / number of rounds", "model site", and "return to game". In the initial guide image, "Start Unimemo" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of guide menus can be selected by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 232, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "Start Unimemo" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Further, when "big hit symbol / number of rounds" is selected, the jackpot symbol / number of rounds is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). Then, when the "model site" is selected, the registration code for the model site is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an image for effect displayed when playing a game, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or any of the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 is used. Also, the demo video that is displayed when the prize is not won for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time has elapsed without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 still displays a video for directing to be displayed when playing a game and the above demo video. Is displayed.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example when a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the initial image of Unimemo, the characters "Unimemo", the characters "Let's customize your favorite character", and the Unimemo menu are displayed. The items of the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to game", and "return". In the initial image of Unimemo, "Enter password" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of Unimemo menus can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 233, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "password input" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when "password input" is selected and determined, the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 234).

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The password display image includes the characters "Enter password" and a password entry menu.

The password entry menu displays multiple password entry menu items. The items of the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated, the item is selected. , Determined by the highlighted number or alphabet. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "Enter" is selected and determined from the password input menu, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected from the password input menu, the characters are deleted from the password display image one by one from the last input character.

When "Return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 may display an image for production when the game is played, the firing handle 32 may not be operated for a predetermined period, or the like. A demo image displayed when no prize is won for a predetermined period is displayed in either the 1 start port 420 or the 2nd start port 440. When "Back" is selected from the password input menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

[Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Hereinafter, modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described.
[Modification example 1 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
First, a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 240.

The setting change / confirmation history processing in the first modification is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, except that it has an authentication function for viewing the setting value. .. In the following, the points different from the above-mentioned setting change / confirmation history processing will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S33052 and the like in FIG. 216) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 1, when the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the following description, the description of the timekeeping process will be omitted.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this setting change / confirmation history process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 209 and 210) displayed in step S3306 of FIG. 214. It is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change / confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S33100). This authentication process will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 236, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, for example. Further display the password request screen (step S33101). FIG. 237 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 238 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

In this modification 1, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). The setting change / confirmation history screen. May be displayed so that the password request screen is displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request is made without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the sub CPU 201 executes the password input process (step S33102) and proceeds to step S33103.

In step S33103, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the entered password is appropriate, and if the entered password is appropriate (YES in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password is not appropriate (NO in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication NG display process (step S33104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, the screen shown in FIG. 239, for example, is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Here, FIG. 239 is an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the entered password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication process of step S33100 and determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is appropriate (YES in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S33110), and the step. Move to S33120. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S33110), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the entered password is appropriate when, for example, the main button 662 is pressed after the password is entered on the password request screen. If the entered password is inappropriate or the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the authentication NG process in step S33103 described above is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed. Can be done. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

In step S33120, the sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process. At this time, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 218) is displayed in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the set value are shown in association with each other.

After the setting change / confirmation history screen display process in step S33120, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S33130). When it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33130), the page update process is executed (step S33140), and then the process proceeds to step S33130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S33130), the process proceeds to step S33150.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" in step S33150. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 221) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is determined to be "clear".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S33150), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S33160), and proceeds to step S33180. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are deleted (see, for example, FIG. 222). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S33150), the process proceeds to step S33170.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to "return" in step S33170. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 218) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is determined to "return".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S33170), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S33180), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S33170), the process proceeds to step S33130 and the processing after step S33130 is continued.

FIG. 240 shows a setting change / confirmation in which the set value can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a flow diagram which shows an example of the operation procedure until the history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 240, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210). Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed. The preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the setting change / confirmation history information. (See FIG. 210) is displayed (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine requests the input of the password (see FIGS. 237 and 238), and determines the suitability of the input password.

As a fourth step, if the password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine will receive the setting value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 225) in which the setting value is associated with the operation type to be performed is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting / change the setting of the confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) displayed through the first to fourth steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that regulates the payout rate, confirmation of setting change, setting change and viewing of confirmation and the corresponding setting value. .. In addition, the person who has the authority is the person who has the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention controls the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit, and the sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, which is a setting means for enabling, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201 are provided, and the display control unit includes a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory capable of storing and holding the written information, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 changes the setting or confirms the setting, and changes the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 to the work RAM 203 when the data received by the data receiving means is changed or confirmed. -It has a setting display function that stores as confirmation history information and displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data are displayed. In this state, it has a configuration for displaying the set value stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, the main button is displayed with the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data displayed. When the 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment also has a configuration in which the date and time data for which the set value is received is acquired from the RTC209, and the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other. good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. It is possible to identify the fraud when the fraud such as changing the set value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and browsed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other, so that each history related to the setting value can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. A setting means including a main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 which is a display control unit for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The setting switch 332 is provided with a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201, and the display control unit writes the reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means even in a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 is provided with a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the stored information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from RTC209 are stored as the setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, and the work RAM 203 is stored. It has a setting display function to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data. Is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC209, and associates the date and time data with the information indicating the browsing history. It may be configured to be memorized.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. Not only can it be determined whether or not it has been done, but it is also possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[Modification example 2 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, a modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 245.

The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, the volume “loud”. , "Medium" and "Small" are switched to one of the three volume positions, and the switching operation is configured to switch to a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is preset. When the order is matched, the user is authenticated as a user with administrator authority. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning the jog dial, and the volume may be determined by pressing the jog dial.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process has an authentication processing function for performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the order of changing the volume position. In the second modification, for example, a control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the voice control circuit 204, and the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a volume switch 108 that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process (see FIG. 242) in a modification 2 of a setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The volume switch 108 is arranged in, for example, the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and a slide operation for setting an initial setting value is possible. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "large". In addition to the switching operation, the switching operation is sequentially performed to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of "large"-> "medium"-> "small"-> "medium". That is, the sub CPU 201 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user with administrator authority (administrator authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. Operate with a pattern and store the multiple volume positions and operation order in the memory. Then, when the administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set value, the volume switch 108 is operated with a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set value.

The authentication operation pattern includes, for example, an operation pattern representing a position change from the volume position 2 (volume “medium”) in FIG. 241 to the volume position 1 (volume “low”), or a volume position 2 to the volume position 3 (volume position 3 (volume “low”). It is possible to hold in advance an operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to the volume “loud”).

As a result, the sub CPU 201 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and the management authority determines whether or not the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern. It can be determined whether or not.

As described above, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting a volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this authentication process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 209) displayed in step S3306 of FIG. 214 (YES in step S33006), and "setting change / confirmation" is performed on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 while "History" is highlighted (see FIG. 210).

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs a volume password request display process (step S33201) for displaying a screen prompting the input of the volume password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed. Execute.

FIG. 243 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 244 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, in the volume password request display process in step S3321 of FIG. 242, the sub CPU 201 enters the password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, by operating the volume switch. A message such as "The setting value will be displayed after entering the password." Is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information.

In this modification 2, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). The setting change / confirmation history screen. May be displayed and the volume password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the operation pattern (step S33202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts the operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and collates it with the preset authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed depending on whether or not the two match (step S33203). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S33203), the sub CPU 201 executes the processes after step S33120 in FIG. 235.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S33203), the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 that the authentication is NG. (Step S33204). As a result, the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of step S33110 in FIG. 235. In the above authentication NG display process, a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Note that FIG. 241 gives an example of using a volume switch 108 having three volume positions as the operation switch according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be any of at least three or more. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information detected by this position detection function (volume position information is acquired, and the acquired order and the work RAM 203 are in advance. The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed on condition that the operation sequence is matched with the stored predetermined operation order.

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. 245, in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing, a hole is formed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210). Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. The preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the setting change / confirmation history information. (See FIG. 210) is displayed (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine requests the input of the volume password (see FIGS. 243 and 244), captures the entered volume password, and determines whether or not the captured volume password is appropriate. The suitability of the volume password is determined by collating the captured volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when both are matched and authentication is OK, the volume password is considered to be appropriate. to decide.

As a fourth step, if the volume password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko machine will have the setting value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 225) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, and at least a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving operations of a player. It includes a non-game operation unit that the player does not operate, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the game, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6) and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit, and the display control unit includes data. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the transmitting means, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 changes the setting or confirms the setting and sets the setting. It is equipped with a setting display function that stores the value and date and time data from RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and specifies the non-game operation unit. It has a configuration for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the condition that the operations are performed in the order of.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or you will be able to determine whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the work RAM 203 and stores it in the liquid crystal display device 16. It may be configured to display the browsing history.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be configured to be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, authentication can be performed in an operation order known only to an authorized person, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized one. This operation order is shown when the pachinko gaming machine is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 can detect each volume position of the operation switch. The setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the condition is that the order of the acquired volume position information matches the predetermined operation order stored in advance. In addition, the configuration may be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance to identify the authorized one. It is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to an authorized person without adding an operation switch.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only those who have the authority regarding the set value in the hall can display the setting change / confirmation history information. Although the configuration has been described, it is input from the input unit of the pachinko gaming machine when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information as in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below. It may be configured to authenticate using a password.

[Modification example 3 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, a modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 to 253.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game system 3210 according to the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The gaming system 3210 includes a pachinko gaming machine A, a portable wireless communication terminal 3220, and a server device 3240 arranged in the network 3230. As will be described later, the gaming system 3210 collaborates with the pachinko gaming machine A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and the server device 3240 to perform authentication processing related to setting change / confirmation history information confirmation.

In the gaming system 3210, the pachinko gaming machine A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine described above. Is provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 249). Specifically, the setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is information content as displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218, and includes the setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine A constitutes a generation means for generating a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 3221, a display operation unit 3222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 3222 has the functions of the display unit and the operation unit, and is composed of a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 3161a or the like (see FIG. 249) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A. The display operation unit 3222 and the camera unit constitute the operation display unit and the image pickup means in the present invention, respectively.

The control unit 3221 has a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like, and the CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in, for example, a storage device or a RAM. I do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 3221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL, and inputs the password to the display operation unit 3222 (the figure to be described later). Input screen display control unit that displays (see 252), an authentication result acquisition unit that sends the input password entered on the password input screen to the server device 3240 based on the above URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 3240. If the acquired authentication result is correct, it has a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 3222 in a mode including the set value. The extraction unit, display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application installed in advance in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the constituent elements of the control unit 3221 according to the present invention, are the extraction means, the input screen display control means, and the authentication result, respectively, in the present invention. The acquisition means and the history information display control means are configured.

The server device 3240 has a function of managing a dedicated site of the authentication service identified by the above URL, which is realized by a computer, receives an input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 that has accessed the above URL, and has a preset password. It is equipped with an authentication service function that determines whether or not the password is correct and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the authentication result. The server device 3240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine A constituting the gaming system 3210 according to the modification 3. This setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by "changing settings" from among a plurality of hall menu items displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 208) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A. -The confirmation history is selected and determined, and the operation is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted (see, for example, FIG. 210) on the hall menu screen.

In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S33052 and the like in FIG. 216) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 3, when the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the above, the description of the timekeeping process is omitted in the description in the third modification.

When this setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site of the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 3161a (see FIG. 249) is performed (step S33301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a two-dimensional code display process of displaying the setting change / confirmation history information read in step S3331 and the generated two-dimensional code 3161a in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. 249. Execute (step S33302).

After executing the two-dimensional code display process in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 can accept a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to. The main button 662 is a button for making a processing return request. The select button 664 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Further, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the sub CPU 201 performs the processes of steps S33303 to S3305. Although the processes of steps S33056 to S33064 shown in FIG. 216 are omitted in FIG. 247, in order to perform these processes, FIG. 216 is located between steps S33302 and S33303 of FIG. 247. The processing of step S33056 to step S33064 shown in is added.

In FIG. 247, after the two-dimensional code display process of step S33302, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear” in step S33303. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 249, for example) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. , The sub CPU 201 determines that it is determined to be "clear".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S33303), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S33304), and proceeds to step S33306. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are deleted (see FIG. 222). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S33303), the process proceeds to step S33305.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to "return" in step S33305. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 249) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is determined to "return".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S33305), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S33306), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S33305), the process proceeds to step S33303 and the processing after step S33303 is continued.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S33303), the sub CPU 201 displays the setting change / confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 3161a (see FIG. 249). You may try to clear it. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine A displays the two-dimensional code 3161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change / confirmation history information may be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 and the server device 3240 of the gaming system 3210 according to the modification 3. This process is started on condition that the two-dimensional code 3161a displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 3220.

When the two-dimensional code 3161a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, the control unit 3221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing and displays the image data on the display operation unit 3222 based on the image data, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 3222a is performed (step S33401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, the control unit 3221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores them in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. The two-dimensional code acquisition process to be held is executed (step S33402). Next, the control unit 3221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 252), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (step S33403).

After executing the password input display process in step S33403, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 cooperates with the server device 3240 and performs the password authentication process through the following steps S33404 and S33405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 first monitors whether or not a password has been input to the password display field 3222c (see FIG. 252) (step S33404), and from the numeric keypad 3222b. Performs the process of accepting the input of the password. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S33404), the control unit 3221 transmits the input password to the server device 3240.

The server device 3240 collates the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 with the registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or NG depending on whether the two match. The server device 3240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the above determination result. As described above, in this embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 3240. That is, the server device 3240 returns only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220.

On the other hand, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 transmits the input password received in step S33404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 3240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S33405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S33405), the control unit 3221 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying a message or the like indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 3222 (NO). Step S33410), and then the process is terminated. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the message field 3222d.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is correct (YES in step S33405), the control unit 3221 is set to display the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in step S33402 on the display operation unit 3222. The change / confirmation history display process is performed (step S33406). In this setting change / confirmation history display process, the control unit 3221 embeds (arranges) the setting change / confirmation history information held in step S33402 according to a preset display format. It is created, and based on this display information, the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display operation unit 3222 (see FIG. 253).

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine A of the gaming system 3210 according to the modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 249, in the pachinko gaming machine A, the sub CPU 201 has set change / confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S33302) of FIG. 247. And the setting change / confirmation history screen including the two-dimensional code 3161a is displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 3161a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen 116g includes the setting change / confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the table liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. Includes.

When displaying the two-dimensional code 3161a in the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 247) in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, "* 2D code on a mobile terminal in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A." It may be configured to display a message prompting the transition to the authentication service, such as "Please read and access the authentication service."

FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing an example of a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 3210 according to the modification 3. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the present embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 251 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to the modification 3. The mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 displays the two-dimensional code 3222a as shown in FIG. 251 on the display operation unit 3222 in the two-dimensional code reading display process of S1101.

FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to the modification 3. In the password input display process (see FIG. 248) in step S33403, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 252 on the display operation unit 3222.

As shown in FIG. 252, on the password input screen, a numeric keypad 3222b having keys "0" to "9", "*", and "#", and a password display field 3222c displaying a password input by the numeric keypad 3222b. , The message field 3222d is displayed. In the message field 3222d, a message prompting the user to enter the password is displayed, for example, "* Please enter the password. The set value will be displayed after entering the password." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 252, the password converted into the hidden character "*" can be displayed in the password display field 3222c in which the password is input by operating the numeric keypad 22 2b.

FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to the modification 3. As shown in FIG. 253, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g displays the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in S1102, for example, equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 253, the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

In the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the above-mentioned display format, the above-mentioned display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 253, the scrolling of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supports. As a result, the control unit 3221 operates the decision button and the select button displayed on the display operation unit 3222 together with the setting change / confirmation history information during the setting change / confirmation history processing in FIG. 248 and after the setting change / confirmation history processing. Moves to a state where it is possible to accept page update requests based on.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S33407). To determine whether or not the page update operation has been performed, when it is determined that the select button has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33407), and the page is updated. The process is executed (step S33408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button has been operated and the page refresh operation has been performed (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button has been operated and the last line has been reached), the page continues to scroll the page. Update processing is performed (step S33408).

When the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S33407), that is, when it determines that the operation of the select button has been stopped and the enter button has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S33409. When it is determined in step S33409 that "return" is determined (YES in step S33071), the control unit 222 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S33410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" is not determined (NO in step S33409), the control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the game system 3210 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko game machine A side converts the setting change / confirmation history information into a two-dimensional code as the so-called raw data and displays it in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A. (See step S3331 and step S33302 in FIG. 247), the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A is photographed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 side to change the setting / confirmation history information. The process of returning to the raw data is being performed (see step S33401 and step S33402 in FIG. 248).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped as standard with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code.

Regarding this point, in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and the dedicated application makes it possible to display in the same display format as the pachinko gaming machine A side. ..

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it should be viewed in the same display format as the pachinko gaming machine A side. It is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, only an authorized person can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the set value, which is sufficiently confidential. Sex can be ensured.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, but the above data is obtained in FIG. 253 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Is displayed. Therefore, if you do not have a dedicated application that has the display format, even if you read it with a general-purpose barcode reader, you will not be able to understand what kind of display the character string that reads the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be ensured. The application is distributed at the time of delivery of the pachinko gaming machine A, and can be acquired only by an authorized person.

In the second embodiment, the password is authenticated by receiving the notification of the authentication result from the server device 3240, and determining whether the password is correct or not depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 may receive the password from the server device 3240, determine that the entered password matches the password received from the server device 3240, and determine whether the entered password is correct or not. If you want to further secure confidentiality, the pachinko game machine A encrypts the setting change / confirmation history information, then generates and displays a two-dimensional code, and uses it as a dedicated application to be installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. May be configured to add a setting change / confirmation history information decryption function corresponding to the above encryption.

Next, the procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 3210 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 250.

As shown in FIG. 250, as the first procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine A has a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. Display the hall menu screen when executed. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine A is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Setting change / confirmation history information including setting change / confirmation history screen preview Display the screen (see FIG. 210) (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine A is mainly in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 210) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the work RAM 203 is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (see FIG. 249). ).

As a fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 captures a two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine A (see FIG. 251). After shooting the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and the password is entered from the password input screen (see FIG. 252) provided by this dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the gaming system 3210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the gaming system 3210 or an individual pachinko gaming machine A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 3240 accepts the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 and collates it with the registered password to perform password authentication. Here, the server device 3240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 to that effect when the authentication is OK.

As a sixth procedure, when the authentication OK is obtained in the fifth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure on a screen in a predetermined display format (FIG. 253). (Refer to), the content including the set value is displayed on the display operation unit 3222. As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 3222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220.

As described above, the pachinko game machine A according to the second embodiment has a liquid crystal display device 16A for displaying various images, a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving various operations, and controls related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit, and the sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16A, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332 that enables the setting switch 332 and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit are provided. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a setting value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from RTC209 as the setting change / confirmation history information, and works. It has a setting display function that displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A, and the operation unit displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data by the setting display function. It has a configuration in which setting change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code when a certain main button 662 is operated.

With this configuration, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means as the setting change / confirmation history information, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. , The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the two-dimensional code is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 and the display is permitted after the password is authenticated, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine A according to the second embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 201 uses the displayed date and time data as the browsing history of the work RAM 203. The browsing history may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine A according to the second embodiment is a mobile wireless device based on information from a predetermined server device 3240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. The communication terminal 3220 may be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 3240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 on condition that the password entered in is matched. Therefore, since it is possible to authenticate with a password known only to an authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized one to the pachinko gaming machine A side. This password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine A is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing or confirming the settings.

Further, the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine A and a server device 3240 connected to the network 3230 and managing a site for authentication. It also has a generation function to generate the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and the two-dimensional code of the site URL, and the server device 3240 uses the password from the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 as the preset password. The mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 has an authentication service machine that compares and authenticates and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the authentication result. The camera unit that captures the two-dimensional code displayed in, the extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and URL, and the input that displays the password input screen for entering the password. When the screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit that sends the password entered on the password input screen to the server device 3240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 3240, and the acquired authentication result are correct. The configuration includes a history information display control unit that displays setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 3222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the second embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine A by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and after authentication by the server device 3240, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. Setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also to make an illegal operation. You will be able to judge whether it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the second embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Not only that, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine A and the gaming system 3210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

The gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its action and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[Example of application to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the second embodiment can be applied to pachislot machines. When the invention according to the second embodiment is applied to a pachi-slot machine, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine.

In pachislot, the setting change process can be performed on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is off, and the setting value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or it is detected that the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachislot has made the above-mentioned setting changes, input a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the setting key, and then operate the start lever. When the indicated signal is received, data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachislot machine constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting has been changed and RTC. The date and time data currently timed by the CPU, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change confirmation history information. The pachislot sub CPU constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In pachislot, checking the set value means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and displaying the current setting value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the setting confirmation process on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON in the power ON state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The pachislot setting switch constitutes a setting means that enables the change or confirmation of the set value together with the main CPU.

In order to be able to display the confirmation history of the set value, the main CPU confirmed the set value by the above operation, and when the signal generated from the setting switch by the operation of the setting key was input, the set value was confirmed. And the setting confirmation command which is the current setting value are sent to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating setting confirmation) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed. The date and time data currently timed by the RTC, that is, the date and time data for which the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received, is stored in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information. The work RAM 203 can store and retain the written information even in a non-energized state.

The sub CPU that has received the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. Then, when the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hall menu display process for displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachi-slot machine. The hall menu screen displayed on the pachislot machine replaces the "medal ball information" displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as the display of "total medal information", basically, the screen is the same as the hall menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. be.

In pachislot, browsing means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. The setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed as, for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen on condition that the main button is pressed in this state.

The pachislot sub CPU executes the same processes as those executed by the pachinko gaming machine sub CPU 201 according to the second embodiment, such as hall menu processing, setting change / confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. be able to. When the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine is applied to the pachislot machine, the hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, the password request screen, and the input described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine are used. A screen similar to the screen displayed when the password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, etc. is displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pachislot machine or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In pachislot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in pachislot, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the precursor games of "SBB" and "BB" are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Further, in pachislot, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART each end on the condition that the games of the number of staying games have been exhausted, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, "100", and like "BB", the number of games added to the number of staying games in "SBB" is increased. It may be configured to be added (added).

Further, in pachislot, the number of games for producing additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" may be set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for additionally producing A, B, and C may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional addition game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional addition effect (additional additions A, B, C).

Further, in the pachislot, the number of staying games of the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games such as "50", or instead, a predetermined number of games is set as one set (for example,). , 1 set "50" games), the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set "50" games, that is, a total of "100" games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided in which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. In addition, a lottery for the number of additional games may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the end of this predetermined period (when the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed with, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the irregular push is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine, as an accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine, a rotary accessory unit 122 having a rotary accessory 123 rotated by driving a stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving, for example, a stepping motor or a solenoid.

[3. Pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment]
[Expansion example of game characteristics using small hit games]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention and the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment have been described above. Is also good. That is, both the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment are basically game-like in which the number of balls to be output is increased in the jackpot gaming state. Alternatively, it may be a game property in which the execution frequency of the small hit game is increased and the number of balls to be played is increased in a specific game state. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment in which the execution frequency of the small hit game is increased and the number of balls to be ejected is increased in a specific gaming state will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment has a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see, for example, FIGS. 5 to 7 and 14 to 17 and the like), and a block diagram showing a main control circuit (see, for example, FIG. 9). , A hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 (see, for example, FIG. 11), a symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 (see, for example, FIG. 12), and. It has a configuration partially different from that of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, such as a jackpot type determination table (for example, see FIG. 13) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100, but points not particularly mentioned. Is almost the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment may have a setting function like the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

Since various variations of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment can be adopted, the first to eighth embodiments will be described separately. However, with respect to the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the configuration different from that of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above will be mainly described, and unless otherwise specified, the first embodiment described above will be described. It has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment. Therefore, the description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

In this specification, the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment is referred to as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment of the third embodiment (also with respect to the second embodiment to the eighth embodiment). The same applies).

Further, with respect to each of the pachinko gaming machines of the second to eighth embodiments, the configuration different from that of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described. It has a similar configuration. Therefore, the description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted.

Further, in explaining each of the pachinko machines of the first to eighth embodiments, the same members as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals even if the arrangement positions are different. is doing. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment has a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 254 described later). Although the placement position is different from, they are all given the same code because they are big winning openings.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment]
FIG. 254 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

(Appearance configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment includes an attacker unit 5000 instead of the attacker unit 500 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. The attacker unit 5000 has a first starting port 5442, a small hit winning opening 5400, a small hit shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small hit winning opening that drives the small hit shutter 6100. While it is equipped with a solenoid (not shown), it is not equipped with a large winning opening 540 and a special electric accessory 600. As shown in FIG. 254, the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20 and on the upstream side of both the attacker unit 5000 and the passage gate 49. It is provided. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 5400 is, for example, 15.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the special electric accessory 600 can (or easily) win a game ball in the big winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid. ), And a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 540.

The right-handed game ball collides with the cushioning member 950, and the momentum of the game ball is weakened. Then, the game ball whose momentum is weakened by colliding with the cushioning member 950 falls above the shutter 610.

The first start port 5442, the small hit winning opening 5400, the small hit winning shutter 6100, and the small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown) do not necessarily have to be unitized, and each is a separate body. Alternatively, only a part of these (for example, the small hit winning opening 5400, the small hit shutter 6100, and the small hit winning opening solenoid may be unitized.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the gaming ball is launched (struck to the right) toward the right side region, all or most of the gaming balls are configured to pass through the passage gate 49. Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, the passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the gaming ball passes, and in the time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 440 is reached. It becomes an electric support state that facilitates the winning of the game ball. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, even in the non-time saving gaming state which is not the electric support state, it is not as much as the time saving gaming state. However, the right-handed pachinko ball is relatively configured to win the second starting port 440 (at least, the left-handed pachinko ball that fires the game ball toward the left region is the first start. It's much easier than winning the mouth 5442). However, even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the number of prize balls to be paid out is one.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20 (see, for example, FIG. 5). In the pachinko gaming machine of one embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged between the large winning opening 540 and the small hit winning opening 5400 (that is, between the shutter 610 and the small hit shutter 6100). .. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. It does not necessarily have to be unitized, and each may be a separate body, or only a part of these (for example, the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 may be unitized.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 is a game ball to the second starting port 440 by allowing the transparent panel 172 to move forward and backward in place of the blade member 4620 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. It is provided with a movable shutter 4650 that can change the ease of winning a prize or change the mode in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is impossible or possible. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a start port solenoid (not shown) and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the start port solenoid to the movable shutter 4650.

As with the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by left-handed hitting, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is in principle. It is done by right-handed.

(Hit judgment table)
FIG. 255 is an example of a hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, the main CPU 101 is used when the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442. The result of the big hit determination using the random value for the big hit determination acquired in 1 is not determined as "small hit", but is determined as "big hit" or "missing" (see FIG. 255 (a)). Further, in the big hit determination using the random value for big hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 determines the result of the big hit determination as "big hit", "small hit" and "small hit". It is determined to be one of "missing" (see FIG. 255 (b)).

More specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the number of jackpot determination value data from the acquired jackpot determination random number value in the jackpot determination using the jackpot determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442. However, if a digit borrowing (becomes negative) occurs, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if no digit borrowing occurs, it is determined to be a loss. Further, in the jackpot determination using the jackpot determination random value acquired when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 first determines the number of jackpot determination value data from the acquired jackpot determination random number value. Subtract, if digit borrowing occurs, it is judged as "big hit", if digit borrowing does not occur, the number of small hit judgment value data is subtracted, and if digit borrowing occurs, it is judged as "small hit", and the digit If no borrowing occurs, it is judged as a loss. For example, in the high-probability gaming state (probability variation flag on), when the jackpot determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 is 13200, "13200 (acquired jackpot determination random number value) -1311. (Number of big hit judgment value data) = 11889 ≠ digit borrowing ", so the result of big hit judgment is not judged as" big hit ", and" 11889 (difference between the acquired random number value for big hit judgment and the number of big hit judgment value data) -13107 (number of small hit determination value data) = -1218 = digit borrowing ", and the result of the big hit determination is determined to be" small hit ". If the result of the jackpot determination is not determined to be "big hit", the acquired jackpot determination randomness is not used without using the difference between the acquired jackpot determination random value and the number of jackpot determination value data (11889 above). Using the numerical value (13200 in the above), "13200 (acquired random value for big hit judgment) -14418 (sum of the number of big hit judgment value data and the number of small hit judgment value data) = -1218 = digit borrowing", and the big hit The result of the determination may be determined to be a "small hit".

In FIGS. 255 (a) and 255 (b), the value of the jackpot determination data is 0-204 when the probability variation flag is 0, 0-1310 when the probability variation flag is 1, and particularly in FIG. 255 (b), the probability variation flag is set. Depending on the value, the value of the small hit determination value data is 205-13311 and 1311-1417, and the number of data does not change, but the value of the data fluctuates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as another example of how to hold the data, the small hit determination data is set to 0-13106 regardless of the value of the probability variation flag, and when the probability variation flag is 0 as the value of the big hit determination data, the probability variation flag 1 In this case, by setting 13107-14417, the random value that becomes a small hit does not change depending on the state, and the types of constant data in the program can be reduced. Therefore, this may be done.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, it is determined as "small hit" in the big hit determination by the main CPU 101 using the big hit determination random value acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442. There is no such thing (the probability of being determined as a "small hit" is 0%), but it is not always necessary to set the probability of being determined as a "small hit" to 0%. For example, in the jackpot determination using the jackpot determination random value acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 has an extremely low probability (for example, in the normal gaming state) as compared with the second special lottery. If the probability is within the range in which the number of balls to be played cannot be increased in the game), it may be determined as "small hit".

(Design judgment table)
FIG. 256 is an example of a symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. First, regarding the symbol determination table (first starting port), the major difference between FIG. 256 and FIG. 12 is that there is no "small hit determination value data" in the determination value data and "big hit determination value data" is obtained. The number of hit selection symbol commands selected in this case is large. Further, regarding the symbol determination table (second start port), the major difference between FIG. 256 and FIG. 12 is that the determination value data includes "small hit determination value data" and "big hit determination value data" can be obtained. The number of hit selection symbol commands selected in this case is large.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 257 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. In this jackpot type determination table, as in FIG. 13, the main CPU 101 responds to the hit selection symbol command related to the jackpot, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game, the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot game state is changed to the general game state. Refer to to determine the type of jackpot, such as whether to turn on the probability change flag and whether to turn on the time saving flag in the gaming state after shifting to (a gaming state that is not a jackpot gaming state, the same applies hereinafter). It's a table. The major difference between FIG. 257 and FIG. 13 is that the main CPU 101 does not always determine the number of time reductions to "100" even when the probability change flag is set to "1", and 24 times, 30 times, and 36 times. , 42 times, 48 times and 100 times may be determined to be the specified number of times, and even if the probability variation flag is set to "0", the time reduction number is determined to be "100". There is a point.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment including the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to "1", the main CPU 101 starts from the jackpot gaming state. The gaming state after shifting to the general gaming state is controlled to the "probability variation time-saving gaming state" which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. In this case, the high-probability gaming state is determined by the main CPU 101 using the big hit determination random value acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 until the next big hit is won. It continues (until it is determined as a "big hit" in the jackpot determination), but the time-saving game state ends when the determined predetermined number of time-saving games are exhausted. Therefore, if the player shifts from the jackpot game state to the high-probability time-saving game state and does not win the next jackpot before the specified number of time-saving games is digested, the main CPU 101 digests the specified number of time-saving games. The later gaming state is controlled to a "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. In this specification, the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are referred to as "low-probability time-saving gaming state". Further, the "time saving game" is a variable display of the special symbol, and the number of time reductions is digested regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. ..

(Variation time of special symbol)
Next, refer to FIGS. 258 and 259 for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol performed in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 (both see FIG. 8). I will explain. The details of the variation time of the special symbol are not described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but it is an important matter in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

FIG. 258 is an example of a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of a special symbol for low start. FIG. 259 is an example of a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of a special symbol for high start. The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is the special symbol for high start than when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start. It is larger when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation time determination table of.

In the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 (hereinafter, "determines the variation time"). "). Further, in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the special symbol variation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. 259 is referred to. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol.

In addition, the "Nth time" shown in the column of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. Occasionally, it is a variable display of a special symbol that may be the last in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" or "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state". In other words, it is a variable display of the special symbol of the short time number that may be determined. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as described above, the number of time reductions is determined to be any one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times, so that the 24th special time is specified. The 30th special symbol variation display, the 36th special symbol variation display, the 42nd special symbol variation display, the 48th special symbol variation display, and the 100th special symbol variation display , Nth special symbol variation display. Then, the variable display of the special symbol other than the Nth time is "other than the Nth time".

When the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation time to the sub CPU 201, and the variation corresponding to the determined variation time. The first special symbol and / and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner over time, and the first special symbol and / and the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner are displayed based on the symbol designation command determined with reference to FIG. 256. Execute control to stop. As a result, based on the jackpot determination (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 and / or the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. The result of the big hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is derived. The control for displaying and stopping the variation of the first special symbol and / and the second special symbol performed by the main CPU 101 corresponds to the processing of step S85 (see FIG. 122) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

In this specification, a product in which the result of the special lottery is shown on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 by the main CPU 101 is referred to as “deriving”, and is referred to as “deriving” by the sub CPU 201, for example, on the liquid crystal display device 16. The display showing the result of the special lottery is called "display".

The sub CPU 201 that has received the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101 determines whether the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Then, when the gaming state at the start of variation of the special symbol (when the variation pattern command is received) is the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 201 receives the variation pattern command as the variation pattern command of the first special symbol. If there is, the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command is controlled via the display control circuit 204 so as to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern of the second special symbol. If it is a command, the control (control to display the effect content determined based on the received fluctuation pattern command on the liquid crystal display device 16) is not executed. Also, when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (when the fluctuation pattern command is received) is "high accuracy time saving game state", "high accuracy non-time saving gaming state" or "low accuracy time saving gaming state", the sub If the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the CPU 201 sets the display control circuit 204 so that the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the control (control to display the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command on the liquid crystal display device 16) is performed. Do not execute.

The "normal gaming state" and the "high accuracy time-saving gaming state" have also been described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but here again, the "normal gaming state" and the "high accuracy" The "time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" will be described. In the "normal game state", the probability that the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the symbol combination of the "big hit" is derived (the probability that the result of the special lottery becomes the "big hit") is relatively low, and the electric power It is a game state without support. In the "high accuracy time-saving game state", the probability that the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the symbol combination of "big hit" is derived (the probability that the result of the special lottery becomes "big hit") is relatively high, and the electric support is performed. It is a gaming state that becomes a state. The "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is a gaming state in which the probability that a special symbol variation display is performed and a "big hit" symbol combination is derived is relatively high, and there is no electric support. The "low-probability short-time gaming state" is a gaming state in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the probability that a "big hit" symbol combination is derived is relatively low, but the game is in an electric support state. In the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" and the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", which are in the electric support state, the main CPU 101 is connected to the hall computer (both see FIG. 9) from the command output port 106 via the external terminal board 320. , The time saving medium signal is output as the command as an external output signal. As a result, the hall computer can manage whether or not each pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a short time (during electric support). Further, for example, a data display directly or indirectly connected to the pachinko gaming machine is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine, and this data display also indicates that the time is being shortened. Is possible.

The first item, which is a characteristic of the variation time of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, is that when the gaming state at the start of the variation of the special symbol is the "normal gaming state", the first special symbol The point is that the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is much longer than the average time of the fluctuation time. In addition, when the gaming state at the start of the change of the special symbol is the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the average of the fluctuation times of the first special symbol. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is much shorter than the time. Such a characteristic point is drawn out especially by the fluctuation time when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "missing".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the result of the second special lottery was "small hit" or "miss" in the "normal game state" in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs a variation display (long variation A, long variation B or long variation C) of the second special symbol over an extremely long time such as 580000 msec to 600,000 msec.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as a pattern of variation display of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "missing" in the "normal gaming state". Although only three patterns of long fluctuation A to long fluctuation C with different fluctuation times are prepared, it can be said from the viewpoint of preventing the act of firing the game ball by right-handed only at the timing when the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened. For example, it is preferable to prepare more patterns (for example, 10 patterns) in the range of 500,000 msec to 600,000 msec.

On the other hand, the game state at the start of the change of the special symbol is the "high probability non-time saving game state" in which the probability change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is OFF, the "high probability time reduction game state" in which the probability change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, or the probability change flag. In the case of "low probability time saving game state" of OFF and time saving flag ON, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "missing", the main CPU 101 is 1000 msec under certain conditions. The fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed over an extremely short time (ultra-fast fluctuation).

The "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" are all general gaming states.

Further, as for the second item, which is a characteristic of the variation time of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the variation determination of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation time table of the special symbol for high start. In the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", as shown in FIG. Normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) is performed. It should be noted that such a reach effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 that has received the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 by using the variable display of the plurality of identification symbols.

(Variation display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol)
By the way, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when both the start memory for the first special symbol and the start memory for the second special symbol are reserved, which start memory comes first. Priority is given to the cancellation of the hold for the start memory of the second special symbol (the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol), and the change of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 73 regardless of whether or not the second special symbol is held. The display is performed (while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed), but in this respect, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment is significantly different.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the starting condition of the first special symbol is that the starting memory for the first special symbol is reserved even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. It is established on condition that the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and that it is in a general gaming state (a gaming state that is neither a big hit gaming state nor a small hit gaming state). Further, as for the start condition of the second special symbol, even if the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the start memory for the second special symbol is suspended, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. It is established on the condition that the game is not played and that the game is in a general game state (a game state that is neither a big hit game state nor a small hit game state). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, even if the main CPU 101 variablely displays one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the start of the other special symbol is performed. When the condition is satisfied, the variable display of the other special symbol is started, and in this case, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU 101 is a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the jackpot symbol. Perform processing so that it does not stop at.

More specifically, when the main CPU 101 is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of No. 1 with a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the game shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above. In this jackpot gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the start of the second special symbol are started. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU 101 does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU 101 is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general game The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted based on the transition from the state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), and the transition from the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the game shifts from the general gaming state to the small hit gaming state as described above. In this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU 101 does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed and one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU 101 is displaying the variable. Regarding the other special symbol, the LED group 73a or the LED group 74a (both of which see FIG. 8) are displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

The small hit game state includes a waiting period (opening interval period) until the execution of the small hit game is started, an execution period of the small hit game of less than 1800 msec, and a waiting period after the small hit game is executed. It is a gaming state of about 5000 msec composed of (ending interval period).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the main CPU 101 is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, one of the special symbols indicates a jackpot symbol. When stopped by a combination, control is performed to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a symbol combination indicating a loss, and when one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the other special symbol is stopped. The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted and the timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is restarted based on the transition from the small hit game state to the general gaming state (end of the small hit game), but this is limited to this. I can't. For example, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, if one special symbol stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. The timekeeping of the other special symbol is resumed based on the transition from the jackpot game state to the general gaming state (end of the jackpot game), and one special symbol changes the small hit symbol. When stopped at the symbol combination shown, the control may be performed to forcibly stop the other special symbol at the symbol combination indicating the loss. Further, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, one of the special symbols stops at either the symbol combination indicating the big hit symbol or the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol. Even if this is the case, the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is restarted based on the transition from the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state. The processing may be performed. Furthermore, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, one of the special symbols is either a symbol combination showing a big hit symbol or a symbol combination showing a small hit symbol. Even when it is stopped, control may be performed to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a symbol combination indicating a loss.

Further, in the main CPU 101, the result of one of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is a "big hit", and while the special symbol based on the "big hit" is displayed in a variable manner, even if the other is displayed. Even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit". In this non-winning process, even if a random number value for big hit determination is acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440, the big hit determination value in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 255). Since the determination is made by excluding the data (replaced with the loss determination value data), the result of the other special lottery is "small hit" or "loss". For example, in the high-probability gaming state, when the random number value for jackpot determination acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is "650", according to the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 255). , It is judged as "missing" where it is originally a "big hit". However, the non-winning process is not limited to such an embodiment, and the result of the jackpot determination using the random value for the jackpot determination acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 is the result. Even if it is a "big hit", it may be a process of clearing the "big hit" and making it a "loss".

Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed. Both will not win at the same time. For example, as shown in the special symbol memory check process of FIG. 124, when the main CPU 101 performs a special lottery based on the winning of the second start port 440, the first start port 5442 within the same interrupt process. This is because a special lottery based on winning a prize will not be held.

However, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the game state of the main CPU 101 is "normal gaming state". , "High-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", "High-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "Low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", both the starting condition of the first special symbol and the starting condition of the second special symbol If is satisfied, both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in this order within the same interrupt processing. In this way, the control load of the main CPU 101 can be reduced by making it possible to perform both the second special lottery and the first special lottery in a predetermined order within the same interrupt process regardless of the game state. While reducing the amount, it is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

By the way, since it is rare that both the start condition of the first special symbol and the start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, usually, in the same interrupt process, the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed. Only one of them (the special lottery for which the start condition is satisfied) is performed by the main CPU 101. If neither the start condition of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is satisfied, the main CPU 101 does not perform either the first special lottery or the second special lottery. However, for example, in the jackpot game state, both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are stopped (that is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are stopped. In either case, the timekeeping of the variable time is not interrupted), and if both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol are reserved at the end of the jackpot game state, the jackpot game After the state is terminated, both the starting condition of the first special symbol and the starting condition of the second special symbol can be satisfied at the same time. Then, the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed within the same interrupt process may be "big hits" at the same time. In particular, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the game shifts to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the probability that the result of the first special lottery and the second special lottery will be "big hit". Is relatively high, so that the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed within the same interrupt process may be "big hits" at the same time. Further, although the possibility of establishment is extremely rare compared to the above example, for example, there is no hold in both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol, and the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 are not held. When a game ball enters at the same time, or after there is a hold in both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously derived. However, it is possible that the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed within the same interrupt process will be "big hits" at the same time.

Therefore, when both the start condition of the first special symbol and the start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the main CPU 101 first performs the second special lottery regardless of the gaming state, as described above. After that, the process is performed so that the first special lottery is performed, but if the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", the big hit flag is set, and in the first special lottery to be performed after that, the big hit flag is set. I try to judge whether or not it is. At this time, if the big hit flag is set, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery as the above-mentioned non-winning process so that the result of the first special lottery does not become a "big hit", thereby performing the same interrupt processing. It is designed to prevent the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery held in the above from becoming a "big hit" at the same time. However, instead of this, when the big hit flag is set because the result of the second special lottery performed earlier in the same interrupt process is "big hit", the first special lottery itself is not executed and the big hit. If the flag is not set, the first special lottery may be executed. However, when the result of the second special lottery previously performed in the same interrupt process is "small hit", the other first special lottery is performed as usual instead of the non-winning process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "big hit" having a relatively high profit degree from being canceled by the "small hit" having a relatively low profit degree.

In this way, even if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are symbol combinations showing the jackpot symbol. I try not to stop it.

It should be noted that the fact that the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed within the same interrupt process become a "big hit" at the same time means that the "high accuracy time-shortening game state" or the "high accuracy time-shortening game state" is obtained after the big hit game state ends. It is relatively likely that it will occur when the player shifts to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". Therefore, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment mainly wins a prize in the second starting port 440 rather than the first starting port 5442. It is preferable to perform the second special lottery and the first special lottery in this order within the same interrupt processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special lottery and the second special lottery may be performed in this order within the same interrupt processing.

(Flow of the game)
When the game ball launched by the player by operating the firing handle 32 toward the gaming area 20 in the "normal gaming state" in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off wins the first starting port 5442. Unless the reach effect (normal reach for low start, super reach A for low start, super reach B for low start) is not performed, normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation A, normal fluctuation B) such as 5000 msec or 10000 msec is performed. On the other hand, when the game ball launched by the player by operating the firing handle 32 toward the game area 20 in the "normal game state" wins the second starting port 440, the second special lottery is performed as described above. Unless the result of is "big hit", the variation display (long variation A, long variation B or long variation C) of the second special symbol is performed over an extremely long time such as 580000 msec to 600,000 msec (see FIG. 258). In the second special lottery, unlike the first special lottery, the "small hit" is won with a relatively high probability of about one-fifth, but the variation display of the second special symbol is performed over such an extremely long time. Therefore, in a "normal game state", a general player plays a game with a left-handed hit that can win a prize at the first starting opening 5442 rather than a right-handed hit that the launched game ball can win at the second starting opening 440. Will be done.

When the game ball launched toward the game area 20 wins the first start port 5442 in the "normal game state", the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery. This first special lottery has a probability of about 1/319 as a "big hit", and the others are "missing". Then, when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 101 operates the condition device to operate the accessory continuous operation device. The condition device operates on the condition that the result of the special lottery is "big hit", and does not operate when the result of the special lottery is "small hit" or "missing". The accessory continuous operation device operates on condition that the condition device is activated. The main CPU 101 executes a control for shifting from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the operation of the accessory continuous operating device.

After shifting to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. This jackpot game is a game in which a round game in which the big winning opening 540 is open is executed over a plurality of rounds, as described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. When a game ball wins a prize in the open prize opening 540, the prize ball is paid out as described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. As described above, the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game is determined by the control of the main CPU 101 based on the big hit type determination table of FIG. 257 when the result of the special lottery is "big hit". To.

When the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 after the big hit game is completed based on the big hit type (hit time selection symbol command) determined with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. Determine the game status. For example, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z7" and the execution of the big hit game is completed, the main CPU 101 executes a control to shift from the big hit game state to the "high accuracy time and short game state".

In the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", "high-accuracy time-short-game state", and "low-accuracy time-short-game state", when the game ball wins the second start opening 440, the main CPU 101 determines the result of the second special lottery. Unless it is a "big hit", the fluctuation time is 1000 msec. In addition, in the second special lottery, a "small hit" is won with a relatively high probability of about one-fifth. Therefore, a general player can win a prize in the first starting port 5442 in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". Rather than hitting, the game will be played with a right-handed hit that can win a prize at the second starting port 440.

Here, for each of the general gaming states, "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", special symbols are provided for each gaming state. Expected value of the number of prize balls paid out while fluctuating is divided by the number of game balls fired (Expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time [(Prize per unit time) Expected value of the number of balls) / (number of balls launched per unit time)]) will be described. Among the parameters that affect the "expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time", the "number of shot balls per unit time" is 100 balls per minute. Another parameter, "expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time" will be described later.

In the case of the above-mentioned enclosed type gaming machine, since the gaming ball as a gaming medium is configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, the prize ball is used as a gaming medium instead of being paid out when a prize is won. Data (referred to as "prize ball data" in this specification) is given. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, 15 is given as prize ball data corresponding to the 15 prize balls in the case of an enclosed gaming machine.

First, in the "normal game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls is extremely higher than any of the "high probability time-shortening game state", "high probability non-time saving game state", and "low probability time-saving game state". It is natural for those skilled in the art to explain that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is much lower than 1.

Next, in the "high accuracy short game state" and the "low accuracy short game state", the electric support state is set as described above, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is easier than in the "normal game state". Be made. Further, in the second special lottery, which is frequently executed based on the winning of the game to the second starting port 440, the "small hit" is won with a probability of about one-fifth as described above. Therefore, the main CPU 101 controls the small hit winning opening 5400 to the small hit game state in which the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened, with an extremely high frequency as compared with the "normal game state". However, since all or most of the game balls hit to the right pass through the passing gate 49, the second starting port 440 is almost open. Therefore, all or most of the right-handed game balls will win the second start opening 440, and some game balls will reach the small hit winning opening 5400 located on the downstream side of the second start opening 440. There are spilled balls, but almost none. Moreover, even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the prize ball is one. Therefore, in the "high probability short game state" and the "low probability short game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls does not exceed 1 (less than 1) even if the player hits right. However, since the winning of the second starting port 440 is facilitated, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls does not fall far below 1 as in the “normal game state”.

Next, in the "high accuracy non-time saving game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls can exceed 1. This is not as good as a) "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state", but the right-handed game ball is relatively configured to win a prize at the second starting port 440. That, b) Unless the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit", the fluctuation display (variable display) of the second special symbol is performed with a super-fast fluctuation of 1000 msec, c) In the second special lottery, about Winning a "small hit" with a relatively high probability of 1/5, d) When a small hit game is executed, the game ball that did not win the second starting opening 440 wins the small hit winning opening 5400. This is achieved by the fact that the structure is such that it can be done, and that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 5400 is relatively large (for example, 15 balls).

In this specification, the description is made on the premise that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1 in the "high probability non-time saving game state", but the description is not necessarily limited to this, and the unit is not limited to this. It is preferable that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per hour is the highest when it is controlled to the "high probability non-time saving game state" in the general game state.

It should be noted that, in the big hit game state, it is natural for those skilled in the art to explain that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time greatly exceeds 1.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time exceeds 1 in the general gaming state in the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, for example. In the "high-accuracy time-short game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time is set to be less than 1. However, the probability is not limited to this, and the probability that a special symbol variation display is performed and a symbol combination of "big hit" is derived as a "high-accuracy time-short game state" (probability that the result of the special lottery becomes "big hit"). It is relatively high and is in an electric support state, and the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1, "the first high-probability time-saving game state", and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The probability that the symbol combination of "big hit" is derived is relatively high, and there is no electric support, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is made shorter than the "normal gaming state", so that the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is given. A "second high-probability short-time gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of balls exceeds 1 may be provided. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the "high accuracy non-time saving game state".

As described above, the main CPU 101 outputs the time-saving / medium-time signal to the hall computer as an external output signal, but when the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” is changed to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, the time-saving / medium-time signal Needs to be turned from ON to OFF. Therefore, if the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1 when the time saving medium signal is OFF, it is also in the "normal game state" from the viewpoint of the hall computer. Regardless of whether the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 (in this case, fraud is suspected), or because it is a "high probability non-time saving game state", the number of balls fired per unit time It is not possible to determine whether the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number exceeds 1. However, when the "first high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "second high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" are provided as the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "first high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "first" The main CPU 101 does not need to turn off the time-saving and medium-time signals even if the state shifts to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state of 2." Therefore, from the perspective of the hall computer, even if the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1, if the time saving medium signal is ON, the "second high accuracy time saving game state" It becomes possible to grasp that. In addition, when the specifications are such that the "first high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "second high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" are mixed and continuously occur, the time-saving and medium-time signals are all ON. Even on the data display side described above, it is possible to notify that a series of continuous chan states are in effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player in the data display as compared with the case where the game is in a “high-accuracy non-time-saving game state”.

Among the parameters that affect the "expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time", the "expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time" is the unit for the winning opening where the prize balls are paid out. The expected value of winning per hour and the number of prize balls paid out when winning a prize in the winning opening are important factors.

The expected winning value per unit time for the winning opening to which the winning ball is paid out is 100 balls / minute if the winning opening is for all of the launched game balls to win. However, in the case of a winning slot such as the small hit winning slot 5400, which can be won after passing through the variable display of the special symbol, the time required for the variable display of the special symbol, the winning probability of the "small hit", and the winning probability of the "small hit", and The time during which the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened (a mode in which a prize can be won) affects the expected winning value per unit time.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the time required for displaying the variation of the special symbol is as described above with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259, but the time when the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened is 1800 msec. Less than (eg, 1700 msec).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won in the winning opening is that the first starting port 5442 has three balls (same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment). (2) The starting port 440 has one ball (three balls in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment), and the small hit winning opening 5400 has 15 balls (the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a small hit winning opening 5400). The general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 (see, for example, FIG. 14) are 10 balls (same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment).

Returning to the flow of the game, in the "high accuracy time saving game state" after the big hit game is completed, when the time saving game is digested without deriving the combination of the special symbols indicating the "big hit" (determined time saving). (When the variation display of the number of special symbols is performed), the main CPU 101 executes a control to shift from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". For example, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z7", the number of time reductions is 30 times. Therefore, when the time reduction games of 30 times are exhausted, the main CPU 101 executes a control to shift to the "high accuracy time reduction game state". do.

Here, as shown in FIG. 257, the number of time reductions can be selected from a plurality of time reductions such as 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times by the control of the main CPU 101. It is determined. However, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the determined time saving number may be kept secret without being disclosed by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 until the time saving game of the time saving number is digested. .. Therefore, the player can change from the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls is less than 1 to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls exceeds 1. It is difficult to grasp at what timing the transition control is performed by the main CPU 101 until the transition to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". In addition, although an example of shifting from the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" has been described, the above-mentioned "first high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "second high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" have been described. It is natural that the above-mentioned number of times of shortening the time may be replaced with the number of times of executing the electric support. In this case, even if the electric support is completed, the time is still shortened and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In this way, when the game state after the big hit game is completed is the "high accuracy time saving game state", from the player's point of view, the shorter the number of time reductions determined, the earlier the "high accuracy non-high accuracy". As the game shifts to the "short-time game state", the interest is enhanced.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 257, the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", and the hit selection symbol command is among "z0" to "z11". When either is the case, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed to the “high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state” or the “low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state”.

In the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the combination of the jackpot symbols is derived (that is, the first). (When the result of the special lottery is a "big hit"), as shown in FIG. 259, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time to be one of "05H" to "07H" based on the symbol determination random number value. do. Similarly, in the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the combination of the jackpot symbols is derived ( That is, when the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit"), as shown in FIG. 259, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time to any of "16H" to "18H" based on the random value for symbol determination. Decide whether. The main CPU 101 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation time determined in this way to the sub CPU 201. When the sub CPU 201 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101, the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, or super reach B for high start) is performed based on the received variation pattern command. It is controlled so that it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "high-accuracy time-short game state", "high-accuracy time-short game state", or "low-accuracy time-short game state", the variation display of the special symbol is performed and the combination of the big hit symbols is not derived, and the small hit symbol is not derived. Even when the combination of or lost symbols is derived (that is, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit" or "missed"), if the number of changes of the special symbol is the Nth time, the Nth time. When the variable display of the special symbol of is being performed, the sub CPU 201 controls the liquid crystal display device 16 to display the same reach effect as the reach effect performed when the result of the special lottery is "big hit". After performing the reach effect, an image indicating that it is a "small hit" or a "loss" is displayed. However, as described above, since the "Nth time" shown in the column of the number of changes of the special symbol in FIG. 259 is the variation display of the special symbol of the number of time reductions that may be determined, the time reduction is digested. In the "high accuracy non-time saving game state", the column of "other than the Nth time" is always referred to.

In this way, when the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is the "high accuracy time-shortening game state" or the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", the sub CPU 201 displays the liquid crystal display device 16 on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the Nth variation display of the special symbol. After the reach effect is displayed, if the image showing the big hit is displayed, it shifts to the big hit game state, and even if the image showing the big hit is not displayed, it may shift to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state". It is possible to perform so-called fanning effects such as. Regarding the reach production in the Nth time, even if the winning is lost, for example, when the confrontation reach in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is executed and the current game state is "low probability short game state". Is finally defeated, and if the current game state is "high accuracy time saving game state", the final victory effect is executed, and the game state to be started from now on is " It is desirable to notify whether it is a "normal gaming state" or a "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". The "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" in this case is the most advantageous gaming state (the most advantageous gaming state among the general gaming states) in which the player can play the game until the next big hit while increasing the game medium. Since the jackpot is guaranteed, you may perform the same effect as the effect at the time of other big hits. Even if the jackpot is not won, even if the effect of winning is executed, the degree of advantage is higher than that of a simple jackpot, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Needless to say, it is natural that it may be a dedicated production different from the big hit production. Further, in the fluctuation time determination table, the fluctuation pattern may be different between the last Nth time and the Nth time other than the last time. For example, in the Nth time other than the last (such as the 24th time when 48 times are decided), whether the current gaming state is the "low accuracy time saving game state" or the "high accuracy time saving gaming state". Since it is confirmed that the game state will continue, the fluctuation pattern for displaying the "tie" is selected as a result of the production, and in the final Nth time (48th time when 48th time is decided, etc.). Will display the final effect ("win" or "defeat") depending on whether the current game state is "low probability time saving game state" or "high probability time saving game state". The variation pattern for this may be selected.

Normally, since the execution of the reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is determined by lottery, there is no guarantee that the reach effect will always be executed in the "high accuracy time / short game state" or the "low accuracy time / short game state". However, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the Nth special symbol variation display in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" or the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" after the big hit game is completed, the sub CPU 201 Since the reach effect is always controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, when the reach effect is executed in the "high probability short game state" or the "low probability time short game state", it is possible that the reach effect is performed based on the result of the special lottery being "big hit". It has a function of indicating that there is, and a function of indicating that it is a variable display of a special symbol that may be the last in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" or "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state". In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 257, when the hit selection symbol command is any one of "z0" to "z5" and "z12", the main CPU 101 is When the big hit game is completed, the transition control is performed from the big hit game state to the "low accuracy time saving game state". Therefore, in addition to the number of time reductions, at least the sub CPU 201 does not disclose which of the "high accuracy time reduction game state" and the "low accuracy time reduction game state" is controlled after the big hit game is completed. By making it (for example, it cannot be grasped from the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16), whether the transition destination after the time-saving game is digested is the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" or "normal". It becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the player is in the “gaming state”. If the transition destination when the time-saving game is digested is the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", it is preferable for the player to have a small number of time reductions, but when the time-saving game is digested, the transition destination is "normal game". When it is in the "state", it is preferable for the player to have a large number of shortened working hours. Therefore, not only the number of time reductions but also the difficulty of grasping the transition destination of the game state after the big hit game is completed can give the player an unprecedented interest.

Further, as a result of the lottery of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 makes it possible to execute a big hit game (hereinafter referred to as "2R big hit game" in this paragraph) in a mode that is difficult for the player to grasp, and such a 2R big hit game. When the player wins the game, the sub CPU 201 may execute a specific effect suggesting that the player has won the 2R jackpot game. In this case, when the number of changes of the special symbol is the Nth time, the change display of the Nth special symbol is performed, and the sub CPU 201 is performed when the result of the special lottery is the 2R jackpot game. The liquid crystal display device 16 is controlled to display an effect that is the same as a specific effect or difficult to grasp in appearance, and after performing the effect, an image indicating that it is a "small hit" or a "loss" is displayed. You may.

By the way, in the "high probability short game state" and the "low probability short game state", as described above, even though the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened at an extremely high frequency, the right-handed game ball Since all or most of them win the second starting opening 440 (the number of prize balls when winning the second starting opening 440 is one), it is almost impossible for a right-handed game ball to win the small hit winning opening 5400. It will be none. However, when controlled to the small hit game state, it takes about 5000 msec for the opening interval period, the execution period of the small hit game, and the ending interval period. That is, in the "high-accuracy time-short game state" and the "low-accuracy time-short game state", although the winning of the game ball can hardly be expected, it is controlled to the small hit game state with high frequency, and each time the game is played. It can be offensive to the person.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled in the "high accuracy time and short game state" and the "low accuracy time and short game state", the small hit game state is changed to the small hit game state. A ceiling suggestion effect that suggests the remaining number of time reductions is performed so that the player's awareness of being controlled is reduced. This ceiling suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 260.

FIG. 260 is an example of a flowchart showing a small hit winning effect process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 130). As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the effect mode determination process includes a scenario presetting process (see FIG. 138) and an effect determination process (see FIGS. 142, 144, 147, and 149). , Look-ahead effect selection process (see FIG. 153), background change control process (see FIG. 157), background change continuous possible number of times determination process (see FIG. 158), variation scenario determination process (see FIG. 161), chance up control process (see FIG. 161). 162), hold change determination process (see FIG. 163), character lamp effect control process (see FIG. 165), full screen effect control process (see FIG. 166), etc. In the game machine, the small hit winning effect processing also constitutes the above-mentioned subroutine processing.

With reference to FIG. 260, the sub CPU 201 determines the current gaming state when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", and when the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (YES in step S1001). ), The effect indicating that the result of the special lottery is "small hit" is not particularly performed, and the effect process at the time of winning the small hit is terminated. Further, when the current gaming state is the "high accuracy non-time saving gaming state" (YES in step S1002), the small hit winning effect (step S1003) indicating that the result of the special lottery is "small hit" is executed. Above, the production process at the time of winning a small hit is completed. In addition, when the current gaming state is neither a "normal gaming state" nor a "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", that is, when it is a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or a "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "small". It is determined whether or not the variation display of the special symbol performed based on the "hit" is the Nth variation display of the special symbol described above (step S1004). When the number of changes of the special symbol is other than the Nth time (NO in step S1004) in the "high probability time saving game state" and the "low probability time saving game state", the sub CPU 201 performs a ceiling suggestion effect (step S1005). This ceiling suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the remaining number of time reductions. On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the Nth time (YES in step S1004) in the "high accuracy time saving game state" and the "low accuracy time saving gaming state", the sub CPU 201 performs the ceiling suggestion effect (step S1005). Without doing so, the production process at the time of winning a small hit is completed. By the way, when the number of changes of the special symbol is other than the Nth time in the "high-accuracy time-short game state" and the "low-accuracy time-short game state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time to "19H" and corresponds to this. The variation pattern command "83H19H" is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for 1000 msec to derive that the result of the second special lottery is "small hit". Therefore, the sub CPU 201 that has received the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101 executes the ceiling suggestion effect after displaying the effect of the ultrafast fluctuation of 1000 msec on the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, the sub CPU 201 executes the above-mentioned ceiling suggestion effect during the small hit game state of 5000 msec.

As a result, even if the small hit game state in which the winning of the game ball is hardly expected is controlled with high frequency, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that can be given to the player each time.

In the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "low-accuracy time-shortening game state", when the number of changes of the special symbol is the Nth time, when the variation display of the Nth special symbol is completed, the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game" is completed. There is a possibility of transitioning to "state". Then, when this Nth special symbol variation display is performed and it is derived that the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the small hit game is performed under the "high accuracy non-time saving game state". May be executed. In addition, when the Nth special symbol variation display is completed, even if the transition to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state" is not performed, the reach is performed when the Nth special symbol variation display is performed. Since the effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start or super reach B for high start) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the player's awareness that the small hit game state is controlled is reduced. It is thought that. Therefore, in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" and the "low accuracy time reduction game state", when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the Nth time, the ceiling suggestion effect suggesting the remaining number of time reductions is not executed. However, it is not always necessary to do this, and the remaining number of time reductions is suggested regardless of whether or not the number of changes in the special symbol in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" and the "low accuracy time reduction game state" is the Nth time. The ceiling suggestion effect may be executed.

Further, the remaining number of time reductions can be calculated by the difference between the number of time reductions determined based on the hit time selection symbol command (see FIG. 257) and the number of digested time reduction games. The calculation may be performed by the main CPU 101 and a command may be transmitted to the sub CPU 201, or the sub CPU 201 may perform the calculation.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when it is controlled to the small hit gaming state, even when it is controlled to either the "high accuracy time-shortening gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state". In this small hit game state, a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests the remaining number of time reductions is executed, but the game state is not limited to this, and one of the "high accuracy time reduction game state" and the "low accuracy time reduction game state" is executed. It may be executed only in.

Further, the effect suggesting the remaining number of time reductions may be a definite effect for determining the number of remaining time reductions, for example, "the possibility that the number of remaining time reductions is 10 is 80%". , It may be a production showing the possibility.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability of winning the "small hit" in the second special lottery is about one-fifth, so that the "high probability time saving game state" or / and the "low probability time saving game" In the "state", if an effect suggesting the number of remaining time reductions is performed each time the small hit game state is controlled, the player may feel annoyed.

Therefore, when the small hit game state is controlled, the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 performs a production lottery in which the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 wins, for example, one-third, and only when the production lottery is won, the production suggesting the remaining time reduction number is produced. It may be performed by the sub CPU 201. In addition, if the number of time reductions is exhausted in the "low probability time reduction game state", it will shift to the disadvantageous "normal game state", so the ceiling is suggested by the "high probability time reduction game state" and the "low probability time reduction game state". The execution probability of the effect may be changed. For example, in the case of the "high probability short game state", the ceiling suggestion effect is executed at 1/5 of the time when the small hit game is executed, and in the case of the "low probability time short game state", the ceiling suggestion effect is executed at 1/20 of the time when the small hit game is executed. In that case, the probability that the ceiling suggestion effect will occur in the "high-accuracy time-short game state" is four times that of the "low-accuracy time-short game state". If the transition rate is, for example, 50% each, the expectation of staying in the "highly accurate time-saving game state" when the ceiling suggestion effect occurs is 80%, the ceiling suggestion effect occurs, and the number of time reductions is exhausted. Regardless, the frequency of transition to the "normal game state" can be reduced, and it becomes possible to hope for the game with an interest in the occurrence of the ceiling suggestion effect. In addition, since it is not "occurrence of ceiling suggestion effect =" high-accuracy time-saving game state "determined", it is said that a big hit occurred without shifting to "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" during "high-accuracy time-short game state". The effect of not giving a feeling of loss can also be achieved.

Further, the winning probability of the above-mentioned effect lottery is changed according to the number of time reductions determined based on the hit time selection symbol command (see FIG. 257) (hereinafter, simply referred to as "time reduction number" in this paragraph). You may do so. For example, if the number of time reductions is 24, the effect suggesting the number of remaining time reductions is executed with a probability of 1/5, and if the number of time reductions is 30 times, the effect is executed with a probability of 1/6. If it is 36 times, it is executed with a probability of 1/7, if the number of time reductions is 42 times, it is executed with a probability of 1/8, and if the number of time reductions is 48 times, it is executed with a probability of 1/9. If the number of time reductions is 100, it may be executed with a probability of 1/10. In this way, by changing the execution frequency of the effect suggesting the remaining time reduction number according to the number of time reductions, the reliability of the suggested remaining time reduction number can be determined from the execution frequency of the effect suggesting the remaining time reduction number. It is possible to give the player the enjoyment of guessing, and it is possible to further reduce the player's consciousness of being controlled by the small hit game state.

In addition, when the time-saving game determined in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is exhausted, the game shifts to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", especially when the time-saving number of times is different each time. It is not known whether the game will shift to the first advantageous game state, and the player may become suspicious and lose his interest. Therefore, when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the "high accuracy time saving game state", the sub CPU 201 transmits a command indicating the determined number of time reductions to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 receiving this command is in the "high accuracy time saving game state". It is preferable to display on the liquid crystal display device 16 the timing of transitioning to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". The timing for shifting from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" may be displayed as the determined number of time reductions, but in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. , A guideline for the timing of transition from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is displayed as an index. That is, the number of time reductions may be displayed as it is, but the number of time reductions may not be displayed as it is, but a guideline may be displayed to some extent. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 261, an index effect processing indicating a guideline for the timing of shifting from the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” will be described.

FIG. 261 is an example of a flowchart of the index effect processing executed by the sub CPU 201.

With reference to FIG. 261, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state has ended, that is, whether or not the jackpot gaming state end command has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S2001). When it is determined that the jackpot gaming state has not ended (NO in step S2001), including the case where the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S2008 described later.

When it is determined that the jackpot game state has ended (YES in step S2001), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game state of the transition destination is the "high accuracy time / short game state", that is, from the main CPU 101 to the "high accuracy time / short game state". It is determined whether or not a command to the effect of shifting to "is received" (step S2002).

On the other hand, if the game state of the transition destination is not "high accuracy time-short game state" (NO in step S2002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the index flag is on (step S2015), and the index flag is turned on. If (YES in step S2015), the index flag is turned off (step S2016), and the index effect processing is terminated. If the index flag is not on (NO in step S2015), the index effect processing is terminated in order to perform the processing in step S2016.

The index flag is a flag that is turned on when the variation display of the special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived. Such an index flag is provided when the "big hit" is derived and controlled to the big hit gaming state, but when the big hit gaming state ends and the "high accuracy time and short game state" is controlled again. , In order to start the continuation from the index displayed when the "big hit" was derived in the previous "high accuracy short game state", but the method of processing using such an index flag Is an example, and is not limited to this.

If the game state of the transition destination is the "high accuracy time saving game state" (YES in step S2002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command indicating the number of time saving times has been received (step S2003). Upon receiving the command indicating the number of time reductions (YES in step S2003), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the index flag is on (step S2004).

If the index flag is on (YES in step S2004), the index stored in the main RAM 103, that is, the index displayed when the "big hit" was derived in the previous "high accuracy short game state". Display (step S2005) and turn off the index flag (step S2006). When the index flag is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2008.

On the other hand, if the index flag is not on (NO in step S2004), the initial index is displayed (step S2007), and the process proceeds to step S2008. The initial index may display the determined number of time reductions, but here, the number of times determined by lottery is displayed as a guideline for the determined number of time reductions, not the determined number of time reductions themselves. The initial index may uniformly display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) instead of the number of times determined by the lottery.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S2008 whether or not the specific condition is satisfied (step S2008). The specific condition may be, for example, a mission given to the player (for example, a mission such as "generate two reach within 3 minutes"), and the specific condition may be satisfied when the mission is cleared. However, a specific condition may be satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls are won in the general winning opening, and the condition can be arbitrarily determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S2008), the sub CPU 201 subtracts a predetermined number from the current index and updates and displays the index (step S2009). Here, the number to be subtracted may be 1, and when the specific condition is difficult to satisfy, the number to be subtracted is changed according to the difficulty of satisfying the specific condition, for example, 3 subtraction. You may do so. After performing the process of step S2009, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S2010. If the specific condition is not satisfied (NO in step S2008), the process proceeds to step S2010. However, if the specific condition is not satisfied in step S2008, a process of adding an index may be performed. For example, the index may be added when the mission is not completed by the player given to the player.

However, in the process of step S2009, it is necessary to change the mode of the index so as to be displayed according to the remaining number of time reductions. For example, even though the remaining number of time reductions is 80 times, an index far from the remaining number of time reductions should not be displayed, such as displaying 20 times. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 is controlled so as to display a value close to the remaining number of time reductions. Further, in the process of step S2009, the sub CPU 201 controls so that the index becomes 0 when the determined time-saving game is digested.

In step S2010, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display of the special symbol has been performed, that is, whether or not the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 has been received (step S2010).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display of the special symbol has been performed (YES in step S2010), the sub CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the current index and updates and displays the index (step S2011). When the sub CPU 201 finishes the process of step S2011, it moves to step S2012. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (NO in step S2010), the process proceeds to step S2012.

In the process of step S2011, even though the determined number of time reductions has not been digested, by subtracting 1 from the current index, the "high probability non-time reduction game state" is changed to the "high probability non-time reduction game state". It is not possible to display "0" indicating the transition to. It is necessary to subtract 1 from the current index and update the display each time the special symbol is variablely displayed in order to make the player understand that the number of remaining time reductions is approaching 0. Needs to perform the process of step S2009 so that 0 is not displayed even though the number of remaining time reductions is not 0.

In step S2012, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is performed and the "big hit" is derived, that is, whether or not the big hit command is received from the main CPU 101 (step S2012).

When the variable display of the special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived, that is, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the "big hit" is derived based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S2012), the sub The CPU 201 stores the currently displayed index in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM (step S2013). After that, the sub CPU 201 turns on the index flag (step S2014), and ends the index effect processing. On the other hand, if the "big hit" is not derived (NO in step S2012), the index effect processing is terminated without performing the processing of step S2013 and step S2014.

In this way, every time the variable display is performed, the index is subtracted and updated so that the remaining number of time reductions approaches 0, so that the "high accuracy time reduction game state" is changed to the "high accuracy non-time reduction game state". It is possible to suggest the timing of the transition to the player, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the sub CPU 201 not only subtracts and displays the index when the variable display is performed, but also the index can perform the addition and subtraction display when a specific condition is satisfied, the sub CPU 201 can perform the addition / subtraction display. It is possible to enhance the game interest until the transition to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state".

In addition, in the "high accuracy time saving game state", the "big hit" is derived before the determined time saving game is digested, and the big hit game state based on this "big hit" is completed and the "high accuracy time saving" is performed again. When controlled to the "game state", the main CPU 101 does not execute the control to shift to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state" unless the determined time saving game is digested, but the sub CPU 201 is the previous "high". The index when the "big hit" is derived in the "probability short game state" is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the mode of the index changes from the continuation of the index displayed in the previous "high accuracy time-saving game state". As a result, although it does not shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" unless the time-saving game of the determined time-saving number of times is digested internally, the appearance is that the time-saving determined in the previous "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is achieved. When the "big hit" is derived without digesting the number of time-saving games, it can be made to appear as if it continues from the previously digested time-saving game, and it is not transferred to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". As a result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss that may occur.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the starting memory based on the winning of the first starting port 5442 and the starting based on the winning of the second starting port 440 Up to 4 memories can be reserved for each. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as described above, the gaming state at the start of the change of the special symbol is the "normal gaming state" and the gaming state at the start of the change of the special symbol is the "high accuracy time-saving game". The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is significantly different depending on the case of "state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state".

Therefore, when the start memory based on the winning of the second start port 440 is reserved in the "normal game state", unless the result of the second special lottery executed for this start memory is "big hit", 580000 ~ The result of the second special lottery will be derived after the variable display of the second special symbol is performed over an extremely long time of 600,000 msec.

As described above, since a general player strikes left in the "normal game state", it is unlikely that the game ball will win the second starting port 440. However, when the gaming state shifts from the "low probability short-time gaming state" to the "normal gaming state", four start memories of the second special symbol are reserved at the time of shifting to the "normal gaming state". Can happen. If the "big hit" is not included in these four holds, the variable display of the second special symbol for all four will end after about 40 minutes (finally, the second special symbol). Even if the start memory (the start memory of the 4th second special symbol) in which the fluctuation display is performed is a "big hit", it becomes about 31 minutes later).

Then, for example, the gaming state shifts from the "low probability short-time gaming state" to the "normal gaming state" with four start memories of the second special symbol reserved, and the first to third symbols are reserved. If the start memory is "missing" and the fourth reserved start memory is "big hit", this "big hit" is derived from the first reserved start memory. A situation may occur after 30 minutes or more have passed since the variable display of the second special symbol was started. It is not preferable to keep the player on standby for such a long time.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 has a look-ahead function for determining the result of the special lottery based on the information of the reserved start memory. I have. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 is suspended when a specific condition is satisfied when the start storage of the second special symbol is suspended. It is determined whether or not "big hit" or / and "small hit" are included in the start memory of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "pre-reading determination of the second special symbol"), and this second special symbol is used. The result of the look-ahead determination of the symbol is sent as a command to the sub CPU 201. The sub CPU 201 that has received the result of the pre-reading determination of the second special symbol is based on the result of the pre-reading determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to suppress the player from waiting for a long time. It is configured to perform a standby coercion suppression effect process capable of executing a standby coercion suppression effect indicating whether or not a "big hit" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol on hold. The standby coercion suppression effect processing will be described below.

FIG. 262 is an example showing a flowchart of the standby extortion suppression effect process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. This standby coercion suppression effect process also constitutes a subroutine process of the effect mode determination process.

With reference to FIG. 262, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the look-ahead determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101 has been received (step S1011). When the sub CPU 201 receives the result of the look-ahead determination of the second special symbol (YES in step S1011), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (step S1012). If the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (YES in step S1012), it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied (step S1013). If the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S1013), it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is included in the reserved start memory of the second special symbol (step S1015). Here, if "big hit" or "small hit" is included in the reserved start memory of the second special symbol (YES in step S1015), the standby compulsion suppression effect is executed (step S1016). This standby compulsion suppression effect is an effect indicating that the start memory of the second special symbol on hold includes a "big hit" or a "small hit", and is a display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. It may be performed as an effect, it may be performed as an audio effect by the output from the speaker 24, or both a display effect and an audio effect may be performed. In this way, by making it possible to perform the waiting compulsion suppression effect based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the player waits for a long time, for example, 30 minutes or more after the variable display of the second special symbol is started. It is possible to eliminate the situation of being forced to.

In the above, in the "normal game state", the standby compulsion suppression effect is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. In this specific condition, for example, a left-handed game ball is a general winning opening 53. From the viewpoint of promoting the game, it is preferable to set the conditions that can be satisfied by hitting the left side, such as winning a prize in, 54, 55. Even if the above-mentioned condition for performing the standby compulsion suppression effect is satisfied, for example, one left-handed game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55. Alternatively, for example, it may be established based on the fact that a plurality of left-handed game balls have won a prize in any of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55. Furthermore, not only one of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 is awarded, but also the weighting condition (for example, the left-handed game ball wins all the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, etc.). The above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression effect may be performed based on the establishment.

In addition, the above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression effect is an effect indicating that "big hit" or "small hit" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is on hold, but includes "big hit". It may be an effect that can distinguish whether it is included or a "small hit" is included, or it may be an effect that cannot be distinguished.

By the way, the above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression effect is an effect indicating that the "big hit" is included in the reserved start memory of the second special symbol by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol for the start memory of the second special symbol pre-read as "big hit" (hereinafter referred to as "specific second start memory") is performed at a stage where it has not been started yet. .. Therefore, the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" even though the sub CPU 201 has performed the standby compulsion suppression effect indicating that the "big hit" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol. When is, the "big hit" for a particular second start memory may be canceled. For example, the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", and a specific first special symbol is started before the variable display of the first special symbol based on this "big hit" is started and the variable display of the first special symbol is finished. 2 It is a case where the variable display of the second special symbol for the start memory is started.

Therefore, after the standby compulsion suppression effect is performed for the specific second start memory, the reach effect is executed by the sub CPU 201 based on the result of the first lottery being a "big hit", and the reach effect is being executed. When the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is started, the sub CPU 201 performs the following effect. First, the reach effect being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. Then, after the reach effect being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the effect is performed as if a new symbol change was started by satisfying the start condition. At this time, the sub CPU 201 suggests that the result of the first special lottery was a loss so that it is difficult to detect that the effect is the same starting memory, such as a revariation effect or a pseudo-continuous effect. It is also preferable to do this. At the same time, it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 performs an effect as if the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is started, in order to perform the effect as if a new symbol change has been started. .. In this case, it is preferable to perform a reach effect different from the above reach effect. For example, if the reach effect before the temporary stop is the super reach effect A, the reach effect performed after the temporary stop may be the super reach effect B or the normal reach, which is completely different from the super reach effect A. As a result, even though the standby compulsion suppression effect indicating that the specific second start memory is a "big hit" is performed, the disappointment that can be given to the player by canceling this "big hit" is reduced. It becomes possible to do.

It should be noted that the reach effect of the first special symbol being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a loss, and then displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of performing the effect as if a new symbol change has started. The sub CPU 201 may perform an effect as if the effect image to be produced is switched from the reach effect for the first special symbol to the reach effect for the second special symbol. That is, in reality, although the reach effect for the first special symbol continues internally, the image looks as if the image has been switched to the reach effect for the second special symbol. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that can be given to the player by canceling the "big hit" for a specific second start memory.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when controlled to the "normal gaming state", the liquid crystal display device 16 mainly displays an effect image based on the result of the first special lottery by the sub CPU 201. To. The effect image based on the result of the second special lottery is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when it is controlled to the "normal game state", or even if it is displayed, it is not detected by the player (for example). , It is only displayed in a small size at the corner of the liquid crystal display device 16.). On the other hand, when controlled to "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the liquid crystal display device 16 is mainly based on the result of the second special lottery. The effect image is displayed by the sub CPU 201, and the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, or even if it is displayed, it is only displayed in a manner not detected by the player. be.

Therefore, even if the result of the second special lottery is a special result when controlled to the "normal gaming state", it is extremely difficult for the player to detect it. Therefore, in the "normal game state", when the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", the sub CPU 201 visually recognizes the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In a manner that does not interfere, a suggestion effect is performed that suggests that the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit" in a manner that can be grasped by the player. "Aspects that do not interfere with the visual recognition of the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16" means, for example, display or light emission using a display device different from the liquid crystal display device 16. By causing the LED to emit light in a specific mode (for example, rainbow light emission), the player is notified that the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit".

However, even if the result of the second special lottery is originally a "big hit", when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", the "big hit" about the second start memory may be canceled. .. For example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is the variation display based on the "big hit". At this time, in the second special lottery for the second start memory where the "big hit" was supposed to be derived, the main CPU 101 is either a non-winning process, or even if the "big hit" is won, the "big hit" is said. Is processed to disappear. Therefore, even though the result of the second special lottery was originally a "big hit", if this "big hit" is canceled, a suggestion effect should have been performed. In such a case, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of not executing the suggestion effect so that the suggestion effect is not always performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the "big hit" from being canceled even though the suggestion effect indicating that the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit" is performed. In addition, it is possible to execute a big hit game based on the result of the first special lottery being a "big hit" without the player being aware that the result of the second special lottery was originally a "big hit". Will be.

In addition, the above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression effect is performed only when the reserved start memory of the second special symbol includes a "big hit" (when only a "small hit" is included. It may be done (not done) or only when the "small hit" is included (not done when only the "big hit" is included).

Further, the above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression effect does not necessarily have to be executed by control by the sub CPU 201. For example, the lighting mode of the second special symbol hold display unit 76 (see FIG. 8) controlled by the main CPU 101 is changed. It may be executed by.

By the way, in the "normal game state", when the standby compulsion suppression effect indicating that the "small hit" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol held is performed, the second special symbol is performed. Since the fluctuation display of is performed for a long time of about 10 minutes each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the small hit shutter 6100 is activated and the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened. Is. Therefore, even though it is clear that the start memory of the second special symbol on hold includes "small hit", when the small hit game is executed, the small hit winning opening 5400 is entered. A situation may occur in which the game ball cannot be won, which may reduce the interest.

Therefore, in the "normal game state", when the "small hit" is included in the reserved start memory of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 201 includes the "small hit". When performing the standby compulsion suppression effect shown, it is preferable to always perform a timing suggestion effect that suggests the timing at which the small hit shutter 6100 is activated (the timing at which the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode). In this case, the sub CPU 201 performs the small hit winning effect processing of FIG. 263 instead of the small hit winning effect process of FIG. 260. FIG. 263 is another example of the flowchart of the small hit winning effect process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. In the small hit winning effect processing of FIG. 263, whether or not the sub CPU 201 has performed the standby compulsion suppression effect (see step S1016 of FIG. 262) when it is in the “normal gaming state” (YES in step S1002). It is different from the small hit winning effect process of FIG. 260 in that the timing suggestion effect (step S1007) is executed if the determination is made (step S1006) and the standby compulsion suppression effect is performed (YES in step S1006). But the others are the same.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the winning probability of the "small hit" in the second special lottery is relatively high, about one-fifth, so that the second special symbol is suspended in the "normal gaming state". It is often possible that multiple "small hits" are included in the starting memory of. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment by performing the timing suggestion effect of step S1007. In particular, when the gaming state shifts from the "low probability time-shortening gaming state" to the "normal gaming state" in a state where four start memories of the second special symbol are reserved, the four second specials that are reserved are reserved. If all of the starting memories of the symbol are "small hits", the game entertainment can be greatly enhanced.

It should be noted that the timing suggestion effect of step S1007 is always performed when the standby compulsion effect indicating that "small hit" is included (when YES is determined in step S1006). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a standby compulsory effect indicating that a "small hit" is included, a timing suggestion effect may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, in the "normal game state", when the "small hit" is included in the reserved start memory of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 201 performs an execution lottery for the timing suggestion effect, and this execution is performed. Only when the lottery is won, the timing suggestion effect may be performed. When the execution lottery of the timing suggestion effect is performed in this way, the player may be expected to win the execution lottery of the timing suggestion effect.

Further, the timing suggestion effect is performed at the timing when the small hit shutter 6100 is activated, but the effect is not limited to this as long as it is possible to make the small hit winning opening 5400 win a prize. For example, in consideration of the time until the launched game ball reaches the small hit winning opening 5400, the sub CPU 201 suggests the timing to launch the game ball before the timing when the small hit shutter 6100 is activated. You may try to perform the production.

By the way, the sub CPU 201 performs the standby compulsion effect (step S1016) indicating that the "small hit" is included in the reserved start memory of the second special symbol when it is reserved, and the timing is set. Since the suggestion effect (step S1007) is performed after the variation display of the second special symbol is started, a time difference occurs between the timing of performing the standby compulsion effect and the timing of performing the timing suggestion effect. Therefore, using this time difference, the sub CPU 201 performs a specific condition (for example, general) between the time when the standby compulsion effect indicating that the "small hit" is included and the time when the small hit game is executed. The timing suggestion effect (step S1007) may be performed only when the winning openings 53, 54, 55, etc. are established. As a result, not only can the player feel a sense of tension from the time when the waiting compulsion effect indicating that the "small hit" is included to the time when the small hit game is executed, but also a specific condition can be obtained. It is possible to enhance the interest by the mini-game that tries to establish.

Further, as described above, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment has a look-ahead function for determining the result of the special lottery based on the information of the reserved start memory. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the look-ahead function provided in the main CPU 101 is used, and the sub CPU 201 performs a plurality of games (for example, a small hit game and a big hit game) executed as a result of a plurality of special lottery. It is configured to perform a premier effect control process that can execute a premier effect as if it were a single game. The premier effect control process will be described below.

FIG. 264 is an example showing a flowchart of the premier effect control process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. This premier effect control process also constitutes a subroutine process of the effect mode determination process.

When the sub CPU 201 executes this premier effect control process, the main CPU 101 is the result of the second special lottery in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". The variation display time of the second special symbol when is "small hit" is determined with reference to the table of FIG. 265 instead of the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259. FIG. 265 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variation time determination table of a special symbol for high start. The variation time determination table of FIG. 265 is a table referred to in the “high-probability short-time gaming state”, “high-probability non-short-time gaming state”, and “low-probability short-time gaming state”, and the result of the second special lottery is obtained. When it is a "small hit", it is determined with a 50% probability of the fluctuation pattern (16H, 17H, 18H) in which the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) is performed. , It is a table in which the fluctuation pattern (19H) in which ultrafast fluctuation is performed is determined with a probability of 50%.

With reference to FIG. 264, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is not the “normal gaming state” (step S1021). When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is not a "normal gaming state", that is, one of the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" ( YES in step S1021), it is determined whether or not the variation display of the special symbol to be performed is the variation display of the second special symbol (step S1022). When the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (NO in step S1021), the sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process. The reason why the premier effect control process is not performed when the current game state is the "normal game state" is that in the "normal game state", the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for about 10 minutes, so that there are a plurality of cases. This is because there is little practical benefit in performing a premiere production of a game (for example, a small hit game and a big hit game) as if it were one game.

Next, when the variation display of the special symbol to be performed is the variation display of the second special symbol (YES in step S1022), the sub CPU 201 derives the variation display of the second special symbol as "small hit". It is determined whether or not the display is variable (that is, whether or not the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit") (step S1023). If the variation display of the special symbol to be performed is not the variation display of the second special symbol (NO in step S1022), the sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process. If the variable display of the special symbol to be performed is not the variable display of the second special symbol, the premier effect control process is not performed in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", or "low-accuracy time-saving game state". In the "game state", the effect mainly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is based on the result of the second special lottery, and even if the special symbol of the first special lottery is variablely displayed, the player is aware of it. This is because it is performed in a manner that does not allow it to occur.

Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is the variation display from which the "small hit" is derived (YES in step S1023), the sub CPU 201 has a reach effect (normal reach for high start, high start). Whether or not the fluctuation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the super reach A and the high start super reach B) are performed is determined based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 (step S1024). Unless it is a variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the reach effect is performed (NO in step S1024), the sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process.

When the variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the reach effect is performed (YES in step S1024), the sub CPU 201 starts the second special symbol in addition to the start memory of the second special symbol to be variablely displayed from now on. It is determined whether or not the memory is reserved (step S1025).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the start memory of the second special symbol is reserved in addition to the start memory of the second special symbol to be variablely displayed from now on (YES in step S1025), the second special symbol to be variablely displayed from now on. With respect to the start memory of the second special symbol held next to the start memory of the symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a "big hit" based on the result of the look-ahead determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101. (Step S1026). If the start memory of the second special symbol is not reserved (NO in step S1025) in addition to the start memory of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed from now on, the sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the look-ahead determination for the start memory of the second special symbol held next to the start memory of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed from now on is "big hit" (YES in step S1026). ), Set the premier production flag on (step S1027). That is, when the result of the second special lottery is continuous in the order of "small hit" → "big hit", the premier effect flag is set to on. If the result of the look-ahead determination for the start memory of the second special symbol held next to the start memory of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed from now on is not "big hit" (NO in step S1026), the second Since the result of the special lottery is not continuous in the order of "small hit" → "big hit", the sub CPU 201 ends the premier effect control process.

Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is performed, the sub CPU 201 executes the premier effect processing (step S1028) and ends the premier effect control process. This premier effect processing is an effect that makes the small hit game state and the next big hit game state of this small hit game state appear as if they are one advantageous game state (that is, more than the normal big hit game). It is a process to execute the effect) to make it look as if it is a big hit game in which the round game of.

When this premier production process is executed, the prize ball that can be obtained in the small hit game state and the prize ball that can be obtained in the big hit game state can be paid out, so that the prize ball can be paid out in one big hit game state. A larger amount of prize balls can be paid out than the prize balls that can be obtained, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is not the variation display from which the "small hit" is derived (NO in step S1023), is the variation display from which the "big hit" is derived? Whether or not it is determined (step S1029).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is not the variation display from which the "big hit" is derived (NO in step S1029), the sub CPU 201 performs a loss effect (step S1032) and performs a premier effect control process. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed is the variation display from which the "big hit" is derived (YES in step S1029), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the premier effect flag is on. Discrimination (step S1030). In the process of this step S1030, the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" → "big hit" between the variable display of the second special symbol immediately before and the variable display of the second special symbol to be performed. It is a process for determining whether or not they are continuous in the order of.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the premier effect flag is not on (NO in step S1030), the sub CPU 201 receives a second variation display between the previous second special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display to be performed. It is determined that the result of the special lottery is not continuous in the order of "small hit" → "big hit", the normal big hit effect is executed (step S1031), and the premier effect control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the premier effect flag is on (YES in step S1030), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S1028, executes a premier effect process that is clearly different from the jackpot effect of step S1031, and premieres. The effect control process is terminated. In this premier effect processing (step S1028), the sub CPU 201 performs an effect connected in a series with the effect performed in the variation display of the previous second special symbol, so that the jackpot effect performed in step S1031 is clearly an embodiment. Is different.

In this way, as a result of the variation display of the second special symbol in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "big hit" is independently derived. If this is the case (when the "small hit" is not derived in the variation display of the previous second special symbol), a big hit effect is performed. On the other hand, in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the results of the second special lottery are continuous in the order of "small hit" → "big hit". Occasionally, the variable display of the second special symbol from which the "small hit" is derived and the variable display of the second special symbol from which the "big hit" is derived perform a premier production as if it were a single game. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it appear as if a game having a higher degree of profit than a normal jackpot game has been executed.

Although not shown in FIG. 264, the sub CPU 201 turns off the premier effect flag after the end of the premier effect by the sub CPU 201 (after the end of the big hit game state by the main CPU 101).

Next, the control by the main CPU 101 such as the fluctuation control of the second special symbol and the control to the big hit game state in the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" , The relationship with the control of the sub CPU 201 such as the control of the variation effect of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 266. Note that FIG. 266 is a time chart showing the relationship between the control by the main CPU 101 and the effect control by the sub CPU 201 in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”, or “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state”. In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of "loss"-> "small hit"-> "big hit", and (b) the first embodiment. This is an example of when the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of "loss"-> "small hit"-> "big hit" in the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 266 (a), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the second special lottery is derived by “missing” by the control by the main CPU, the result of the second special lottery is derived by “missing”, and in response to this, by the control by the sub CPU 201. For example, an effect image showing "loss" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Similarly, when the result of the second special lottery is derived by "small hit" by the control by the main CPU, the effect image showing the "small hit" is displayed by the control by the sub CPU 201. Further, when the result of the second special lottery is derived by "big hit" by the control by the main CPU, the effect image showing the "big hit" is displayed by the control by the sub CPU 201. Then, when the result of the second special lottery is derived by "big hit", the main CPU controls to the big hit game state. In this jackpot game state, a round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. Further, when the sub CPU 201 is controlled to the small hit game state by the control by the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 displays the small hit effect on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the sub CPU 201 is controlled to the big hit game state by the control by the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 is displayed. Displays the jackpot effect on the liquid crystal display device 16. As described above, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the control by the main CPU and the control by the sub CPU 201 have a one-to-one correspondence.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, control by the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 is executed, for example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 266 (b). Specifically, when the result of the second special lottery is derived by "loss" by the control by the main CPU, in response to this, the effect of showing "loss" to the liquid crystal display device, for example, by the control by the sub CPU 201. The image is displayed.

However, when the result of the second special lottery is derived by "small hit" by the control by the main CPU, the start storage of the second special symbol from which the "big hit" is derived by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101 is reserved. On the premise of this, the effect image indicating "premier hit" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, for example, by the control by the sub CPU 201. In the effect image showing this "premier hit", for example, more rounds are executed (that is, one jackpot) than the number of rounds of the round game executed in one jackpot game state (for example, 15 rounds). It is a production image showing that a larger number of prize balls may be paid out than the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the game state).

Further, when the main CPU 101 controls the small hit game state, the sub CPU 201 performs a pseudo round effect as if a round game is being executed. This pseudo-round effect is the same as or very similar to the effect performed during the round game of the actual jackpot game.

By the way, when the premier production is executed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed between the small hit game state and the big hit game state, so if this time is long, the player may be unnatural. There is a problem that there is no such thing. Therefore, it is important how to perform the effect by the sub CPU 201 between the small hit game state and the big hit game state, that is, while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, while the main CPU 101 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 201 is as if it is in the interval between the round games. Pseudo interval production. This pseudo-interval effect is the same as or very similar to the effect actually performed during the interval between the round games. As a specific example of this pseudo interval effect, for example, when the sub CPU 201 performs "premier hit display", the jackpot derived after that (pre-reading jackpot) is, for example, a probabilistic jackpot (after the jackpot gaming state ends). Even though it is a big hit where the probability change flag is turned on in the game state), it is directed as if it is a normal big hit (a big hit where the probability change flag is not turned on in the game state after the big hit game state ends). On the premise of this, in the pseudo-interval effect, an effect that indicates whether or not to promote from a normal jackpot to a probabilistic jackpot is equivalent. By performing such a promotion effect, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the effect, and even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 101 is slightly longer than the interval time, a sense of incongruity that can be given to the player. Can be reduced.

Then, after being controlled to the big hit game state by the control by the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 performs the round effect normally performed. However, in this round effect, even if the round game executed by the main CPU 101 is actually, for example, the first round game, the sub CPU 201 does not clearly indicate that it is the first round game. It is preferable to do.

In this way, when the results of the second special lottery in the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" are continuous in the order of "small hit" → "big hit". In addition, by performing a series of effects as if the small hit game state and the big hit game state are controlled to one premier big hit game state, more than the round game normally performed in one big hit game state. It is possible to give the player the feeling of winning the jackpot game state in which the round game is performed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition to the above-mentioned pseudo-interval effect, as a method for solving the unnaturalness that may occur between the small hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state (while the second special symbol variation display is performed). For example, the following method can be considered.

For example, the opening effect indicating that a "big hit" has been won is usually performed after it is derived that the result of the special lottery is a "big hit", but is controlled by the main CPU 101 to a small hit gaming state. The sub CPU 201 will perform an opening effect indicating that the "big hit" has been won at the stage where the big hit game state has not yet started, straddling the time when the second special symbol is being displayed and the time when the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It may be. That is, the reach effect is not performed during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the "big hit". Even with such a method, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the small hit game state and the big hit game state.

Further, as a method for solving the above-mentioned problems, when the result of the second special lottery in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" is "big hit". Instead of the mode (see FIG. 259) in which the fluctuation time of is always determined to be the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start or super reach B for high start), for example, there is a 50% probability of reach. A fluctuation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the production (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) is performed, and a fluctuation pattern in which ultra-fast fluctuation is performed with a probability of 50% ( It is conceivable that it will be decided in 19H). Then, when the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" and the main CPU 101 determines the ultra-fast fluctuation, by executing the above-mentioned premier effect, between the small hit game state and the big hit game state. It is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur.

In the above, the case where the "small hit" and the "big hit" are continuous in the second special lottery has been described, but it is necessary to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the small hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state. If possible, this is not always the case, and in the second special lottery, there may be a "loss" between the "small hit" and the "big hit". In this case, there is a high possibility that the time between the small hit game state and the big hit game state will be longer than in the case where the "small hit" and the "big hit" are continuous, but the small hit game state and the big hit game By performing the above-mentioned pseudo-interval effect between the states and performing the fluctuation display when the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" with super-fast fluctuation, between the small hit game state and the big hit game state. It is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur in. It is preferable that the sub CPU 201 does not display an image showing the loss while the main CPU 101 displays the variation of the second special symbol for the "loss" between the "small hit" and the "big hit". ..

Further, in the above, a series of effects as if the small hit game state and the big hit game state are controlled to one premier big hit game state have been described. It does not deny that it is displayed on the display device 16. That is, normally, the liquid crystal display device 16 has an effect for showing to the player, such as an effect of changing the decorative symbol or an effect by a character, and a special symbol displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol. The liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect that the player does not notice, such as a corresponding symbol. Since the series of effects as if the above-mentioned small hit game state and big hit game state are controlled to one premier big hit game state are the effects to be shown to the player, they are separate from such effects. Even if the effect of the displayed special symbol-corresponding symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, it does not matter because this is an effect that does not make the engineer aware of it.

By the way, when the above-mentioned premier effect control process is executed, when the main CPU 101 controls the small hit game state, even though the sub CPU 201 starts the premier effect, the pre-reading function of the main CPU 101 causes a "big hit". There is a possibility that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived before the "big hit" for the start memory of the second special symbol determined to be pre-read is derived. In this case, the "big hit" about the start memory of the second special symbol pre-read by the pre-reading function of the main CPU 101 is canceled and the "loss" is derived, which may discourage the player. In addition, the display control of the premier effect that has already been started becomes complicated, and the control load of the sub CPU 201 may increase. Therefore, when the sub CPU 201 starts the premier effect, the first start memory stored (the first start memory stored in step S55 (see FIG. 120)) is stored based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101. In the above, it is determined whether or not the start memory determined that the "big hit" can be derived by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101 is not included. Then, when the stored first start memory does not include the start memory determined that the "big hit" can be derived, the sub CPU 201 executes the premier effect. This makes it possible to reduce the disappointment and display control load that may be given to the player.

In the above, an example in which the result of the second special lottery is derived before the "big hit" is "small hit", but when the "big hit" is derived before the "small hit", , The sub CPU 201 can perform the following effects.

First, the look-ahead function by the main CPU 101 is stored in the second start memory (second start memory stored in step S63 (see FIG. 120)) when the jackpot game state is controlled. Determine if "small hit" is included. This determination is performed by the sub CPU 201 based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101. Here, if it is determined that the "small hit" is included in the stored second start memory, after this big hit gaming state is terminated, the second special symbol is variablely displayed and ". "Small hit" is derived.

Therefore, the sub CPU 201 performs a round-up effect suggesting that the number of rounds has increased in a pseudo manner before the jackpot game state ends. That is, although the number of rounds executed in the round game executed in the big hit game state does not change, the round-up effect is performed to make it appear as if the number of rounds has increased by executing the small hit game. For example, when a big hit game with 15 rounds is being performed, the sub CPU 201 is determined by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101 that the stored second start memory is a "small hit", for example. "Plus 1 round" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

However, the above-mentioned round-up effect is performed when it is controlled to the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" after the jackpot gaming state ends. This is because, when controlled by these gaming states, the variation display time of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start. That is, when the jackpot gaming state is finished and then controlled to the "normal gaming state", the variation display time of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start. Therefore, it takes a long time to derive the "small hit".

Such a round-up effect may be performed when it is determined that the second start memory in which the start condition is first satisfied is a "small hit" among the stored second start memories. , Even if the second start memory in which the big hit game state ends and the start condition is first satisfied is "missing", if the stored second start memory contains "small hit", Roundup You may try to produce. Even if the second start memory in which the jackpot game state ends and the start condition is first satisfied is "missing", "high accuracy time saving game state", "high accuracy non-time saving game state" or "low accuracy time saving game state" When controlled to, as described above, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol can be determined to be ultra-fast fluctuation by referring to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start, so that the influence on the Roundup effect is It is thought that there are few.

Further, as a result of pre-reading about the stored second start storage, when "small hits" are continuous, the sub CPU 201 may display "plus 2 rounds" on the liquid crystal display device 16 or "plus 1". The "round" may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and after the small hit game is performed once, the "plus 1 round" may be further displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, a maximum of five hit determination results, including four which is the upper limit of the number of holdings of the second start memory and one which is currently changing, can be pre-read, and at least one of them is a big hit. If the other four are small hits, a maximum of "plus 4 rounds" can be displayed. In addition, if there is a big hit of 2 or more out of 5, it is possible to further increase the value of "plus ○ round". For example, if all of the five reserved second start memories are 16R jackpots, a maximum of 80R can be displayed.

By the way, at the end of the big hit game state, the sub CPU 201 performs an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state. However, when performing the round-up effect, it is preferable not to perform the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state, but to perform the ending effect after the small hit game targeted for the round-up effect is completed. In this way, by performing the ending effect after the small hit game that is the target of the roundup effect is completed, it is possible to enhance the credibility of the roundup effect.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. As described in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the types of jackpots are the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game, the jackpot game is completed and the jackpot game state is changed to the general gaming state (game state that is not the jackpot game state, and the following. Whether or not to turn on the probability change flag and whether or not to turn on the time saving flag in the gaming state after shifting to the same), and these are determined according to the hit time selection symbol command related to the big hit. .. As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the hit selection symbol command is the determination value data and the symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. It is determined based on a random number value (see FIG. 256 in each case).

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, when the hit time selection symbol command is determined, the main CPU 101 has a "normal gaming state", a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", a "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" and Regardless of the gaming state of the "low accuracy time-shortening gaming state", the determination is made with reference to the symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) of FIG. 256.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the hit-time selection symbol command is determined, the main CPU 101 is in the "normal gaming state" and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" which are not in the electric support state. , It is the same in that it is determined by referring to the symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) of FIG. Is determined by referring to the symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) of FIG. 267 instead of the symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) of FIG. 256. different.

FIG. 267 is a symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, and is a “high-accuracy time-short game state”. It is an example of the table referred to in "Low probability short game state".

As shown in the symbol determination table (first starting port) of FIG. 267, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is in the “high-accuracy time-shortening game state” and the “low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state” in which it is in the electric support state. When the determination value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is the "big hit determination value data" (the first executed based on the winning of the first starting port 5442). (When the result of the special lottery is "big hit"), the hit selection symbol command is determined to be "z14" with a 100% probability. When the hit selection symbol command is determined to be "z14", as can be seen by referring to the jackpot type determination table in FIG. 257, the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is always controlled to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state". Will be done.

That is, in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" and the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", which are in the electric support state, the jackpot gaming state is changed by hitting the left to allow the game ball to win the first starting port 5442. The game state after the end is always controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1. However, in the "high accuracy short game state" and the "low accuracy short game state", the benefit of the electric support can be obtained only when hitting right, and even if the player hits left, the benefit of the electric support is received. Can't.

Therefore, when the player is controlled to the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" or the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", which is the electric support state, the game played by the player left-handed may benefit from the electric support. Although there is a demerit that it can not be done, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", it is always controlled to "high accuracy non-time saving game state" after the big hit game state ends. It is a thrilling game with high risk and high return compared to the game performed in the same way.

Further, as shown in the symbol determination table (second starting port) of FIG. 267, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is in the “high accuracy time saving game state” and “low accuracy time saving state” in which it is in the electric support state. In the "game state", when the determination value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is the "big hit determination value data" (executed based on the winning of the second starting port 440). (When the result of the first special lottery is "big hit"), the hit selection symbol command is determined to be one of "z15" to "z21". That is, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is controlled to the "high probability short game state" with a probability of 80%, and the probability of "low probability time short game" is 20%. It is controlled by "state". In the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the "big hit" is not derived and the determined number of time-saving games are digested, the system is controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". Although it may happen, it is not controlled to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state" immediately after the big hit game state is finished.

That is, in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" and the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", which are in the electric support state, the jackpot gaming state is changed by right-handing the game ball to the second starting port 440. The game state after the end is not immediately controlled to the "high probability non-time saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1, and it is a general probability variation loop game. Become.

Therefore, when the player is controlled to the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" or the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", which is the electric support state, the game performed by the player right-handing is performed after the jackpot gaming state is completed. Although it is not immediately controlled by the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", it can benefit from electric support, and it is a stable game with low risk and low return compared to the game played by left-handed.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, which game is to be executed, a thrilling game with a relatively high risk and a high return, or a stable game with a relatively low risk and a low return. It is possible to give the player a choice right depending on the launch mode (right-handed or left-handed) of the game ball. However, it is preferable that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the final number of shot balls is the same when hitting right and when hitting left.

In addition, a pachinko machine having a setting function like the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, that is, setting any one of a plurality of (for example, 6 stages) setting values having different probabilities of "big hit" in the special lottery. In a gaming machine in which a special lottery is executed based on a value, when the probability of "big hit" is a relatively low low setting value, or when the probability of "big hit" is a relatively high high setting value. Compared to this, the expected value from which the "big hit" is derived by displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol is low. Although it is preferable that the expected value of the number of prize balls is the same for the final number of shot balls when hitting right and when hitting left, the expectation that a "big hit" is derived in this way. When the value is a low setting value, the expected value of the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the "high probability non-time saving gaming state" is larger than when the value is a high setting value. Therefore, when the set value is low, it is better to hit left while being controlled to the "high accuracy time-shortening game state" or "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", which is the electric support state, as compared to the case of right-handed hitting. , The expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is high. On the other hand, when the set value is high, it is better to hit right while being controlled to the "high accuracy short game state" or "low accuracy short game state", which is the electric support state, compared to the case of left hit. , The expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is high. In this case, the player is simply given the right to choose which game to play, a thrilling game with a relatively high risk and a high return, or a stable game with a relatively low risk and a low return. Instead, it is possible to provide a new game property in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time differs between when hitting right and when hitting left according to the set value. Further, if the effect that the set value can be guessed is performed, it is possible to provide a more interesting game property in combination with the above.

Although the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment has also been described, the configuration provided in the gaming machine in which the game is played based on any one of the plurality of set values is as follows. That is, in this type of gaming machine, the main CPU 101 includes a non-volatile storage means for storing a plurality of set values having different probabilities that a special symbol variation display is performed and a "big hit" is derived. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a special lottery based on one of the plurality of set values stored in the storage means, displays the variation of the special symbol, and derives the result of the special lottery. It is equipped with fluctuation control means. One of the above setting values is for starting / stopping the supply of electric power from the power supply circuit to the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200, and the operation means called the setting key that can be operated by the gaming machine administrator. It can be changed by operating the power supply operating means, the backup clear switch 330, and the setting operating means for changing the set value. Specifically, it is first necessary to perform a power off operation. Then, when the operation means called the setting key is turned on while the power is not turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch is turned on, the main CPU 101 can change the set value. Control the setting change state. In the setting change state, the main CPU 101 circulates and displays information indicating the set value on a predetermined display monitor each time the setting operation means is pressed. When the operation means called the setting key is turned off in the setting change state, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and sets the setting value displayed on the predetermined display monitor as one setting value. A game by the main CPU 101 is executed based on one set value set in this way.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board surface configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 268). Further, the trigger for changing the variable time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol is also different from that of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

FIG. 268 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 268, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment has a passing gate 49 in the left region (there is no passing gate 49 in the right region). .. Further, on the downstream side of the passing gate 49, in addition to the conventional first starting port 5442, another first starting port in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize is provided. In order to distinguish between the two, the other first starting port is referred to as the first starting port 54421, but when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 and in the first starting port 54421, the game ball wins. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when the main CPU 101 is used.

Further, the ease of winning the game ball to the first starting port 54421 is changed by allowing the transparent panel 172 to move forward and backward, or it is impossible to win the game ball to the first starting port 54421. It comprises a movable member 54422 that can be varied between embodiments and possible embodiments.

The movable member 54422 is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and when the normal symbol reaches a specific stop display mode (hit) in the normal symbol display unit 71, it operates in the forward direction, and this movable member It is configured to guide the game ball on 54422 toward the first starting port 54421 (rearward direction). In this way, the movable member 54422 changes the first starting port 54421 from a mode in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult to a mode in which it is possible or easy. In the electric support state, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 54422 in the forward direction to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 54421.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the passage gate 49, the first starting port 5442, and the first starting port 54421 are configured so that a left-handed gaming ball can pass or win a prize.

Further, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20, and are large. By driving the shutter 610 by the winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540, and it is impossible (or easy) to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that is difficult).

A second starting port 4401 is arranged on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, that is, on the downstream side of the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600. The game balls that are hit right and do not win the big winning opening 540 are configured to win about 1 in 5 balls and the 2nd starting opening 4401.

Further downstream of the second starting port 4401, a small hit shutter 6100 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction with respect to the small hit winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small hit shutter 6100 can be driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is closed, and when the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 opens. It is an open mode. If the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, most of the game balls that did not win the second starting opening 4401 are configured to win the small hit winning opening 5400.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the large winning opening 540, the second starting opening 4401, and the small hit winning opening 5400 are configured so that the right-handed gaming ball can pass or win.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the main CPU 101, like the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, is a general gaming state that is not a big hit gaming state, such as a "normal gaming state" and a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming". It is controlled to one of the "state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the game state after the big hit game state is completed as the "high probability time / short game state" or the "low probability time / short game state" based on the hit selection symbol command (see FIG. 257). To control. Then, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the time saving is exhausted without deriving the combination of the special symbols indicating the "big hit" in the "high accuracy time saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 is set to " The control to shift from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is executed.

Here, FIG. 269 shows the variation time executed by the main CPU 101 when the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment shifts from the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process. This variation time determination table setting process is another example of the flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process of step S173 (see FIG. 127) executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 269, a variable time determination table setting process executed when the transition from the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” will be described. First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state has changed (step S1811). If the gaming state has not changed (NO in step S1811), the main CPU 101 ends the variation time determination table setting process without changing the variation time determination table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol. .. When it is determined that the gaming state has shifted (YES in step S1811), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state of the transition destination is the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” (step S1812). When the gaming state of the transition destination is the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” (YES in step S1812), FIG. 259 shows a variation time determination table that the main CPU 101 refers to when determining the variation time of the special symbol. It is set in the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start (step S1813), and the fluctuation time determination table setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the gaming state of the transition destination is not the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” (NO in step S1812), the main CPU 101 displays the variation time determination table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol in FIG. 258. It is set in the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown (step S1814), and the variation time determination table setting process is terminated.

In this way, a combination of special symbols indicating "big hit" is derived in the "normal game state" and the game shifts to the big hit game state, and this big hit game state ends and the "high accuracy time-short game state" or "low accuracy" is achieved. Even if the game shifts to the "time saving game state", the main CPU 101 does not change the variation time determination table of the special symbol, and refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 to refer to the special symbol. Determine the fluctuation time of. Then, when the time reduction is exhausted without deriving the combination of the special symbols indicating the "big hit" in the "high accuracy time reduction game state", the main CPU 101 changes the game state from the "high accuracy time reduction game state" to the "high accuracy time reduction game state". While executing the control to shift to the "non-time saving game state", the variable time determination table of the special symbol to be referred to is changed from the variable time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 to the high start shown in FIG. 259. Performs control to change to the variable time determination table of the special symbol for.

(Flow of the game)
Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. The main CPU 101 controls the game state to one of "normal game state", "high accuracy time and short game state", "high accuracy non-time and short game state", and "low accuracy time and short game state", but "low accuracy". "Time saving game state" is not an essential game state. In these gaming states, a general player plays a game by left-handed. In the gaming states other than the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", that is, the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", even if the player hits right, the result of the second special lottery is obtained. Unless it is a "big hit", the variation display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is performed for a long time of about 10 minutes (long variation A to C), and the player only loses. be.

In the left-handed "normal game state", when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the symbol combination of the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 selects the hit time as shown in FIG. 257. Based on the symbol command, the number of time reductions is determined to be one of a plurality of time reductions such as 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the symbol combination of the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls to the jackpot gaming state. In this big hit game state, the game ball can be won in the big winning opening 540, so that a general player plays the game by hitting right.

When the big hit game state ends, the main CPU 101 executes a control to shift the game state to the "high accuracy time-short game state" unless the symbol designation command is selected with a very low probability of "zA5". When the gaming state shifts to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", a general player will return from right-handed to left-handed to play the game. In this "high accuracy time-saving gaming state", as described above, the main CPU 101 is for the low start shown in FIG. 258 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 and / and the second starting port 4401. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol. When the symbol designation command is "zA5", the main CPU 101 shifts the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" without shifting to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state". Control.

In the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", when the determined number of time-saving games are digested without deriving the combination of the special symbols indicating the "big hit", the main CPU 101 changes the game state to the "high-accuracy time-saving game". In addition to controlling the transition from "state" to "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", as described above, the fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol is the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. The fluctuation time determination table of the above is changed to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259.

In this way, in the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state", the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and even if the player hits right, the first 2 Since the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a long time of about 10 minutes, the frequency with which the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened is relatively small so that the game ball to the small hit winning opening 5400 is won.

On the other hand, in the "high probability non-time saving game state", when the game ball wins the second starting port 4401, most of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not only changed at super speed, but also about one-fifth. It is possible to win a game ball to the small hit winning opening 5400 with a probability, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a specific state exceeding 1.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the time saving number determined based on the hit time selection symbol command is produced by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 until the time saving game of the time saving number is exhausted. It is kept secret without being disclosed. In addition to the number of time reductions, for example, as described with reference to FIG. 136 for the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the gaming state has a high probability as in the secret A stage 2002 or the secret B stage 200. It is preferable that the player cannot or is difficult to grasp whether the player is in the gaming state or the low probability state even by looking at the display effect performed by the sub CPU 201 on the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the player can change from the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls is less than 1 to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls can exceed 1. It is configured so that it is impossible or difficult to grasp at what timing the main CPU 101 shifts to the "state" until the shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". Then, in the "high accuracy time saving game state", when the time saving game is digested without deriving the combination of the special symbols indicating "big hit", the sub CPU 201 reaches the ceiling (the time saving is digested). The ceiling effect indicating the above is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. This makes it possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed has an extremely low probability (when the symbol designation command is "zA5"), and the gaming state is "high probability non-time saving gaming state". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends may always be controlled to the “high-probability time-shortening gaming state”.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, when the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, 54421, and the game ball to the second starting port 4401. In any case where the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the winning of the prize, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is almost controlled to the "high-probability time-saving gaming state", but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. When the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442, 54421, it is controlled to the "high probability non-time saving game state" with a probability of 10%, and the second start port 4401 When the game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball, the game may be controlled to the "high probability non-time saving game state" with a probability of 50%. In this way, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442,54421. By controlling to the "high probability non-time saving game state" with a higher probability than when, once it reaches the ceiling (when the time saving is exhausted), after that, the number of shot balls per unit time Not only will the expected value of the number of prize balls exceed 1 in a specific state (high-accuracy non-time-saving game state), but also the probability that such a specific state will loop will be increased, realizing a highly game-friendly game. Is possible.

In the first modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the first starting port 54421 is provided separately from the first starting port 5442, and the movable member 54422 is provided with a transparent panel 172. However, the ease of winning the game ball to the first starting port 54421 is changed by allowing the player to move forward and backward, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a so-called electric chew such as a blade member 4620 is provided above the first starting port 5442, and in the electric support state, the so-called electric chew is operated so as to facilitate winning of the first starting port 5442. You may do it. In this case, regardless of whether or not it is in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start. It suffices if a game ball can be won to some extent at the second starting port so that the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1. When determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start, the variation display of the second special symbol is for an extremely long time (long variation A, long variation B or long variation C). ), Even if a game ball can be won to some extent at the second starting port, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board surface configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 270). Further, the trigger for changing the variable time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol is also different from that of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

FIG. 270 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 270, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment has a passing gate 49 in the left region (there is no passing gate 49 in the right region). .. Further, on the downstream side of the passing gate 49, is it possible to change the ease of winning the game ball to the second starting port 4401 by allowing the second starting port 4401 and the transparent panel 172 to move forward and backward in the front-rear direction? Alternatively, it is provided with a movable member 4651 that can be changed into a mode in which a game ball cannot win a prize in the second starting port 4401 and a mode in which the game ball can be won. Further, on the downstream side of the second starting port 4401, a small hit winning opening 5400, a small hit shutter 6100 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small hit winning shutter 6100 for driving the small hit shutter 6100 are driven. A mouth solenoid (not shown) is provided.

The movable member 4651 is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and when the normal symbol reaches a specific stop display mode (hit) in the normal symbol display unit 71, it operates in the forward direction, and this movable member It is configured to guide the game ball on the 4651 to the second starting port 4401 (rear direction). In this way, the movable member 4651 changes the second starting port 4401 from a mode in which it is difficult to win a game ball to a mode in which it is easy to win. In the electric support state, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 4651 in the forward direction to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401. When the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is not facilitated (when it is difficult to win the game ball), the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is the first starting. It is about the same as winning a game ball to the mouth 5442, or it is a little more difficult to win a game ball than the first starting mouth 5442.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the passing gate 49, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 4401, and the small hit winning opening 5400 all pass or the left-handed gaming ball passes through. It is configured to be able to win a prize. In addition, the large winning opening 540 is configured so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 shows a variation time determination table of the special symbol referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol in FIG. 258, triggered by the end of the small hit gaming state. The control for changing from the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 is executed. The processing by the main CPU 101 at this time will be described with reference to FIG. 271.

FIG. 271 is an example of a flowchart showing a variation time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 when the small hit game state ends in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 271, the variable time determination table setting process executed at the end of the small hit game state will be described. First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game state has changed (step S1821). If the small hit game state is not executed or the small hit game state is being executed (NO in step S1821), the main CPU 101 changes the variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbol. The variable time determination table setting process is terminated without doing so. When it is determined that the small hit game state has ended (YES in step S1821), the variation time determination table set in the main CPU 101, that is, the variation time determination table currently used for reference is shown in FIG. 258. It is determined whether or not the table is a variation time determination table for a special symbol for a low start (step S1822). If the set variation time determination table is the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start (YES in step S1822), the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table when determining the variation time of the special symbol. Is set in the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 (step S1823), and the variation time determination table setting process is completed. On the other hand, if the set variation time determination table is not the variation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 (NO in step S1822), the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol. The variable time determination table setting process is terminated without changing the variable time determination table to be referred to. In step S1822, if the set variation time determination table is not the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, the currently set variation time determination table is the high shown in FIG. 259. It will be a table for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the start.

Therefore, while the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start, even if the game ball wins in the second starting opening 4401, the result of the second special lottery is obtained. Unless it is a "big hit", the variation display of the second special symbol (long variation A to C) is performed over an extremely long time, so that the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, the frequency with which the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened is relatively small so that the game ball to the small hit winning opening 5400 wins a prize.

On the other hand, after the change to the variable time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 at the end of the small hit game state, the right-handed game ball is moved to the second starting port 4401. When a prize is won, most of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not only fluctuated at super speed, but also a game ball can be won in the small hit winning opening 5400 with a probability of about 1/5, and the launch ball per unit time. The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number exceeds 1.

In the above, the state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is set as a specific state, but the expected value of the number of prize balls does not exceed 1, but the design value is extremely close to 1. For example, the state set to 0.99) may be set as the second specific state. In that case, it is desirable that the expected value is higher than the expected value (for example, 0.90) when left-handed during the time saving state (during electric support). During the left-handed time reduction state, it shifts to the second specific state with a small hit, starts right-handed, and then shifts to a more advantageous specific state by digesting the number of time reductions, and the expected value rises in three stages. Can be done. It should be noted that this modification in which the fluctuation pattern changes due to a small hit is not limited to the fourth embodiment, and can be applied to the extent applicable to other embodiments.

Further, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, as described above, the special symbol for low start is changed from the variable time determination table (see FIG. 258) to the special for high start when the end of the small hit game state is triggered. Since the table is changed to the symbol variation time determination table (see FIG. 259), when the variation time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start (in this modification, the player It is desirable to be able to win a "small hit" when (when hitting left). For example, in the first special lottery, there is a probability that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time in the "normal game state" will not be exceeded (for example, 55% to 60%). A game ball is placed at the second starting port 4401 at a frequency that does not exceed the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time in the "normal game state" when the player is elected or hits to the left. You should try to win a prize.

As described above, the main CPU 101 uses the fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol as the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 based on the end of the small hit game state. By changing from the fluctuation time determination table to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example, the game ball is placed in the small hit winning opening 5400 even though it is controlled to the small hit game state. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment that may occur when the prize cannot be won.

In addition, the main CPU 101 uses the fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol from the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start to the special for high start when the end of the small hit game state is triggered. After changing to the symbol variation time determination table, it is high until a predetermined period (for example, a period until the special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times or a period until the jackpot game ends) elapses. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for the start. The main CPU 101 may change to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start based on the elapse of the period, or the variation time of the special symbol for low start based on the elapse of the period. It may be decided whether to change to the decision table or to continue to refer to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start.

By the way, in the above, when the small hit game state ends when the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start is set, it is always changed to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the small hit game state ends when the variable time determination table of the special symbol for low start is set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the table is changed by a predetermined condition (for example, whether or not the main CPU 101 changes the table). Whether or not the lottery is performed and the lottery is won, and if multiple small hit symbols are provided and the small hit symbol 1 is used, the table is changed and the small hit symbol 2 is not changed). If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start is continued, and the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start is determined based on the condition of the predetermined condition. You may change it to.

[Modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. The appearance configuration of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 270). That is, the passing gate 49, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 4401, and the small hit winning opening 5400 are all configured so that a left-handed game ball can pass or win. In addition, the large winning opening 540 is configured so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

In the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol, in principle, the variation of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 in the "normal gaming state". It is performed with reference to the time determination table, and in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. However, only for a predetermined period after the backup is cleared, it is performed by referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. 272.

FIG. 272 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, and is a diagram showing a variation time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol for the middle start. The table shown in FIG. 272 shows the variation display of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "loss", and the variation of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. The time is shorter than the time specified in the time determination table (58,000 msec to 60,000 msec) and longer than the time specified in the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259. It is a thing.

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a variation time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 in a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 273, the fluctuation time determination table setting process in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been operated to clear the backup (step S1824). If the backup is cleared (YES in step S1824), the main CPU 101 is shown in FIG. 272 as a variation time determination table to be referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol based on the backup clear. It is set in the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for the start (step S1825). On the other hand, if the backup is not cleared (NO in step S1824), the main CPU 101 moves to step S1826. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state has ended (step S1826). If the jackpot game state is not completed (NO in step S1826), the main CPU 101 ends the variable time determination table setting process. The main CPU 101 determines NO in step S1826 even when the jackpot gaming state has not yet been controlled. When the jackpot gaming state ends (YES in step S1826), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to shift to the "normal gaming state" (step S1827). When the transition destination of the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is the "normal gaming state" (YES in step S1827), the main CPU 101 has a special symbol based on the transition to the "normal gaming state". The fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 (step S1828), and the fluctuation time determination table setting process is completed. On the other hand, the transition destination of the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is not the "normal gaming state", that is, the transition destination is the "high accuracy time saving game state", "high accuracy non-time saving game state" or "low accuracy time saving game". When it is in the "state" (NO in step S1827), the main CPU 101 has a special symbol based on the transition to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". The fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 (step S1829), and the fluctuation time determination table setting process is completed.

As described above, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, when the backup is cleared, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol to be referred to to the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. 272. Performs control to change to the variable time determination table of.

Then, when the variation time determination table of the special symbol to be referred to is changed to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. 272, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol until the jackpot gaming state ends. The time is determined with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. 272. That is, when the variation time determination table of the special symbol is changed to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. 272 due to the backup clear, this table is displayed until the jackpot game state ends. Is not changed. That is, once the change time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start shown in FIG. 272 is changed, this table is not changed unless the special symbol is changed and displayed and the "big hit" is derived.

In the above, when the table is changed to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start, this table is not changed until the jackpot game state ends, but this is not always the case, for example, the second. When the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start is terminated, and the variation time determination of the special symbol for the low start shown in FIG. 258, for example. You may refer to the table. In this case, for example, a predetermined period (until the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times)) after the opening of the hall is set to a state advantageous to the player by the intention of the gaming machine manager. It becomes possible.

Although not shown in FIG. 273, when the backup is cleared (step S1824), the main CPU 101 is shown in FIG. 272 from the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. Although the process of changing to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for the start is performed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the medium start shown in FIG. 272 is determined from the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for the high start shown in FIG. 259. The process of changing to a table may not be performed.

As described above, the main CPU 101 uses the fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol as the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the medium start shown in FIG. 272 based on the backup clearing. By changing to the decision table, it is possible to adjust the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time at the will of the game machine manager, for example, when the hall is opened.

In the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, among the setting values of a plurality (for example, six stages) having different probabilities of "big hit" in the special lottery, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. It may be a gaming machine in which a special lottery is executed based on any one set value. Then, only when one set value is a specific set value (for example, set value 6), for example, the sub CPU 201 may execute a specific effect such that the one set value can be inferred. It becomes possible to provide more interesting playability.

As described above, one setting value is specified when the special lottery is executed based on one of the plurality of setting values having different probabilities of "big hit" in the special lottery. Not only the effect that can be inferred to be the setting value of, but also, for example, one setting value is an odd number (for example, setting values 1, 3, 5) or an even number (for example, setting values 2, 4, 6). You may perform an effect that allows you to guess. For example, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the second special lottery is "missing", it is determined with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for the middle start in FIG. 272. The average of the variation display time of the second special symbol is uniformly 60,000 msec regardless of one set value. Instead of this, a table having an average variation display time of the second special symbol of, for example, 60,000 msec and a table of 610000 msec are stored in the main ROM, and the main CPU 101 has an odd number of one set value (for example, set values 1, 3). When 5), the average of the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol refers to a table of, for example, 60,000 msec, and when one set value is an even number (for example, set values 2, 4, 6), the first (2) The variation display time of the second special symbol may be determined by referring to a table in which the average of the variation display time of the special symbol is, for example, 61000 msec. As a result, the player can infer one set value based on the variable display time of the second special symbol, and can further enhance the game interest.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board surface configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 274). Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment also differs from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment in the probability that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the “small hit” is derived.

FIG. 274 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 274, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 have the gaming area 20. It is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 inside, and by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 540. , It is possible to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the large winning opening 540. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when the large winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-handed gaming balls are configured to win the large winning opening 540.

Further, a normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged on the downstream side of the large winning opening 540 and on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory unit 460 are integrated, but it does not necessarily have to be unitized and may be a separate body.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory 460 changes the ease of winning a game ball to the second starting port 440 by allowing the transparent panel 172 to move forward and backward in the front-rear direction. Alternatively, it is provided with a movable shutter 4650 that can be changed into a mode in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is impossible or possible. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIGS. 53 and 54) and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the start port solenoid 4630 to the movable shutter 4650.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when the opening mode is such that the winning of the second starting port 440 is facilitated, among the right-handed gaming balls, the gaming ball that does not win the large winning opening 540. All or most are configured to win the second starting port 440.

A receiving member 3000 is formed on the upper right side of the ordinary electric accessory 460 to temporarily receive a game ball that has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540 among the game balls hit to the right. The receiving member 3000 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the flowing game ball and then dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the movable shutter 4650.

The movable shutter 4650 is a plate-shaped member capable of rolling the game ball in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 as described above. The second starting port 440 is in the open mode when the movable shutter 4650 is advanced forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the second when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. The starting port 440 is closed.

The movable shutter 4650 is capable of receiving the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side) when the movable shutter 4650 is advanced in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the movable shutter 4650 receives the game ball on the upstream side (right side). The game ball is configured to roll with the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 facing the downstream side (left side).

The second starting port 440 is arranged on the most downstream side of the movable shutter 4650, and is opened so that the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 can receive a game ball that rolls from the upstream side to the downstream side. .. However, if the movable shutter 4650 retracts in the rear direction in a state where there is a game ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 but has not yet reached the second starting port 440, the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 is rolled. The moving game ball falls without winning the second starting port 440.

Below the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, a flow path forming portion 5500 that forms a flow path of a game ball that has not won a prize in the second starting port 440 is arranged. The flow path forming portion 5500 includes a first flow path 5501 in which a game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 flows down when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted in the rear direction, and when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted in the rear direction. It is configured to form a second flow path 5502 through which the game ball that has been rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 flows down.

The flow path forming unit 5500 is configured so that all the game balls that have rolled on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 flow down the second flow path 5502 when the movable shutter 4650 retracts in the backward direction. For example, the game ball on the most upstream side of the movable shutter 4650 (the game ball that has just fallen from the receiving member 3000) is configured to flow down the first flow path 5501. You may.

A small hit unit 5300 is arranged below the flow path forming portion 5500. The small hit unit 5300 includes a small hit winning opening 5400, a plate-shaped small hit shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small hit winning opening solenoid that drives the small hit shutter 6100. (Not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 is activated and the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 5501 (a game that has reached the small hit unit 5300 among the right-handed game balls). All or most of the balls) are configured to win the small hit winning opening 5400.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the first starting port 5442, the small hit winning opening 5400, the small hit shutter 6100 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the small hit shutter 6100 are provided. The attacker unit 5000 was configured by the small hit winning opening solenoid to be driven, but the small hit unit 5300 of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment has a separate first starting port 5442.

A passing gate 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the small hit winning opening 5400. Similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the gaming ball passes through, and in a time-saving state, the gaming ball wins a prize at the second starting port 440. Becomes an electric support state that facilitates. All or most of the game balls that flowed down the first flow path 5501 but could not win the small hit prize opening 5400 because the small hit winning opening 5400 was closed, and all or most of the game balls that flowed down the second flow path 5502. It is configured to pass through the passage gate 49.

A flow path 2500 through which the game ball can flow down is formed between the large winning opening 540 and the second starting port 440. The flow path 2500 is large due to, for example, an obstacle nail or an accessory. It is configured so that it takes a certain amount of time for a game ball that has not won a prize in the winning opening 540 to flow down the first flow path 5501 and reach the small hit unit 5300. This time above a certain level is at least a time larger than the sum of the interval time when the big hit game ends and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the big hit game state ends and the fluctuation starts first. Is preferable. The reason will be described later.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "small hit" is derived is about one-fifth, but the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment In the machine, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is not derived, the "small hit" is always derived. That is, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be "missing" is 0, and all except "big hit" are "small hits". It should be noted that the variation display of the second special symbol is not limited to the fact that the "small hit" is always derived, and the probability is extremely low as compared with the case where the "small hit" is derived. The "loss" may be derived.

(Flow of the game)
First, in the "normal gaming state", a general player strikes left. When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the first special symbol. When the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 executes a control to shift from the "normal gaming state" to the big hit gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is configured as a gaming machine that can be controlled to a "normal gaming state" that is not an electric support state or a "time saving state" that is an electric support state. In this "time saving state", the probability that the "big hit" is derived when the variation display of the special symbol is performed may be higher or lower than the "normal gaming state".

In the jackpot game state, a general player plays a game by hitting right. Further, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the main CPU 101 executes a control to shift to the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving state". When a general player executes a control to shift to the "normal gaming state" by the main CPU 101, the player returns to the left-handed state to play the game, but the main CPU 101 executes a control to shift to the "time saving state". And play the game by hitting right.

In the big hit game state, all or most of the right-handed game balls win the big prize opening 540, so it is difficult to let the game ball pass through the passing gate 49 or to make the second starting opening 440 win the game ball. Is. Therefore, it is difficult to reserve the start memory of the second special symbol in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the game is not in the big hit game state, if the game is played by right-handed, the start memory of the second special symbol can be suspended unless the right-handed game ball wins the small hit winning opening 5400. There is. However, in the "normal game state", since the general player plays the game by left-handed, the start memory of the second special symbol is not reserved.

Therefore, when the state shifts from the "normal gaming state" to the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot gaming state ends, there is a possibility that the start memory of the second special symbol is not reserved when the jackpot gaming state ends. high. On the other hand, when the game shifts from the "time saving state" to the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot gaming state ends, the start memory of the second special symbol is reserved up to the upper limit of 4 at the time when the jackpot gaming state ends. Probability is high.

When the control to shift to the "time saving state" is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the start memory of the second special symbol is not held at that time, the first right-handed game ball hits the flow path 2500. After flowing down and being once received by the receiving member 3000, it flows down the first flow-down path 5501 without rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and without winning the small hit winning opening 5400, the passing gate 49 Pass through. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 makes a normal symbol determination. When the normal symbol determination is performed, the main CPU 101 performs a variation display of the normal symbol for a very short time, and derives the result of the normal symbol determination to the normal symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 8). Since the result of the normal symbol determination is 100% or a probability close to 100%, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the movable shutter 4650 has a probability of almost 100% in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172. The second starting port 440 becomes an open mode.

When the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, the game ball that has flowed down the flow path 2500 is once received by the receiving member 3000, and then falls to the upstream side of the movable shutter 4650, and the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 is pressed. It rolls from the upstream side to the downstream side, and then wins a prize at the second starting port 440.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs a second special lottery, and the result of the second special lottery is derived after displaying the variation of the second special symbol. In the "short game state", the main CPU 101 displays the fluctuation of the second special symbol with an ultra-high speed fluctuation of 1000 msec. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the main CPU 101 always "is" when the "big hit" is not derived. "Small hit" is derived. That is, the main CPU 101 performs the second special lottery so that when the result of the second special lottery is not a "big hit", it is always a "small hit". However, it is not limited to the mode in which the "small hit" is always derived when the "big hit" is not derived, and the probability that the "small hit" is derived when the "big hit" is not derived. In very rare cases, "loss" may be derived with a much lower probability than.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "small hit" is derived, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the second starting port 440 is in the open mode. However, as described above, when the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls dropped from the receiving member 3000 fall on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and the game balls to the first flow path 5501. The entry of the ball is hindered, and the game ball does not reach the small hit winning opening 5400.

Further, the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 wins a prize in the second starting port 440 or flows down the second flow path 5502 and passes through the passage gate 49. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 again with a probability of almost 100%, and the second starting port 440 becomes an open mode. Then, again, all or most of the game balls dropped from the receiving member 3000 fell on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, the entry of the game balls into the first flow path 5501 was hindered, and the game balls fell on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650. The game ball either wins a prize at the second starting port 440 or flows down the second flow path 5502 and passes through the passage gate 49. Therefore, when the game is played in the "time saving state", the start prize of the second special symbol may be suspended up to the upper limit by the main CPU 101.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, when the "big hit" is not derived, the "small hit" is almost always derived, so that the player hits right. In the "time saving state", the small hit winning opening 5400 is almost fully open. However, in this "time saving state", all or most of the right-handed game balls pass through the second starting port 440 or the passing gate 49, so that the game ball to the small hit winning opening 5400 Winning will be hindered. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 49 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 57.

At the timing when the movable shutter 4650 retracts backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 may flow down the first flow path 5501 and win the small hit winning opening 5400. , The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

When the start prize of the second special symbol is held by the main CPU 101 up to the upper limit, for example, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 is in the big hit game state. Move to. Since neither the start condition of the first special symbol nor the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied in the jackpot game state, the hold of the start memory of the second special symbol held up to the upper limit is maintained until the jackpot game state ends. do.

In the jackpot game state, as described above, all or most of the right-handed gaming balls win the jackpot 540. Even if there is a game ball that has not won a prize in the big prize opening 540 among the game balls that have been hit right in the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 determines the normal symbol regardless of whether or not it is in the big hit game state. In order to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol for a very short time, the start memory of the normal symbol is rarely held at the end of the big hit game state.

Therefore, if the start memory of the second special symbol is reserved at the end of the big hit game state, the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied when the big hit game state ends, and the main CPU 101 is in the small hit game state. (The small hit shutter 6100 is operated to control the small hit winning opening 5400 in an open mode). At this time, since the start memory of the normal symbol is not reserved as described above, the movable shutter 4650 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 flows down to the first flow. It is possible to win a prize in the small hit winning opening 5400 by flowing down the route 5501, and temporarily, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a specific state exceeding 1. This specific state is maintained for the number of stored start memories of the second special symbol. However, in this specific state, it is difficult for the game ball to reach the passing gate 49 because all or most of the right-handed game balls flow down the first flow path 5501 and win the small hit winning opening 5400. Since the second starting port 440 is not in the open mode, the starting memory of the second special symbol is not newly reserved, but only the reserved starting memory is digested. Then, when all the hold of the start memory of the second special symbol is exhausted, the specific state ends.

When the specific state ends, the main CPU 101 no longer controls the small hit game state, and the game ball can pass through the passing gate 49. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, as described above, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 with a probability of almost 100%, and the second starting port 440 is in the open mode. Then, all or most of the game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3000 fall to the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, the entry of the game balls into the first flow path 5501 is hindered, and the small hit winning opening 5400 is won. Becomes a difficult state.

The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is configured so that when the second special symbol is variablely displayed, a "small hit" is derived unless it is a "big hit". In ", since the main CPU 101 displays the variation of the second special symbol by any of the long variation A to C (see, for example, FIG. 258), there is no merit to play the game by hitting right.

In this way, a limited period such as a specific state after the jackpot game state ends is acquired in the jackpot game state by setting the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time to exceed 1. In addition to the prize balls that can be made, it will be possible to acquire prize balls even in a specific state, so it will be possible to enhance the interest in the game. In particular, if the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one small hit game state is, for example, 100, if the start memory of the second special symbol is reserved up to four at the end of the big hit game state, the upper limit is four. It is possible to win about 400 prize balls, which greatly stimulates the player's willingness to play. At this time, as in the first embodiment, by showing the four small hits as a series of productions with the previous big hit, even if it is notified that more prize balls can be obtained than the big hit prize balls that can be originally obtained. good. This special state is unlikely to occur in the "normal gaming state", and is likely to occur in the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", which are electric support states, so the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and It is possible to give a great expectation to the big hit that can occur in the "low probability short game state". Further, as in the other embodiments, the jackpot type may be provided so that the specific state is continued as a "probability variation non-time saving state" not only four times after the jackpot but also until the next jackpot.

In addition, in the "time saving state", when the holding of the normal symbol is interrupted, the period in which the movable shutter 4650 is closed increases, and the winning of the small hit winning opening 5400 increases, unlike the designer's intention. Things can happen. In that case, it is desirable to open and close the movable shutter 4650 so as not to interrupt the holding of the normal symbol. For example, it is desirable to define an opening pattern so that the total opening time becomes 6000 msec by repeating 1000 msec opening, 50msec closing, 1000msec opening, and 50msec closing in one winning of a normal symbol. At this time, for 50 msec of closing, the game ball rolling on the movable shutter 4650 is not pinched by the next opening, and the game ball directly above the movable shutter 4650 is in the first flow path due to free fall or the like. It is desirable that the time does not flow into 5501. By doing so, a game ball that passes through the passage gate 49 via the second flow path 5502 is generated at a rate of one ball for every few balls, so that the normal symbol hold is not interrupted and the first flow path 5501 is reached. It is possible to suppress the inflow of game balls.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned specific state can be realized in the "time saving state" in which the electric support state is reached after the jackpot game state is completed, but it is not always possible to be realized only in the "time saving state" in which the electric support state is reached. That is, the "time saving state" in which the electric support state is set is a state in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is easier than in the "normal game state", but the "normal game state". If the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is not facilitated, it is not in the electric support state. Therefore, even in the "normal game state", the result of the normal symbol determination performed based on the right-handed game ball passing through the passing gate 49 is set to be 100% or a probability close to 100%. (2) The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the starting port 440 is set to one, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a long fluctuation in the "normal game state", and after the big hit game state is completed. By making the super-speed fluctuation in the game state, it is possible to realize a specific state without changing the game state after the big hit game state to the "time saving state" which becomes the electric support state.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board surface configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 275). Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to a "normal gaming state" that is not an electric support state or a "high accuracy time-saving gaming state" that is an electric support state. .. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the first implementation is also performed on the variation time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol referred to in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". It is different from the pachinko game machine in the example.

FIG. 275 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 275, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 have the gaming area 20. It is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 inside, and by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 540. , It is possible to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the large winning opening 540. In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, when the large winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-handed gaming balls are configured to win the large winning opening 540.

Further, a passage gate 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the large winning opening 540 and on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for determining a normal symbol on condition that the game ball passes through.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is provided with a first starting port in which a right-handed gaming ball can win a prize on the downstream side of the passing gate 49, in addition to the first starting port 5442 conventionally provided. There is. In order to distinguish between the two, for convenience, the first starting port arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as the first starting port 5443, but when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442 and the first starting. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when the game ball wins in the mouth 5443.

Above the first starting port 5443, a movable member 4652 that can be changed into a mode in which the game ball cannot win a prize in the first starting port 5443 (closed mode) and a mode in which the game ball can be won (opened mode) is provided. ing. The main CPU 101 operates the movable member 4652 more frequently than in the "normal gaming state" based on the fact that the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit in the "high accuracy time-shortening gaming state", and the first starting port It is designed to facilitate the winning of 5443.

A second starting port 440 is arranged below the left side of the first starting port 5443. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 displays the variation of the second special symbol, but as with the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability that a "small hit" is derived is about 5 minutes. It is one of.

Below the first starting port 5443, a small hit shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small hit winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small hit shutter 6100 can be driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is closed, and when the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 opens. It is an open mode. When the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 performs variable display of the second special symbol and derives the result of "small hit". When the result of "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the small hit gaming state in which the small hit shutter 6100 is operated so that the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode.

At the upper right of the first starting port 5443, an out port 5444 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the machine without winning a prize is arranged.

Further, the game ball hit to the right has a flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443, a flow path 5451 toward the second start port 440, and a flow path 5452 toward the out port 5444. It is configured, for example, by obstacle nails to flow down the path. Of these three flow paths, the one with the highest flow rate of the game ball is the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443, then the flow path 5451 toward the second starting port 440, and the flow rate of the game ball is the highest. The low is the flow path 5452 toward the out port 5444.

The game balls that have flowed down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 are configured so that all or most of the game balls win the first start port 5443 when the first start port 5443 is in the open mode. .. Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is the small hit winning opening. It is difficult to win the 5400.

On the other hand, when it is impossible to win a prize for the game ball to the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small hit winning opening 5400. At this time, if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 enters the small hit winning opening 5400 via the payout / firing control circuit 300. Pay out the prize ball based on the prize. The game ball that has reached the small hit winning opening 5400 but has not won the small hit winning opening 5400 flows further downstream, and is eventually discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57. Therefore, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" in which winning the first starting port 5443 is easier than in the "normal gaming state", even if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the small winning opening 5400 is said to be small. It is difficult for a game ball to win in the winning opening 5400, but in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" where the frequency of winning the first starting port 544 is less than in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" A large amount of game balls will flow down toward the small hit winning opening 5400, and these large numbers of game balls will win the small hit winning opening 5400 if the small hit winning opening 5400 is open. It will be possible.

(Flow of the game)
Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. The main CPU 101 controls to one of the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". However, in addition to this, although it is not essential, it may be controlled to the "low accuracy time and short game state".

When the game ball launched toward the game area 20 wins the first start port 5442 in the "normal game state", the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery. When the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 executes the control to shift to the big hit gaming state. In this "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101, like the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 to change the special symbol. Determine the time.

When the jackpot gaming state is completed, the main CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot according to the hit time selection symbol command related to the jackpot, and according to the determined jackpot type, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. Then, the control for shifting the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed to the "normal gaming state" or the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is executed.

The main CPU 101 is the pachinko game of the first embodiment in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" controlled after the time-saving game is digested in this "high-accuracy time-saving game state". Unlike the machine, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 276.

FIG. 276 is another example of the table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, which is another example of the variation time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol for high start (another example of FIG. 259). ). The difference between the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 276 and the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 is that the result of the first special lottery is "big hit". At one point, the variation display of the first special symbol can be performed over an extremely long time, for example, 300,000 msec (long variation F) to 600,000 msec (long variation D). When the result of the second special lottery is "missing", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is subjected to ultra-fast fluctuation in an extremely short time such as 1000 msec.

As described in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the result of the special lottery of either the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a "big hit", and the change of the special symbol based on the "big hit". During the display, even if the start condition of the other special symbol is satisfied, the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit". Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", during the variable display of the first special symbol based on this "big hit", even if the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the main CPU 101 is The second special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit".

However, even if the main CPU 101 executes a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit" in the second special lottery, the main CPU 101 wins a "small hit" with a probability of about one-fifth in this non-winning process. In the "high accuracy short game state", it is difficult to win the small hit winning opening 5400 because all or most of the game balls flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting opening 5443 win the first starting opening 5443. Is. However, when the state shifts from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the electric support state is lost. The frequency of winning the small hit winning opening 5400 without winning the 5443 increases, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time increases.

That is, when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit" in the "high-accuracy time-short game state", the variation display of the first special symbol over an extremely long time such as 600,000 msec (long variation D) is performed. The time-saving game is digested by displaying the fluctuation of the second special symbol in an extremely short time (until the result of "big hit" is derived), for example, 1000 msec (ultra-fast fluctuation). When the determined time-saving game is digested, the main CPU 101 executes a control to shift from the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". Until the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the result indicating that it is a "big hit" is derived, the result of the second special lottery will not be a "big hit", and during this period, for example, 1000 msec (ultra-fast fluctuation). In an extremely short time, the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner, and by winning a "small hit" with a high probability of about one-fifth, you will be able to win prize balls as much as you want, and the number of shots per unit time will be increased. The expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 in a specific state. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by realizing a game-like property in which a prize ball is acquired and a specific state of all-you-can-eat is created. It is preferable that the gauge configuration is such that when the player hits right, the hold of the second start memory is always the upper limit (for example, four).

The number of time reductions may always be a fixed number (for example, 100 times). However, if the number of time reductions in the "highly accurate time reduction game state" is different each time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "big hit" is derived, it is possible to further enhance the interest. For example, by making the number of time reductions in the "high accuracy time saving game state" different each time the "big hit" is derived, the result of the first special lottery in the "high accuracy time saving game state" becomes the "big hit" ( The following interesting things occur in relation to the timing (the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a long variation). That is, it does not mean that the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes a "big hit" (the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a long variation) in the "high-accuracy time-short game state" is not good. For example, when the number of time reductions is 100, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a long fluctuation at an early timing, the period of the specific state may be shortened, and in some cases, the specific state may not be reached. 1 There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may stop and be controlled to the big hit game state. Further, when the number of time reductions is relatively short (for example, 24 times), it is possible to receive the benefit as a specific state for a longer time if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a long fluctuation at an earlier timing. .. In this way, by making the number of time reductions different each time a "big hit" is derived, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game. Therefore, the determined number of time reductions is suggested or specified by control by, for example, the sub CPU 201. May be done.

However, even if the number of time reductions is not disclosed by any of the controls of the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 until at least the transition to the "high accuracy non-time reduction game state" is made, the player can decide at any timing the "high accuracy time reduction game state". Because it is difficult to grasp whether to shift from "highly accurate non-time saving game state", the game interest is enhanced from a different point of view from when suggesting or clearly indicating the determined number of time saving games. Is possible.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 276, the result of the first special lottery in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" was "big hit". At this time, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at any of the fluctuation times of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F by lottery. Since the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F have different fluctuation times, the long fluctuation D having the longest fluctuation time is the most advantageous to the player, and the long fluctuation F having the shortest fluctuation time is the most disadvantageous to the player. .. In this way, by making it possible to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to be one of a plurality of different fluctuation times, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game. Moreover, if it is not disclosed by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 which of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F is determined, the player does not know the end timing of the specific state, so that the game is a hobby. Can be further enhanced.

Further, in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 is configured to be determined to be one of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F, but a predetermined probability. Therefore, the fluctuation time (for example, 10000 msec) may be determined so that the degree of profit for the player is low.

Further, in the above, after the big hit game state is completed, it is configured to be controlled to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state" via the "high accuracy non-time saving game state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit game is not necessarily limited to this. Immediately after the state ends, it may be controlled to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state". In particular, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the normal jackpot controlled to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" via the "high-probability short-time gaming state", and after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the "high-probability short-time gaming state" A premier jackpot that is controlled to a "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" without going through is prepared, and in a special lottery executed by the main CPU 101, the premier jackpot is won with a predetermined probability according to the hit-time selection symbol command. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be one of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F. However, it is not always necessary to set the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to a long variation for all "big hits". For example, only when a specific "big hit" is made among a plurality of jackpot types, the first special symbol The fluctuation time of may be determined by the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F.

Further, in the above, even in the "high-probability non-time-saving game state", when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" as in the "high-probability time-saving game state", the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Is configured to be determined to be one of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F, but instead of this, a fluctuation time determination table different from that in FIG. When the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" in the "high probability non-time saving game state", the fluctuation time (for example, 1000 msec), which is less profitable for the player, may be determined with high probability. That is, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" in the "highly accurate time-saving game state", the time-saving game is digested by performing the fluctuation time of the second special symbol with super-fast fluctuation, and the time-saving game is digested. In the later "high probability non-time saving game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is increased, while in the "high probability non-time saving game state", the result of the first special lottery is "big hit". If there is, the change time of the first special symbol may be changed to a big hit game state immediately by performing a super speed change such as 1000 msec. In this case, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" in the "high accuracy short game state" in which the number of times that the game can be executed is predetermined, it is more advantageous for the player than in other states. It is possible to give a premier hit, and the player's "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is more disadvantageous in the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time than the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". Expectations for "big hits" can be increased.

Although it is common not only to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment but also to all of the first to eighth embodiments of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 101 Performs both the second special lottery and the first special lottery in a predetermined order within the same interrupt processing, so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed while reducing the control load of the main CPU 101. It is configured so that the variable display of the special symbol can be performed in parallel.

By the way, as described above, it is rare that both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in a predetermined order within the same interrupt process. However, the main CPU 101 is set to either one (the special lottery is performed first) so that the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed within the same interrupt process do not become "big hits" at the same time. If the result of the special lottery is a "big hit", the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process, so that the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed within the same interrupt process are executed. I try to prevent both of these results from being "big hits" at the same time. However, as mentioned above, if the result of the special lottery of either one (the one for which the special lottery was performed first) is "small hit" within the same interrupt processing, the other special lottery is not won. Since the special lottery is performed as usual, it is possible to prevent the "big hit" having a relatively high profit degree from being canceled by the "small hit" having a relatively low profit degree.

In such a gaming machine, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time is controlled to a "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit". When both conditions are satisfied that the variation display of the first special symbol is performed over an extremely long time such as 600,000 msec (long variation D in FIG. 276), the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. During this period, the result of the second lottery will not be a "big hit", so a new game is guaranteed in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1. Can provide sex.

In particular, when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by the main CPU 101 to, for example, one of the long variation DFs (see FIG. 276) having different variation times. By doing so, the time when the specific state is guaranteed will be different, and it will be possible to enhance the game entertainment. In particular, when the long fluctuation D having the longest fluctuation time is determined, the sub CPU 201 may perform a special effect to uplift the player. Further, if neither the main CPU 101 nor the sub CPU 201 discloses which of the long fluctuations D to F is determined by the main CPU 101, the player cannot grasp how long the specific state will continue. , In this case as well, it is possible to enhance the interest.

In this way, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is obtained while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed. For a gaming machine having a specific state of more than 1, it is preferable to perform a special lottery in the order of the first special lottery and the second special lottery within the same interrupt processing. This is because when the first special lottery is performed first and the result is a "big hit", the second special lottery is regarded as a non-winning process and is in a specific state. However, this is not an essential requirement, and the special lottery may be performed in the order of the second special lottery and the first special lottery.

[Variation example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the first starting port 5442 conventionally provided, the first starting port is also provided on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment has a first starting port. In the modified example, the configuration is different in that the first starting port 5442 is not provided. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the game is played by left-handed in the "normal gaming state", and the game is played by right-handed in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". However, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the game is played by right-handed in any of the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". It is a configuration to perform.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the gaming ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is the first starting port. When the 5443 is in the open mode, all or most of the gaming balls are configured to win the first starting port 5443. Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is the small hit winning opening. It is difficult to win the 5400. Further, when it is impossible to win a prize for the game ball to the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small hit winning opening 5400. At this time, if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 enters the small hit winning opening 5400 via the payout / firing control circuit 300. Pay out the prize ball based on the prize. The game ball that has reached the small hit winning opening 5400 but has not won the small hit winning opening 5400 flows further downstream, and is eventually discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57.

In the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, when the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" are used. In any of the above, unless a specific condition described later is satisfied, the determination is made with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 277.

FIG. 277 is another example of the table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, which is a table for determining the variation time (variable display time) of the special symbol for low start (another example of FIG. 258). ). The difference between the table shown in FIG. 277 and the table shown in FIG. 258 is that when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", the variation display of the first special symbol is, for example, 300,000 msec (long variation G). The point is that variable display can be performed over an extremely long time.

(Flow of the game)
Next, the flow of the game in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, the main CPU 101 controls to one of the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". However, in addition to this, although it is not essential, it may be controlled to a "low probability short game state" in which the game is played by right-handed.

When the game ball launched toward the game area 20 wins the first start port 5443 in the "normal game state", "high accuracy time-saving game state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", the main CPU 101 is set to the first. 1 A special lottery is performed, and based on the result of the first lottery, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277.

In the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", which is an electric support state, all or most of the game balls that have flowed down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 will win a prize in the first start port 5443. Therefore, it is difficult to win a prize in the small hit winning opening 5400. However, when the state shifts from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the electric support state is lost. It is possible to reach the vicinity of the small hit winning opening 5400 without winning 5443. However, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as described above, when the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol of FIG. 277 is determined unless a specific condition is satisfied. Make a decision by referring to the decision table. That is, if the result of the second special lottery is not a "big hit", the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner over an extremely long time of 580000 msec to 600,000 msec if the player is no longer in the electric support state. There is little or no open mode.

Therefore, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 101 is determined to have a variation pattern (long variation G) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is extremely long as the above-mentioned specific condition. Therefore, the control for changing from the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277 to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278 is executed. The variation time determination table for the special symbol for high start in FIG. 278 is different from the variation time determination table for the special symbol for low start in FIG. 277, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" and "small hit". The point is that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be performed only for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec (ultra-fast fluctuation) when it is "missing".

FIG. 279 shows a variation executed by the main CPU 101 when the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long variation pattern (long variation G) in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time determination table setting process.

With reference to FIG. 279, a fluctuation time determination table setting process executed when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G) will be described. First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special lottery has been executed (step S1831). If the first special lottery is not executed (NO in step S1831), the main CPU 101 performs the variable time determination table setting process without changing the variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbol. finish. When it is determined that the first special lottery has been executed (YES in step S1831), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the long variation G (step S1832). If the variation pattern of the first special symbol is not determined to be the long variation G (NO in step S1832), the main CPU 101 does not change the variation time determination table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol. The variable time determination table setting process is terminated. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the long variation G (YES in step S1832), the main CPU 101 is set to the variation time determination table, that is, the variation time determination table currently used for reference. , It is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277 (step S1833). If the set variation time determination table is the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start (YES in step S1833), the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table when determining the variation time of the special symbol. Is set in the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278 (step S1834), and the variation time determination table setting process is completed. On the other hand, if the set variation time determination table is not the variation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277 (NO in step S1833), the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol. The variable time determination table setting process is terminated without changing the variable time determination table to be referred to. In step S1833, if the set variation time determination table is not the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277, the currently set variation time determination table is the high shown in FIG. 278. It will be a table for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the start.

Therefore, while the variation time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277, even if the game ball wins in the second start opening 440, the second Unless the result of the special lottery is a "big hit", the variation display of the second special symbol (long variation A to C) is performed over an extremely long time, so that the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, the frequency with which the small hit winning opening 5400 is opened is relatively small so that the game ball to the small hit winning opening 5400 wins a prize.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol was determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G), it was changed to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278. Later, when the right-handed game ball wins the second starting opening 4401, most of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not only changed at super speed, but also the small hit winning opening 5400 with a probability of about 1/5. It becomes possible to win a prize for a game ball, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a specific state exceeding 1.

As described above, the main CPU 101 is based on the fact that the fluctuation time determination table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extremely long. By changing from the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277 to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278, the variation time of the first special symbol is changed. While continuing, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the "big hit" is not derived. Therefore, the prize balls that can be obtained in the above-mentioned specific state and the prize balls that can be obtained in the subsequent big hit game state can be used as a premium big hit in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out to the player, which enhances the game entertainment. Is possible.

Further, when such a premium jackpot is set, the sub CPU 201 is in the above-mentioned specific state before it is derived that the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit" (before being controlled by the jackpot gaming state). When the liquid crystal display device 16 executes a premium effect indicating that the jackpot game state and the jackpot game state are continuously executed premium jackpots, for example, via the display control circuit 204, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

As a result of the lottery of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 makes it possible to execute a big hit game (hereinafter referred to as "2R big hit game" in this paragraph) in a mode that is difficult for the player to grasp, and such a 2R big hit game. When the second special symbol is changed to the variable display of the long fluctuation G when the player is elected, and the game is controlled to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state" after the 2R big hit game is completed, the game state is specified. The state shifts in the order of 2R jackpot game and specific state. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to make the player think that the specific state has been continuously executed. The 2R big hit game is a big hit game in which, for example, a round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened by about 18,000 msec is executed for only two rounds. However, if it can be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp, another big hit game may be used instead of the above 2R big hit game.

Further, the main CPU 101 is triggered by the determination of the fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extremely long, from the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start to the special symbol for high start. After changing to the variable time determination table, for high start until a predetermined period (for example, a period until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times or a period until the big hit game ends) elapses. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol. The main CPU 101 may change to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start based on the elapse of the period, or the variation time of the special symbol for low start based on the elapse of the period. It may be decided whether to change to the decision table or to continue to refer to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start.

By the way, in the above, when the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G). It is always changed to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for low start is set and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G), the main CPU 101 is determined. It is determined whether or not a condition (for example, a change lottery for whether or not the main CPU 101 changes the table is performed and the change lottery is won, etc.) is satisfied, and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a low start is used. The reference to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol of the above may be continued, and the change to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start may be made based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, instead of the above-mentioned change lottery, a long-variable G-1 that changes the variable time determination table and a long-variable G-2 that does not change the variable time determination table may be provided, and the selection rate may be 50% for each.

In the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the game is played by right-handed in any of the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". However, instead of this, a left-handed game may be played in any of the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". In this case, the left-handed game ball can win both the first start port and the second start port (in the sense that one game ball wins both the first start port and the second start port). However, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed based on the result of the first special lottery being a "big hit", the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to fluctuate at an ultra-fast speed. Even in the "normal gaming state", it is possible to set the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launching balls per unit time to a specific state in which the expected value exceeds 1 before shifting to the jackpot gaming state.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board surface configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 280). Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to a "normal gaming state" that is not an electric support state or a "high accuracy time-saving gaming state" that is an electric support state. .. If the "big hit" is not derived and the time-saving game is digested a certain number of times (for example, 100 times) in this "high-accuracy time-saving game state", the game shifts to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" which is not the electric support state. In this way, the point that the number of time reductions is constant is different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, but like the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, it is determined to be one of the plurality of time reductions. It may be something that is done. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment, the pachinko machine of the 1st embodiment also has a table for determining the variation time (variable display time) of the special symbol in the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state” and the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”. It is different from the variation time (variable display time) determination table (see FIG. 259) of the special symbol for high start of the gaming machine.

FIG. 280 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 280, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 have the gaming area 20. It is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 inside, and by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 540. , It is possible to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the large winning opening 540. In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, when the large winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-handed gaming balls are configured to win the large winning opening 540.

Further, a passage gate 49 is arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The passing gate 49 is configured so that most of the game balls hit to the right that do not win the large winning opening 540 can pass through. The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on condition that the game ball passes through.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment, like the pachinko gaming machine of the 6th embodiment, is a game that is hit right on the downstream side of the passing gate 49 in addition to the first starting port 5442 that is conventionally provided. It has a first starting port where the ball can win a prize. The first starting port is the first starting port 5443, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. Further, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 is the same when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 and when the game ball wins the first starting port 5443. ..

Above the first starting port 5443, a movable member 4653 that is constantly operated at regular intervals is provided under the control of the main CPU 101. The movable member 4653 is opened and closed many times by a large number of opening patterns, for example, "3000 msec closed → 100 msec open → 10000 msec open → 200 msec open → 7000 msec closed → 300 open → 10000 msec closed → 700 msec closed → 300 msec open". By setting the operation to one cycle, it is difficult to understand the opening timing even though the operation is always performed at a fixed cycle.

The right-handed game ball is configured so that if the movable member 4653 is open, all or most of the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 will win a prize in the first starting port 5443. On the other hand, if the movable member 4653 is closed, the game ball hit to the right flows down to the downstream side of the first starting port 5443 without winning a prize in the first starting port 5443.

The second starting port 440 is arranged on the downstream side of the first starting port 5443. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 displays the variation of the second special symbol, but as with the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability that a "small hit" is derived is about 5 minutes. It is one of.

Above the second starting port 440, a shutter 4654 for the second starting port that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The second start port shutter 4654 can be driven by a second start port solenoid (not shown). When the second starting port shutter 4654 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 is closed, and when the second starting port shutter 4654 operates in the rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 is closed. The starting port 440 is in the open mode. The main CPU 101 sets the shutter 4654 for the second starting port to "normal" so that the second starting port 440 is in the open mode based on the result of the normal symbol determination being a hit in the "high accuracy time-shortening gaming state". It is operated more frequently than the "game state" to facilitate the winning of the second starting port 440.

On the downstream side of the second starting port 440, a small hit shutter 6100 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the small hit winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small hit shutter 6100 can be driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is closed, and when the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 opens. It is an open mode.

When the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-handed game balls win the second starting port 440, and when the second starting port 440 is in the closed mode, the right-handed game ball is hit. The game ball is configured to reach the small hit shutter 6100.

When the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that have reached the small hit shutter 6100 win the small hit winning opening 5400, and the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the closed mode. Is configured to be discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 57.

(Flow of the game)
Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment will be described. The main CPU 101 controls to one of the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". However, in addition to this, although it is not essential, it may be controlled to the "low accuracy time and short game state".

When the game ball launched toward the game area 20 wins the first start port 5442 in the "normal game state", the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery. When the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 executes the control to shift to the big hit gaming state. In this "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101, like the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 to change the special symbol. Determine the time.

When the jackpot gaming state is completed, the main CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot according to the hit time selection symbol command related to the jackpot, and according to the determined type of jackpot, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. Then, the control for shifting the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed to the "normal gaming state" or the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is executed.

The main CPU 101 is the pachinko game of the first embodiment in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" controlled after the time-saving game is digested in this "high-accuracy time-saving game state". Unlike the machine, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed for an extremely long time such as 300,000 msec (long fluctuation F) to 600,000 msec (long fluctuation D). After that, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol from which the "big hit" can be derived. This point is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. Further, when the result of the second special lottery is "missing", the variation display of the second special symbol is changed at an extremely short time such as 1000 msec, which is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. Is.

Also in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", this "big hit". During the variable display of the first special symbol based on the above, even if the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the main CPU 101 executes the second special lottery as a non-winning process that does not result in a “big hit”.

However, as with the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, even if the main CPU 101 executes a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit" in the second special lottery, there is a probability of about one-fifth in this non-winning process. Win a "small hit". In the "high accuracy short game state", all or most of the game balls that did not win the first starting port 5443 win the second starting port 440 (the number of prize balls when winning the second starting port 440). Is one ball), it is difficult to win the small hit winning opening 5400. However, when the state shifts from the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", the electric support state is lost. The frequency of winning the small hit winning opening 5400 increases without doing so, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time becomes high.

That is, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit" in the "high accuracy time-shortening gaming state", it takes an extremely long time such as 600,000 msec (long fluctuation D). While the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (until the result indicating that it is a "big hit" is derived), the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed in an extremely short time such as 1000 msec (ultra-fast fluctuation). The time-saving game is digested by being played, but when the determined time-saving game is digested, the main CPU 101 controls to shift from the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". To execute. Until the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the result indicating that it is a "big hit" is derived, the result of the second special lottery will not be a "big hit", and during this period, for example, 1000 msec (ultra-fast fluctuation). In an extremely short time, the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner, and by winning a "small hit" with a high probability of about one-fifth, you will be able to win prize balls as much as you want, and the number of shots per unit time will be increased. The expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 in a specific state. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by realizing a game-like property in which a prize ball is acquired and a specific state of all-you-can-eat is created. When the player hits right, the hold of the second start memory is always set to the upper limit (for example, four).

The number of time reductions may always be a fixed number (for example, 100 times). However, if the number of time reductions in the "highly accurate time reduction game state" is different each time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "big hit" is derived, it is more interesting as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. Can be increased. For example, by making the number of time reductions in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" different each time the "big hit" is derived, the result of the first special lottery becomes the "big hit" (the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. The following interesting things occur in relation to the timing (which is a long fluctuation). That is, it does not mean that the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes a "big hit" (the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a long variation) is early. For example, when the number of time reductions is 100, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a long fluctuation at an early timing, the period of the specific state may be shortened, and in some cases, the specific state may not be reached. 1 There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may stop and be controlled to the big hit game state. Further, when the number of time reductions is relatively short (for example, 24 times), it is possible to receive the benefit as a specific state for a longer time if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a long fluctuation at an earlier timing. .. In this way, by making the number of time reductions different each time a "big hit" is derived, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game. Therefore, the determined number of time reductions is suggested or specified by control by, for example, the sub CPU 201. You may perform the production.

However, even if the number of time reductions is not disclosed by any control of the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, the player can perform the "highly accurate time reduction game state" at any timing, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. Since it is difficult to grasp whether or not the game will shift to the "highly accurate non-time-saving game state", it is necessary to enhance the game interest from a different point of view than when suggesting or clearly indicating the determined number of time-saving games. Is possible.

As in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The fluctuation time of any of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F is determined by lottery. In this way, by making it possible to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to be one of a plurality of different fluctuation times, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game. Moreover, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, if it is not disclosed by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 which of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F is determined, the player can use the pachinko game machine. Since the end timing of the specific state is not known, it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment.

Further, in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 101 is configured to be determined to be one of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F, but the sixth implementation. As described in the pachinko gaming machine of the example, the fluctuation time (for example, 10000 msec) in which the profit degree for the player is low may be determined with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the above, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, it is configured to be controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" via the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", but the sixth is not necessarily limited to this. As described in the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine may be controlled to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” immediately after the jackpot gaming state is completed. In particular, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the normal jackpot controlled to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" via the "high-probability short-time gaming state", and after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the "high-probability short-time gaming state" A premier jackpot that is controlled to a "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" without going through is prepared, and in a special lottery executed by the main CPU 101, the premier jackpot is won with a predetermined probability according to the hit-time selection symbol command. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be one of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F. However, it is not always necessary to make the fluctuation time of the first special symbol a long fluctuation for all "big hits", and as described in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, for example, it is specified among a plurality of big hit types. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol may be determined to be the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation D to the long fluctuation F only when it is a “big hit”.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board surface configuration of the gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 281). Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed is controlled to the "normal gaming state" which is not the electric support state or the "high accuracy non-time saving gaming state" which is the electric support state. To. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment may be controlled to the "high accuracy time saving gaming state" or the "low accuracy time saving gaming state", but it is not essential. Further, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the number of time reductions is determined to be one of a plurality of time reductions and the number of time reductions determined in the "high accuracy time reduction game state" is digested. It may be controlled to a "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". Hereinafter, the appearance configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 281.

FIG. 281 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 281, in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 have the gaming area 20. It is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 inside, and by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 540. , It is possible to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball to the large winning opening 540. In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, when the large winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-handed gaming balls are configured to win the large winning opening 540.

Further, on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, the accessory device 3500 is arranged on the downstream side of the large winning opening 540, and the right-handed game ball is configured to be able to enter the accessory device 3500. There is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the accessory device 3500 may be arranged so that the left-handed game ball can enter.

The accessory device 3500 has an entrance 3502 capable of taking in the game ball inside, and a rolling surface 3530 on which the game ball entering the inside from the entrance 3502 can roll, and enters the inside. By rolling the rolling surface 3530, the game ball is temporarily retained inside the accessory device 3500.

At substantially the center of the rolling surface 3530, an interference member 3520 that constantly rotates and changes the movement of the game ball when the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 3530 comes into contact with the rolling surface 3530 is provided. If the game ball only rolls on the rolling surface 3530, it only rolls around the interference member 3520, but if it interferes with the interference member 3520, it is thrown away. The flipped game ball can be accepted by the first reception 3540 or the second reception 3550. The game ball once taken into the accessory device 3500 rolls on the rolling surface 3530 until it is received by the first inlet 3540 or the second inlet 3550, and thus stays inside the accessory device 3500. The time will be different each time. Further, the first entrance 3540 and the second entrance 3550 are not limited to the mouths that can accept the game ball, and may be a region through which the game ball can pass.

A movable member 3510 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172 is provided above the entrance 3502, and the movable member 3510 is always used as a game ball inside the accessory device 3500. It is located forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 so as to prevent entry. Then, only when a specific condition described later is satisfied, the movable member 3510 operates in the backward direction to open the entrance 3502, and only one game ball can be taken into the accessory device 3500. ing. Although not shown in FIG. 281, when a plurality of game balls enter the entrance 3502 when the movable member 3510 is operated, only one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500. Other game balls are discharged to the outside of the machine. Further, if the game ball is not fired, the main CPU 101 maintains the entrance 3502 in an open mode until one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500.

The above-mentioned big winning opening 540 provided above the accessory device 3500 is a winning of a game ball when the first special symbol is variablely displayed and a "big hit" is derived and controlled to a big hit gaming state. Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, it is referred to as the first large winning opening 540. The first large winning opening 540 has an open mode that enables (or easily) a winning of a game ball by driving the shutter 610 by a first large winning opening solenoid (not shown), and a winning of the game ball. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult).

A passing gate 49 that triggers a normal symbol determination is arranged below the accessory device 3500, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol determination. If the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the blade member 4620 in an open mode of, for example, about 5900 msec, and then in a closed mode. While the blade member 4620 is in the open mode, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is facilitated. The second starting port 440 is configured to be able to win a prize when hitting right, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 5) according to the first embodiment.

On the downstream side of the passing gate 49, a game ball can be won when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and controlled to a big hit gaming state on condition that a "big hit" is derived. Two major winning openings 5403 are provided. The second large winning opening 5403 has an open mode that enables (or easily) a winning of a game ball by driving the shutter 6103 by a second large winning opening solenoid (not shown), and a winning of the game ball. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult).

A small hit winning opening 5400 is provided on the downstream side of the second large winning opening 5403. The small hit winning opening 5400 has an open mode that enables (or easily) wins a game ball by driving the small hit shutter 6100 by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown), and the game ball. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize.

If the game ball hit to the right does not win any of the first big winning opening 540, the accessory device 3500, the second big winning opening 5403, the small hit winning opening 5400 and the second starting opening 440, the out opening 57 Is discharged from the machine.

The major difference between the pachinko gaming machines of the 8th embodiment and the pachinko gaming machines of the 1st to 7th embodiments is the process until the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The process of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described.

First, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. Therefore, since there is no merit of winning the game ball in the second starting port 440, the game is played by left-handed hitting that allows the game ball to be won in the first starting port 5442. When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery. Then, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the first special lottery is derived. In this "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. At this time, when the "big hit" is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 to shift the first big winning opening 540 into an open mode and a closed mode. Control to a special gaming state that takes place over a round. As described above, when the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442, the process until it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is not significantly different from that of the pachinko gaming machines of the first to sixth embodiments.

Next, when the big hit game state ends and is controlled to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state", the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, triggered by the end of the big hit game state. The fluctuation time determination table of the symbol is changed to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259. Then, in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259. Further, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the second special lottery held based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, there is a probability of winning a "small hit" with a probability of about one-fifth. However, in the first special lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, the "small hit" is not won, or even if it is won, it is won with an extremely low probability compared to the second special lottery. It is only. Therefore, in this "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", the game is played by right-handed. When the right-handed game ball wins the second starting opening 440, the main CPU 101 executes the second special lottery. Then, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, and the result of the second special lottery is derived. In this "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is in a specific state exceeding 1. Therefore, as an effect indicating that when the jackpot gaming state ends and the sub CPU 201 is controlled to the "high accuracy non-time saving gaming state", the sub CPU 201 is controlled to a specific state that is advantageous to the player different from the jackpot gaming state. , A delight image that delights the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

Even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 and the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 does not immediately control the big hit game state, but rather. First, as the first condition, which is one of the conditions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, only the condition device is operated. After the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed based on this, the small hit game is executed with high frequency, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit winning opening 5400 is increased. .. When a game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 5400, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In the above, when the condition device is activated by deriving the "big hit" based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. The small hit game is executed frequently to obtain a prize ball, but when the condition device is activated based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the condition device is activated. Based on this, it is general that the variation display of the second special symbol is not performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 until the jackpot gaming state is completed. Therefore, instead of the above, when the condition device is activated by deriving the "big hit" based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, for example, based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 49. The winning opening (second starting opening 440 in this embodiment) is facilitated by opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) by increasing the probability that the result of the ordinary symbol determination is determined to be a hit. The winning frequency of the game balls may be increased to increase the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time. In this case, when a game ball wins a prize in the winning opening facilitated by the opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620), it is necessary to pay out at least two or more game balls as the prize ball. Further, the main CPU 101 has a relatively long time before the condition device is activated so that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launch balls per unit time is not increased when the condition device is not operating. It is preferable to perform the fluctuation time of the normal symbol over the period and change the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to a relatively short time based on the operation of the condition device.

When the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 3510 to take only one game ball into the accessory device 3500. Then, when the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received by the first entrance 3540 or the second entrance 3550, the main CPU 101 is a second condition which is a further condition for controlling the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the accessory continuous actuating device is operated. On the premise that the condition device is operating, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 when the accessory continuous operation device is operated, and shifts the second special winning opening 5403 to the open mode and the closed mode. Controls to a special gaming state that is played over multiple rounds. As described above, when the gaming ball wins a prize in the second starting port 440, the process until it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is significantly different from that of the pachinko gaming machines of the first to seventh embodiments.

It should be noted that, for example, in a round game executed in a jackpot game state, when the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received by the first reception 3540 and when it is received by the second reception 3550. It is advisable to make a difference in the degree of advantage, such as making a difference in the number of rounds. However, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of receptions that function as conditions for operating the accessory continuous device, such as the first reception 3540 and the second reception 3550. With the acceptance of the game ball, the main CPU 101 may be used to operate the accessory continuous operation device.

Further, in the above, in the big hit game state in which the main CPU 101 is controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close the first big winning opening 540. In the jackpot game state in which the round game is performed and the game is controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, the shutter 6103 is driven to open and close the second winning opening 5403. Round games are played using different big winning openings, such as playing round games to be transferred. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot gaming state controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 and the jackpot gaming state controlled based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 440. Then, the round game may be performed using the same large winning opening.

Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived, the game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500 and accepted by the first reception 3540 or the second reception 3550. It is controlled to the big hit game state without going through the process, because the main CPU 101 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device by deriving the result of the first special lottery. ..

By the way, as described above, the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is temporarily retained inside the accessory device 3500 until it is received by the first inlet 3540 or the second inlet 3550. .. As a result, a time difference can be generated between the generation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. That is, even though the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived, the big hit gaming state is not controlled until the continuous accessory actuating device is activated. A specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 will be extended. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the sub CPU 201 is used as an effect indicating that the specific state is extended when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived. A delight image that delights the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Further, since the specific state is limited to a limited period in which it is unknown how long after the condition device is activated, the sub CPU 201 prevents the game ball from being accepted by the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550. The cheering effect of cheering the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

In this way, when the second starting port 440 is won, not only the operation of the conditional device (the first condition is satisfied) such that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived, but also the condition. Assuming that the device has been activated, a time difference is provided and when the accessory continuous actuation device is further activated (the second condition is satisfied), the jackpot game state is controlled, and a prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is awarded. It is possible to extend the specific state in which the expected value of the number of balls exceeds 1, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Moreover, since the time from the operation of the condition device as the first condition to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device as the second condition is different each time, the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is increased. It becomes difficult for the player to predict how long the specific state in which the expected value exceeds 1 will continue, and it becomes possible to further enhance the game interest.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous device are set as the first condition and the second condition for being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, in a so-called type 1 type 2 multifunction device, the type 1 winning and the type 2 winning may be the first condition and the second condition for being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. For example, in the so-called type 1 type 2 multifunction device, the same accessory device 3500 as the accessory device 3500 described in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is provided. The main CPU 101 changes the special symbol during normal times (when neither type 1 nor type 2 occurs), for example, referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. Determine the time. Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed and the "hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 3510 so as to take only one game ball into the accessory device 3500. Let me. Further, on the premise that the main CPU 101 displays the variation of the special symbol even after it becomes one type, for example, referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, the special symbol Determine the fluctuation time of. On the other hand, one game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 rolls on the rolling surface 3530 and is repelled when it comes into contact with the interference member 3520. When the game ball bounced by the interference member 3520 is received by, for example, the first entrance 3540, it becomes a hit of two types, and the main CPU 101 controls the big hit game state. In such a so-called type 1 type 2 compound machine, it is not possible to have the concept that the specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is extended, but per type and 2 The seed hit can be the first condition and the second condition for being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after becoming one kind as the first condition, two kinds as the second condition. Since the time until a hit is different each time, it becomes difficult for the player to predict how long the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time will continue to exceed 1, and the game will be enhanced. Is possible.

[Modification example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described. The major difference between the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is that the variation time determination table of the special symbol referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol is used, for example. This is an opportunity to change from the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example. In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the main CPU 101 changes the variation time determination table of the special symbol referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol when the jackpot gaming state ends. In the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, the change is triggered by the operation of the condition device.

Further, the change time determination table of the special symbol referred to by the main CPU 101 when determining the variation time of the special symbol is set to the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, for example, based on the operation of the condition device. When changing from the fluctuation time determination table to, for example, the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, the condition device is generated even when the game ball wins the first start port 5442. It is possible to create a time lag between the time when the accessory continuous operation device is activated and the time when the accessory continuous operation device is activated.

Further, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the large winning opening may be only one of the first large winning opening 540 and the second large winning opening 5403 shown in FIG. 281. Similarly, as for the shutter, only one of the shutter 610 and the shutter 6103 may be used. Therefore, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, it is assumed that the second special winning opening 5403 and the shutter 6103 are not provided, but the first large winning opening 540 and the shutter 610 are provided. Therefore, since it is not necessary to distinguish the first large winning opening 540 from other large winning openings, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, it is simply referred to as the large winning opening 540.

Specifically, first, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, so that the left The game is played by hitting. When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 immediately controls to the big hit gaming state like the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. However, first, as the first condition for controlling the jackpot gaming state, the condition device is operated.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the variation time determination table of the special symbol to be referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol when the condition device is activated, and the variation of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259. Change to the time determination table. Here, in the second special lottery held based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the "small hit" is won with a probability of about one-fifth, and the game ball to the first starting port 5442. In the first special lottery, which is held based on the winning of the prize, the "small hit" is not won, or even if it is won, it is only won with an extremely low probability compared to the second special lottery. Is played by hitting right. When the game is played by this right-handed hit, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time becomes a specific state exceeding 1.

Further, after the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. In order to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and display the fluctuation of the second special symbol based on this, the small hit game is executed frequently, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit winning opening 5400 is high. Can be enhanced. When a game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 5400, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

Also in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, for example, the winning opening facilitated by opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620). (In this embodiment, the winning frequency of the gaming balls to the second starting port 440) may be increased to increase the expected value of the number of winning balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time.

Further, the accessory device 3500 is also configured so that a right-handed gaming ball can enter, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left-handed gaming is not limited to this. The ball may be arranged so that it can enter.

After the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 3510 in the same manner as when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. Then, only one gaming ball is taken into the accessory device 3500. Then, when the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received by the first entrance 3540 or the second entrance 3550, the main CPU 101 is a second condition which is a further condition for controlling the jackpot gaming state. As a result, the accessory continuous actuating device is operated. On the premise that the condition device is operating, the main CPU 101 has a plurality of round games in which the shutter 610 is driven when the accessory continuous operation device is operated to shift the large winning opening 540 into an open mode and a closed mode. Control to a special gaming state that takes place over a round. As described above, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, even when the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442, the first condition for being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is first. Assuming that the device is operated and the condition device is operated, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device, which is the second condition, with a time lag. In this case, the main CPU 101 does not stop the measurement of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol only by the operation of the condition device, but measures the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. Execute control to stop.

Therefore, after the condition device is activated, it is possible to create a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1, for a limited period of time in which it is unknown how long it will last, which enhances the interest of the game. Is possible.

When the game is controlled to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state" after the big hit game state is completed, the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. The expected value can be set to a specific state exceeding 1, and a time difference can be generated between the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device.

[Modification example of the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment]
The modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment can be further modified as follows. In the modified example of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the board surface configuration of the game board unit 17 is, for example, the board surface configuration shown in FIG. 282 instead of the board surface configuration shown in FIG. 281. Hereinafter, the appearance configuration of the modified example of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 221.

FIG. 282 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the modified example of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment.

The board configuration shown in FIG. 282 is a combination of the board configuration shown in FIG. 275 and the board configuration shown in FIG. 281. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282, the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. The large winning opening 540 has an opening mode that enables (or easily) a winning of a game ball by driving the shutter 610 by a large winning opening solenoid (not shown), and a game ball to the large winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize. When the big winning opening 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the big winning opening 540.

On the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 and on the downstream side of the large winning opening 540, the same role as the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment and the accessory device 3500 described in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. The object device 3500 is arranged.

A passing gate 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the large winning opening 540 and on the right side of the accessory device 3500. The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for determining a normal symbol on condition that the game ball passes through.

Further, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment and the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 281), in addition to the conventional first starting port 5442, it is located on the downstream side of the passage gate 49. , The first starting port 5443 (the number of winning balls when winning the first starting port 5443 is, for example, 1 ball) and the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5443 A movable member 4652 that can change the ease, and a second starting port 440 (the number of prize balls when winning the second starting port 440 is, for example, one ball) arranged on the lower left side of the first starting port 5443. It is equipped with. The main CPU 101 uses the movable member 4652 more frequently than the "normal gaming state" based on the fact that the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit in the "high accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". It is activated so that the winning of the first starting port 5443 is facilitated. When the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 displays a variation of the second special symbol, but here, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, a "small hit" is derived. The probability of being played is the probability that all or almost "small hits" will be derived when the "big hit" is not derived, but the probability that "small hits" will be derived is not limited to this.

Further, unlike FIG. 281, similarly to FIG. 254, a small hit winning opening 5400 (the number of prize balls when winning the small hit winning opening 5400 is, for example, 15 balls) and a transparent one are below the first starting port 5443. A small hit shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the panel 172 is arranged. The small hit shutter 6100 can be driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is closed, and when the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 opens. It is an open mode. When the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 performs variable display of the second special symbol and derives the result of "small hit". When the result of "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the small hit gaming state in which the small hit shutter 6100 is operated so that the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode.

Similar to FIG. 254, an out port 5444 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the machine is arranged on the upper right side of the first start port 5443, but it is not necessarily an essential configuration.

Further, as in FIG. 281, among the game balls hit to the right, the game balls that did not win the large winning opening 540 and did not enter the accessory device 3500 have a flow path 5450 toward the first starting opening 5443. , The flow path 5451 toward the second starting port 440 and the flow path 5452 toward the out port 5444 are configured by, for example, an obstacle nail so as to flow down any of the flow paths. Of these three flow paths, the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 has the highest flow rate of the game ball, followed by the flow path 5451 toward the second start port 440, and the flow path of the game ball is the highest. The low rate is the flow path 5452 toward the out port 5444.

Further, as for the game balls flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls flow down to the first starting port 5443, as in FIG. 281. It is configured to win a prize. Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is the small hit winning opening. It is difficult to win the 5400. On the other hand, when it is impossible to win a prize for the game ball to the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small hit winning opening 5400. At this time, if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 enters the small hit winning opening 5400 via the payout / firing control circuit 300. Pay out the prize ball based on the prize. The game ball that has reached the small hit winning opening 5400 but has not won the small hit winning opening 5400 flows further downstream, and is eventually discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57.

Further, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, as in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined, and the variation of the first special symbol is displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 where the left-handed gaming ball can win, indicating that it is a "big hit". When the result is derived, only the condition device out of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is operated. The main CPU 101 is changed to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example, when the condition device is activated. In this way, even when the condition device is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 in the "normal game state", from the generation of the condition device to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. It is possible to create a time lag between the two. Then, from the time when the condition device is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 until the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the second special symbol is changed in the state where the condition device is operating. Even if the display is made, the result of "big hit" is not derived, and the main CPU 101 frequently controls the small hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. By letting the small hit winning opening 5400 win a game ball, you can win the prize ball as much as you want. In this way, from the time when the condition device is generated until the continuous operation device for the accessory is activated, the result of "big hit" is not derived, and the prize ball can be obtained as much as possible by the small hit game state. Is guaranteed, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can be set to a specific state exceeding 1.

Further, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, for example, and after the jackpot gaming state is completed. For example, when the game is controlled to the "high accuracy time-short game state", the change time change table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 is changed to the trigger of the end of the big hit game state. May be good. In this case, the main CPU 101 is the first based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5443 in which the right-handed game ball can win in the "high accuracy time-shortening game state" after the big hit game state is completed. When the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result indicating that it is a "big hit" is derived, only the condition device is operated among the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device, so that the condition device is used after the condition device is generated. It is possible to create a time lag between the time when the continuous object actuating device is activated. Then, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", when the determined time-saving games are digested, the main CPU 101 controls to shift the game state to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". In this "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the game ball is in a non-electric support state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize in the first starting port 544. Therefore, the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 has flowed down. The game ball will reach the small hit winning opening 5400. That is, in the "high-accuracy time-short game state", the variation display of the second special symbol was performed in the state where the condition device was operating from the time when the condition device was generated until the accessory continuous operation device was activated. Even so, the result of "big hit" is not derived, and when the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the game is played in the small hit winning opening 5400. It will be possible to win a ball, and you will be able to win the prize ball as much as you want. In this way, even when the game is controlled to the "high-accuracy time-short-game state" after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the "high-accuracy" is "high accuracy" from the generation of the condition device to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. On condition that the game has been changed to the "non-time saving game state", the result of "big hit" is not derived, and the prize ball can be obtained by the small hit game state and the unlimited state is guaranteed, and the launch ball per unit time. It is possible to set a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number exceeds 1.

In both the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment and the modified example of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the condition device is based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting port 5442. Since it can be operated, the accessory is placed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the accessory continuous actuation device can be operated even if the player hits the left on the premise that the condition device is operating. It is preferable to provide a continuously operating gate 3560. In this case, the main CPU 101 executes control to operate the bonus continuous actuating device based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the bonus continuous actuating gate 3560 on the premise that the condition device is operating. In this way, by providing the bonus continuous operation gate 3560 through which the game ball can pass when the game ball is launched in a launch mode different from that of the bonus device 3500, for example, only the condition device can be used just before the closing time of the hall. By letting the game ball pass through the character continuous operation gate 3560 without letting the game ball enter the accessory device 3500 during operation, it is possible to quickly shift to the jackpot game state.

[4. Pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment]
[Examples of expansion of gameplay by arranging various members in the game area]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention and the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment have been described above. Then, the game may be expanded as follows. The pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described below.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment has a configuration not mentioned in the following description (for example, various members arranged in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine (particularly the left side region), control by the main CPU 101, and control by the sub CPU 201. Etc.) is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 5) according to the first embodiment. However, it may have the same basic configuration as the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment (see FIG. 254). Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment may have a setting function like the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment can adopt various variations of the embodiments, the first to fourth embodiments will be described separately.

Although some members constituting the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment are also provided in the pachinko machines according to the first to third embodiments (for example, a large winning opening), the first 4. For convenience, some pachinko machines according to the fourth embodiment have the same reference numerals, and some have different reference numerals.

In this specification, the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is referred to as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment (also the second to fourth embodiments). The same applies). On the other hand, the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment is simply referred to as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (the same applies to the second to seventh embodiments). That is, the embodiment in which "the fourth embodiment" is described before the embodiment means the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, and "the fourth embodiment" is described before the embodiment. The embodiment in which is not described means the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 283 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 283, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the special gaming member 4000 is arranged at the lower right of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special game member 4000 is composed of a large winning opening 5401, a special electric accessory 6010, a general winning opening 560, a flow path forming member 590 that forms a flow path of a right-handed game ball, and the like. In the special gaming member 4000 shown in FIG. 283, various members constituting the special gaming member 4000 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the special electric accessory 6010 is driven by a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) to drive the shutter 6020. Transition (drive) between an open mode that allows (or is easy) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 5401 and a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 5401. Possible to be configured.

A receiving member 3001 that temporarily receives the game ball hit to the right is formed on the upper right side of the shutter 6020. The receiving member 3001 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the flowing game ball and then dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6020.

The shutter 6020 is a plate-shaped member on which the game ball can roll on the upper surface in the left-right direction, and is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. When the shutter 6020 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the large winning opening 5401 becomes an open mode, and when the shutter 6020 retracts backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the large winning opening 5401 opens. It is a closed mode. When a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening 5401, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, 15 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 300.

When the shutter 6020 is advanced in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the shutter 6020 can receive the game ball that has been hit right and dropped from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side). The game ball received on the side is configured to roll with the upper surface of the movable shutter 6020 facing the downstream side (left side).

The large winning opening 5401 is arranged on the most downstream side of the shutter 6020, and is opened so that the upper surface of the shutter 6020 can receive a game ball rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. However, when the shutter 6020 retracts in the backward direction in a state where there is a game ball that has rolled the upper surface of the shutter 6020 but has not yet reached the big winning opening 5401, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 has rolled. The game ball falls without winning the large winning opening 5401.

Below the special electric accessory 6010, more specifically below the shutter 6020, a flow path forming member 590 that forms a flow path of the game ball that did not win the grand prize opening 5401 is arranged. The flow path forming member 590 includes a first flow path 5901 in which a game ball dropped from the receiving member 3001 flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction, and a shutter when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction. It is configured to form a second flow path 5902 through which the game ball that has been rolling on the upper surface of the 6020 flows down.

The flow path forming member 590 may be configured such that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow path 5902 when the shutter 6020 retracts in the rear direction. It is not always necessary that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flow down the second flow path 5902 when the shutter 6020 retracts in the rear direction. Therefore, among the game balls that have been rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020, some of the game balls on the upstream side (for example, the game balls that have just fallen from the receiving member 3001) are subjected to the first flow path 5901. It may be configured to flow down.

The game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 5901 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 57 without winning any prize.

A general winning opening 560 is arranged on the downstream side of the second flow path 5902, and all or most of the game balls flowing down the second flow path 5902 are configured to win a prize in the general winning opening 560. When a game ball wins a prize in the general prize opening 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, four prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 300.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol or the second special symbol like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. When the fluctuation display of the above is performed and the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

In the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the big winning opening 5401 is opened in a predetermined manner over a plurality of rounds. The one-round round game is a game in which the large winning opening 5401 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 30,000 msec), or the large winning opening 5401 is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls are won. That is, the large winning opening 5401 repeats opening and closing every round.

Therefore, each time the round game of one round is completed and the shutter 6020 retracts in the backward direction, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow path 5902 and wins the general winning opening 560. do. For example, if 15 rounds of round games are executed in the big hit game state, the number of times the shutter 6020 retracts in the backward direction is 15 times in one big hit game state. If the average number of game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 is, for example, 3 when the shutter 6020 retracts in the backward direction, about 45 game balls will win a general prize in one big hit game state. You will have a chance to win a prize in Mouth 560. Then, assuming that the number of prize balls when one game ball wins in the general prize opening 560 is four, there is a possibility that about 180 prize balls will be paid out.

In this way, by arranging the special game member 4000 in the game area 20 as described above (just by devising the arrangement position of various structural members), the game is paid out by the big hit game (winning to the big prize opening 5401). In addition to the number of prize balls, prize balls are paid out based on the prizes in the general prize opening 560, so that it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

It should be noted that the opening mode of the large winning opening 5401 (that is, the operating mode of the shutter 6020) in the round game is not necessarily limited to one that opens and closes once per round, if there is regularity, and a plurality of times per round. It may open and close. For example, a mode in which the opening of 10,000 msec is repeated three times is considered as a one-round game. As described above, in a one-round round game, if the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 5401 (operation mode of the shutter 6020) is executed a plurality of times, a larger amount of game balls may be paid out, and the game It will be possible to further enhance the interest.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 284 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 284, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the special gaming member 4100 is arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special gaming member 4100 is a plate-shaped movable member 5602, the second, which can change the large winning opening 5401, the special electric accessory 6010, the general winning opening 560, and the general winning opening 560 into an open mode and a closed mode. It is composed of a starting port 440, a passing gate 49, a small hit winning opening 5400, a small hit shutter 6100, a small hit winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the small hit shutter 6100, and the like. In the special gaming member 4100 shown in FIG. 284, various members constituting the special gaming member 4100 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

The special electric accessory 6010 is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. By driving the shutter 6020 by (not shown), it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 5401, and it is impossible (or easy) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 5401. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to the closed mode (difficult).

The right-handed game ball collides with the cushioning member 950, and the momentum of the game ball is weakened. Then, the game ball whose momentum is weakened by colliding with the cushioning member 950 falls to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6020.

The shutter 6020 is a plate-shaped member on which the game ball can roll on the upper surface in the left-right direction, and is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. The large winning opening 5401 is opened when the shutter 6020 is advanced forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the large winning opening 5401 is opened when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. It is a closed mode.

When the shutter 6020 is advanced in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the shutter 6020 can receive a game ball that has been hit to the right and whose momentum has been weakened by the cushioning member 950 on the upstream side (right side). The game ball received on the upstream side is configured to roll with the upper surface of the shutter 6020 facing the downstream side (left side).

The large winning opening 5401 is arranged on the most downstream side of the shutter 6020, and is opened so that the upper surface of the shutter 6020 can receive a game ball rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. However, when the shutter 6020 retracts in the backward direction in a state where there is a game ball that has rolled the upper surface of the shutter 6020 but has not yet reached the big winning opening 5401, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 has rolled. The game ball falls without winning the big winning opening 5401.

Below the special electric accessory 6010, more specifically below the shutter 6020, a flow path forming member 591 that forms a flow path of the game ball that did not win the grand prize opening 5401 is arranged. The flow path forming member 591 includes a first flow path 5903 in which a game ball hit to the right flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction, and an upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction. It is configured to form a second flow path 5904 in which the game ball that has been rolling down flows down. The first flow path 5903 and the second flow path 5904 are partitioned by a partition wall 594 so that the game balls cannot move back and forth between each other.

The flow path forming member 591 may be configured such that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow path 5904 when the shutter 6020 retracts in the rear direction. It is not always necessary that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flow down the second flow path 5904 when the shutter 6020 retracts in the rear direction. Therefore, among the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020, some of the game balls on the upstream side may be configured to flow down the first flow path 5903.

In the first flow path 5903, the general winning opening 560, the second starting opening 440, and the small hit winning opening 5400 are arranged in this order from the upstream side to the downstream side. The small hit winning opening 5400 is not an essential configuration for the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment.

The general winning opening 560 can be displaced into a closed mode in which the game ball cannot be won by being closed by the movable member 5602 and an open mode in which the game ball can be won by operating the movable member 5602. There is. When the general winning opening 560 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path 5903 without winning the general winning opening 560 are configured to be able to win a prize.

Above the second starting port 440, a game ball that has been hit to the right and has flowed down the first flow path 5903 without winning the big winning opening 540, and has not won a prize in the general winning opening 560. A receiving member 3002 that is once received is formed. The receiving member 3002 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the flowing game ball and then dropping the game ball above the second starting port 440.

A guide nail that guides the game ball to the second start port 440 is planted above the second start port 440, and the game ball that has fallen above the second start port 440 from the receiving member 3002 is guided by this guide. Guided by a nail, it is configured to win a prize in the second starting port 440 with a probability of about three-quarters. By setting the number of prize balls at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 to one, the degree of expectation is less than 1 even if a right-handed hit is made in a normal game state.

The small hit winning opening 5400 is configured to be displaceable in a closed mode and an open mode by a small hit shutter 6100 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172. That is, when the small hit shutter 6100 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is closed, and when the small hit shutter 6100 retracts backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 is closed. 5400 is the open mode. The game ball that has fallen above the second starting port 440 from the receiving member 3002 but has not won a prize in the second starting port 440 flows down to the upstream side (right side) of the small hit shutter 6100.

The right-handed game ball flowed down the first flow path 5903 without winning the large winning opening 5401, but did not win any of the general winning opening 560, the second starting opening 440, and the small hit winning opening 5400. The game ball is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 57.

A passing gate 49 that triggers a normal symbol determination is arranged in the second flow path 5904, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol determination. In this ordinary symbol determination, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%. If the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 in an open mode of, for example, about 5900 msec, and then in a closed mode. While the movable member 5602 is in the open mode, the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 560 is facilitated. When a game ball wins in the general prize opening 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, 15 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 300. No, the general prize opening 560 only triggers the payout of the prize ball even if the game ball wins, and does not, for example, trigger the start of the variable display of the special symbol (execution trigger of the special lottery).

Further, the pachinko gaming machines of the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment are the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, and the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment. Similar to the machine, when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

In the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the big winning opening 5401 is opened in a predetermined manner over a plurality of rounds. The one-round round game is a game in which the large winning opening 5401 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 30,000 msec), or the large winning opening 5401 is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls are won. That is, the large winning opening 5401 repeats opening and closing every round.

In the jackpot game state in which the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds, an interval period is provided between the round game and the round game, and during this interval period, the shutter 6020 moves backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. The large winning opening 5401 is closed.

When the round game of one round is completed and the shutter 6020 retracts in the backward direction, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow path 5904. The game ball that has flowed down the second flow path 5904 passes through the passage gate 49, and the main CPU 101 performs a variation display of the normal symbol for a very short time, and as a result of the normal symbol determination, 100% or 100 as described above. A hit is derived with a probability close to%. When a hit is derived as a result of the normal symbol determination, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 in an open mode for about 5900 msec so that the game ball can be won in the general winning opening 560, and a time of about 5900 msec elapses. Then, the closed mode is adopted.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 has a movable member 5602 so that the general winning opening 560 is opened during the interval period between the round games. Activate. That is, at least while the general winning opening 560 is in the open mode (about 5900 msec) due to the operation of the movable member 5602, the large winning opening 5401 is in the closed mode, so that the right-handed game ball is in the first flow path 5903. In addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the big hit game (winning to the big prize opening 5401), all or most of them win the general winning opening 560, and the prize balls are based on the winning to the general winning opening 560. Will be paid out, so it will be possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. The opening end condition of the movable member 5602 is set to 5900 ms, but in addition to that condition, even if a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of prizes are awarded to the general winning school 560 in one opening, the movable member 5602 may be closed immediately. good. In that case, since it is more likely that a predetermined number of prizes will be won before the lapse of 5900 ms if the firing is continued, the interval period may be set shorter than 5900 ms. Alternatively, it is possible to hold up to four ordinary symbols, set the interval period to 5900 ms, and after winning a predetermined number of prizes, open the movable member 5602 again by winning the ordinary symbols to further win a prize.

In this way, simply by devising the arrangement position of various structural members arranged in the game area 20, in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the big hit game (winning to the big prize opening 5401), the general winning opening 560 can be reached. It is possible to make the prize balls pay out based on the winning.

For example, suppose that an average of about 7 game balls win a prize in the general winning opening 560 in one interval period, and the number of prize balls when one game ball wins in the general winning opening 560 is 15 balls as described above. If so, there is a possibility that about 105 prize balls will be paid out in one interval period. Assuming that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state is, for example, 15 rounds, about 1575 prize balls are paid out in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the big hit game (winning to the big prize opening 5401). Will be.

It is preferable that the main CPU 101 does not hold the start memory of the normal symbol based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 49, but it may hold the start memory of the normal symbol.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 285 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment is a so-called type 1 and type 2 multifunction device, and is not only when a special symbol variation display is performed and a "big hit" is derived. Even when a game ball enters a specific area opened by satisfying a predetermined condition and the game ball is received in a specific mouth called a V attacker, the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state. ..

As shown in FIG. 285, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the special gaming member 4200 is arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. This special game member 4200 changes the passing gate 49, the large winning opening 5402, the special electric accessory 6015, the specific opening 777, the non-specific opening 778, the general winning opening 560, and the general winning opening 560 into an open mode and a closed mode. It is composed of a plate-shaped movable member 5602, a second starting port 440, and the like that can be used. In the special gaming member 4200 shown in FIG. 285, various members constituting the special gaming member 4200 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

A passing gate 49 that triggers a normal symbol determination is arranged in the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number and a normal symbol. Make a judgment. In this ordinary symbol determination, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%. Further, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol based on the extracted normal symbol random number. Then, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed with the determined variation pattern, and the result of the normal symbol determination is derived.

On the downstream side of the passage gate 49, a large winning opening 5402 and a special electric accessory 6015 are arranged. The special electric accessory 6015 is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, and the pachinko gaming machines of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment. By driving the shutter 6030 by the large winning opening solenoid (not shown), the opening mode that enables (or easily) the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 5402, and the opening mode of the gaming ball to the large winning opening 5402. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize.

More specifically, the specific opening 777 and the non-specific opening 778 are arranged on the downstream side of the shutter 6030 from the downstream side of the large winning opening 5402. When the change display of the special symbol is performed and the "small hit" is derived (when the result of the special lottery is "small hit"), the main CPU 101 operates the opening / closing member 5603 to operate the specific opening 777 or non-specific mouth 777. It enables the game ball to enter the specific mouth 778.

However, when the opening / closing member 5603 is operated so that the game ball can be accepted into the specific port 777 or the non-specific port 778, the game ball is rarely accepted by the non-specific port 778, and is 100% or extremely 100. A game ball enters the specific mouth 777 with a probability close to%. The specific mouth 777 is a mouth that triggers the occurrence of a big hit gaming state when the game ball enters, and the non-specific mouth 778 is a mouth that does not trigger the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state even if the game ball enters. Further, the specific mouth 777 and the non-specific mouth 778 are not limited to the mouths that can accept the game ball, and may be a region through which the game ball can pass.

When the game ball enters the specific mouth 777, the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state. On the other hand, even if the game ball is accepted in the non-specific mouth 778, it does not serve as an opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state.

A general winning opening 560 is arranged on the downstream side of the specific opening 777, the non-specific opening 778, and the opening / closing member 5603. The general winning opening 560 is closed by a movable member 5602. Then, if the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 as an open mode, and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 560 is facilitated. The main CPU 101 closes the movable member 5602 after a certain period of time has elapsed. When a game ball wins a prize in the general prize opening 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, one prize ball via the payout / launch control circuit 300. Even if the game ball wins, the general prize opening 560 only serves as an opportunity to pay out only one prize ball. do not have.

A second starting port 440 is arranged on the downstream side of the general winning opening 560. However, when the movable member 5602 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that have been hit right and reached the movable member 5602 win the general winning opening 560, so that the game ball to the second starting opening 440 Winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the movable member 5602 is in the closed mode, the game ball that is hit right and reaches the movable member 5602 is guided to the upper part of the second starting opening 440 without winning the general winning opening 560. However, even if the game ball hit to the right reaches the vicinity of the movable member 5602, not all of the game balls that have reached the movable member 5602 fall on the movable member 5602, but come out from the right side of the movable member 5602. There is also a game ball that is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57 without winning any winning opening.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol determination with a probability of 100% or a probability very close to 100%, and the variation display time of the normal symbol. Because of the short length, the movable member 5602 is almost fully open. Therefore, all or most of the game balls that have been hit right and reached the movable member 5602 win the general winning opening 560 and rarely reach the second starting opening 440.

(Flow of the game)
Next, the flow of the game will be described. When the player makes a right-handed hit when the jackpot game state is not controlled, the game ball first passes through the passing gate 49. The main CPU 101 performs a variation display of the normal symbol based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 49, and derives the result of the normal symbol determination.

When the result of the normal symbol determination is derived, the movable member 5602 becomes an open mode with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%. Normally, even if the movable member 5602 is in the closed mode when the game ball falls to the upstream side of the movable member 5602, the game ball passes through the movable member 5602 because the variation display time of the normal symbol is short. Until (until the game ball that has fallen to the upstream side of the movable member 5602 rolls toward the downstream side and passes through the movable member 5602), the movable member 5602 becomes an open mode and the second starting port 440. Since the winning of the game ball is hindered, it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will win the second starting port 440. That is, it can be said that the movable member 5602 is almost fully open.

By the way, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the normal symbol based on this, but the variable display of the normal symbol includes the opening interval time and the time when the normal symbol is variably displayed. It consists of an ending interval time. The main CPU 101 operates the movable member 5602 based on the fact that the variation display of the normal symbol is performed and the hit is derived (the variation display of the normal symbol is completed after the ending interval time has elapsed), and the open mode is set. After a predetermined time has passed, the closed mode is set. Therefore, for example, by setting the opening interval time and the ending interval time to be longer, the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602 (the game in which the game ball falls to the upstream side of the movable member 5602) is set to the variable display time of the normal symbol. If the time is longer than the time it takes for the ball to roll toward the downstream side and pass through the movable member 5602), the game ball that has passed through the movable member 5602 may win a prize in the second starting port 440. Occurs.

When the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs a second special lottery, and the result of the second special lottery is derived after displaying the variation of the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the probability that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big hit" is derived is, for example, 1/319, and the "small hit" is derived. The probability is, for example, 318/319, and there is no "loss". However, it may be possible to make a "loss" with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/319).

When the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 5602. When the movable member 5602 is in the open mode, as described above, the game ball enters the specific opening 777 with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%, and the game ball hardly enters the non-specific opening 778.

When the game ball enters the specific mouth 777, the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state and executes the round game over a plurality of rounds.

As described above, not all of the game balls that have been hit right and reached the vicinity of the movable member 5602 head toward the movable member 5602, and there are also game balls that head toward the out port 57. Further, since the movable member 5602 is in a substantially fully open state, the game ball wins the general winning opening 560 with almost no winning in the second starting opening 440. However, even if a game ball wins in the general prize opening 560, the number of prize balls is one. Therefore, even if the player always hits right, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1 in the normal time when the game is not in the big hit game state.

By the way, as described above, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set longer by setting the opening interval time or the ending interval time, for example, there is a possibility that the game ball that has passed through the movable member 5602 wins the second starting port 440. ..

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the first pattern in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively short and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are relatively long. Two patterns are available. The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is stored in, for example, the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 9). The first pattern described above is a time shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602, and the second pattern described above is a time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602. Is also a long time. Then, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number based on passing through, for example, the passing gate 49, uses the extracted normal symbol random number to determine a variation pattern of the normal symbol, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed with the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, if the determined normal symbol variation pattern is the first pattern, there is almost no possibility that the game ball wins the second starting port 440, and if the determined normal symbol variation pattern is the second pattern, there is almost no possibility. There is a possibility that the game ball will win the second starting port 440.

The main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol as the first pattern with a probability of, for example, 299/300, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol as the second pattern with a probability of 1/300. When the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the second pattern and the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed, and as described above, there is a 1/319 probability of "big hit". Is derived, and even if the "big hit" is not derived, the "small hit" is derived with a probability of 318/319. When the "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 executes a control for operating the opening / closing member 5603 so that the game ball can enter the specific opening 777 or the non-specific opening 778. When the opening / closing member 5603 is activated, the game ball enters the specific opening 777 with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100%, so that the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a novel game property that has never been seen before.

As the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol, a large number of fluctuation patterns may be prepared. However, it is preferable that most of the fluctuation patterns are shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602. If a large number of fluctuation patterns are prepared for a time longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening / closing member 5602, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 becomes high, and the jackpot game state is high. This is because it may be executed in.

Further, if the probability that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the second pattern is too low, there is a possibility that the interest will be reduced because there are almost no game balls passing through the opening / closing member 5603. Therefore, in the variation display of the second special symbol performed based on the winning rate of the game ball passing through the opening / closing member 5602 to the second starting port 440 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, "small hit". At least one of the probabilities that the game ball enters the specific opening 777 when the opening / closing member 5603 operates based on the probability that "small hit" is derived in the variation display of the second special symbol. By appropriately changing one or more, it is possible to increase the probability that the second pattern will be determined. Then, not only the fun of whether or not the game ball passes through the opening / closing member 5603, but also whether or not the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing member 5603 wins the second starting port 440, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 440. It is possible to entertain the player in multiple stages, such as whether or not a "small hit" is derived when a prize is won, and whether or not a game ball enters a specific mouth 777 when a "small hit" is derived. Become.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 286 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 286, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment includes a first starting port on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in addition to the conventional first starting port 5442. ing. In order to distinguish between the two, for convenience, the first starting port arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as the first starting port 5443, but when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442 and the first starting. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when the game ball wins in the mouth 5443. However, the number of prize balls is four when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, whereas the number of prize balls is one when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5443.

A special gaming member 4300 is arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special game member 4300 is composed of a large winning opening 540, a special electric accessory 600, a passing gate 49, the above-mentioned first starting port 5443, a second starting opening 440, an ordinary electric accessory 6300, and the like.

The large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20.

The special electric accessory 600 has an opening mode that enables (or easily) a prize for a game ball to the large prize opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by a large winning opening solenoid (not shown), and a large winning opening. It is configured to be able to be displaced (driven) in a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the mouth 540. When the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 540 is an easy opening mode, all or most of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the big winning opening 540. The large winning opening 540 has a probabilistic attacker (not shown) inside, and for example, when the entry of a game ball into the probabilistic attacker is detected while being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the main The CPU 101 controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and the jackpot is not detected when the game ball enters the probabilistic attacker. When the gaming state ends, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the "normal gaming state" or the "low probability time-shortening gaming state".

On the downstream side of the large winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600, a passage gate 49 that triggers a normal symbol determination is arranged. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number and performs a normal symbol determination.

In addition, in the normal symbol judgment, in the "normal game state" or "high probability non-time saving game state" which is not the electric support state, it is not more advantageous to hit right than to hit left. Although it is determined to be a hit only with a relatively low probability, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100% in the "high probability short game state" or "low probability short game state" which is an electric support state.

The first starting port 5443 and the ordinary electric accessory 6300 are arranged on the downstream side of the passage gate 49 and on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The ordinary electric accessory 6300 includes a plate-shaped shutter 6310, a solenoid (not shown), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the solenoid to the shutter 6310.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, when the opening mode is such that the winning of the first starting port 5443 is facilitated, the large winning opening 540 of the right-handed gaming balls is won. All or most of the game balls that have become are configured to win a prize in the first starting port 5443.

A receiving member 3000 is formed on the upper right side of the ordinary electric accessory 6300 to temporarily receive a game ball that has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540 among the game balls hit to the right. The receiving member 3000 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the flowing game ball and then dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6310.

The shutter 6310 is a plate-shaped member on which the game ball can roll on the upper surface in the left-right direction, and is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 as described above. The first starting port 5443 is closed when the shutter 6310 is located in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the first starting port is closed when the shutter 6310 is located in the rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172. 5443 is the open mode. When the variation display of the normal symbol is performed and the hit is derived, the main CPU 101 operates the shutter 6310 to change the first starting port 5443 from the closed mode to the open mode.

The shutter 6310 is capable of receiving the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side) when the shutter 6310 is advanced in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, and is received on the upstream side. The game ball is configured to roll with the upper surface of the shutter 6310 facing the downstream side (left side).

A second starting port 440 is arranged on the downstream side of the first starting port 5443 and the shutter 6310. However, when the first starting port 5443 is opened by the shutter 6310, all or most of the game balls that have been hit right and reached the shutter 6310 win the first starting port 5443, so that the second starting port 440 It is difficult to win a prize for a game ball. On the other hand, when the first starting port 5443 is closed by the shutter 6310, the game ball hit right and reaches the shutter 6310 does not win the first starting port 5443 and is above the second starting port 440. Will be guided to. However, even if the game ball hit to the right reaches the vicinity of the shutter 6310 (the game ball falls from the receiving member 3000), not all of the game balls are guided to the shutter 6310, and the game ball comes out from the right side of the shutter 6310. Therefore, there is also a game ball that is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57 without winning any winning opening. Further, even if the ball is guided to the upper part of the second starting port 440, there is a game ball that is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57 without winning any winning opening including the second starting opening 440.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 makes 100% of the normal symbol determination in the "high probability time saving game state" or the "low probability time saving game state" which is the electric support state. The shutter 6310 is almost fully open because the probability of hitting is determined to be extremely close to 100% and the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is short. Therefore, in the "high accuracy short game state" or the "low accuracy short game state", all or most of the game balls that have been hit right and reached the shutter 6310 win the first start port 5443 and reach the second start port 440. It rarely reaches. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5443, the main CPU 101 pays out the prize ball via the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the number of prize balls at this time is one. In addition, since there is also a game ball that exits from the right side of the shutter 6310 and heads toward the out port 57, in the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state" and "low-accuracy time-shortening game state", a prize is given for the number of shot balls per unit time by hitting right. The expected value of the number of balls does not exceed 1. In the "normal game state" or "high-probability non-time-saving game state" that is not the electric support state, the main CPU 101 has a normal symbol so that it is not more advantageous when hitting right than when hitting left. The judgment is made so that it is judged as a hit only with a relatively low probability.

On the other hand, when shifting from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or from the "low-probability short-time gaming state" to the "normal gaming state", the electric support state is lost. The hit is determined only with a relatively low probability, and the shutter 6310, which was in a state close to full open, closes. Then, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5443 is hindered, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 becomes possible.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 refers to, for example, the variation time determination table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. Then, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined. Further, the main CPU 101 uses, for example, the variation time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. Refer to it to determine the variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, a general player plays a game by left-handed in the "normal game state", and is one of the "high-accuracy time-shortening game state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". In the game state, the game is played by hitting right. In the "normal game state", even if the player hits right, the shutter 6310 is closed, so that the game ball rarely wins in the first starting port 5443, and the game ball wins in the second starting port 440. However, unless the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time of about 10 minutes (long fluctuations A to C), and the player is only damaged.

By the way, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 is based on the big hit type (hit time selection symbol command) determined with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288. The number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the big hit game state, the game state after the big hit game is completed, and the like are determined.

FIG. 287 is an example of a symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 288 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment. In this jackpot type determination table, as in FIGS. 13 and 257, the number of rounds executed by the main CPU 101 in the jackpot game according to the hit time selection symbol command related to the jackpot, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game, and the jackpot game state after the jackpot game is completed. To determine the type of jackpot, such as whether to turn on the probability change flag and whether to turn on the time saving flag in the gaming state after shifting to the general gaming state (game state that is not the jackpot gaming state, the same shall apply hereinafter). It is a table to be referred to. Further, similarly to FIG. 257, the number of time reductions is also configured to be determined to be any of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times.

FIG. 287 and FIG. 288 differ from FIGS. 12, 13, 256, and 257 in a method for determining whether or not to turn on the probability change flag. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, even if the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the probability change flag is turned on based on the result of the special lottery (hit time selection symbol command). As described above, it is determined not by determining whether or not to do so, but by whether or not the entry of the gaming ball into the probabilistic attacker is detected in the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 288, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is "big hit", the ease of entering the game ball into the probabilistic attacker according to the hit selection symbol command is easy. It's different. For example, if the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 101 controls the game ball to the big hit game state in a manner in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker, and the hit selection symbol command is "z10". For example, the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state in such a manner that the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, in the "mode in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the probabilistic attacker", the gaming ball enters the probabilistic attacker while being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. This is an aspect in which there is almost no possibility. In addition, in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability change attacker", the game ball almost enters the probability change attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (the probability of entering the high probability game state is almost 100%). It is an aspect (controlled).

The ease of entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker can be changed, for example, by the operation mode of the movable piece provided in the grand prize opening 540. That is, if the hit selection symbol command is, for example, "z3", the main CPU 101 operates the operation mode of the movable piece in the big hit game state so that the game ball does not easily enter the probabilistic attacker. On the other hand, if the hit selection symbol command is, for example, "z10", the main CPU 101 operates the operation mode of the movable piece in the big hit game state so that the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker.

The method for creating a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter is not limited to this. For example, apart from the large winning opening 540 having a probabilistic attacker inside, it is conceivable to provide another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a probabilistic attacker. Then, when the game ball is easily entered into the probabilistic attacker (for example, the hit selection symbol command is "z10"), the game is controlled to the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, and the game is played to the probabilistic attacker. When it is difficult for the ball to enter (for example, the hit selection symbol command is "z3"), the big hit game state in which the other big prize openings are opened without opening the big prize opening 540 is controlled. It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect as long as it is possible to create an aspect in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probabilistic attacker and an aspect in which the game ball is easy to enter.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, as can be seen with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288, when the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", a gaming ball to a probabilistic attacker. There is a 50% probability that the game will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state in an manner in which the player can easily enter (the hit selection symbol commands are "z6" to "z11", "z13"). On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", the big hit game is in a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker (the hit selection symbol commands are "z20" to "z25", "z27"). The probability of being controlled by the state is 80%.

Therefore, when the big hit game state ends and the game shifts to the "high probability time / short game state" or the "low probability time / short game state", it is difficult or impossible to win the game ball to the second starting port 440 in these game states. Therefore, when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in these game states and a "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 has a 50% probability of changing the game state after the big hit game state ends. It will be controlled to the gaming state in which the flag is turned on (“high-probability short-time gaming state”, “high-probability non-short-time gaming state”).

Then, when the time-saving game of the time-saving number of times determined without deriving the "big hit" as a result of the special lottery in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is digested, the main CPU 101 changes from the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" to " Execute the control to shift to the "high accuracy non-time saving game state". In this "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the "big hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 has an 80% probability of changing the game state after the big hit game state is completed. , The game state in which the probability change flag is turned on (“high probability short game state”, “high probability non-time short game state”) is controlled.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the probability change flag is turned on when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" without changing the firing mode of the gaming ball. It is possible to provide a new game property, such as being able to change the probability of being controlled (hereinafter referred to as "probability change probability") ("high probability short game state", "high probability non-time short game state"). Will be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the probability change probability changes when the jackpot gaming state shifts to the “high accuracy time-shortening gaming state” (from the “high accuracy time-shortening gaming state” to the “high accuracy time-shortening gaming state”). Since the number of time reductions until the transition to the "probable non-time reduction game state" is different each time, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, by not disclosing the determined number of time reductions by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the probability change probability changes, further enhancing the game interest. be able to.

Furthermore, when the jackpot game state ends and the game shifts to the "high probability time / short game state" or the "low probability time / short game state", whether the game is in the "high probability time / short game state" or the "low probability time / short game state". Is not disclosed by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201, so that it is possible to provide a more interesting game property. That is, when it is in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" (increasing the probability of probability change) at an early stage. On the other hand, when it is in the "low probability time and short game state", it is more advantageous for the player to be controlled to the "low probability time and short game state" for as long as possible. Therefore, depending on whether the current gaming state is the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", it depends on whether the end timing of the time-saving game should be early or late. It will be possible to increase.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the number of time reductions may be 0 (the hit selection symbol command is "z12"). , "Z13", [z26], "z27"). In this case, even if the number of time reductions is the same 0, it is stimulating that the game is controlled to the "high accuracy non-time reduction game state" or to the "normal game state" immediately after the jackpot game state ends. It is possible to provide a game-like character. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, in either the first special lottery or the second special lottery, immediately after the big hit game state is completed, the "high probability non-time saving game state" is obtained. Probability of being controlled to (the probability that the hit selection symbol command is selected to "z13" or "z27") and the probability of being immediately controlled to "normal gaming state" (the hit selection symbol command is "z12" or (Probability of being selected as "z26") is the same, but not limited to this, the probability of being immediately controlled to "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is changed between the first special lottery and the second special lottery. You may do it.

It should be noted that, as can be said in common with all the above-described embodiments, examples and modifications, the game ball can be awarded with a high frequency when the game ball is launched in a specific mode (for example, right-handed). The winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 440 in FIG. 284) is the main winning opening when the game ball wins, regardless of whether it is a winning opening in which the electric support functions or a winning opening in which the electric support does not function. It is preferable that the number of prize balls paid out by the CPU 101 (payout / launch control circuit 300) is 1. As a result, for example, even if the player fires the game ball in a specific mode in the "normal game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time may exceed 1. It can be made impossible.

[Other extended examples, etc.]
Each of the above-described embodiments, examples and modifications is an example, and each configuration shown in each embodiment, each embodiment and each modification can be referred to as another embodiment, another embodiment and another modification. It goes without saying that it is possible to partially replace or combine in. That is, the components described in each embodiment, each embodiment, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 1 has information on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of certain conditions, and the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by, the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are used until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the operation and the start memory stored by the hold means. A specific start memory (reach or jackpot) among one or more start memories stored by the symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 or the like) that can determine the execution number of the provisional variation) and the hold means. When the above is included, the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed is provided. The effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. A specific effect determining means (for example, a character subtraction effect) for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. It is characterized by having step S372 etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. Since the effect mode for the start memory (that is, the start memory for which the variable display has not yet been performed) can be determined before the variable display is started, even if the data capacity is large, it is smooth. It becomes possible to perform processing. Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are apparently displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if variable display is performed for memory, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, the effect of the effect is further enhanced. Smooth processing can be performed.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the display of the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is further added. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed. And.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is determined. Has a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) that determines an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not the specific start memory. The suggestion effect determining means is configured so as not to determine the effect mode suggesting that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode when the start memory is not stored by the hold means. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Moreover, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, the effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode is not determined, so that the control load does not increase.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 1, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 2 has information on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by, the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are used until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect (for example, provisional) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that controls the operation and the start memory stored by the hold means. Determining an effect mode capable of determining an effect mode for a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of (variation) and one or a plurality of start storages stored by the holding means. The effect mode determining means includes means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means produces the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. A specific effect determining means (for example, a character subtraction effect) that is divided into predetermined units and is performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. , Step S370, etc.), and when the specific start memory is not included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means, the effect is applied to all the start memories stored by the hold means. In addition to determining the aspect, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is described in the specific aspect even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It has a suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed, and the suggestion effect determination means is described above. When the start memory is not stored by the holding means, it is characterized in that it is configured so as not to determine the effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, so that the data capacity is large. Even so, smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are apparently displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if variable display is performed for memory, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, the effect of the effect is further enhanced. Smooth processing can be performed.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is set as the start mode. By deciding on an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. ing.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. Further provided with a variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) means that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port. Based on this, the start storage can be held, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU201) is stored in the holding means when the game ball wins a prize in the starting opening. It is characterized in that the number of executions of the symbol effect with respect to the above is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory. Further, since the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, the symbol effect for each start memory is performed without increasing the load on the government. The number of executions can be easily determined.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 2, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while enhancing a directing effect.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 3 is a display means in which a start port (for example, a second start port 440) provided in the game area and a variable display of an identification symbol are performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the start port. (For example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) are stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start-up storage. The first effect mode is determined for the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can be stored up to, and the start storage stored by the holding means when the identification symbol is variablely displayed. , The first effect mode determining means for setting the effect data related to the determined first effect mode, and the start memory stored by the hold means when the game ball is received at the start port. (2) The second effect mode determining means is provided with a second effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode and setting the effect data related to the determined second effect mode, and the second effect mode determining means is based on the first effect mode determining means. It is characterized in that the second effect mode is determined by using the effect data related to the determined first effect mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second effect mode in which the effect mode is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means when the game ball is received at the start port is stored by the hold means. Although there is not enough time to display it immediately when it is displayed, it depends on the first effect mode determined for the start memory stored by the holding means when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed. Since it is determined using the effect data, smooth processing can be performed even if the data capacity is large.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Further comprising a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number, the first effect mode determining means is the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory is determined. It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means, the display is variable for one start memory. On the outside, it seems as if variable display is performed for a plurality of start-up memories, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, it is possible to further enhance the effect. Will be.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 3, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while enhancing the effect of production.

[Appendix 4]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 4 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A predetermined number of display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) on which the display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) as a start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to (for example, four) and the one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory is stored. A display control means (for example, step S205) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed, and the winning determination. A special game state executing means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result being a specific result, and the special game are executed. An advantageous state control means capable of controlling a later gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state for a different period each time, and the display means. The effect control means includes an effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the display effect displayed on the screen, and the effect control means executes an index effect (character subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state. And the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous gaming state to execute the index effect is at least information related to the gaming state in the advantageous gaming state (for example, information on whether or not the game is in a high probability gaming state). And the effect predetermining means (for example, scenario presetting process (for example, FIG. 138)) that is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state according to the period controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of time reductions). The specific effect determining means (for example, step S370 or the like) for determining the effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state. The means is determined by the effect predetermining means when the index start memory in which the index effect is executed is included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. Either of the above-mentioned one or more start memories instead of the execution timing It is characterized by having an effect redetermining means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining the execution in the variable display related to the start memory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state is executed in the variable display in the advantageous gaming state, but the execution timing of the index effect is set to the advantageous gaming state. Determined before being controlled. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the index production is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is a time when the start memory related to the index effect is not yet held, so it is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state depending on the situation when the variable display is performed. It is not always possible to produce an index at the executed timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set among the one or more start memories. I am trying to re-determine to execute in the variable display related to one of the start memories. As a result, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be smoothly processed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the M-th variable display indicates the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect predetermining means in the game state after the special game is executed. When the predetermined number that can be stored as the start memory by the holding means is N, the effect redetermining means replaces the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect predetermining means. In the game state after the special game is executed, the variable display at any timing in the range of [M- (predetermined number N-1)] to [M + (predetermined number N-1)] is described. It decides to perform index production.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect redetermining means is determined without significantly deviating from the execution timing of the index effect determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, among the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific embodiment is included. The specific start determination means (for example, step S330, etc.) for determining whether or not the above is specified is further provided, and the effect redetermination means is the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the hold means. When it is determined that the specific start memory is included, it is characterized in that it is determined to perform the variable display in any one of the start memories until the variable display related to the specific start memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the control is controlled. The index can be produced by smooth processing without excessively increasing the burden on the machine. That is, if the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, it becomes necessary to redetermine the effect mode, which may increase the burden on control. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. Since the mode of effect is determined, the burden on control can be reduced as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 4, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in interest. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of smooth processing.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 5 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A predetermined number of display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) on which the display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) as a start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means that can be stored up to (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the one starting memory stored by the holding means, the next starting memory of the one starting memory. A display control means (for example, step S205) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display is performed, and the result of the winning determination is a specific result. A special game state executing means capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the existence, and a game state after the special game is executed are set as a game more than a normal game state. An advantageous state control means that can be controlled over a different period each time in an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the person, and an index effect (character subtraction effect) that has a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state. ) And the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous gaming state is to execute the index effect, at least, information related to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example, whether or not it is a high-probability gaming state). The effect predetermining means (for example, scenario preset processing (for example,)) that is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state according to the information) and the period controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of time reductions). 138)) and the number of symbol effect executions that can determine the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) and effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state. ), And the effect mode determining means determines whether or not the index start memory in which the index effect is executed is included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. For the index effect execution determination means (for example, step S338, etc.) and the holding means. When it is determined by the index effect execution determination means that the index start memory is included in one or more start memories to be stored, the execution timing is replaced with the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means. Then, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the index effect is determined in which symbol effect is divided into the predetermined units. It is characterized by having a redetermining means (for example, step S358 or the like).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state is executed in the gaming state after the special gaming state is executed, but the execution timing of the index effect is , Determined before being controlled to an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the index production is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is a time when the start memory related to the index effect is not yet held, so it is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state depending on the situation when the variable display is performed. It is not always possible to produce an index at the executed timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set among the one or more start memories. I am trying to re-determine to execute in the variable display related to one of the start memories. As a result, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be smoothly processed.

Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means, although it is a variable display for one start memory, a plurality of start memories are apparently present. It looks as if a variable display is being performed for, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units and the index effect is executed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, in the index effect execution determination means, the index start memory in which the index effect is executed is stored in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. Although it is determined whether or not it is included, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined which of the plurality of start memories the index effect is executed. It is characterized by being configured not to.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the index start memory is included, but any of the plurality of start memories is determined. Since it is not determined whether the index effect is executed by the start memory, the effect on the control can be enhanced without increasing the control load. It was determined by the effect predetermining means that, even if the index start memory is included in the plurality of start memories, it is not determined which of the multiple start memories the index effect is executed. This is because the execution timing is redetermined.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the effect mode determining means is a specific start in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When a memory (reach or jackpot) is included, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), it is interesting. Can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory. The effect mode for the start memory until the variable display is performed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variablely displayed after the specific start memory. Can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 5, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 6 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A predetermined number of display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) on which the display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) as a start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means that can be stored up to (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the one starting memory stored by the holding means, the next starting memory of the one starting memory. A display control means (for example, step S205) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display is performed, and the result of the winning determination is a specific result. A special game state executing means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the existence, and a game state after the special game is executed. It has an advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state for a different period each time, and a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state. The number of times the index effect (character subtraction effect) is executed and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous gaming state the index effect is executed are determined by at least information related to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example, high). An effect predetermining means (for example,) that is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state according to the information on whether or not it is a stochastic gaming state) and the period controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of time reductions). , Scenario preset processing (FIG. 138)) and the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Determining an effect mode capable of determining an effect mode for a determinable symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) and one or a plurality of start-up memories stored by the hold means in the advantageous gaming state. A first index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) having a relatively high expectation and the first index effect are provided with means (for example, step S372, etc.). Second index production with relatively low expectations (for example, subtraction performance of ally characters) The effect predetermining means determines the execution timing for each of the first index effect and the second index effect, and the effect mode determining means is the holding means. Whether the one or more start memories stored by the first index start memory and / or the second index start memory in which the second index effect is executed are included in the start memory stored by the first index effect. The first index start memory and / or the second index start memory in one or more start memories stored by the index effect execution determination means (for example, step S338 or the like) for determining whether or not the hold means. When it is determined by the index effect execution determination means that the above is included, the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means is replaced with the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means. An effect redetermining means (for example, a step) that divides the symbol effect into a predetermined unit and determines in which of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined unit the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed. S358 etc.) and.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as the index production having a predetermined expectation for the gaming state, the first index production having a relatively high expectation and the expectation relatively lower than the first index production. A second index effect having a degree is prepared. Although both the first index effect and the second index effect are executed in the variable display in the advantageous gaming state, the execution timing of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is the advantageous gaming state. Determined before being controlled by. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is a time when the start memory related to the first index effect and / and the second index effect is not yet reserved, so it is advantageous depending on the situation when the variable display is performed. It is not always possible to perform the first index effect and / or the second index effect at the execution timing determined before being controlled by the gaming state. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is set. , One or more start-up memories are re-determined to run in the variable display for any start-up memory. As a result, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be smoothly processed. For the redetermination of the execution timing of the first index effect and / and the second index effect, it is preferable that the execution order of the first index effect and / and the second index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is maintained. ..

Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means, although it is a variable display for one start memory, a plurality of start memories are apparently present. It looks as if a variable display is being performed for, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the number of executed symbol effects determined is divided into predetermined units and the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, further effects are further produced. It is possible to enhance the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the index effect execution determination means is the first index start memory and / and the first index start memory in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. Although it is determined whether or not the two index start memories are included, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, which of the plurality of start memories is used as the first index effect or / And the first index start memory and the second index start are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, while not determining whether the second index effect is executed. When both of the memories are included, it is characterized in that the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the first index start memory and / and the second index start memory are included. However, since it is not determined which of the plurality of start-up memories the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed, the control load is not increased and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. It is the first index memory and / and the second index in the plurality of start memories that does not determine which of the multiple start memories the first index effect and / and the second index effect is executed. This is because the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means is redetermined even if the memory is included. However, when both the first index start memory and the second index start memory are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect. I try to judge about. This is because when the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are redetermined, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is maintained. Is.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the effect mode determining means is a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) among one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When is included, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), it is interesting. Can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory. The effect mode for the start memory until the variable display is performed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variablely displayed after the specific start memory. Can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 6, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 7]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 7 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A predetermined number of display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) on which the display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) as a start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to (for example, four) and the one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory is stored. A display control means (for example, step S205) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed, and the winning determination. A special game state executing means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result being a specific result, and the special game are executed. An advantageous state control means (for example, step S171, etc.) capable of controlling the later gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the above-mentioned A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, a step) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. (S324, etc.) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state. The effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units, and is divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. Specific effect determining means (for example, sub CPU201) for determining the effect mode to be performed during the execution of, and timing determining means (for example, scenario) for determining the execution timing of the index effect (subtracted effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state. The preset processing (FIG. 138), step S370, etc.), and one or more start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory in which a specific effect (for example, reach variation) is executed, and said. The execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect When there is no overlap, the specific effect is executed out of the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined for each of the one or a plurality of start storages stored by the hold means. It is possible to perform a suggestion effect (reach precursor) suggesting that the specific effect is performed prior to the specific effect by subtracting the number of executions of the symbol effect on which the index effect is performed from the number of executions of the symbol effect up to. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution determination means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining the number of symbol effects.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, so that the data capacity is large. Even so, smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are apparently displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if variable display is performed for memory, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, the effect of the effect is further enhanced. Smooth processing can be performed.

Further, although the specific start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect related to the specific start memory do not overlap. In this case, the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) is determined by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the symbol effects until the specific effect is executed. Therefore, for any of the specific effect, the index effect, and the suggestion effect, the execution timing can be determined before the variable display is started, so that smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the index effect and the suggestion effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the suggestion effect execution determining means includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the hold means, and the specific effect of the specific effect. When the execution timing and the execution timing of the index effect overlap, the execution of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined for each of the one or more start storages stored by the holding means. The number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of executions of the symbol effect on which the index effect is performed is subtracted from the total number of numbers to determine the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) performed prior to the specific effect. It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect overlap, the index effect is executed when the specific effect is executed. Since the specific effect and the index effect are overlapped from the flow of the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 7, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 8 is information on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as a start storage (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) and the display means. As a special game execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed, and as an effect executed in the game state after the special game is executed. , A first index effect having a relatively high expectation (for example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) and a second index effect having a relatively lower expectation than the first index effect (for example, a subtraction of an ally character). The effect) is prepared at least, and the index effect timing determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 138), step S370, etc.) for determining the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is provided. , It is determined whether or not the specific effect (for example, reach effect) in which the variable display is performed in a specific embodiment and the first index effect and / or the second index effect are performed in the same variable display. The overlap determination means (for example, step S346 or the like) and the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means are provided. When it is determined that the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display, the effect mode determining means determines that the first index effect is performed in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed. In the variable display in which the specific effect is performed when it is determined that the first effect mode determining means (for example, step S350 or the like) and the specific effect and the second index effect are performed in the same variable display. It is characterized by having a second effect mode determining means for determining not to perform the second index effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as the index production having a predetermined expectation for the gaming state, the first index production having a relatively high expectation and the expectation relatively lower than the first index production. A second index effect having a degree is prepared. Further, it is determined whether or not the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed when the specific effect (for example, reach effect) is performed. Here, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is performed is the first index effect, the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display. On the other hand, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is performed is the second index effect, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. That is, if the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, both effects can give the player a relatively high expectation. Therefore, the specific effect and the first effect are performed in the same variable display. The index production is performed. On the other hand, even if the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. In this way, the effect of production is suitably enhanced.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one. The "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed on the start memory stored by the holding means. The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number and the symbol effect of the execution number determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means are divided into predetermined units, and the unit of the start storage is Regardless of the above, the specific effect determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) for determining the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is further provided, and the effect mode determining means is the specific. Prior to the effect, it is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) suggesting that the specific effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the suggestion effect (reach precursor) suggesting that the specific effect is performed is executed prior to the specific effect, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 8, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect can be enhanced by increasing the types of effect, for example, since the data capacity of video and the like is large, if the effect is not performed effectively, not only the interest will be reduced, but also the control load will increase. Not preferred.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 9 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. The display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) in which the variable display is performed and the information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) are used as start-up memory. The specific holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, four) and the starting memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific starting storage. It is determined whether or not to execute the first effect (for example, the sumi effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination for the start memory, and the first effect is also applied to the specific start memory. Of the first effect execution determining means (for example, step S205 and the like) for determining whether or not to execute the operation, and the start memory which is different from the first effect and is stored by the holding means. The second effect (for example, the movable accessory effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination for the specific start memory stored at the end is added to all the start memories stored by the holding means. It is determined that the second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205 or the like) for determining whether or not to execute the first effect and the first effect are not executed for the specific start memory, and the second effect is not executed. The present invention is characterized by comprising a second effect non-execution determining means for changing not to execute the second effect on the specific start memory when it is determined to execute the specific start memory. And.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if it is decided to execute the second effect for a specific start memory, it is determined not to execute the first effect for the specific start memory. When it is, it is changed so that the second effect is not executed for a specific start memory, so that it is not necessary to perform a meaningless effect, and not only the deterioration of the interest is suppressed, but also the effect is effectively performed. It becomes possible. That is, even if it is decided to execute the second effect for a specific start memory, if it is decided not to execute the first effect for the specific start memory, it is determined for the specific start memory. Expectations are not so high. Therefore, even if it is decided to execute the second effect for a specific start memory, the execution of the meaningless effect is omitted by changing so that the second effect is not executed. It is intended to be effective.

In addition, "execution of the first effect (second effect) for the start memory" means the first effect (second effect) that changes the hold effect image itself indicating that the start memory is stored. Execution, execution of the first effect (second effect) on the hold effect image indicating that the start memory is stored, and the first effect (the first effect) when the variable display of the start memory is performed. The purpose is to include both of the second production).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the start memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific start memory is different from the start memory of the specific start memory. The first effect execution is further provided with a third effect confirmation means (for example, step S205 or the like) for confirming whether or not it is determined to execute the third effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the determination. When it is determined that the third effect is to be executed for the prior start memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific start memory, the determination means has the specific start memory and the prior start. It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to execute the first effect with respect to the start memory between the memory and the memory.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for the start memory for which it is determined to execute the third effect, the specific start memory and the destination are not determined whether or not to execute the first effect. Since the first effect is executed for the start memory between the start memory and the start memory, an effective effect can be performed without unnecessarily increasing the control load.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 9, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing the production.

[Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect can be enhanced by increasing the types of effect, for example, since the data capacity of video and the like is large, if the effect is not performed effectively, not only the interest will be reduced, but also the control load will increase. Not preferred.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 10 has a lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which variable display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memory. Winning determination for a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a number (for example, 4) and a specific starting memory held last among the starting memories held by the holding means. The first effect (for example, countdown effect) that may suggest the result of the above is continuously executed from the variable display of the start memory stored before the specific start memory to the variable display of the specific start memory. When the first effect execution determining means (for example, step S205 or the like) for determining whether or not to perform the variable display and at least the variable display for the specific starting memory are performed, the result of the winning determination for the specific starting memory is determined. With a second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) that determines whether or not to execute a suggestive second effect (for example, a movable accessory effect) separately from whether or not to execute the first effect. The first effect executed from the variable display of the start memory stored prior to the specific start memory is continued until the variable display of the specific start memory. When executed, it is confirmed or likely that the result of the winning judgment for the specific start memory is a hit, and the variable display for the specific start memory is continuously executed. If not, it is configured so that the result of the winning determination for the specific start memory is determined to be out of order or is likely to be out of order, and the variable display for the specific start-up memory is described above. When it is decided not to continuously execute the first effect and it is decided to execute the second effect in the variable display for the specific start memory, in the variable display for the specific start memory. It is further provided with a second effect non-execution determination means (for example, step S205 or the like) for changing the second effect so that the second effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is determined that the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display of the fixed start memory, and the second effect is executed in the variable display of the specific start memory. When it is decided to do so, it is changed so that the second effect is not executed in the variable display for a specific start memory, so that it is not necessary to perform a meaningless effect, and not only the deterioration of the interest is suppressed, but also the deterioration of the interest is suppressed. It is possible to effectively perform the production. That is, if the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display of the specific start memory, it is highly likely that the result of the winning determination for the specific start memory is determined to be wrong or is wrong. .. Even in such a case, if the second effect is performed in the variable display for a specific start memory, not only the meaningless effect is performed, but also the interest may be lowered. Therefore, even if it is decided to execute the second effect in the variable display for a specific start memory, by changing so as not to execute the second effect, the execution of the meaningless effect can be omitted, and the effect is achieved. It is intended to produce a typical effect.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing the production.

[Appendix 11]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 11 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) for determining a winning based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying a predetermined effect image. A display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of executing control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol and controlling the expected effect image based on the result of the winning determination, and a predetermined effect sound. A game machine including a sound output control means (for example, a voice control circuit 205) for controlling the output of the display control means, wherein the display control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination. As a specific effect control means (for example, step S903) that controls the expected effect image to be displayed without displaying the variation effect of the identification symbol, and the gaming machine without displaying the variation effect of the identification symbol. The sound output control means has an information image display control means (for example, step S905) that controls the information image related to the display means to be displayed on the display means, and the sound output control means has a variation effect of the identification symbol by the specific effect control means. When the identification symbol is not displayed, the muffling means (for example, step S904) which does not output the fluctuation sound related to the variation effect of the identification symbol, and when the information image display control means does not display the variation effect of the identification symbol, the variation of the identification symbol is displayed. It is characterized by having a fluctuating sound control means (for example, step S906) that outputs a fluctuating sound related to the effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest. As the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination is applicable. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an error is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the information image display control means is turned off when the variation effect of the identification symbol is displayed as the information image related to the gaming machine, and then restored. It is controlled so that the restoration image (for example, FIG. 167 (C)) at the time of this is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the recovery image is displayed and the variation effect of the identification symbol cannot be visually recognized in the restoration image after the power failure, it can be grasped that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed. ..

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 11, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 12]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 12 displays a variable display of the identification symbol when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and displays a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) in which the result of the winning determination is displayed when the identification symbol stops. 16), an operation means that can be operated by the player (effect button 62), and based on the operation of the operation means within a predetermined period, an execution lottery for a specific effect based on the result of the winning determination is performed. The first effect executing means (FIG. 164 (B)) for executing the specific effect based on the execution lottery, and the execution lottery for the specific effect based on the elapse of a predetermined time are performed, and based on the execution lottery. A second effect executing means (FIG. 164 (C)) for executing the specific effect is provided, and the first effect executing means can execute the specific effect when the operating means is not operated within the predetermined period. However, the second effect executing means does not execute the specific effect when the specific effect is executed by the first effect executing means within the same variable display, while the operating means operates within the predetermined period. It is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when the specific effect is not executed by the first effect execution means because the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the specific notification mode is not executed when the operation means is not operated, and the specific notification mode is further executed when the specific notification mode is executed. It won't be executed. On the other hand, if the specific notification mode has not been executed yet, the specific notification mode may be executed. As a result, unnecessary processing can be omitted without discomfort, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 12, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 13]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed and the result of the game is shown when the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. Up to four variable displays of symbols are reserved as start-up memories, and variable display is performed for each start-up memory.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the game is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example, special). See Kai 2006-246964).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the starting storage unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the expectation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 13 has information on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by, the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are used until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the display control means for controlling the operation and the start memory stored by the hold means. A start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) among one or a plurality of start memories stored by a determinable symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) and the hold means. ) Is included, the effect mode determining means (for example, step S332 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed is provided. When the specific start memory is included in the plurality of start memories stored by the hold means, the effect mode determining means displays the variable display first among the plurality of specific start memories. The effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the earliest specific start memory is performed is determined, and the start memory until the variable display of the earliest specific start memory is performed. On the other hand, the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbols are divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during the execution of the effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode that can give a high expectation to the player is performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such an effect is performed. The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the display of the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is further added. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed. Is to be.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is determined. Is not the specific start memory, but is determined to be an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect). It has a suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S366, etc.), and when the start memory is not stored by the hold means, the suggestion effect determination means performs a variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific embodiment. It is characterized in that it is configured so as not to be determined in the production mode suggesting.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Moreover, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, it is not determined to the effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode, so that the increase in the control load is also suppressed. ..

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 13, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 14]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed and the result of the game is shown when the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. Up to four variable displays of symbols are reserved as start-up memories, and variable display is performed for each start-up memory.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the game is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example, special). See Kai 2006-246964).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the starting storage unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the expectation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 14 has information about a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by, the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are used until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect (for example, provisional) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that controls the operation and the start memory stored by the hold means. Determining an effect mode capable of determining an effect mode for a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of (variation) and one or a plurality of start storages stored by the holding means. The effect mode determining means includes means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means produces the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. It is divided into predetermined units and is stored by the specific effect determining means for determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage, and the holding means. Alternatively, when a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) is not included in the plurality of start memories, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means. At the same time, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is that the identification symbol is displayed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S356, etc.) for determining an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that a variable effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to make it. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the start memory stored by the hold means is stored last (variable display is performed at the end). By determining the effect mode for the start memory to be an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, the player for the display effect. I am trying to maintain my expectation.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. Further provided with a variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) means that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port. Based on this, the start storage is configured to be reservable, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU201) is stored in the reholding means when the game ball wins a prize in the start opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed. Is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 14, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by producing the movable body and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 15]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a game advantageous to the player is executed according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, a movable body effect is performed to operate the movable body in order to expect the result of the winning judgment to be advantageous to the player. There is something that can be enhanced.

As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph and the movable body is tilted at the same time as the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph starts (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582). reference).

However, for example, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, when the operation of the movable body is started, it is possible to grasp a plurality of operations by the movable body such as movement and inclination of the movable body, and there is a limit in enhancing the effect of the effect. There was a risk that the interest would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the effect of producing a movable body and suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 15 has information about a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by, the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are used until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the display control means for controlling the operation and the start memory stored by the hold means. A determinable symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means. Etc.), and the effect mode determining means includes a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When not, the effect mode is determined with respect to the effect target number determining means for determining the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode to be different each time, and the start memory to be determined for the effect mode. In doing so, the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and is divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. The specific effect determining means for determining the effect mode (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means. Even though the start memory is not the specific start memory, the suggestion effect determination is determined in the effect mode (for example, the reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode. It is characterized by having means (for example, step S356).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be a different number each time, and the start memory stored by the holding means is stored last (variable display at the end). Is displayed by determining the effect mode for the start memory (which is performed) to be an effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory. The player's expectation for the production is maintained.

In addition, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, because the identification symbol is determined in a specific mode from the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode. It should not be easily grasped that the variation display is not performed (even if the effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol is variable display is displayed in a specific mode, the suggestion mode is disappointing). To make it.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. The holding means further includes a variation pattern determining means (for example, step S57, etc.) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, and the holding means has the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball in the starting opening. The symbol effect execution number determination means determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the start memory stored in the hold means when the game ball wins a prize in the start opening. It is characterized in that it is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed. Is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 15, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by producing the movable body and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 16]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the appendix 16 has information about a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as a start storage (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) and the display means. A special game execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific result is displayed, and a game after the special game is executed. As an effect executed in the state, an index effect timing determining means (for example, a scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) that determines in advance the execution timing of the index effect (subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state. Among the effect mode determining means (for example, step S374, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the hold means, and the one or more start memories stored by the hold means. An effect information determination means (for example,) for determining whether or not a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach variation effect) and an index start memory in which the index effect is performed are included. , Step S346, etc.), and the effect mode determining means displays the index effect when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. The effect redetermining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining to execute in the variable display related to the start memory of any one of the one or a plurality of start memories instead of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means. ), And the effect information determination means that the effect redetermining means includes the specific start memory and the index start memory in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When it is determined by the means, it can be determined that the index effect for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the specific start memory, regardless of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution timing of the index effect is determined in advance, so even if the data capacity of the index effect is large, there is time to perform the index effect, so that it is smooth. Processing can be performed. Further, when a specific start memory and an index start memory are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory is specified regardless of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means. Since it is determined that the index effect for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display of the start memory, the effect of the index can be enhanced. That is, when the index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, and the index effect has a relatively low degree of expectation for the index effect, the player can display the variable display. Is difficult to have a sense of expectation. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, when a specific start memory and an index start memory are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the index effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific start memory. By doing so, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. At that time, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode that can give a high expectation to the player is performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such an effect is performed. The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (2) above, when a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory. Since the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the above is performed is determined, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 16, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 17]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 17 has information on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as a start storage (for example, a random value for determining a big hit, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) and the display means. When a specific result is displayed, the special game execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and the start memory stored by the holding means are displayed. On the other hand, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed, and the special game As the effects to be executed in the game state after being executed, the first index effect having a relatively high expectation (for example, the subtraction effect of the enemy character) and the expectation relatively lower than the first index effect. At least a second index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of a ally character) having , Scenario preset processing (FIG. 138)) and a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific embodiment, the first index effect and / or the first index effect. (2) Duplicate determination means (for example, step S346) for determining whether or not the index effect is performed, and effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory stored by the holding means. ), And the effect mode determining means is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means in determining the effect mode for the one or more start memories to be determined by the effect mode. A specific effect determining means for dividing a number of the symbol effects into predetermined units and determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage, and the specific effect. When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the second index effect is performed when the effect is performed, it is determined that the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. Therefore, when the specific effect is performed, the second index effect is not performed. It is characterized by having an index effect timing redetermining means (for example, step S358 or the like).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are determined in advance, it is assumed that the data capacity of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is large. However, since there is time to allow the first index effect and / or the second index effect to be performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. By being determined, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the effect of the second index can be enhanced by performing the second index effect in the pattern effect before the specific effect is performed.

It should be noted that the first index effect is in an advantageous state if it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, when the enemy character is annihilated) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the ally character is annihilated). (For example, it has a function of notifying that it is a high-probability gaming state). Further, the second index effect is relatively performed when the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy character is completely destroyed) (for example, when the ally character is completely destroyed). It has a function of notifying that it is a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a low-probability gaming state).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the index effect timing determining means determines the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect during the execution of the special game. The effect mode determining means is characterized in that, in the game state after the special game is executed, the effect mode for the start memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are determined during the execution of the special game, smoother processing can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 17, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 18]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 18 has information on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as a start storage (for example, a random value for determining a big hit, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) and the display means. When a specific result is displayed, the identification symbol is used for the special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and the start memory stored by the holding means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect are performed, and the game state after the special game is executed. As an effect executed in (for example, a time-saving game state), a first index effect having a relatively high expectation (for example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) and a relatively lower expectation than the first index effect. A second index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of a ally character) having the above is prepared, and an index effect timing determining means for predetermining the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect It is determined whether or not the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific embodiment is performed. The effect mode determining means is provided with a duplication determination means (for example, step S346 or the like) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for the start memory stored by the holding means. In determining the effect mode for the one or more start memories to be determined by the effect mode, divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units. A specific effect determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage, and the specific effect are performed. When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the second index effect is to be performed, the second index effect is determined to be performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. An index effect that prevents the second index effect from being performed when a specific effect is performed. When it has timing redetermination means (for example, step S358 or the like) and it is determined by the duplication determination means that the first index effect is to be performed when the specific effect is performed, when the specific effect is performed. It is characterized in that the first index effect is configured to be performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are determined in advance, it is assumed that the data capacity of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is large. However, since there is time to allow the first index effect and / or the second index effect to be performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. By being determined, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the effect of the second index can be enhanced by performing the second index effect in the pattern effect before the specific effect is performed.

It should be noted that the first index effect is in an advantageous state if it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, when the enemy character is annihilated) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the ally character is annihilated). (For example, it has a function of notifying that it is a high-probability gaming state). Further, the second index effect is relatively performed when the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy character is completely destroyed) (for example, when the ally character is completely destroyed). It has a function of notifying that it is a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a low-probability gaming state).

Further, when it is determined that the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. This is because when the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, there is a high possibility that the player has a sense of expectation for the variable display, and the first index effect and This is because the effect of the effect is enhanced by any of the variable displays.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the index effect timing determining means determines the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect during the execution of the special game. The effect mode determining means is characterized in that, in the game state after the special game is executed, the effect mode for the start memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are determined during the execution of the special game, smoother processing can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 18, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 19]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 19 has information on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as a start storage (for example, a random value for determining a big hit, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) and the display means. When a specific result is displayed, the special game execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and the start memory stored by the holding means are displayed. On the other hand, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed, and the special game As an effect to be executed in the game state after being executed, an index effect determining means (for example, a scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) that determines in advance the execution timing of the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state. , Duplicate determination means (for example, step S346) for determining whether or not the index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the identification symbol is variably displayed in a specific mode is performed. ), And an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory stored by the hold means, and the effect mode determining means is a determination target of the effect mode. In determining the effect mode for the one or more start memories, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, regardless of the unit of the start memory. By the above-mentioned duplication determination means, the specific effect determining means for determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the fact that the index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. When determined, the number of executions of the symbol effect obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the one or more start memories to be determined for the effect mode is Only when it exists, it is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution determining means for determining that a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is to be performed is executed prior to the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution timing of the index effect is determined in advance, so even if the data capacity of the index effect is large, there is time to perform the index effect, so that it is smooth. Processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the index effect is not performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the symbol effect determined for one or more start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined. Only when the number of executions of the symbol effect obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the symbol effect exists (that is, only when it is larger than 0), the suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is performed is specified. Since it is executed prior to the production, it is possible to perform an effective production such as expecting a specific production by the suggestion production while performing smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the suggestion effect execution determining means executes the specific effect (for example, reach variation) in one or more start storages stored by the holding means. When the overlap determination means determines that the index effect is to be performed when the specific start memory is included and the specific effect is performed, each of the one or more start memories stored by the hold means. The number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of executions of the symbol effect on which the index effect is performed is subtracted from the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined for the specific effect, and the specific effect is performed prior to the specific effect. It is characterized in that the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when it is determined by the duplication determination means that the index effect is to be performed when the specific effect is performed, the suggestion effect is performed at an appropriate timing prior to the specific effect. Therefore, more effective production can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 19, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 20]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the appendix 20 has a display means for displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and a display control means for controlling at least a variation effect of an identification symbol (for example, display). A control circuit 204) and a sound output control means (for example, a voice control circuit 205) for controlling the output of a predetermined effect sound are provided, and the sound output control means systematizes the effect tone color by a plurality of channels. It is possible to output according to the situation, and the effect tone output from the channel is changed according to the change in the mode of the effect image displayed on the display means, while the channel of the system of the identification symbol is fixed. It is characterized in that the output sound from the channel of the system of the identification symbol is muted according to the mode of the variation effect of the identification symbol.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest. As the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination is applicable. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an error is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

In the present invention, for example, the following configuration can be adopted as an effect that can give the player a sense of expectation for the result of the winning determination. That is, it is a gaming machine configured to be able to proceed with a game by receiving a power supply, and is a lottery means for determining a win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a display means for displaying a predetermined effect image, and a display means for displaying a predetermined effect image. It is displayed by the display control means that can execute the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol as the main effect and the control related to the other effect as the sub effect, the speaker that outputs the effect sound, and the display means. The display control means includes a sound output control means for controlling the production sound according to the effect image to be output from the speaker, and the display control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination. The control related to the character effect is executed as the main effect, the specific effect control means for executing the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol as the sub effect, and the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol are executed as the main effect. As an effect when the power supply is stopped while the power supply is stopped and then the power supply is restored, the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol is executed as a sub-effect, but the power source is restored. The sound output control means has a return effect control means for controlling so that the effect image is mainly displayed, and the sound output control means is engaged in the variation effect of the identification symbol when the variation effect of the identification symbol is not displayed by the specific effect control means. It is a gaming machine having a fluctuating sound output control means that outputs a fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol when the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol is not displayed by the return effect controlling means, although the fluctuating sound is not output. Even in such a gaming machine, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest. The main effect is the effect on the side that is the main body of the effect and the player's gaze is directed, and the sub-effect is the effect that is displayed on the display means together with the main effect, but the player's gaze is It is a production on the side that is difficult to face.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 20, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 21]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the appendix 21 is a gaming machine that outputs a warning sound when a predetermined error occurs, and is a lottery means (for example, step S117) that determines a winning based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is possible to execute a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying a predetermined effect image and control for a variation effect of the identification symbol, and control for an expected effect image based on the result of the winning determination. The display control means (for example, the display control circuit 204) that can be executed, the speaker that outputs the effect sound (for example, the speaker 24), and the warning sound are included in the effect image displayed by the display means. The sound output control means (for example, the voice control circuit 205) for controlling the effect sound to be output from the speaker is provided, and the sound output control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination. It is necessary to have a specific output control means (for example, step S904) in which the output for the warning sound is maintained while the output for the variation effect of the identification symbol is muted when the specific effect having the effect is executed. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest. As the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination is applicable. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an error is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect tone can be output from a plurality of channels according to the system, and the effect tone output from the channel can be output according to the effect image displayed on the display means. The specific output control means includes a changeable shared channel, a warning system channel, and a channel of the identification symbol system, and the specific output control means changes the effect tone through the shared channel according to the effect image displayed on the display means. When the specific effect is executed, the state of the channel of the warning system is maintained, and the output from the channel of the system of the identification symbol is muted.

The gaming machine of (2) above is a more specific representation of (1) above, omitting unnecessary processing without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and smoothly processing while suppressing deterioration of interest. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 21, it is possible to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 22]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 22 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the following after one variable display is performed. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol until the variable display is performed, and the variation of the identification symbol for each variable display. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of symbol effect executions in which the effect and the stop effect are performed, and an effect mode determining means capable of determining the effect mode for a plurality of variable displays. (For example, step S372, etc.), the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into a predetermined unit, and divides the symbol effect into the predetermined unit. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) for determining an effect mode performed during the execution of the performed symbol effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined for each variable display. That is, although the symbol effect is normally performed once for each variable display, the number of executions of the symbol effect once or multiple times is determined for each start memory, so that one variable display ( Although it is a single game), it looks as if a plurality of variable displays (multiple games) are being performed on the appearance. Moreover, each symbol effect is divided into predetermined units regardless of the game unit. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in each game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one game, and is used for one game. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect mode determining means determines one or a plurality of variable displays as an effect section, and is included in the effect section as a section effect performed in the effect section. The effect mode for the variable display is determined, and the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means for the variable display included in the effect section is divided into predetermined units. It is characterized by having a section effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the variable display unit.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for a plurality of variable displays included in the effect section, so that the player is not even more aware of the variable display in each game. Can be.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the effect mode determining means includes a part of the number of symbol effects determined for one variable display included in the effect section and the effect section. It is characterized in that a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for other variable displays included in the above can be divided as a predetermined unit across a plurality of variable displays. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above,
An effect mode that spans a part of the symbol effect determined for one variable display included in the effect section and a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for another variable display included in the effect section. It can be decided. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in each game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 22, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by making the player not aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 23]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to preferably suppress a decrease in interest while making the player not aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit. ..

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 23 is information about a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is set. A display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the identification symbol, and the variation effect of the identification symbol with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the stop effect is performed, and one or a plurality of start storages stored by the holding means. When a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in the effect, the effect mode determining means (for example,) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. , Step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means determines the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. It has a specific effect determining means for dividing the symbol effect into predetermined units and determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. The effect determining means determines the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, the start memory stored before the specific start memory and the specific start memory. Although the effect mode that straddles can be determined, it is characterized in that the effect mode that straddles the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory is not determined.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode that can give a high expectation to the player is performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), it is applied. The player's interest in the production mode is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in determining the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units, the effect mode straddling the start memory stored before the specific start memory and the specific start memory is determined. Can be done. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. On the other hand, the effect mode straddling the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory is not determined. As a result, the player's gaze can be directed to the variable effect of the identification symbol performed in a specific mode rather than the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the variable effect can be expected. Can be done.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above is further provided with a hold effect control means for controlling the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, and the hold effect control. The means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is determined. Is not the specific start memory, but has a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) that determines the effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode. Is to be.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 23, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 24]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the appendix 24 has information on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and one stored by the holding means. When the variable display of the start memory is performed, control is performed so that the variable display and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect execution that can determine the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means to be performed and the start memory stored by the hold means. A number determining means stage (for example, step S324 or the like), and an effect mode determining means stage (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means. When the specific start memory is not included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means, the effect mode determining means includes all start memories stored by the hold means. On the other hand, in determining the effect mode and determining the effect mode for all the start memories stored by the holding means, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is predetermined. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the start memory).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

By the way, when the start memory stored by the hold means does not include the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the start memory stored by the hold means is included. Since the burden on control is less than when a specific start memory is included and the effect mode can be determined for more start memories, all start memories stored by the holding means can be used. On the other hand, the production mode is determined.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A variation pattern that determines a variation pattern when a variable display of the identification symbol is performed based on a start port (for example, a second start port 440) in which a game ball can win a prize and a prize of the game ball to the start port. Further provided with a determination means (for example, step S173 or the like), the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening, and the number of executions of the symbol effect. The determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball wins in the starting opening by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized in that it is determined based on a fluctuation pattern.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 24, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 25]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 25 has information about a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and one stored by the holding means. When the variable display of the start memory is performed, control is performed so that the variable display and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) and the start memory stored by the hold means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode, and an effect mode determining means (for example, a step) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means. (S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means includes a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When not, the effect mode (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode is set for all the start memories stored by the hold means. In determining, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. In the specific mode, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memory stored by the specific effect determination means and the hold means is set in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that a variation effect of the identification symbol is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is set as the start mode. By deciding on an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. ing.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. Further provided with a variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) means that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port. Based on this, the start storage is configured to be reservable, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU201) is stored in the reholding means when the game ball wins a prize in the start opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 25, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 26]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine of the appendix 26 has information about a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number of (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) as start storage, and one stored by the holding means. When the variable display of the start memory is performed, control is performed so that the variable display and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect execution that can determine the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means to be performed and the start memory stored by the hold means. It is provided with a number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means. When the specific start memory is not included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means, the effect mode determining means determines the number of start memories to be determined by the effect mode. The effect number determining means for determining the number to be different each time, and the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means in determining the effect mode for the start memory to be determined for the effect mode. Finally, among the specific effect determining means for dividing the symbol effect into predetermined units and determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the start memory stored by the holding means. A suggestion effect that determines the effect mode for the stored start memory to be an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a determination means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, and the effect mode for the last start-up memory stored by the holding means is determined. By determining the effect mode that suggests that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. I am trying to be done.

The reason why the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time is that the identification symbol is varied and displayed in a specific mode from the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode. (Even if an effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol is variablely displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggestion effect mode is not good) cannot be easily grasped. Because.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect target number determining means is characterized in that the number of start memories to be determined in the effect mode is determined by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined by lottery, so that the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. ), And the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is a thing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 26, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 27]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 27 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control for promoting the winning determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination in the normal gaming state. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the above, and a concealment effect (for example,) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Information about the concealment effect executing means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the concealment A stage 2002) and the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display on the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the result is executed, and at least a control that promotes the winning determination is executed. In the game state, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. ), And an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means is said. An effect mode in which the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbol effect is divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. The specific effect determining means has a specific effect determining means, and the specific effect determining means indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability when the secret effect is executed. As a matter of fact, an effect mode (eg,) performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units. For example, it is characterized in that it determines the subtraction effect of the character).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute the display effect without being aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the display of the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is further added. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed. Is to be.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress since the control that promotes the winning judgment is started (that is, the number of times the starting memory is digested while the control that promotes the winning judgment is executed (the game executed). It becomes difficult to grasp the number)). As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning judgment can be further reduced. It is possible to make the player even less aware.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the effect mode determining means has the variable display in a specific mode in one or more start storages stored by the holding means. When the specific start-up memory to be performed is not included, the effect mode is determined for all the start-up memories stored by the hold means, and the start-up memory stored by the hold means is the last stored. Suggested effect determining means (for example,) that determines the effect mode for the start memory to be an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. , Step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 27, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by producing the movable body and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 28]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 28 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control for promoting the winning determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination in the normal gaming state. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the above, and a concealment effect (for example,) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the concealment A stage 2002) and holding means (for example, step) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start storage. (S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one start memory stored by the holding means, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the identification symbol, and a gaming state (for example, a time-saving game) in which at least the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. In the state), the symbol effect execution number determining means for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. (For example, step S324 or the like) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start storages stored by the holding means. The aspect determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units, and executes the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. It has a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining an effect mode to be performed in the specific effect, and the specific effect determining means has a specific start-up when a specific start-up memory is stored by the hold means. A production mode that straddles the start memory stored before the memory and the specific start memory. Although it is possible to determine the mode, it is configured so as not to determine an effect mode that straddles the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory, and when the secret effect is executed. As an indicator of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. .. ..

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute the display effect without being aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

In addition, in determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units, it is stored (variably displayed first) before a specific start memory (for example, reach variation effect). It is possible to determine an effect mode that straddles the start memory and the specific start memory. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. On the other hand, the effect mode straddling the specific start memory and the start memory stored (variably displayed later) after the specific start memory is not determined. As a result, the player's gaze can be directed to the variable effect of the identification symbol performed in a specific mode rather than the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the variable effect can be expected. Can be done. Here, the "specific start memory" corresponds to a start memory in which a variable display is performed that can give the player a feeling of expectation that the result of the winning determination is a specific result, for example, a reach fluctuation or the like. do.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress since the control that promotes the winning judgment is started (that is, the number of times the starting memory is digested while the control that promotes the winning judgment is executed (the game executed). It becomes difficult to grasp the number)). As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning judgment can be further reduced. It is possible to make the player even less aware.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is determined. Is not the specific start memory, but has a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode. It is a thing.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 28, since the specific gaming state performed separately from the special gaming can be suitably performed, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 29]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 29 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control for promoting the winning determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination in the normal gaming state. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the above, and a concealment effect (for example,) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Information about the concealment effect executing means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the concealment A stage 2002) and the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display on the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A game in which a display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol to be performed using the effect time until the result is executed, and at least the control that promotes the winning determination is executed. In the state, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) that determines the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. And an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start-up memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode determining means is the hold. When a specific start memory is not included in the start memory stored by the means, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and all stored by the hold means. In determining the effect mode for the start memory of the above, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is executed. Specificity that determines the effect mode (for example, character subtraction effect) performed during A gaming machine characterized by having a production determining means (for example, step S372 or the like).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute the display effect without being aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

By the way, when the start memory stored by the hold means does not include the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the start memory stored by the hold means is included. Since the burden on control is less than when a specific start memory is included and the effect mode can be determined for more start memories, all start memories stored by the holding means can be used. On the other hand, the production mode is determined.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. Further provided with a variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) means that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port. Based on this, the start storage can be held, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU201) is stored in the holding means when the game ball wins a prize in the starting opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect with respect to the above is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress since the control that promotes the winning judgment is started (that is, the number of times the starting memory is digested while the control that promotes the winning judgment is executed (the game executed). It becomes difficult to grasp the number)). As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning judgment can be further reduced. It is possible to make the player even less aware.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 29, it is possible to suitably perform a specific gaming state performed separately from the special gaming, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 30]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 30 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control for promoting the winning determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination in the normal gaming state. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the above, and a concealment effect (for example,) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Information about the concealment effect executing means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the concealment A stage 2002) and the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display on the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A game in which a display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol to be performed using the effect time until the result is executed, and at least the control that promotes the winning determination is executed. In the state, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) that determines the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. And an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start-up memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode determining means is the hold. When a specific start memory is not included in one or more start memories stored by the means, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the hold means determines the effect mode. In determining the effect mode for all the start memories to be stored, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the start memory). Z) A production mode performed during the execution of the design production divided into the predetermined units. The specific effect determining means for determining the mode (for example, the subtraction effect of the character), and the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the hold means, the start memory is the specific start memory. Despite this, the suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the effect mode (for example, the reach precursor effect of Gase) suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific aspect is provided. It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, the degree of progress after the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination) is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period to be executed). Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to make it. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is set as the start mode. By deciding on an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. ing.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, a variation pattern when the identification symbol is variably displayed based on the starting port where the game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variable pattern determining means (for example, step S173 or the like) for determining the above is further provided, and the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening. When the game ball wins a prize in the start opening, the symbol effect execution number determining means determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the start memory stored in the holding means by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized by making a decision based on a pattern.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the hold effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning judgment can be further reduced. It is possible to make the player even less aware.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 30, it is possible to preferably perform a specific gaming state performed separately from the special gaming, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 31]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after a special game is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 31 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control for promoting the winning determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination in the normal gaming state. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the above, and a concealment effect (for example,) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Information about the concealment effect executing means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the concealment A stage 2002) and the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display on the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A game in which a display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol to be performed using the effect time until the result is executed, and at least the control that promotes the winning determination is executed. In the state, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) that determines the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. And an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start-up memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode determining means is the hold. When the one or more start memories stored by the means do not include a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) in which the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific embodiment, the start memory is stored by the holding means. Of the start-up memories, the effect number determination means for determining the effect mode for a different number of start-up memories each time, and the symbol effect for determining the effect mode for the start-up memory to be determined for the effect mode. The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units. , A specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of a symbol effect divided into the predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the start memory), and a different number each time. It is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory in the start memory of the above is that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, the degree of progress after the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination) is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period to be executed). Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to make it. Therefore, in this case, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, and the effect mode for the last start-up memory stored by the holding means is determined. By determining the effect mode that suggests that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. I am trying to be done.

The reason why the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time is that the identification symbol is varied and displayed in a specific mode from the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode. (Even if an effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol is variablely displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggestion effect mode is not good) cannot be easily grasped. Because.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect target number determining means is characterized in that the number of start memories to be determined in the effect mode is determined by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined by lottery, so that the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 31, it is possible to suitably perform a specific gaming state performed separately from the special gaming, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 32]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game is completed is set to a specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is concealed and determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not there is a high probability when the number of games played is digested (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that keep secret whether or not they have a high probability in a specific gaming state are provided with an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine whose specific gaming state ends when a predetermined number of games is digested, the player can easily know the end timing of the specific gaming state simply by grasping the digested number of games. It ends up. When the end timing of the specific game state approaches, even if a production suggesting the degree of expectation of high probability is performed, the expectation of high probability may be diminished and the interest may be reduced. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make it difficult to grasp the end timing of a specific gaming state and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 32 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means that can execute a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state until the winning determination is performed a predetermined number of times, and the winning. A probability changing means capable of setting the winning probability in the determination to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than in a normal gaming state while at least the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed, and the above-mentioned A concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) capable of executing a concealment effect (for example, concealment A stage 2002) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability is still performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information about the variable display that has not been stored as start storage, and one start storage stored by the holding means. When the variable display is performed, the display is controlled so that the variable display and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. In the gaming state in which the control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) and at least the control for promoting the winning determination are executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are used with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) for determining the number of symbol effect executions to be performed, and an effect capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means. A mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) is provided, and the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units and stores the start. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) for determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, even if the end timing of the period in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed is predetermined, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the execution period.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, the degree of progress after the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination) is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period to be executed). Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, the player's consciousness can be directed toward the above-mentioned production mode rather than the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the holding effect control means further provided with a hold effect control means for controlling the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means. Is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in the index production that can estimate the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the end timing of the control that promotes the winning judgment can be further adjusted. It can be made more difficult for the player to grasp.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, when the effect mode determining means has a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, one of the plurality of start memories is stored. A part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for the start memory and a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for the other start memory are divided as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of start memories. It is characterized by having a specific effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode so as to straddle a plurality of starting memories without being bound by the result of one gaming. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, and it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the control that promotes the winning determination.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 32, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the specific gaming state.

[Appendix 33]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game is completed is set to a specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is concealed and determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not there is a high probability when the number of games played is digested (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not they have a high probability in a specific gaming state are provided with a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine in which a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a high probability in the specific gaming state is performed while concealing whether or not the probability is high in the specific gaming state, the probability is high. If this is not the case, it is easy to select a production with a low degree of expectation, so if such a production with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will decline.

On the other hand, if a production with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make the display effect performed in a specific gaming state interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 33 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means (for example, step S171, etc.) capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for promoting the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and the above-mentioned gaming machine. A probability changing means capable of setting the winning probability in the winning determination to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than in a normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. In addition to providing a concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) in which it is possible to execute a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, the winning probability in the winning determination in the concealment period is provided. The index production execution means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing the index production that can give a feeling of expectation that the probability is high, and the index production scenario performed as the entire production during the concealment period are described above. A scenario determining means (for example, a scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) that is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, and the scenario determining means has a control for promoting the winning determination. It is characterized in that the scenario of the index effect is determined so that it is clearly shown whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability at the end.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the scenario of the index production performed as the overall production in the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, so that the index is determined according to the concealment period. You can proceed with the production scenario. That is, before the end of the concealment period, if the index production determines whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player, it may be annoying. In this respect, according to the present invention, the interest in the index production can be maintained until the end of the concealment period, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start storage, and A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example,) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. Step S324 and the like), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 and the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start-up memories stored by the holding means are further provided to determine the effect mode. The means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means, and the predetermined unit is irrespective of the unit of the start memory. It has a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the units of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the retaining means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The "variable display" means a series of displays from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification symbol for one start memory, and the variation of the identification symbol for one start memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, a sub) that controls the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed in a predetermined display area. The CPU 201) is further provided, and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the index production that can give a feeling of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 33, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific gaming state interesting, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 34]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game is completed is set to a specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is concealed and determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not there is a high probability when the number of games played is digested (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not they have a high probability in a specific gaming state are provided with a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine in which a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a high probability in the specific gaming state is performed while concealing whether or not the probability is high in the specific gaming state, the probability is high. If this is not the case, it is easy to select a production with a low degree of expectation, so if such a production with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will decline.

On the other hand, if a production with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make the display effect performed in a specific gaming state interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 34 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. Information about the variable display that has not yet been performed is stored by the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number as starting storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the game, and a lottery promotion control means capable of executing the control for promoting the winning determination (for example, the time-saving game state) as compared with the normal game state, and the lottery promotion control means. With a probability changing means capable of setting the winning probability in the winning determination to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than in a normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. In addition to providing a concealment period in which it is possible to execute a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability in the concealment period. An index effect executing means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing an index effect that can give a feeling of expectation, and a control that promotes the winning determination of the index effect scenario performed as the entire effect during the concealment period. Variation of the identification symbol with respect to the scenario determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) that is predetermined before execution and the start memory stored by the holding means at least during the concealment period. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the effect and the stop effect are performed is provided, and the index effect execution means is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means. It is determined that the symbol effect of the number of executed executions is divided into predetermined units, and the index effect is performed as the effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. With having a special production decision means to In addition, the scenario determining means determines the scenario of the index effect so that it is clearly shown whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability when the control for promoting the winning determination is completed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least during the concealment period, the execution of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number is determined. That is, where the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, at least during the concealment period, once or multiple times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined, the variable display for one start memory is apparently as if the variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period. Further, since the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is more difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

Further, as an effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units, an index effect that can give a feeling of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high is determined. This index effect is determined in advance before the control that promotes the winning determination is executed in the scenario performed as the entire effect during the concealment period, and when the control that promotes the winning determination ends, the winning in the winning determination is completed. Whether or not the probability is considered to be high is clearly indicated.

In this way, while keeping the player from being aware of the end timing of the concealment period and eventually the end timing of the control that promotes the winning judgment, the index production that can give a feeling of expectation that the winning probability in the winning judgment is high is performed. At the same time, when the control for promoting the winning determination is completed, it is clarified by the index effect whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Therefore, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is disclosed when the concealment period elapses for a certain period, the end timing of the concealment period and the end of the control for promoting the winning determination By making the timing unaware of the player, it is possible to perform an effect such as clearly indicating whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability by the outcome of the index effect. For example, when the index effect is a game effect between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize an effect such as a high probability determination when the ally wins.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed. do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the index production that can give a feeling of expectation that the winning probability in the winning judgment is high, and the winning probability in the winning judgment is high in the outcome of the index production. It is possible to give the player the impression that the presence or absence is disclosed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, when the special effect determining means has a plurality of start memories stored by the hold means, one of the plurality of start memories is stored. A part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for the start memory and a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for the other start memory are divided as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of start memories. It is characterized by having a specific effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode so as to straddle a plurality of starting memories without being bound by the result of one gaming. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, and it is more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period and the end timing of the control that promotes the winning determination. be able to.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 34, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific gaming state interesting, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 35]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game is completed is set to a specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is concealed and determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not there is a high probability when the number of games played is digested (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not they have a high probability in a specific gaming state are provided with a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine in which a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a high probability in the specific gaming state is performed while concealing whether or not the probability is high in the specific gaming state, the probability is high. If this is not the case, it is easy to select a production with a low degree of expectation, so if such a production with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will decline.

On the other hand, if a production with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make the display effect performed in a specific gaming state interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 35 has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of performing control for promoting the winning determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination. At least while the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed, the probability changing means capable of setting a higher probability (for example, a high probability gaming state) than the normal gaming state and the winning probability in the winning determination are In addition to providing a concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) in which a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the probability is high is provided, whether the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability in the concealment period. Control that promotes the winning determination in the index effect executing means capable of executing the index effect (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) that can be guessed whether or not, and the scenario of the index effect that is performed as the entire effect in the concealment period. The lottery promotion control means is provided with a scenario determination means that is determined in advance before the execution of the game, and the lottery promotion control means is one of a plurality of periods so that the period for executing the control for promoting the winning determination is different each time. The promotion period determining means (for example, step S172 or the like) for determining the period is provided, and the scenario determining means ends the control for promoting the winning determination according to the period determined by the promotion period determining means. At that time, it is characterized in that the scenario of the index production is determined so that it is clearly shown whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the scenario of the index effect performed as the overall effect during the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, and the winning determination is promoted. When the control ends, it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Here, the index effect is an effect that makes it possible to infer whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Further, since the execution period of the control for promoting the winning determination is determined to be different each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

In this way, while keeping the player from being aware of the end timing of the concealment period and eventually the end timing of the control that promotes the winning judgment, the index production that makes it possible to guess whether or not the winning probability in the winning judgment is high is performed. At the same time, when the control for promoting the winning determination is completed, it is clarified by the index effect whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Therefore, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is disclosed when the concealment period elapses for a certain period, the end timing of the concealment period and the end of the control for promoting the winning determination By making the timing unaware of the player, it is possible to perform an effect such as clearly indicating whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability by the outcome of the index effect. For example, when the index effect is a game effect between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize an effect such as a high probability determination when the ally wins.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start storage, and A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example,) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. Step S324 and the like), and the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 and the like) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means. Divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means, and determines the predetermined number regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means (for example, step S370 or the like) for determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into units.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The "variable display" means a series of displays from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification symbol for one start memory, and the variation of the identification symbol for one start memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

(3) The gaming machine according to (2) above is further provided with a hold effect control means for controlling the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, and the hold effect control. The means controls so that the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in the index production that can estimate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 35, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific gaming state interesting, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 36]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 36 is information about a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as a start storage (for example, a random value for determining a big hit or a random value for determining a symbol) and the holding means. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used. The display control means for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol, and the symbol effect for performing the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. One or more start memories of the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 and the like) capable of determining the execution number of (for example, provisional variation) and the start memory stored by the holding means are determined as the effect section. However, as the section effect performed in the effect section, the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory included in the effect section is provided, and the effect mode is determined. The means determines whether or not the section effect is being executed, and when it is determined that the section effect is not being executed, the means again determines the effect section and the effect of the section effect performed in the effect section. It is characterized in that the section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption by determining the mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means are determined as the effect section. Since such a section effect is repeated without interruption, the player can be made not aware that the effect is a start memory unit, and the expectation can be maintained for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the mode in which the above-mentioned section effect is "repeatedly performed without interruption" includes, of course, a mode in which the reserved start memory is performed without interruption as long as there is a reserved start memory. For example, even if the demo effect is executed in the middle of the process, if the section effect is executed when the start memory is held after that, it is included in the above "repeatedly performed without interruption". .. Further, when there are a plurality of starting ports (for example, when there are a first starting port 5442 and a second starting port 440), and a game ball enters one of the starting ports (for example, the first starting port 5442). However, when a game ball enters the other starting port (for example, the second starting port 440), the section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect mode determining means produces the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory included in the effect section. Those having a section effect mode determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) that is divided into predetermined units and determines an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. Is.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the effect mode is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is also possible to determine the effect mode so as to span a plurality of start memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start memory unit, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player aware of the game result for each start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the section effect mode determining means includes a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for one start memory included in the effect section, and the effect. It is possible to divide a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for other start memories included in the section as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of start memories.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one gaming. In addition, since the player can perform a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, the range of the effect can be expanded and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 36, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Regarding the "expectation degree" described in each of the above appendices, the degree of expectation (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a big hit of each advance notice effect or a high-probability gaming state is each advance notice. The probability that the effect will be executed and become a "big hit" or "high probability gaming state", the probability that each advance notice effect will be executed and become a "big hit" or "high probability game state", and the probability that each advance notice effect will be executed will be " It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of becoming a predetermined internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) such as the probability of becoming "out of place" or "low probability gaming state". However, since the "expectation degree" can include the case where the degree of expectation is 100% and the case where the degree of expectation is 0%, there are cases where the above division does not hold strictly (for example, the production is executed). It is not suitable to divide 1 by 0 because it may include the case of deterministically notifying the game state or winning, and in this case, the expectation includes 100%, 0%, or the concept of presence or absence. Will be).

[Appendix 37-1 to Appendix 37-8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, structural factors that influence the ball entry rate and the ball ejection tendency to the ball entrance port. Alternatively, the state of the control element can only be changed according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game entertainment is necessarily large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving the interest. be.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 37-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 37-1 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) in which a variation display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) is performed in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time.
A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3078) that determines a variation pattern performed in the display means based on the result of the lottery.
A variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern, and
A symbol display control means (for example, a symbol display control means that displays variation of the symbol (for example, variation display of a special symbol) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means, and stops and displays the result of the lottery. For example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S3093 and
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means is
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, a figure) defined so that the probability that the fluctuation time is relatively determined to be a short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized in that it stores the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol shown in 170).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the higher the set value, the larger the number of lottery times per unit time, and eventually the result of the lottery. Expectations will be raised, and it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further, a lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time is provided, and the lottery is further provided.
The fluctuation pattern table storage means is
As the set value set by the setting change control means increases, the probability of being determined by the short variation pattern becomes higher than that of the variation pattern table (for example, in FIG. 172). The fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more is further stored.
The fluctuation pattern determining means is
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery count means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a big hit lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the big hit game state ends), It is characterized in that the fluctuation pattern can be determined by using the other fluctuation pattern table.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the number of times the lottery is executed counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using another fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the greater the number of lottery times per unit time, and when the number of times the lottery is executed is a specific number of times the lottery is executed, the player's expectation is increased, and it is possible to improve the game interest. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, when a jackpot lottery for a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the jackpot gaming state is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variable display of the symbol is being performed, a lottery for the variable display of the symbol is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in the mode showing the result.
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variation display of the symbol (for example, the variation display of the special symbol) is performed, the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. May be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbol, if it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability / unsuitability for the game information, It is configured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 37-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 37-2 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed by a predetermined symbol and the result of the lottery can be shown by the stop mode of the symbol.
A stop mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be shown in the display means based on the result of the lottery.
A stop mode table storage means (for example, program ROM 202) for storing a stop mode table (for example, the decorative symbol determination table of FIG. 171) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determining means.
A symbol effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3207) that controls the symbol to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means.
When the symbol is displayed in an aspect (for example, a first aspect, a second aspect, a specific aspect) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of benefits advantageous to the player. (For example, a profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control of FIG. 10) that gives a profit from any of (for example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot), and
Equipped with
The profit-giving means is
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit) and the stop mode is the specific stop mode (for example, the specific mode), the plurality of benefits Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) with a relatively high advantage.
The stop mode determining means is
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the more the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of benefits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The stop mode determining means is
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the set value set by the setting change control means has the same probability that the specific profit is given regardless of the set value. It is characterized in that the stopping mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the stopping mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stopping mode increases as the value increases.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting is changed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means increases, the probability of being stopped in a specific stop mode increases, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means when the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. Even if it is determined by the stop mode determining means that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means for controlling the game from proceeding (for example, the process of step S3722) is executed. Main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is being performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a specific result and the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, it is unsuitable for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information. If it is determined that the game cannot proceed, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 37-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 37-3 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118, both a jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of predetermined conditions).
A lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol of FIG. 173 or FIG. 174 is a big hit).
At least a display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) in which a variable display of a symbol is performed,
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that displays variations in the symbols and stops and displays the results of the lottery.
The symbol is in an aspect (for example, Special Figure 1-1 to Special Figure 1-8, Special Figure 2-1 to Special Figure 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, a profit-giving means (for example, FIG. 10) that grants one of a plurality of profits (for example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player. Main CPU 101) that executes jackpot game control, and
Equipped with
The lottery table storage means
A plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) having a relatively high advantage among the plurality of profits differ depending on the set value are stored.
The lottery means
It is characterized in that the lottery can be performed using the lottery table according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits having a relatively high advantage differ according to the set value, the lottery is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to make the degree of profit given to the player different according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The profit-giving means is
As the specific profit, at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player and a high-probability gaming state in which the profit is given to the gaming state after the special gaming state ends with a relatively high probability are given. And
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that it stores a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the high probability gaming state differs depending on the set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The profit-giving means is
As the specific profit, a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which the lottery is promoted is further granted.
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that it stores a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state differs depending on the set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. Even if the result is the result of granting the specific benefit, the game control means for controlling the game so as not to proceed (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery relating to the variable display of the symbol is the result of granting a specific profit, the game is configured so as not to proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 37-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 37-4 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area, and
The main capable of executing the processing of the special lottery means (for example, step S3073, step S3083, step S3118) for performing a special lottery in a different lottery mode based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into each of the plurality of starting ports. CPU101) and
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit).
Based on the fact that the result of the special lottery is a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game, and
Equipped with
The special lottery means
When the special lottery is performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port, the probability that the specific result will be obtained depends on the set value set by the setting change control means. Can be done differently, as well as
The specific game execution means is
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the frequency is higher when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the specific game can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of a specific result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the first The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. That is, if a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value on the premise that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port" is the first. When the game ball enters the starting port of, a winning judgment (including a probability of 0) is made for a specific result, but the probability that a specific result will be obtained in the winning judgment is the probability that the game ball has entered the second starting opening. It includes not only a mode lower than the case, but also a mode in which a winning judgment situation for a specific result is not performed when the game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 10).
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), the start variable control means (for example, for example) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start opening. , Main CPU 101) and
The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), and the game ball is displayed in the second starting port (first starting port 440). A special symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that displays variation of the second special symbol based on the approach, and
A normal game in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF so long that the time for displaying the variation of the second special symbol (for example, an average time of 1000 sec) affects the progress of the game. The second gaming state (for example, the average time of 1 sec) is shorter than the time of the variation display of the first special symbol (for example, the average time of 10 sec). A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON and the time reduction flag is set to OFF).
It is characterized by further preparing.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the second gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. , It is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the appropriate determination means is unsuitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start port (for example, the second start port). Even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the game cannot proceed without executing the specific game by the specific game executing means. (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, even if the game ball enters the starting port (for example, the second starting port), a special lottery (for example, for example) is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port. Before the result of the second special lottery) is shown (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even so, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, a small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 37-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 37-5 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A starting port provided in the game area and
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, and
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit).
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 10).
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), the start variable control means (for example, for example) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start opening. , Main CPU 101) and
Within the specific area where the specific opening is provided based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result (for example, a small hit). A specific area variable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that the game ball can easily enter (for example, receive) the game ball into the game ball.
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the reception of a game ball in the specific mouth provided in the specific area, and a second special game execution means.
Equipped with
The specific area variable control means is
It is configured so that the predetermined movable piece can be operated so that the ease of entering the game ball into the specific area may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value. The operating frequency of the movable piece is different, and the opportunity for the privilege to be given can be made different according to the set value, which makes it possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means is
The ease of entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is made different according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of normal hit is made different) of the normal symbol. By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is set. It is characterized by being performed so that it can be different depending on the situation.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is normal so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of benefits given based on the entry of the game ball into a specific area will differ according to the set set value, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means is
Ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area by making the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) different in the special lottery according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Is characterized by being performed so as to be different depending on the set value set.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is normal so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area differs according to the set set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
If it is determined by the appropriate determination means that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start opening. Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means (for example, the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without operating the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means. The main CPU 101) to be executed and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (4) above, even if the game ball enters the starting port, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is shown (for example, a special symbol). During the variable display), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result, it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable. Is configured so that the game cannot proceed before a predetermined movable piece is activated. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 37-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 37-6 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
A special game state control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 10) that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) is executed. Main CPU101) and
Probability change in the game state control means (for example, step S3169) capable of controlling the game state after the special game state is ended to an advantageous game state (for example, a high probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The main CPU101), which advances the game after setting the flag,
A counting means (for example, main) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated without being controlled by the normal gaming state after being controlled to the special gaming state. CPU101) and
Equipped with
The game state control means is
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, the special gaming state can be controlled and controlled.
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times, the gaming state after the special gaming state ends is controlled to the normal gaming state.
The specified number of times
It is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated up to a specified number of times, and this specified number of times differs depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
The specified number of times determination means
It is characterized in that the lottery for determining the specified number of times is performed so that the expected value for the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Since it differs depending on the game, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the counting means is counted even if the number of times counted by the counting means is less than the specified number of times. A game control means for controlling the number of times counted by the game so that the game cannot proceed without reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722).
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated (that is, the number of loops) without being controlled by the normal gaming state does not reach the specified number of times (that is, during the loop). ), The suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate, the game cannot be advanced without the number of loops reaching the specified number of times. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 37-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 37-7 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
With a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440) (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118). ,
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) to be executed and
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of at least executing an opening effect performed at the start of the special gaming state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special gaming state.
Equipped with
The lottery means
The higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the advantage, and the lottery is performed.
The effect control means is
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed so that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be longer as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. It is characterized by being configured to do so.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the lottery is performed in a manner in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is higher. Therefore, at a high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time while improving the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that displays variations of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
Further prepare
The lottery means
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special gaming state, a random number can be extracted based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port, and the random number can be extracted.
The appropriateness determination means is
Even when the game is controlled to the special game state, it is configured so that the suitability / unsuitability of the game information can be discriminated.
The game control means is
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game progress is not permitted to control the game so that it cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state. It is characterized by having means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even when the game is controlled to the special gaming state, the suitability / unsuitability of the gaming information may be determined. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so that security is ensured. At the same time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 37-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 37-8 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100) and a second entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110).
An approach permitting means (for example, a distribution device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any one of the plurality of entrances.
Different benefits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance (for example, if the number of rounds is different and there is a starting port below the entrance, a lottery will be held. A profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 10) that can give the player a profit-giving means (for example, whether or not it is executed) can be given to the player.
Equipped with
The entry allowance means
Among the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball is configured to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. do.

According to the game machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance is configured to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the game entertainment. Can be suitably changed.

It should be noted that "a different benefit can be given to the player when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance" means, for example, a game at the first entrance. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the big hit game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is the starting port that triggers the lottery, and the other entrance is a lottery. This is the case when it is a general winning opening that does not trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 5442, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that draws a lot based on the fact that the game ball is accepted at the starting port.
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
Game information related to the progress of the game including the information of the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). With a game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
Appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player is notified. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without giving a profit.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance but no profit has been given while the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information being played may be determined. In this case, even though there is a possibility that a profit may be given to the player, when it is determined that the game information is unsuitable in the determination of suitability / unsuitability, the game proceeds without giving the player a profit. It is configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, an approach enabling means (for example, a main for operating a condition device) for enabling the entry of a game ball at least for the first entrance and the second entrance. Further equipped with CPU101)
The profit-giving means is
When the game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined benefit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player, and the player can be given a predetermined profit.
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R jackpot game state) having a higher profit than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the player will play the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a larger profit may be given, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Will be.

According to the gaming machines of Appendices 37-1 to 37-8 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[Appendix 38]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(Second issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table, for example, an abnormality may occur in the gaming setting value or the like, and the security is perfect. Is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving security.

In order to solve the second problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 38 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 38 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) for drawing a lot based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440).
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that displays variations of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
With appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving the game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
If it is determined by the appropriateness determination means that the game information stored in the game information is inappropriate while the variation display of the symbol is being performed, it is assumed that the variation display of the symbol has been performed. The game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the suitability / unsuitability of the gaming information may be determined when the variable display of the symbol is performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is disallowed even if the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It will be possible to improve.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 38 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

[Appendix 39]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(Third issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each gaming table, changing the ball ejection tendency according to the set value does not necessarily have a light design load. It's hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 39 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 39 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A random number generating means that generates a random number within a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 that generates a random number value by executing a program), and
A random number extraction means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3073) that extracts random numbers based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
A table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) that stores a lottery table (for example, a big hit random number determination table) that defines a total random number (for example, a range of random numbers for big hit determination) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data). ,
A lottery (for example, the process of step S3118) is performed using the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means, and when the extracted random numbers are specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data), the special gaming state is controlled. Possible special game state control means and
Equipped with
The table storage means
A lottery table in which at least the number of the total random numbers is different according to the set value set by the setting change control means is stored.
The random number generation means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to generate a total random number of a number specified in the lottery table according to a set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (that is, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot determination) having more digits than the numerator (number of jackpot determination value data)). Since the jackpot probability) will be changed, it is possible to set the jackpot probability for each set value in detail compared to the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the random number for jackpot judgment as a fixed value. It will be possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that displays variations of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
When a random number is extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, an appropriateness determination means (step) for determining appropriateness / unsuitability of the total random number generated by the random number generation means by the time the variable display of the symbol is started. S3072, the main CPU 101) that performs the processing of step S3082, and
When the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, the game control means for controlling the game from proceeding (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the total random number generated by the random number generating means is determined to be unsuitable, the game is configured so as not to proceed, so that the set value is ensured while ensuring security. It is possible to set the jackpot probability for each in detail.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 39 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[Appendix 40, Appendix 41]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(Fourth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, the tendency of paying out balls for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, while the player can be suspicious because the tendency of paying out balls can be arbitrarily set. , There is a risk that the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting. There is something in it.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 40 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 40 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first starting opening 5442, second starting opening 440, general winning openings 53 to 56) provided in the game area and including a starting opening.
A privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 350) for granting a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the acceptance of a game ball in any of the plurality of winning openings.
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) capable of executing a lottery based on the fact that the game ball is accepted at the starting port.
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) at which at least a pattern variation effect performed based on the result of the lottery is performed, and
When the variable effect of the symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening among the plurality of winning openings is specified. A setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information about the set value set by the setting change control means based on the acceptance of the game ball.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, setting change control is based on the fact that a gaming ball is accepted in a specific winning opening when a symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since the setting value information about the setting value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming a suspicious demon. Further, if the pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
A specific mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3078) for determining whether or not to perform the variation effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect).
When it is determined by the specific mode determining means that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific mode, the specific winning opening determination means for randomly determining any one of the plurality of winning openings to the specific winning opening. (For example, main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by further preparing.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific winning opening is not a fixed winning opening but is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning openings, so that it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. It is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning openings are kept secret without being disclosed. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, it is set by the setting change control means. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value.
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the gaming information is stored when the symbol is varied or when the gaming ball is accepted in a specific winning opening but the set value information is not yet suggested. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the set value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the set value set by the setting change control means is used. It is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information of. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 41 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 41 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 5442, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that draws a lot based on the fact that the game ball is accepted at the starting port.
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) to be executed and
Settings for the set value set by the setting change control means based on the fact that the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port are satisfied (for example, the overflow point has reached the predetermined point). A setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the current setting value (setting value set by the setting change control means) is based on the condition that the predetermined condition related to the acceptance of the gaming ball to the starting port is satisfied. Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming a suspicious demon. In addition, the execution of the game is urged so that the game ball is accepted at the starting port. In addition, "satisfying the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port" is, for example, held because the holding limit was reached even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. It is assumed that there is no such thing, or that points are accumulated and the points reach the specified points when the game ball is not held because it was held at the upper limit even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. However, it is not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storage stored in the hold storage means, the lottery result for the hold storage and the variation display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs processing in steps S3072 and S3082) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing.
Further prepare
The game control means is
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is accepted at the start port (). For example, even if the overflow point reaches a predetermined point, the game progress disapproval means (for example, the game progress disapproval means) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. , A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S3722.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition may be satisfied if the game ball is accepted at the start port, in the determination of suitability / unsuitability of the game information performed by the game ball being accepted at the start port. If it is determined to be unsuitable, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 40 and the gaming machine of Appendix 41 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

[Appendix 42]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming setting value in which the state of a gaming element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering a ball into the entrance and the tendency of a ball to be ejected is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the tendency of ball ejection for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent the tendency of ball ejection to be uniform for each game store or game table.

(Fifth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, there is a risk that the payout management will not be easy.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 42 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 42 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set in any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
A payout means (for example, a payout device 350) that pays out a game medium based on a prize as a result of the game.
A special game execution means (for example,) capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of winning is increased based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition being a specific result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 10 and
A data aggregation means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of aggregating data related to a game medium paid out by the payout means, and
A data display control means (main CPU 101) that displays the data aggregated by the data aggregation means in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334), and
Equipped with
The data aggregation means is
All history totaling means for totaling the above data based on all game history,
It has a history totaling means for each set value that aggregates the data based on the game history for each set value.
The data display control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and / and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means can be displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to display either one or both of the data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means. Ball management can be easily performed.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 42 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

[Appendix 43]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so that the storage means for storing the effect data necessary for executing the effect can be exchanged. Is no longer necessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that it will be uninteresting just by changing the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 43 having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 43 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game is played according to the set value. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different values (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game in a game-like manner based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
Equipped with
The game control means is
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, processing of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) based on the game characteristics according to the set value set by the setting change control means.
Based on the result of the lottery, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, the jackpot game control of FIG. 10) to which a privilege corresponding to the set value set by the setting change control means is given, and a special game execution means.
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to execute a game with different game characteristics based on the setting value set by the setting change control means with one gaming machine, and the game machine management manager or the like can execute the game. It is possible to give a wide range of ways to utilize the gaming machines.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game control means is
When the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state is reached. The first game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes the game under the game characteristics (for example, ST specification) that ends the game.
When the second set value is set among the plurality of set values, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability. A second game control player (for example, main CPU 101) stage that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, probability variation loop specification).
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the game machine of (2) above, although both the game characteristics by the first game control means and the game characteristics by the second game control means are controlled in a high-probability gaming state, the first game control means is used. The high-probability game state may end halfway without continuing until the next big hit game state, and the high-probability game state is controlled to the next special game state in the game property by the second game control means. It differs greatly in that it is continuously executed until. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that are similar at first glance but are substantially different, the manager of the gaming machine, etc. can use the pachinko gaming machine in a wider range of ways. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 43 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 44-Appendix 56]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in a hall.

(7th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems such as changes will occur.

Further, since the above set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person, and convenience is also required for the management.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 44 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 44 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the command output port 106 and the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
It is characterized by having a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen that limits the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that ends the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S3301, and a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when it is determined to be YES in step S3314).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 45 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 45 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, the setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed, and the one setting value It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055) capable of transmitting the set value information of the above.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the set value information as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The display control means is
First screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 223) in which history information that does not include the set value information among the history information is displayed based on the predetermined operation. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 223) and
A second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 225) in which history information including at least the set value information is displayed on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 225).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the set value information are shown as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 223) showing the history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is displayed, and the first screen is displayed. On condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 225) showing the history information including the setting value information is configured to be displayed.

As the transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, the setting operation information and the set value information may be transmitted together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second screen display control means is
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, only when a specific condition is satisfied, a second screen showing history information including setting value information is displayed, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. It is not possible to prevent the setting value information from being viewed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, when an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The display control means is
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 46 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 46 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the command output port 106 and the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received) A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store the information as history information.
A display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation.
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command to generate an effect control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. It is characterized by having an information screen display limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes a hall menu display prohibition process in step S3316) for limiting the display of the screen.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, although the displayed information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the predetermined conditions are met, the information screen cannot be viewed, so even if an unauthorized person attempts to view it illegally, it cannot be easily viewed and security can be ensured. It becomes.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 47 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 47 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the command output port 106 and the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
A normal screen (for example, a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine administrator) can be viewed only. A display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which history information is displayed on the display means. , Has,
The display control means is
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on at least when the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). It is characterized by being configured to be displayed in.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine administrator). An information screen that can be viewed only is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and at least the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated. If not, it is configured not to be displayed. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing.

By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being able to be viewed by an unspecified person when, for example, only the player who has registered as a member can view it, but as long as the member is registered, it may not be possible to view it. Since anyone can view it (that is, if they have the intention to view it), it can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by a person having authority such as a game machine administrator.

Further, since the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen limiting means for limiting the display of the information screen during the execution of the game (for example, NO in step S3301). It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201) that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined, and a sub CPU 201) that executes the process of step S3315 when it is determined to be YES in step S3314.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 48 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 48 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the command output port 106 and the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
A display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation, and
It has an information erasing means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes processing such as step S3306 and step S33160) that erases the history information from the second storage means when receiving a specific operation.
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to accept the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the "clear" item) is accepted, the history information is deleted, and the specific operation is specific. It can be accepted only when the conditions are met (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to delete the history of changing the setting value, confirming the setting value, or browsing for the purpose of fraud, such deletion cannot be executed unless specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraud history from being intentionally deleted. In addition, for those who have authority, the history information can be deleted, which can enhance convenience.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
It is possible to further transmit the setting value information about the above-mentioned one setting value.
The second storage means is
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means is
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 225) in which the setting value information is included in the history information.
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that the history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The information erasing means is
When erasing the history information from the second storage means, it is characterized in that only a part of the history information stored in the second storage means can be erased as the history information.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), since the authorized person can select the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means, the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed in association with one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information (see, for example, FIG. 225). The information erasing means may delete the associated history information (for example, for each No. shown in FIG. 225), or may delete each item of the information of a plurality of items included in the history information (for example, for each item). For example, all of the date and time items, the operation type items, and the set value items shown in FIG. 225 may be deleted).

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 49 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 49 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the command output port 106 and the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The setting operation information is
It is information that can distinguish the operation type whether it is the information indicating that the change of the one set value has been performed or the information indicating that the confirmation of the one set value has been performed. ,
The display control means is
A list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are shown as history information regardless of the type of the setting operation information.
It is possible to selectively display a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information corresponding to a specific type among the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, regardless of the type of setting operation information, the information screen of the list in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are shown as history information, and the setting operation information correspond to a specific type. Since the setting operation information, the time information, and the specific information screen in which the setting value information is shown as history information can be selectively displayed, the convenience of the operator (for example, the gaming machine administrator) is enhanced. Can be done.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, when an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The transmission means is
It is possible to further transmit the setting value information about the above-mentioned one setting value.
The second storage means is
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means is
It is characterized in that an information screen including the set value information in the history information can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 50 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 50 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the command output port 106 and the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not shown, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen in which the history information is shown (for example, a hall menu screen). For example, a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen) and
The information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S3312, step S3313 or step S3314), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. Information screen display limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when it is determined to be YES in step S3312, step S3313, or step S3314).
The second storage means is
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, the browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Even if the information screen is displayed a plurality of times by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is restricted, it is regarded as one browsing history. It is characterized by being configured to be memorized.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, although the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

Further, the information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it is recorded as one setting history information. Will be done. This makes it difficult for a person who changes settings, confirms settings, browses information screens, etc. for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create a large number of browsing histories. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or checking the set value, browsing is performed multiple times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). The effect is great because it is possible to do so and therefore it is easy to intentionally create a large number of histories.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 51 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 51 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example,) that can distinguish whether the one set value has been changed or the one set value has been confirmed (for example). It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055) capable of transmitting a setting operation command).
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can be stored as history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information.
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not shown, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen in which the history information is shown (for example, a hall menu screen). For example, it has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen).
The second storage means is
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Further, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one setting value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed, while the above-mentioned browsing history information is displayed.
When the setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud by using a setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but regarding fraud involving a setting confirmation history. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. In addition, it is considered that the person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the settings rather than browsing after changing the settings. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated and one setting value is confirmed and the information screen is browsed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are both. Is displayed, and when one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. As a result, the amount of history information displayed on the display means can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the total number of histories from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud.

In addition, "when the change of the one setting value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, only the browsing history information is displayed among the setting change history information and the browsing history information" is ". Of the setting change history information and the browsing history information, only the browsing history information is stored in the second storage means, so that only the browsing history information is displayed. ”And“ Both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it may be stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information may be displayed by the control by the display control means among these information, but the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means. Therefore, the former is preferable.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 52 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 52 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example). , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the command output port 106 and the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
A display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation, and
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, history erasing means (for example, a history erasing means) that executes control to erase at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. , And a sub CPU 201) that executes the process of step S3306.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the work RAM 203), but since there is an upper limit to the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means. If the amount of history information is large, there is a possibility that the history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to be recorded in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, new history information is recorded by erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. It prevents situations such as being unable to do so.

In addition, "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" is the second. By overwriting the new history information with respect to the history information already stored in the storage means, the history information may be deleted as a result, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. If there is a possibility that the amount may exceed a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be deleted and then the history information may be stored. Further, even when new history information is stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means when there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the second storage means. At least a part of the existing history information may be deleted.

In addition, the setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. It is the set value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that ends the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S3301, and a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when it is determined to be YES in step S3314). ..

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 53 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 53 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed or the setting value of the one is confirmed. A setting state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) for controlling the setting confirmation state that can be performed.
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting change state and / and the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the setting change state and / and the setting can be displayed. It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of restricting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state is completed.
The display control means is
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without limiting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends (for example, step S3310, step S311). It is possible to execute the processing of
Even if the setting change state ends, it is possible to control so that the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends. The process of step S311 to step S3314 can be repeated).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information can be browsed, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, security is ensured that, for example, an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. Moreover, at least when controlled to the setting change state, the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as the predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time elapses after the setting change state ends. It is also possible to improve the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
At least when the one setting value is changed, the setting value information about the one setting value can also be transmitted.
The display control means is
It is characterized in that, in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, the information screen in which the setting value information about the one setting value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when displaying the history screen, the setting value information about one setting value is also displayed, so that a person with authority can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The display control means is
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, when the receiving means receives specific information related to the progress of the game, the information screen is displayed. It is characterized by having a forced termination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when it is determined to be YES in step S3314).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forced when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means. Because it ends in a targeted manner, the execution of the game is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to secure the convenience of operation by an authorized person and suppress fraud by an unauthorized third party while ensuring the state in which the game can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
In the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, it is configured so that it can be grasped that the game can be executed without disturbing the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example). , While the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the LED 25 is fully lit in white, while when the setting change or setting confirmation is completed, the LED 25 is fully lit in red).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed without preventing the predetermined operation related to the information screen from being performed. Since it is possible to grasp that the game is to be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed without being able to grasp the game even though the game can be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 54 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 54 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
In the setting state, there is a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen, a hall menu item screen) on which various information can be displayed on the display means. death,
The information screen is
A history screen showing the history information (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) and a non-history screen (for example, a hall) in which the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. Has multiple information screens, including at least (menu screen)
The display control means is
A screen updating means (for example, a step) for controlling the display of another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while the information screen of any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display means. Sub-CPU 201) that executes processing such as S33051, step S33057, and step S33073, and
When the non-history screen is displayed in the setting state, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, the hall menu display process in step S302 is executed. When none of the items is selected in the process of step S3303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed.) On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or longer. For example, it is characterized by having a specific display control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when it is determined to be YES in step S33072) that controls the display of the history screen to be terminated.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed as history information, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by viewing the history screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

In addition, the non-history screen where the history information is not shown is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed, but the history screen where the history information is shown ends if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer. do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed by an unauthorized third party. In addition, the above-mentioned "continuous display" includes temporarily ending the display and redisplaying. That is, it is important whether the display is displayed or the display is not performed even when the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
At least when the one setting value is changed, the setting value information about the one setting value can also be transmitted.
The display control means is
When displaying the history screen on the display means in the setting state, the setting value information about the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when displaying the history screen, the setting value information about one setting value is also displayed, so that a person with authority can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 55 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 55 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A first control means having one storage means (for example, a main control circuit 100) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the first storage means, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the specific operating means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed is entered. A setting change state control means to be controlled (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting change information (for example, the setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is changed, and the setting value for the one setting value. When the erasing process for erasing the information (for example, the set value information after the change when the set value is changed) and the information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055) capable of transmitting information indicating that (for example, an initialization command).
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting change information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) that can store as history information.
An information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information on the display means at least in the setting change state.
Erasing execution information notifying means capable of notifying that the erasing process has been executed (for example, the display control circuit 104, the voice control circuit 205 for controlling the voice output of the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 for controlling the lighting mode of the LED 25). And have
The erasure execution information notification means is
When the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the first aspect (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) can be grasped that the erasing process is executed. The first notification means (sub CPU201) that notifies by the character display such as "RAM has been cleared", the voice output such as "RAM has been cleared", and the LED 25 is fully lit in red).
It is more difficult to grasp than the first aspect that the erasing process is executed so that the visibility of the information screen is not obstructed when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state. A second notification means (for example, not displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16 but only a voice output such as "the setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized" and all red lighting of the LED 25). It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201) and.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least the information screen in which the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information are shown as history information can be browsed, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, when there is a possibility that the set value has been changed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the above fraud has been committed. It will be possible to do. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, or is controlled by the setting change state. May be executed. When the erasing process is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the erasing process is executed by a third party who does not have the authority, for example, because it is notified in the first mode that the erasing process can be grasped. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is done. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one setting value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second aspect, which is more difficult to grasp than the first aspect. Further, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the information screen showing the history information is displayed, but in the second aspect, the visibility of the information screen is not obstructed. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A voice output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined sound is further provided, and the sound is further provided.
The second control means is
Further, it has a voice control means (for example, a voice control circuit 206) capable of controlling the voice output from the voice output means.
The first notification means is
The fact that the erasing process has been executed is notified by using both the display means and the voice output means.
The second notification means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the erasing process has been executed by using only the voice output means among the display means and the voice output means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, both the display means and the voice output means are used to notify. Therefore, it is possible to clearly know that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control to the setting change state, only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means is used for notification, so that the visibility of the information screen is hindered. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the erasing process from being performed, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, an unauthorized third party while improving convenience.

According to the gaming machines of the present inventions of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[Appendix 56]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in a hall.

(8th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as changes in the control board and unauthorized replacement of the control board.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the eighth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 56 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 56 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the setting operation means is operated, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of the setting state control means (for example, step S3024 or step S3026) for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. )When,
A storage means (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information about the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and transmission means capable of transmitting at least the set value information about the one set value (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 or step S3055). And have
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the set value information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
Based on the reception of the set value information by the receiving means, the suitability of the one set value is determined by using the received set value information and the set value information received prior to the set value information. Setting determination means (for example, sub CPU 201 for determining whether or not the previous setting value and the current setting value match) and
It has an abnormal time processing execution means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes a set value abnormal time processing) that executes an abnormal time processing when the setting determination means determines that the one set value is inappropriate. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability of one set value by using the set value information of one set value transmitted from the first control means a plurality of times. It becomes possible. That is, even if it is possible for the first control means to determine the suitability of one set value, for example, when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value is normal. Regardless of whether it is abnormal or abnormal, the first control means determines that one set value is normal. Therefore, by enabling the second control means to determine the suitability of one set value, for example, even when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value can be determined. It is possible to immediately discover the suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
It is also possible to send setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the above-mentioned one setting value has been changed or confirmed.
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage means that can be stored as history information. Means (eg, work RAM 203) and
Having a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

When the transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means transmits both the setting operation information and the set value information, these information may be transmitted together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about one set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 56 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[Appendix 57]

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a plurality of functions with one device has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, in order to be pressed by a player and to have an impact on the player, the pachinko machine is designed to jump out to a position that greatly protrudes from the main body of the game machine regardless of the player's operation. The push button that was used is disclosed.

(Ninth issue)

By the way, when checking the operation of accessories, various sensors, etc., the maintainability is lowered for a device having a plurality of functions, such as a push button described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505. There is concern about the risk.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions. be.

In order to solve the ninth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 57 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 57 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
A character that can be operated based on the result of the lottery (for example, a character 1000) and
A compound means having a plurality of functions in one (for example, an effect button 62) and
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421, etc.) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
At least, the maintenance item determining means (for example, the process of step S33084) for determining the maintenance item to be executed among the plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the accessory, the function confirmation of the composite means, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Executable sub CPU 201) and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, FIG. 231) in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the composite means, and detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected can be selected. A maintenance screen display control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S33083) that displays at least a maintenance screen), and
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means is
The combined means having one but having a plurality of functions is configured to be displayable so that an item can be selected for each function on the selection screen (for example, the item of "effect button 1" in FIG. 231). It is displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, for a compound means having a plurality of functions even though it is one, an item can be selected for each function on a selection screen in which one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The combined means
At least, it has an operation function and an effect function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery.
The maintenance item determination means is
When the operation function item (for example, the effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the effect function item (for example, the effect button 2) is selected. In some cases, it is characterized in that it can be determined as a maintenance item related to the effect function.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is selected. Since it is configured to be decidable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 57 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[Appendix 58]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a gaming machine equipped with a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery has been known. There is.

As this type of gaming machine, as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of a lottery, a gaming machine including a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory having different drive sources is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273 (see No. 2018-15273).

(10th issue)
By the way, in the gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273, which includes a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is especially true when multiple movable objects with different drive sources can interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources are provided. It is to provide a game machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 58 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 58 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
The first accessory and the second accessory, which can operate based on the result of the lottery and have different drive sources,
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421, etc.) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
At least, a maintenance item determining means (for example, a step) for determining a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Sub CPU 201) capable of executing the processing of S33084 and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, a selection screen in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected can be selected. , The maintenance screen display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S33083) that displays at least the maintenance screen (maintenance screen of FIG. 231).
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means is
Not only the operation check of the first accessory and the second accessory alone, but also the operation check when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated is selected on the selection screen. It is configured to be displayable so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of "directing accessory 1 + 2" in FIG. 231 is displayed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, not only the operation check of each of the first and second bonuses independently, but also the operation check when both the first and second bonuses are operated. Can be selected on the selection screen, so it is possible to reduce the troublesome maintenance work.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The maintenance screen display control means is
It is configured so that the operation check when the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Direction accessory 1 → 2" in FIG. 231. Items etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since the operation check when the machine is operated can be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesome maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a third accessory that can operate based on the result of the lottery and has a different drive source from both the first accessory and the second accessory is provided.
The maintenance screen display control means is
When the first accessory and / and the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory and / and the second accessory The selection screen is configured to be displayable in a manner in which neither the third accessory nor the third accessory can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of "directing accessory 1 + 3" in FIG. 231 cannot be selected. )
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility that the first accessory and / or the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory is displayed on the selection screen. Since it is not possible to select an mode in which either the 1st accessory or / and the 2nd accessory and the 3rd accessory are operated, it is possible to improve maintainability.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 58 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[Appendix 59, Appendix 60]

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in a hall.

(11th issue)

By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the ball ejection. However, for example, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to the occurrence of power failure or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 59 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 59 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
Equipped with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the state control means (for example, a state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed). , The main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S3024.
The state control means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is controlled to the setting change state. It is possible to restore power in the setting change state when it is possible or the power supply is stopped (for example, when NO is determined in step S3021, the process of step S3024 is executed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if, for example, a power failure occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, the setting change state is controlled or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored in the state where the setting is changed when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is maintained properly. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The control means is
When the setting operation means is turned off after the setting value of the one is changed in the setting change state, the setting value fixing means for fixing the setting value of the one to the set value after the change (for example). , Further has a main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S32480.
The set value fixing means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. After that, when the OFF operation is further performed, the above-mentioned one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is made. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation where the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 60 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 60 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means having the means (for example, the main control circuit 100) and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
Equipped with
The control means is
The setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed and the one setting in the state after the power is turned on according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing processing such as step S3024, step S3026, and step S3028) that can control any of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state in which a value can be confirmed. death,
The state control means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, the control is performed in one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. (For example, the processes of steps S3022 to S3028 are executed).
When the power supply was stopped in the setting change state and then turned on, the setting controllable state or the power supply was stopped regardless of the operation state of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. It is possible to restore power in the state of changing the setting at that time (for example, when NO is determined in step S3021, the process of step S3024 is executed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, while ensuring the convenience of the operator. That is, since the setting confirmation state is a state in which only one setting value can be confirmed and one setting value cannot be changed, for example, even if an unintended power failure occurs, one setting value is not possible. It is unlikely that it will affect. On the other hand, since the setting change state is a state in which one setting value can be changed, for example, if an unintended power failure occurs, the one setting value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is turned on after that, one of a plurality of states is set according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. By recovering the power, the convenience of the operator is ensured, and the situation where the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The state control means is
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, the setting is controlled to the changed state.
The control means is
When the setting operation means is turned off after the setting value of the one is changed in the setting change state, the setting value fixing means for fixing the setting value of the one to the set value after the change is further provided. Have and
The set value fixing means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. After that, when the OFF operation is further performed, the above-mentioned one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is made. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation where the set value is not set.

According to the gaming machine of the appendix 59 and the gaming machine of the appendix 60 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining the set value.

[Appendix 61]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in a hall.

(12th issue)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the ball ejection. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 61 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 61 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
Equipped with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the setting change state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) and
Appropriate determination means for determining the suitability / non-suitability of the information stored in the storage means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3721) and
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is inappropriate, the abnormality control means (for example, the process of steps S3722 to S3727) for controlling the abnormal state (for example, the state in which the processes of steps S3722 to S3727 are executed) is controlled. Main CPU 101) that executes
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state and the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed. It is controlled so that it cannot be controlled (for example, the process of step S31790 is not executed when it is determined to be NO in step S31770), while the game is controlled so that the game can be executed when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on (for example, step). It is characterized by having a game execution means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S17) that executes the process of step S31790 when it is determined to be YES in S31770 and YES in step S31780).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity, and the power supply is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In that case, even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, the game cannot be executed, and the game can be executed when the setting is changed after the power is turned on. .. When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that the one setting value information stored in the storage means is abnormal, so only when the setting change state is controlled so that the one setting value is always changed. The game can be executed and the set value is maintained properly.

According to the gaming machine of the appendix 61 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining the set value.

[Appendix 62]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in a hall.

(13th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems such as changes will occur.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 62 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 62 is
A first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
A setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the above-mentioned one setting value, and
When the power is turned on, a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on with the setting operation means turned on (for example, the setting key is ON), the state control means for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing processes such as step S3024, step S3026, and step S3028) and
Although the game cannot be executed in the set state, the game is executed in the setting process of step S3020 in which the game execution means that can be controlled so that the game can be executed when the set state is completed (for example, the game return process of step S3030 has not been executed yet). When the setting process of step S3020 is completed, the game return process of step S3030 is executed to execute the power-on process that enables the game to be executed, although it cannot be done.
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S3055.
The second control means is
A receiving means (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, the setting operation effect executing means (for example,) that can execute the effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed in the set state in which the game cannot be executed. , A sub CPU 201) that executes control to turn on the LED 25 in red via the LED control circuit 206).
The setting operation effect executing means is
Even if the set state ends and the game can be executed, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed until the predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a set state in which the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the set state is completed and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect such fraud when the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed illegally, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The setting operation effect executing means is
After the setting state is completed and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the first set value has been performed can be visually grasped as the state in which the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable in.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner in which it is possible to visually grasp that the gaming is in a state where the game can be executed, one is performed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The state control means is
It has a setting change state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed.
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a storage means that can be stored as history information (for example, work RAM 203),
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state is completed. Further, it has a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of limiting the display.
The display control means is
When the receiving means receives the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses. The information screen can be displayed (for example, the processes of steps S3310 to S3314 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the set state, and the display of the information screen is restricted when the set state is completed. Therefore, in the set state, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value by browsing the information screen showing the history information. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales. Furthermore, while the display of the information screen is restricted when the setting state ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display an information screen. Therefore, even if the fraud is committed, it is possible to easily detect the fraud and to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the gaming machine of the appendix 62 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[Appendix 63-1 to Appendix 63-26]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that variablely displays a first special symbol when a game ball wins a prize in a first starting opening, and variablely displays a second special symbol when a game ball wins a prize in a second starting opening. Then, when it is displayed that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a specific result, it is controlled to a special gaming state which is advantageous to the player.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine using a function of simultaneously performing a variable display of a first special symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol is disclosed. For example, a specified number of variable displays are performed in a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which the small hit probability of the second special symbol is higher than that of the first special symbol, the lottery probability is high, and the winning of the first starting port is facilitated. Then, a gaming machine capable of increasing the number of balls to be played is disclosed by ending the facilitation of winning a prize at the first starting port and shifting to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state so that a small hit game can be easily executed. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800).

The gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-174800 has a new game property that utilizes a function of simultaneously performing a variable display of a first special symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol. , Further, a gaming machine having new playability is desired.

Each of the inventions of Supplementary note 63-1 to Supplementary note 63-26 has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 63-1 is
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
The first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs the first lottery (for example, the first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, and
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, and
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 of FIG. 254) is used. ) Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to the prize ball or the winning opening to which the prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, a small hit game). Main CPU101) and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
An effect control means that can execute a predetermined effect,
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, but the prize is won. An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is less than 1 due to the inhibition of acceptance of the game balls into the mouth (for example, a high-probability short-time gaming state). When,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning opening becomes easier than in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the game ball is launched per unit time. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state.
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state at a timing that may differ each time when the advantageous gaming state is controlled.
The effect control means is
When the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, the timing for shifting to the specific game state (the number of digested time-saving games, the specified number of times) is used by using the time provided for executing the specific game. It is characterized by being able to execute an effect that suggests (the number of remaining times of the time-saving game) by subtracting the number of time-saving games.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the advantageous gaming state, although the specific game is frequently executed based on the acceptance of the gaming ball to the second starting opening, the gaming ball to the winning opening is executed. It may cause discomfort to the player because the acceptance is hindered. Therefore, when the specific game is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the time devoted to the execution of the specific game is used to give an effect that suggests the timing of transition to the specific gaming state, which may be given to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability such as reducing pleasure.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

In addition, the "effect suggesting the timing of transition to the specific game state" is, for example, the number of remaining time-saving games obtained by subtracting the number of digested time-saving games from the specified number of times (determined time-saving number of times). The mode is not limited as long as the timing of transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state can be grasped.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 63-2 is
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
(With the first holding means capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the first starting memory based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first starting port).
The first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs the first lottery (for example, the first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, and
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, and
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 of FIG. 254) is used. ) Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to the prize ball or the winning opening to which the prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, a small hit game). Main CPU101) and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
An effect control means that can execute a predetermined effect,
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, but the prize is won. An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is less than 1 due to the inhibition of acceptance of the game balls into the mouth (for example, a high-probability short-time gaming state). When,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning opening becomes easier than in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the game ball is launched per unit time. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state.
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state at a timing that may differ each time when the advantageous gaming state is controlled.
The effect control means is
When the specific game is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the effect determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for determining whether or not to execute the timing suggestion effect suggesting the transition timing to the specific game state, and
When it is determined by the effect determining means that the timing suggestion effect is to be executed, the timing suggestion effect for executing the effect suggesting the timing to shift to the specific game state by using the time provided for executing the specific game. It has an execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) and
The production determining means is
It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to execute the timing suggestion effect so that the execution frequency of the timing suggestion effect may differ depending on the transition timing (for example, the number of time reductions).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the advantageous gaming state, although the specific game is frequently executed based on the acceptance of the gaming ball to the second starting opening, the gaming ball to the winning opening is executed. It may cause discomfort to the player because the acceptance is hindered. Therefore, when the specific game is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the time used for executing the specific game is used to give an effect that suggests the timing of transition to the specific gaming state, which may be given to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability such as reducing pleasure.

By the way, in the specific game state, the specific game is executed at a high frequency based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port. Therefore, if the timing suggestion effect is executed frequently, the interest may be lowered. Therefore, the execution frequency of the execution lottery of the timing suggestion effect is determined as a predetermined number of times (determined) that may differ each time if the transition condition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state (for example, if the digestion of the time-saving game is the transition condition). By making it different according to the number of time reductions)), it is possible to execute a well-balanced timing suggestion effect. Furthermore, the player can estimate the specified number of times from the execution frequency of the timing suggestion effect, and it is interesting to compare the transition timing to the specific game state suggested by the timing suggestion effect with the specified number of times estimated by himself / herself. You can also give.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

In addition, the "effect suggesting the timing of transition to the specific game state" is, for example, the number of remaining time-saving games obtained by subtracting the number of digested time-saving games from the specified number of times (determined time-saving number of times). The mode is not limited as long as the timing of transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state can be grasped.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-3 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or data in place of it as a result of a game performed by launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
The first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs the first lottery (for example, the first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, and
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, and
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 of FIG. 254) is used. ) Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to the prize ball or the winning opening to which the prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, a small hit game). Main CPU101) and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
An effect control means that can execute a predetermined effect,
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, but the prize is won. An advantageous game state (for example, a high-probability short-time game state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1 due to the inhibition of the acceptance of the game ball into the mouth. ,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning opening becomes easier than in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the game ball is launched per unit time. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state.
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state at a timing that may differ each time when the advantageous gaming state is controlled.
The effect control means is
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, an index (for example, a determined number of time reductions) that can suggest the transition timing to the specific gaming state is displayed, and when the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state is performed, the said An index display means (for example, sub CPU 201) that changes (for example, subtracts) the index so as to approach the specific mode each time the variable display is performed so that the index becomes a specific mode (for example, 0). ).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is not known at what timing the transition to the specific gaming state is made, and the player becomes suspicious and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, an index that can suggest the timing of transition to the specific gaming state is displayed so that the index becomes the specific mode when shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state, and approaches the specific mode each time the variable display is performed. By changing the index to a specific mode, the player can grasp that the index shifts to a specific gaming state when the index becomes a specific mode, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The index display means is
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, an index that can suggest a timing different from the transition timing to the specific gaming state is displayed as an initial index, and when a specific condition is satisfied separately from the variable display (for example). It is characterized by having a specific index display means (for example, sub CPU 201) that changes the index so as to approach the specific mode even when the mission is achieved.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, not only the variable display is performed to wait for the index to approach a specific mode, but also the index changes when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the index is changed from the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to enhance the gaming interest until the transition to a specific gaming state.

In addition, "timing different from the transition timing to the specific gaming state" is defined when, for example, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, a determined time reduction number). It means the number of falsehoods that is different from the number of times.

Further, "changing the index" includes not only a change approaching a specific mode (for example, a change approaching 0) but also a change moving away from the specific mode (for example, a change moving away from 0). For example, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a mission is achieved), the index is changed so as to approach a specific mode, and when the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, when a mission fails), the specific mode is used. The distant index may be changed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above
Based on the fact that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed before the transition timing is reached in the advantageous gaming state to derive the special result, and the special result is derived. When the executed special game is completed and the game is further controlled to the advantageous game state,
The specific index display means is
Instead of the initial index, it is characterized in that it can be continuously displayed from the index displayed when the special result was derived.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, a special result is derived and a special game is executed before the transition timing is reached (for example, before the determined time-saving game is digested) in the advantageous gaming state, and this special game is executed. When is finished and controlled to the advantageous gaming state again, it is continuously displayed from the index displayed when the special result is derived. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the aspect of the index changes from the continuation of the previous time, and the loss that may occur due to the special game being executed before the index changes to the specific mode in the previous advantageous gaming state. It is possible to reduce the feeling.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-4 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
The first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs the first lottery (for example, the first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, and
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, and
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to a prize ball or a winning opening to which prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main). CPU101) and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, an effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling so that a specific effect is performed. When,
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
Although the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, but the above-mentioned An advantageous gaming state (for example, a high-probability short-time gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is less than 1 due to the inhibition of acceptance of the game balls into the winning opening. )When,
When the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the unit time is obtained because the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning opening becomes easier than in the advantageous gaming state. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls per is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state.
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift to the specific gaming state after the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times that may differ each time when the advantageous gaming state is controlled. ,
The effect control means is
When the special result (for example, a big hit) is derived during the variable display of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed as the last variable display of the specified number of times. It is characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing the same effect as the specific effect that can be performed or an effect that is difficult to distinguish (for example, a reach effect).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state and control after the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed as the last variable display of the specified number of times, a specific effect that can be performed when a special result is derived during the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability, such as performing the same effect as or an effect that is indistinguishable from a specific effect. In particular, the variable display at the end of the specified number of times suggests that there is a possibility of shifting to a specific gaming state, and it is possible to arouse the player's willingness to play. In addition, normally, there is no guarantee that a specific effect is always executed in an advantageous gaming state or a specific gaming state, but the same effect as the specific effect or an indistinguishable effect is executed in the final variable display of the specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 for determining a time saving number of times) for determining the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified times.
The specific effect executing means is
Not limited to the specified number of times determined by the specified number of times determining means, the specific effect is produced during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at at least one specified number of times among the plurality of specified times. It is characterized by being configured in a viable manner.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times is determined to be one of a plurality of specified times. In addition, the same effect as a specific effect or an effect that is difficult to distinguish is not limited to the determined specified number of times, but is executed during the variable display of the special symbol at least one of a plurality of specified times, so that each time. , It becomes possible to incite the player, and the game of the specified number of times can be a very hot game for the player.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
For the special game,
As a special game executed when the first special result is derived, a first special game to which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data is given (for example, a big hit game of 8R) and
As a special game executed when the second special result is derived, a second special game (for example, a big hit of 2R) in which the prize ball or the prize ball data given is less than that of the first special game. Games) and are included,
The effect control means is
When the first special result may be derived, the first special effect executing means capable of executing the first special effect and the first special effect executing means.
When the second special result may be derived, the second special effect executing means capable of executing the second special effect and the second special effect executing means.
Have,
The specific effect executing means is
The specific effect is performed in the same manner as the second special effect or in a manner indistinguishable from the appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state, the specific gaming is specified in the same manner as when the second special game may be executed or in an appearance indistinguishable manner. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may occur due to the fact that the game is not a special game when the game is changed from the advantageous game state to the specific game state.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-5 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to a prize ball or a winning opening to which prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main). CPU101) and
A game state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first start storage and / and the second start memory stored in the first holding means are described. Preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not a special result can be derived and whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port is the same. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) that is higher than the normal gaming state,
It is configured to be controllable in any of multiple gaming states, including at least
The effect control means is
In the specific gaming state, the specific second start memory stored by the second holding means and the other second start memory stored next to the first second start memory are each specified. When it is determined by the prior determination means that the condition can be satisfied and the special result can be derived, it is shown as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is characterized by having a series of effect executing means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects (for example, a premier effect) capable of performing.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is determined by the prior determination means that the specific game and the special game are executed in the specific game state, the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as a series of productions that can be made to look as if. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game. Since it is possible to give out a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, it is possible to enhance the game interest. It becomes.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

In addition, the statements "a specific condition can be satisfied" and "a special result can be derived" include the possibility that the specific condition may not be satisfied and the special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery result of the other is "special result". Even if it is, it is taken into consideration that a loss may be displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect control means is
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the special result may be derived, special during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A special effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing the effect (for example, reach effect), and
After the special game is started, an interval effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an interval effect between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game, and
Have,
The series of effect execution means is
After the specific game is executed, the special effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory for which it is determined by the prior determination means that the special result is derived. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in the same manner as the interval effect or in an appearance indistinguishable form without executing the effect.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory for which the fact that the special result is derived is determined by the prior determination means, the special effect is normally performed. Where it is executed, the series of effect executing means is during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory in which it is determined by the prior determination means that the special result is derived after the specific game is executed. , Since the effect is executed in the same manner as the interval effect or in an appearance indistinguishable form without executing the special effect, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. ..

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-6 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to a prize ball or a winning opening to which prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main). CPU101) and
A game state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first start storage and / and the second start memory stored in the first holding means are described. Preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not a special result can be derived and whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port is the same. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) that is higher than the normal gaming state,
It is configured to be controllable in any of multiple gaming states, including at least
The effect control means is
In the specific gaming state, a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means, and the second start memory and the special one in which the specific condition can be satisfied are stored in the plurality of second start memories. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that both the second start memory from which the result of the above can be derived is included, it is as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is characterized by having a series of effect executing means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects that can be shown (for example, a premier effect).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific gaming state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second starting memories. It is determined prior to the second lottery whether or not it can be done and whether or not a specific condition can be satisfied. Then, in the plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means, both a starting memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and a starting memory in which the special result can be derived are included. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as a series of productions that can make it appear as if it is one advantageous game in a specific game and a special game when it is determined to be. It becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game. Since it is possible to give out a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, it is possible to enhance the game interest. It becomes.

Further, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is set when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

Further, the second start memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and the second start memory in which a special result can be derived do not need to be continuously stored in the second holding means, for example, a specific condition can be obtained. A loss and a pre-determined start-up memory may be included between the start-up memory that can be established and the start-up memory from which a special result can be derived.

In addition, the statements "a specific condition can be satisfied" and "a special result can be derived" include the possibility that the specific condition may not be satisfied and the special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery result of the other is "special result". Even if it is, it is taken into consideration that a loss may be displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect control means is
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the special result may be derived, special during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A special effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing the effect (for example, reach effect), and
After the special game is started, an interval effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an interval effect between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game, and
Have,
The series of effect execution means is
After the specific game is executed, the special effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory for which it is determined by the prior determination means that the special result is derived. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in the same manner as the interval effect or in an appearance indistinguishable form without executing the effect.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory for which the fact that the special result is derived is determined by the prior determination means, the special effect is normally performed. Where it is executed, the series of effect executing means is during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory in which it is determined by the prior determination means that the special result is derived after the specific game is executed. , Since the effect is executed in the same manner as the interval effect or in an appearance indistinguishable form without executing the special effect, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. ..

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-7 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to a prize ball or a winning opening to which prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main). CPU101) and
A game state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first start storage and / and the second start memory stored in the first holding means are described. Preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not a special result can be derived and whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port is the same. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) that is higher than the normal gaming state,
It is configured to be controllable in any of multiple gaming states, including at least
The effect control means is
In the specific gaming state, a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means, and the second start memory and the special one in which the specific condition can be satisfied are stored in the plurality of second start memories. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that both the second start memory from which the result of the above can be derived is included, it is as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It has a series of effect executing means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects that can be shown (for example, a premier effect).
The series of effect execution means is
When it is determined by the prior determination means that the first start memory stored by the first holding means does not include a start memory from which the special result can be derived, the series of effects It is characterized by being configured to perform.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific gaming state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second starting memories. It is determined prior to the second lottery whether or not it can be done and whether or not a specific condition can be satisfied. Then, in the plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means, both a starting memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and a starting memory in which the special result can be derived are included. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as a series of productions that can make it appear as if it is one advantageous game in a specific game and a special game when it is determined to be. It becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game. Since it is possible to give out a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, it is possible to enhance the game interest. It becomes.

By the way, in the case of performing a series of effects that can be made to appear as one advantageous game in a specific game and a special game, the second start memory in which a special result can be derived even though the series of effects is started. Before the "big hit" is derived, there is a possibility that the first special symbol may be variablely displayed and a special result may be derived. Therefore, by executing a series of effects when it is determined by the prior determination means that the first start memory stored by the first holding means does not include the start memory from which a special result can be derived. , I am trying to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The second start memory from which a specific condition can be satisfied and the second start memory from which a special result can be derived do not need to be continuously stored in the second holding means. For example, a specific condition can be used. A loss and a pre-determined start-up memory may be included between the start-up memory that can be established and the start-up memory from which a special result can be derived.

In addition, the statements "a specific condition can be satisfied" and "a special result can be derived" include the possibility that the specific condition may not be satisfied and the special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery result of the other is "special result". Even if it is, it is taken into consideration that a loss may be displayed.

Further, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is set when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect control means is
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the special result may be derived, special during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A special effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing the effect (for example, reach effect), and
After the special game is started, an interval effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an interval effect between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game, and
Have,
The series of effect execution means is
After the specific game is executed, the special effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory for which it is determined by the prior determination means that the special result is derived. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in the same manner as the interval effect or in an appearance indistinguishable form without executing the effect.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory for which the fact that the special result is derived is determined by the prior determination means, the special effect is normally performed. Where it is executed, the series of effect executing means is during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory in which it is determined by the prior determination means that the special result is derived after the specific game is executed. , Since the effect is executed in the same manner as the interval effect or in an appearance indistinguishable form without executing the special effect, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. ..

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-8 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to a prize ball or a winning opening to which prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main). CPU101) and
A game state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first start storage and / and the second start memory stored in the first holding means are described. Preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not a special result can be derived and whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port is the above. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) that is higher than the normal gaming state,
It is configured to be controllable in any of multiple gaming states, including at least
The special results mentioned above
The first special result in which the derivation probability of the special result is controlled to a relatively low gaming state after the special game is executed, and the special result after the special game is executed. Includes a second special result in which the probability of deriving is controlled to a relatively high gaming state, as well as
The pre-determination means is
When it is determined that the special result is derived, it can also be determined whether the special result is the first special result or the second special result.
The effect control means is
In the specific gaming state, a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means, and the specific second start memory and the specific second start memory in which the specific condition can be satisfied are stored in the plurality of second start memories. Whether the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game when it is determined by the pre-determination means that both the special second start memory from which the special result can be derived is included. It has a series of effect executing means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects (for example, a premier effect) that can be made to look like.
The series of effect execution means is
When the special second start memory is determined by the prior determination means to be the second special result, first of all, an effect indicating that the special second start memory is the first special result. Is performed, and during the variable display of the second special symbol for the special second start memory, a promotion effect indicating that the first special result has been promoted to the second special result can be executed. It is characterized by being done.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific gaming state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second starting memories. It is determined prior to the second lottery whether or not it can be done and whether or not a specific condition can be satisfied. Then, in the plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means, both a starting memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and a starting memory in which the special result can be derived are included. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as a series of productions that can make it appear as if it is one advantageous game in a specific game and a special game when it is determined to be. It becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game. Since it is possible to give out a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, it is possible to enhance the game interest. It becomes.

By the way, when a series of productions that can make a specific game and a special game appear as if they are one advantageous game is performed, a special game is especially derived between the specific game and the special game. Since the second special symbol is sometimes variablely displayed, this variable display may cause an unnatural state such as a time between the specific game and the special game. Therefore, when the second start memory determined to be a special result by the prior determination means is the second special result, first, even though the special second start memory is the second special result. Performed an effect indicating that it was the first special result, and was promoted from the first special result to the second special result during the variable display of the second special symbol for the special second start memory. I am trying to execute a promotion effect to that effect. This makes it possible to suppress the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game.

It should be noted that the specific second start memory from which a specific condition can be satisfied and the special second start memory from which a special result can be derived do not need to be continuously stored in the second holding means, for example, a specific one. A loss and a pre-determined start memory may be included between the specific second start memory in which the condition can be satisfied and the special second start memory in which the special result can be derived.

In addition, the statements "a specific condition can be satisfied" and "a special result can be derived" include the possibility that the specific condition may not be satisfied and the special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery result of the other is "special result". Even if it is, it is taken into consideration that a loss may be displayed.

Further, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is set when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-9 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to a prize ball or a winning opening to which prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main). CPU101) and
A game state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first start storage and / and the second start memory stored in the first holding means are described. Preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not a special result is derived and whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port is the same. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) that is higher than the normal gaming state,
It is configured to be controllable in any of multiple gaming states, including at least
The second special symbol variable control means is
A normal variable display (for example, normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and the predetermined time. It is performed by one of a plurality of variable display times including a short-time variable display (for example, ultra-fast fluctuation) that is variablely displayed only for a shorter time than that.
The effect control means is
In the specific gaming state, the specific second start memory stored by the second holding means and the other second start memory stored next to the first second start memory are each specified. When it is determined by the prior determination means that the condition can be satisfied and the special result can be derived, it is shown as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. Has a series of effect executing means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects (for example, a premier effect) capable of
The series of effect execution means is
It is characterized in that when the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second start memory is performed by the short-time variable display, the series of effects is executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is determined by the prior determination means that the specific game and the special game are executed in the specific game state, the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as a series of productions that can be made to look as if. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the special game. Since it is possible to give out a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, it is possible to enhance the game interest. It becomes.

By the way, when a series of productions that can make a specific game and a special game appear as if they are one advantageous game is performed, a special game is especially derived between the specific game and the special game. Since the second special symbol is sometimes variablely displayed, this variable display may cause an unnatural state such as a time between the specific game and the special game. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol performed on the other second start memory (the second start memory for which it is determined that the special result is derived by the prior determination means) is performed in the short-time variable display. , I try to execute a series of productions. This makes it possible to suppress the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

In addition, the statements "a specific condition can be satisfied" and "a special result can be derived" include the possibility that the specific condition may not be satisfied and the special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery result of the other is "special result". Even if it is, it is taken into consideration that a loss may be displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect control means is
Further having an opening effect executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes the opening effect for a predetermined time when the execution of the special game is started.
The second special symbol variable control means is
In the specific gaming state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the special result is derived, the variable display of the second special symbol has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%). Therefore, it can be executed for a short time (for example, 1000 msec of ultrafast fluctuation) shorter than the predetermined time.
The series of effect execution means is
When the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second start memory is performed for the short time, the series during the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the first second start memory. It is characterized by being configured to perform a production.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a special result is derived, the variable display of the second special symbol is only for a short time shorter than a predetermined time. When it is performed, a series of effects are executed during the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the first second start memory, so that it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. It will be possible.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect control means is
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the special result may be derived, special during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A special effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing the effect (for example, reach effect), and
After the special game is started, an interval effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an interval effect between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game, and
Have,
The series of effect execution means is
After the specific game is executed, the special effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory for which it is determined by the prior determination means that the special result is derived. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect in the same manner as the interval effect or in an appearance indistinguishable form without executing the effect.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory for which the fact that the special result is derived is determined by the prior determination means, the special effect is normally performed. Where it is executed, the series of effect executing means is during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory in which it is determined by the prior determination means that the special result is derived after the specific game is executed. , Since the effect is executed in the same manner as the interval effect or in an appearance indistinguishable form without executing the special effect, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. ..

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-10 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special round game of opening and closing a predetermined movable member is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. A special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game, and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 254). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to a prize ball or a winning opening to which prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main). CPU101) and
A game state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
Prior to the first lottery and / or the second lottery, the first start storage and / and the second start memory stored in the first holding means are described. Preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not a special result can be derived and whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port is the same. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) that is higher than the normal gaming state,
It is configured to be controllable in any of multiple gaming states, including at least
The pre-determination means is
When the special game is being executed, at least for the second start memory stored in the second holding means, it is determined whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied prior to the second lottery. And
The effect control means is
When the special game is controlled to the specific game state after the special game is completed, the specific condition is satisfied for the second start memory stored in the second holding means during the execution of the special game. When the pre-determination means determines the possibility, the specific effect executing means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that performs a specific effect suggesting that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the special game is pseudo-increased. It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the special gaming state is controlled after the special gaming is completed, the second holding means is used during the execution of the special gaming before being controlled to the specific gaming state. When it is determined by the pre-determination means that a specific condition can be satisfied for the stored second start memory, a specific effect suggesting that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the special game has increased in a pseudo manner. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine having a new playability such as the above. When such a specific effect is performed, the round game executed in the special game does not change, but it becomes possible to make it appear as if the number of rounds has increased, which is more than the number of rounds that should be executed originally. By making the player think that the round game is performed over the round, it is possible to enhance the game interest.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

In addition, the statements "a special result can be derived" and "a specific condition can be satisfied" include the possibility that a special result cannot be derived and the specific condition may not be satisfied, respectively. However, this is because when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery result of the other is "special result". Even if it is, it is taken into consideration that a loss may be displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect control means is
It has an end effect control means for performing an end effect (for example, an ending effect) indicating the end of the special game when the special game ends.
The end effect control means
When the specific effect is performed, the end effect is not performed when the special game ends, but is configured to be performed when the specific game that can be executed after the special game ends ends. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific effect is performed, the end effect that is originally performed when the special game ends is not performed when the specific effect is performed, and is executed after the special game is completed. Since it is performed when the specific game is completed, it is possible to increase the credibility of the increase in the number of rounds.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 63-11 is
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hit shutter 6100) is activated. Then, when the game ball is accepted, the prize ball or the specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing the specific game (for example, a small hit game) that is easily accepted into the winning opening to which the prize ball data is given is used. ,
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
Preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the special result can be derived prior to the second lottery with respect to at least the second start storage stored in the second holding means.
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
It is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means in parallel.
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time). The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time). Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least, and it is possible to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.
The effect control means is
In the first gaming state, when the second start memory is stored by the second holding means, a predetermined condition provides an effect suggesting a determination result of the second start memory by the prior determination means. It is characterized in that it is configured to be feasible based on the fact that it is established.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time rather than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing the game ball in a normal manner. Further, in the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Since it is large, the game is played by firing a game ball in a specific mode. Then, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the second start memory may be stored by the second holding means. In the first game state, since the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is low, the derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the second start memory is stored by the second holding means, a predetermined condition is satisfied for the effect of suggesting the determination result by the prior determination means for the second start memory. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new playability, such as executing based on the above. As a result, even if the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the discrimination result by the prior discrimination means is suggested, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In particular, even if a plurality of second start storages are stored in the second holding means when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the second start condition for all of the plurality of second start memories is stored. Since the discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means is suggested without waiting for the establishment of the above, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In particular, the effect is remarkable when the second starting memory stored in the second holding means is a predetermined number, which is the upper limit when the second gaming state is changed to the first gaming state.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

In addition, the description "a special result can be derived" includes the possibility that a special result may not be derived, but this is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is considered that when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived on one side, a loss may be displayed even if the lottery result on the other side is a "special result". ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect control means is
As the predetermined condition, the predetermining means for the second start memory is based on the fact that the game ball launched in the normal embodiment is received at a predetermined reception port different from the first start port. It is characterized in that it is configured to be feasible to produce an effect that suggests the discrimination result by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the gaming ball into a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port for the gaming ball launched in the normal manner, and the second An effect suggesting a discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means for the start memory is executed. Therefore, even if the transition from the second gaming state in which the game ball is launched in a specific mode to the first gaming state in which the game ball is launched in the normal mode, it is possible to promote the promotion of the game.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned predetermined condition may be satisfied based on the fact that one game ball launched in the normal mode is received at the predetermined reception port, or may be fired in the normal mode. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls are accepted at a predetermined reception. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be satisfied based on the establishment of a weighted condition.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-12 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hit shutter 6100) is activated. Then, when the game ball is accepted, the prize ball or the specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing the specific game (for example, a small hit game) that is easily accepted into the winning opening to which the prize ball data is given is used. ,
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
Preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the special result can be derived prior to the second lottery with respect to at least the second start storage stored in the second holding means.
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
It is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means in parallel.
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time). The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time). Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least, and it is possible to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.
The effect control means is
In the first gaming state, when the second start memory is stored by the second holding means, the prior determination means for a specific second start memory among the stored second start memories is used. A second start result pre-production means (for example, a sub) that can execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a standby compulsion suppression effect) suggesting that the determination result is the special result based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied. CPU201) and
When the result of the first lottery is at least the special result, the first reach effect indicating that the special result may be derived after the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Reach effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing
Have,
The means for executing the reach effect is
Even though the special suggestion effect is executed by the second start result pre-effect effect means, the first reach effect is executed based on the result of the first lottery being the special result, and the first reach effect is executed. When the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is started during the execution of the first reach effect, the first reach effect indicates that the result of the first lottery is lost. After being temporarily stopped in a lost manner, it is characterized in that a second reach effect different from the first reach effect can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time rather than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing the game ball in a normal manner. Further, in the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Since it is large, the game is played by firing a game ball in a specific mode. Then, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the second start memory may be stored by the second holding means. In the first game state, since the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is low, the derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when a specific second start memory from which a special result is derived is stored by the second holding means, the determination result of the specific second start memory by the prior determination means is obtained. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability, such as executing a suggestion effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. As a result, even if the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the discrimination result by the prior discrimination means is suggested, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

By the way, the special suggestion effect is performed at a stage where the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory has not been started yet. Therefore, the first reach effect is executed based on the result of the first lottery being a special result, and during the execution of the first reach effect, the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is displayed. May be started. Therefore, the first reach effect is executed based on the result of the first lottery being a special result, and during the execution of the first reach effect, the variation display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is displayed. When it is started, the first reach effect is temporarily stopped in a lost manner, and then the second reach effect different from the first reach effect is started. This second reach production is performed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result inherited from the first reach production, but the first reach and the second reach are different reach productions. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to detect that the second reach effect is based on the result of the first lottery being a special result. As a result, it is possible to control the special gaming state based on the result of the first lottery, not the result of the second lottery, without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

In addition, the description "a special result can be derived" includes the possibility that a special result may not be derived, but this is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is considered that when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived on one side, a loss may be displayed even if the lottery result on the other side is a "special result". ..

Further, "the predetermined condition is satisfied" is, for example, a condition that can be satisfied as a result of the player playing the game, which is preferable from the viewpoint of promoting the game. For example, it may be established based on a prize in a general winning opening to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball wins, or based on a predetermined number or more of game balls winning in the general winning opening. It may be established based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The means for executing the reach effect is
Although the second reach effect is performed based on the result of the first lottery being the special result, the second reach effect is performed and the result of the second lottery is the special result. It is characterized by the fact that it is a production that makes it appear as if it is performed based on the fact that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the second reach effect is an effect that makes the player appear as if the result of the second lottery is based on a special result. It is possible to control the special gaming state based on the result of the first lottery without giving a sense of discomfort.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The second start result pre-directing means
As the predetermined condition, the predetermining means for the second start memory is based on the fact that the game ball launched in the normal embodiment is received at a predetermined reception port different from the first start port. It is characterized in that it is configured to be feasible to produce an effect that suggests the discrimination result by.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the gaming ball into a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port for the gaming ball launched in the normal manner, and the second An effect suggesting a discrimination result by the pre-discrimination means for the start memory is executed. Therefore, even if the transition from the second gaming state in which the game ball is launched in a specific mode to the first gaming state in which the game ball is launched in the normal mode, it is possible to promote the promotion of the game.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned predetermined condition may be satisfied based on the fact that one game ball launched in the normal mode is received at the predetermined reception port, or may be fired in the normal mode. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls are accepted at a predetermined reception. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be satisfied based on the establishment of a weighted condition.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-13 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hit shutter 6100) is activated. Then, when the game ball is accepted, the prize ball or the specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing the specific game (for example, a small hit game) that is easily accepted into the winning opening to which the prize ball data is given is used. ,
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
It is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means in parallel.
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time). The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time). Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least, and it is possible to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.
The effect control means is
When controlled to the first gaming state, the effect image based on the result of the first lottery is displayed in a predetermined display area.
In the first gaming state, when the result of the second lottery is the special result, the effect image based on the result of the first lottery displayed in the predetermined display area is not hindered from being visually recognized. It has a suggestion effect means (for example, sub CPU 201) that suggests that the result of the second lottery is the special result in a manner that can be grasped by the player.
The suggestion effect means
When the variation display of the first special symbol performed when the variation display of the second special symbol is started is based on the special result, the non-execution process is always performed so that the suggestion effect is not performed. Characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first gaming state, the effect image based on the result of the first lottery is displayed in a predetermined display area, so that the result of the second lottery is a special result. However, it is extremely difficult for the player to detect it. Therefore, in the first game state, when the result of the second lottery is a special result, the result of the second lottery is a special result in a manner that does not hinder the visual recognition of the effect image based on the result of the first lottery. Is suggested to the player in a manner that can be grasped by the player. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the result of the second lottery is a special result. However, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol may be the variable display based on a special result. In such a case, the sub CPU 201 can provide a gaming machine having new playability, such as performing a process of not executing the suggestion effect so that the suggestion effect is not always performed. Become. As a result, the result of the first lottery is based on the special result without the player being aware that the variation display of the second special symbol may be performed and the special result may be derived. It becomes possible to control the special gaming state.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-14 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the first starting port, the first holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first starting memories is used.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a particular manner (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port,
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hit shutter 6100) is activated. Then, when the game ball is accepted, the prize ball or the specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing the specific game (for example, a small hit game) that is easily accepted into the winning opening to which the prize ball data is given is used. ,
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Equipped with
It is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means in parallel.
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time). The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time). Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
It is possible to control any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least, and it is possible to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.
The effect control means is
In the first game state, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and the specific condition is satisfied, an effect suggesting the execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. It is characterized by having a timing suggestion effect executing means to be executed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time rather than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing the game ball in a normal manner. Further, in the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Since it is large, the game is played by firing a game ball in a specific mode. Then, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol may be being executed. In the first game state, since the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is low, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not end easily, and the result of the second lottery. There is a risk that the derivation of the product will be delayed and the interest will be reduced. In particular, if the result that a specific condition is satisfied is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is satisfied, an effect suggesting the execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the establishment of the specific condition is provided. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability, such as executing based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, even if the result that a specific condition is satisfied is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the execution timing of the specific game is suggested, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. It will be possible.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

Further, "the predetermined condition is satisfied" is, for example, a condition that can be satisfied as a result of the player playing the game, which is preferable from the viewpoint of promoting the game. For example, it may be established based on a prize in a general winning opening to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball wins, or based on a predetermined number or more of game balls winning in the general winning opening. It may be established based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further provided with a pre-determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied prior to the second lottery for the second start storage stored in at least the second holding means. ,
The timing suggestion effect execution means is
When the second start memory is stored by the second holding means, if it is determined by the prior determination means for the second start memory that the specific condition can be satisfied, the specific condition is determined. It is characterized in that it suggests the execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the establishment of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the first gaming state is changed to the second gaming state, not only the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, but also the second holding means is used for the second. The starting memory may be remembered. In the first game state, since the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is low, the derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed, and the interest may be reduced. In particular, if the result of the second lottery is delayed and then the result that a specific condition is satisfied is derived, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the second start memory is stored by the second holding means, if it is determined by the prior determination means for the second start memory that a specific condition can be satisfied, this is determined. By suggesting the execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the establishment of the specific condition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest that may occur due to the delay in the derivation of the result of the second lottery.

In addition, the description of "a specific condition can be satisfied" includes the possibility that a specific condition may not be satisfied, but this is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Considering that when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived on one side, a loss may be displayed even if the other lottery result is a "specific result". be.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The timing suggestion effect execution means is
As the predetermined condition, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the fact that the game ball launched in the normal mode is received at a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port. It is characterized in that an effect suggesting the execution timing of the specific game to be executed when the specific condition is satisfied can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the gaming ball into a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port for the gaming ball launched in the normal manner, and the second A variable display of the special symbol is performed, and an effect suggesting the execution timing of the specific game to be executed when a specific condition is satisfied is executed. Therefore, even if the transition from the second gaming state in which the game ball is launched in a specific mode to the first gaming state in which the game ball is launched in the normal mode, it is specified based on the acceptance of the game ball at the predetermined reception. Since the execution timing of the game is suggested, it is possible to promote the promotion of the game.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned predetermined condition may be satisfied based on the fact that one game ball launched in the normal mode is received at the predetermined reception port, or may be fired in the normal mode. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls are accepted at a predetermined reception. Further, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be satisfied based on the establishment of a weighted condition.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-15 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) and a second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) that can receive a game ball launched toward the game area.
The first start memory is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the first start opening, and the first is based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the second start opening. 2 Holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of start storage, and
The first lottery (for example, the first special lottery) for the first start memory is performed based on the condition that the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start memory is performed based on the condition that the second start condition is satisfied. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery), and
A special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery and variablely displays the second special symbol based on the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result is derived, a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player is used.
Equipped with
The lottery means
Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed, as long as the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol corresponding to the established starting condition is provided. A normal lottery means for performing a lottery (for example, the main CPU 101) and
When both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, a specific lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs both the first lottery and the second lottery in a predetermined order.
Have,
The specific lottery means is
When both the first lottery and the second lottery are performed in a predetermined order, but the result of any one of the first lottery and the second lottery, which is performed earlier, is the special result. , The non-winning process is executed so that the result of another lottery does not become the special result.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since both the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed in a predetermined order, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special while reducing the control load. It is possible to perform variable display of symbols in parallel. Moreover, if the result of either lottery becomes a special result so that the result of both the first lottery and the second lottery does not become a special result at the same time, the other lottery is executed as a non-winning process. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide a new playability such that both the first lottery and the second lottery can be prevented from having a special result at the same time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time is relatively large, and the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is relative to the normal variable display pattern. A storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that stores at least a small long-term variable display pattern, and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol to any one of the plurality of variable display patterns.
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls one of a plurality of game states, and
Further prepare
The game state control means is
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is smaller than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the launch ball per unit time. In the first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number is smaller than 1,
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the launch ball per unit time. A second game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number is larger than that of the first game state.
Can be controlled to any of multiple gaming states, including
The variable display pattern determining means is
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined to be the normal variable display pattern at least in the first gaming state, and the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is the result. It is characterized in that the long-time variable display pattern is decidably configured based on a special result.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. Moreover, if the result of the first lottery is a special result, the non-winning process in which the result of the second lottery is not a special result is executed, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. During this period, it is possible to provide new playability such that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time guarantees the game in the first gaming state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The storage means
As the long-time variable display pattern, a plurality of long-time variable display patterns having different expected values of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time are stored.
The variable display pattern determining means is
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, which is determined based on the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state, is the plurality of long-time variable display patterns. It is characterized by being configured to determine one of them.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is the expected value of the number of times the variable display is executed per unit time. Is determined to be one of a plurality of different long-term variable display patterns, so that the period during which the game in the first gaming state is guaranteed differs depending on which of the plurality of long-term variable display patterns is determined. As a result, it will be possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-16 are
A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) and a second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) that can receive a game ball launched toward the game area.
The first start memory is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the first start opening, and the first is based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the second start opening. 2 Holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of start storage, and
The first lottery (for example, the first special lottery) for the first start memory is performed based on the condition that the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start memory is performed based on the condition that the second start condition is satisfied. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery), and
A special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery and variablely displays the second special symbol based on the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result is derived, a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player is used.
If a specific condition is satisfied even if the special result is not derived (for example, if a small hit is won), a specific game (for example, a small hit game) having a lower profit level than when the special game is executed is performed. Specific game execution means to be executed (for example, main CPU 101) and
Equipped with
The lottery means
Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed, as long as the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol corresponding to the established starting condition is provided. A normal lottery means for performing a lottery (for example, the main CPU 101) and
When both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, a specific lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs both the first lottery and the second lottery in a predetermined order.
Have,
The specific lottery means is
When both the first lottery and the second lottery are performed in a predetermined order, but the result of any one of the first lottery and the second lottery, which is performed earlier, is the special result. , Execute the non-winning process so that the result of other lottery does not become the above special result,
When the specific condition is satisfied in any one of the first lottery and the second lottery, the result of the other lottery is the special one without executing the non-winning process. It is characterized by drawing lots so that the result can be obtained.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since both the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed in a predetermined order, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special while reducing the control load. It is possible to perform variable display of symbols in parallel. Moreover, if the result of either lottery becomes a special result so that the result of both the first lottery and the second lottery does not become a special result at the same time, the other lottery is executed as a non-winning process. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide a new playability such that both the first lottery and the second lottery can be prevented from having a special result at the same time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time is relatively large, and the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is relative to the normal variable display pattern. A storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that stores at least a small long-term variable display pattern, and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol to any one of the plurality of variable display patterns.
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls one of a plurality of game states, and
Further prepare
The game state control means is
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is smaller than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the launch ball per unit time. In the first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number is smaller than 1,
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the launch ball per unit time. A second game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number is larger than that of the first game state.
Can be controlled to any of multiple gaming states, including
The variable display pattern determining means is
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined to be the normal variable display pattern at least in the first gaming state, and the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is the result. It is characterized in that the long-time variable display pattern is decidably configured based on a special result.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. Moreover, if the result of the first lottery is a special result, the non-winning process in which the result of the second lottery is not a special result is executed, so that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. During this period, it is possible to provide new playability such that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time guarantees the game in the first gaming state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The storage means
As the long-time variable display pattern, a plurality of long-time variable display patterns having different expected values of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time are stored.
The variable display pattern determining means is
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, which is determined based on the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state, is the plurality of long-time variable display patterns. It is characterized by being configured to determine one of them.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is the expected value of the number of times the variable display is executed per unit time. Is determined to be one of a plurality of different long-term variable display patterns, so that the period during which the game in the first gaming state is guaranteed differs depending on which of the plurality of long-term variable display patterns is determined. As a result, it will be possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-17 are
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 270) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery based on the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery (for example, the first special lottery). When,
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 4401 in FIG. 270) capable of receiving a game ball launched in the predetermined mode (for example, left-handed) toward the game area.
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
A storage means (for example, a main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which a variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is prepared, and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, variation of FIG. 271) for determining a variable display pattern used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables. The main CPU 101) that executes the time determination table setting process, and
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a special game execution means (for example,) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. , Main CPU 101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 270). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance into a winning opening (for example, a small hit winning opening 5400) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. Specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively small expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is prepared (for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258). A second table (for example, for a high start in FIG. 259) in which a determination table) and a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time are prepared. Fluctuation time determination table for special symbols)
At least remember
The variable display pattern determining means is
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is always determined by using the first table, and the variable display of the first special symbol is based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port. It is characterized by having a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means that can be determined by using the second table instead of the first table based on the fact that the display is performed and the specific condition is satisfied. ..

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port. , It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability, such as changing from a first table to a second table. Moreover, for example, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment that may occur when the game ball cannot be won in the winning opening even though the specific game is executed.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-18 are
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 268) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area, and
A first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs the first lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 4401 in FIG. 268) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area, and
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result is derived, a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player is used.
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 268). Is activated to facilitate acceptance into a specific winning opening (for example, small hit winning opening 5400 in FIG. 268) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, small hit). Specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game) and
A game state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
Equipped with
The game state control means is
A normal gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state") in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low, and
An advantageous gaming state in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is less than 1 (for example, "high probability short game state"). )When,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the frequency of accepting the game ball to the specific winning opening is increased by executing the specific game, so that the number of prize balls or the prize ball with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is increased. A specific gaming state in which the expected value of the number of data is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state (for example, "high probability non-time saving gaming state") and
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a determined time reduction number) in the advantageous gaming state, a state transition control means (for example, a state transition control means capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state). It is characterized by having a main CPU 101).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times in the advantageous gaming state, the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is the normal gaming state. And shift to a specific gaming state that is larger than any of the advantageous gaming states. Therefore, even if a special result is not derived in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property, such that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed by shifting to the specific gaming state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
By determining the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified times (for example, 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times), the advantageous gaming state can be changed to the specific gaming state. A migration timing determining means (for example, main CPU 101) that can make the migration timing different each time,
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs a predetermined effect without clearly indicating a predetermined number of times determined by the shift timing determining means.
It is characterized by further preparing.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it becomes possible to make it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the transition timing from the advantageous gaming state to the specific advantageous gaming state, which further enhances the interest. It becomes possible.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
At least, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol, and
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small. The first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns are prepared (for example, the variation of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258). A time (variable display time) determination table) and a second table in which a plurality of relatively large variable display patterns are prepared (for example, a variable time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol for high start in FIG. 259). At least a storage means to store (eg, main ROM 102) and
Further prepare
The variable display pattern determining means is
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table at least in the advantageous gaming state, and the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state is made. Based on the above, the determination is made by referring to the second table instead of the first table.
The second lottery means is
It is characterized in that the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol based on the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state is the second special per unit time. The expected value of the number of times the variable display of the symbol is executed is determined to be a relatively large variable display pattern, and moreover, in the second lottery, a specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed. Therefore, the specific game is executed at a high frequency. In this way, it is possible to realize a specific gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is larger than that of either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-19 are
A special starting port that facilitates or enables the acceptance of game balls when a predetermined movable member is activated,
A normal starting area that can accept the game ball (for example, the passage gate 49 in FIG. 274) and
A normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a normal lottery in a manner in which all or roughly of the lottery is a normal hit based on the passage of the game ball through the normal start area.
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being the ordinary hit, the movable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that activates the predetermined movable member to facilitate or enable the acceptance of the game ball into the special starting port. )When,
Based on the fact that the game ball is received in the special starting port, a holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of starting memories is used.
A special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a special lottery for the start memory based on the establishment of the start condition, and
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game (for example, a special game that enables the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 540 in FIG. 274)). For example, a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a big hit game) and
A specific movable member (for example, a small hit shutter 6100) based on a specific result (for example, a small hit) that is the result of all or a rough result when the result of the special lottery is not the special result. Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that enables acceptance of a game ball into the specific winning opening (for example, the small hit winning opening 5400 in FIG. 274) (for example, the main CPU 101). )When,
An advantageous gaming state in which the specific movable member is roughly operated by the specific result in all or roughly the game state after the special game is completed, unless the result of the special lottery is the special result. For example, a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to a time saving state),
At least, a prize-giving means (for example, from the main CPU 101) capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data when the game ball is accepted in the special winning opening and when the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening. Disbursement / launch control circuit that pays out prize balls according to the command of
Equipped with
At least during the execution of the special game, the starting memory is stored by the holding means based on the acceptance of the game ball into the special starting port, but the starting condition is not satisfied.
The normal starting area is
During the execution of the special game, the game ball is accepted into the special winning opening so that the game ball cannot pass through the normal starting area, and the special game is being executed. Even if it is not, when the specific movable member is in the operating state, the game ball is received in the specific winning opening so that the game ball cannot pass through the normal starting area. It is characterized by becoming.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to pass through the normal starting area during the execution of the special game, and even if the special game is not being executed, the specific movable member If is in the operating state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area. Therefore, until the special lottery for the start memory stored in the holding means is executed when the special game is completed, the specific movable member is generally in the operating state and the normal start area is entered during the execution of the specific game. When a special game is executed due to difficulty or impossibility of passing the game ball, the prize ball or prize ball data given during the execution of the special game and the starting memory number stored in the holding means. It is possible to grant both the prize ball or the prize ball data given by executing the specific game of the minute, and the number of prize balls or the prize ball data given when the special game is executed once. You can increase the expected value of the number. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
After the special game is completed and before being controlled to the advantageous game state, an interval control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the interval state is further provided.
The starting condition is
Even if the start memory is stored in the holding means when the special game is completed, it is configured so as not to be established as long as it is controlled by the interval state.
The specific winning opening is provided on the downstream side of the special winning opening, and is also provided.
The ball path of the game ball between the special winning opening and the specific winning opening is
The game ball that is not accepted by the special winning opening is more than the total time of the time controlled in the interval state and the time until the specific movable member is activated when the starting condition is satisfied. It is characterized by being configured so that it takes longer to reach the mouth.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the special winning opening is not accepted more than the total time of the time controlled in the interval state and the time until the specific movable member is activated when the starting condition is satisfied. It takes longer for the pachinko ball to reach the specific winning opening. Therefore, when the game ball that could not win the special winning opening because it reached the special winning opening immediately after the end of the special game reaches the specific winning opening, the specific movable member will operate, so that the specific winning opening will be used. As the game ball is accepted, it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area. As a result, during the execution of the specific game for the number of starting memories stored in the holding means at the end of the special game, the game ball is surely accepted in the specific winning opening, and the game ball is won in the specific winning opening. It becomes possible to guarantee the opportunity for the prize ball or the prize ball data to be given based on.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-20 are
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5443 in FIG. 275) that facilitates or enables acceptance of a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (for example, right-handed) toward the game area.
A first special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a first special lottery based on the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port, and
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first special lottery.
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 275) capable of accepting a game ball launched toward the game area in the predetermined manner and not accepted by the first starting port.
A second special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing the second special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, and
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second special lottery, and
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result is derived, the special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the special gaming state in favor of the player ,
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 275). Is activated to facilitate acceptance into a specific winning opening (for example, small hit winning opening 5400 in FIG. 275) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, small hit). Specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game) and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control any of a plurality of game states, and
Equipped with
The game state control means is
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time). Normal game state),
The second gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) in which the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port is easier than in the first gaming state, and the acceptance of the gaming ball into the first starting port are described above. It becomes more difficult than the second game state, and a larger amount of game balls can flow down toward the specific winning opening as compared with the second game state, and the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time. When the expected value of is larger than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time in the first gaming state (for example, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state),
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a determined number of time reductions) in the second gaming state, the state transition control means capable of executing control to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state. Has (for example, main CPU 101)
The second special symbol variable control means is
Even when the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol can be variably displayed, and when the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived. , During the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is configured to be variablely displayed so that the special result is not derived.
The first special symbol variable control means is
When the result of the first special lottery at least in the second gaming state is the special result, the first special symbol is variable in a long fluctuation pattern (for example, long fluctuations DF in FIG. 276) over a certain period of time. By making it possible to derive the special result after displaying the display, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the long variation pattern in the third gaming state shifted from the second gaming state. During this period, the specific game can be executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, which makes it possible to increase the chance of giving the prize ball or the prize ball data, thereby increasing the number of shot balls per unit time. It is characterized in that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to is higher than that of either the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the result of the first special lottery performed in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol may be performed for a long time. When the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that the special result is not derived until the special result is derived. When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times in the second gaming state, the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed. In this third gaming state, a larger amount of gaming balls flow down toward the specific winning opening as compared with the second gaming state. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a long time, the second start port is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol performed for a long time. When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to, the game ball that flows down toward the specific winning opening can be accepted by the specific winning opening, so that the prize ball or the prize ball data can be acquired as much as possible. It will be possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as being given an opportunity.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation effect by a plurality of identification symbols is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the result of the first special lottery or the second special symbol is controlled to be displayed. Further provided with effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201),
The symbol effect control means is
When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a special result, a plurality of reach effect patterns (for example, normal reach for low start, super reach A for low start, super reach B for low start in FIG. 277). ), Which has a reach effect control means (for example, sub CPU201) that performs the symbol variation effect in any one of the reach effect patterns.
The long fluctuation pattern over a certain period of time is
It is characterized in that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a longer period of time than any of the plurality of reach effect patterns.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a special result, the symbol variation effect is performed by one of the plurality of reach effect patterns. However, when the result of the first special lottery performed in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a longer time than any of these plurality of reach effect patterns. , It is possible to secure an opportunity to be given a prize ball or prize ball data by executing a specific game that can be easily accepted into a specific winning opening, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
By determining the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified times (24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, 100 times), the second gaming state can be changed to the third gaming state. A migration timing determining means (for example, main CPU 101) that can make the migration timing different each time,
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs a predetermined effect without clearly indicating a specified number of times (for example, a determined time reduction number) determined by the shift timing determining means.
It is characterized by further preparing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to make the relationship between the timing when the result of the first special lottery becomes a special result and the timing of transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state interesting. It becomes. That is, it does not mean that the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes a special result in the third game state is early. For example, if the transition timing from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is late, if the result of the first special symbol becomes a special result at an early timing, the period of the second gaming state may be shortened. In addition, if the transition timing from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is early, the benefit of the second gaming state may be longer if the result of the first special symbol becomes a special result at an earlier timing. can. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by making the predetermined number of times that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed different each time in the third game state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The effect control means is
When the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the length variation pattern, a series of advantageous games are performed together with the special gaming state. It is further provided with a specific effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of executing a specific effect indicating that the effect is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific state is reached, a game advantageous to a player who exceeds the prize ball paid out in one special gaming state is executed at a stage where the special gaming state has not yet been controlled. Since it is shown that the game is more interesting, it is possible to further enhance the game.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 63-21 is
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable member 4653 of FIG. 280) is activated, a first starting port (for example, FIG. 280) that facilitates or enables acceptance of a game ball launched in a predetermined manner toward the game area. First starting port 5443) and
A movable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that activates the predetermined movable member to facilitate or enable the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port.
A first special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a first special lottery based on the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port, and
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first special lottery.
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 of FIG. 280) capable of accepting a game ball launched toward the game area in the predetermined manner and not accepted by the first starting port.
A second special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing the second special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, and
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second special lottery, and
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a special game execution means (for example,) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. , Main CPU 101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a specific movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 280) is used. Execute a specific game to execute a specific game that can be easily accepted into a specific winning opening (for example, the small hit winning opening 5400 in FIG. 280) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. Means (eg, main CPU 101) and
Equipped with
The second special lottery means is
The second special lottery is performed so that the specific conditions are satisfied with a higher probability than when the first special lottery is performed.
The second special symbol variable control means is
Even when the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol can be variably displayed, and when the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived. , During the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is configured to be variablely displayed so that the special result is not derived.
The first special symbol variable control means is
When the result of the first special lottery is the special result, the first special symbol is variably displayed in a long fluctuation pattern (for example, long fluctuations D to F in FIG. 276) over a certain period of time. By making it possible to derive a special result, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port while the first special symbol is variably displayed in the long fluctuation pattern. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the chance of giving a prize ball or prize ball data can be increased by being able to accept the game ball to the specific winning opening.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol can be performed for a long time. When the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that the special result is not derived until the special result is derived. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a long time, the second starting port is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol performed for a long time. By making it possible to accept a game ball to a specific winning opening when a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to, the chances of granting the prize ball or prize ball data are increased, and the prize ball or prize ball is given. It will be possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as acquiring data and giving an all-you-can-eat opportunity.

In addition, "the second special lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first special lottery is performed" is specified when the first special lottery is performed. It is not essential that the condition of (for example, winning a small hit) is satisfied. For example, in the first special lottery, although it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, the small hit lottery is performed but the probability of winning a small hit is 0). Aspects) and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) are included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further equipped with a game state control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states,
The predetermined movable member is
It is always working in a certain regular manner,
The specific winning opening is
It is configured to be able to accept a game ball that is launched toward the game area in the predetermined manner and is not accepted by either the first starting port or the second starting port.
The game state control means is
The first gaming state (for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time). Normal game state),
To the second starting port so that all or roughly all or roughly of the game balls launched toward the gaming area in the predetermined manner and not accepted by the first starting port can be accepted by the second starting port. The expected value of the second gaming state (for example, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state) in which the acceptance of the game ball is easier than the first gaming state, and the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is the above. It is larger than the first gaming state, and it is more difficult to accept the gaming ball to the second starting opening than in the second gaming state, so that a larger amount of gaming balls than in the second gaming state are directed toward the specific winning opening. Third game state (for example, high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that can be flowed down
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
Having a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times in the second gaming state. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times in the second gaming state, the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is performed. In this third game state, it is more difficult to accept the game ball to the second starting port than in the second game state, so that a larger amount of game balls flow down toward the specific winning opening as compared with the second game state. do. Since the specific winning opening is configured to be able to accept a game ball that is launched toward the game area in a predetermined manner and is not accepted by either the first starting opening or the second starting opening, the third game In the state, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed for a long time, the prize ball or the prize ball data can be acquired as much as possible, and it becomes possible to further enhance the game entertainment.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-22 are
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing game information related to the progress of the game, and
When a predetermined operation is performed, a data clearing means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S23) capable of clearing the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, the main RAM 103) and
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 270) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of a game ball to the first starting port.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 4401 in FIG. 270) that easily accepts a game ball launched in the predetermined mode (for example, left-handed) toward the game area.
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
A storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which a variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is prepared, and
With a variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines a variable display pattern used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables. ,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, a special game execution means (for example,) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. , Main CPU 101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100 in FIG. 270). Is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance to a prize ball or a winning opening to which prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main). CPU101) and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively small expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is prepared (for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258). A second table (for example, for the middle start of FIG. 272) in which a determination table) and a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time are prepared. Fluctuation time determination table for special symbols)
At least remember
The variable display pattern determining means is
Although the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is always determined by using the first table, the game information stored in the game information storage means is cleared by the data clearing means. Only occasionally, it is characterized by having a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means that can be determined using the second table.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is obtained from the first table based on the fact that the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is cleared. It will be possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as changing to a second table. In particular, for example, when the game machine manager clears the game information stored in the game information storage means before the opening of the hall, the second special symbol per unit time when the game is launched toward the game area in a predetermined manner is displayed. Since the expected value of the number of times the variable display is executed can be increased, it is possible to adjust the payout.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A game control means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player.
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and
Further prepare
The effect control means is
When the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by using the second table and the one set value is a specific set value, a specific effect can be executed. It is characterized by having a directing execution means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the player can infer one set value from the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol, which further enhances the game interest. be able to.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-23 are
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5443 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area, and
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of a game ball to the first starting port.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area, and
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
A storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which a variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is prepared, and
With a variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines a variable display pattern used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables. ,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player). For example, the main CPU 101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small hit shutter 6100) is activated. A specific game for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance into a winning opening (for example, a small hit winning opening 5400) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. Execution means (for example, main CPU 101) and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The second special symbol variable control means is
It is possible to perform variable display of the second special symbol even while the first special symbol is in variable display, and when the special result is derived by the variable display of the first special symbol, the first 2 In the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is configured so that the special result is not derived.
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively small expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is prepared (a table for determining the variable time of the special symbol for a low start in FIG. 277). ), And a second table in which a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time are prepared (variation of the special symbol for high start in FIG. 278). Time determination table)
At least remember
The variable display pattern determining means is
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol from which the special result is derived is determined to be a specific variable display pattern (for example, the length variation G in FIG. 277) longer than the specified time. A possible first special symbol display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1832) and
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is always determined by using the first table, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the specific variable display pattern. Based on this, it is characterized by having a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1834) that can be determined by using the second table instead of the first table. ..

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is usually determined with reference to the first table, but the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern longer than the specified time. By changing from the first table to the second table based on the above, the specific game is guaranteed while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol continues, and it becomes possible to enhance the game interest.

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the specific variable display pattern, a series of advantageous games are executed between the specific game and the special game at a stage where the special game has not yet been executed. It is characterized by further comprising an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of executing a specific effect indicating that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol is determined to be a specific variable display pattern and the specific game is executed, the special game is still executed. At no stage, it is shown that a game that is more advantageous to the player than the special game is executed once, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-24 are
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a normal manner (eg, left-handed) toward the gaming area.
A first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery, and
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable shutter 4650 of FIG. 254) is activated, a second starting port (for example, FIG. 254 second starting port 440) and
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery, and
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, a main) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is performed. CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), the specific movable member (for example, the small hit shutter 6100) is activated. , A specific game for executing a specific game (for example, a small hit game) that facilitates acceptance into a specific winning opening (for example, a small hit winning opening 5400) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. Execution means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the game state after the special game is executed to one of a plurality of game states.
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
In a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability that the special result is derived is relatively low and the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1. ,
The probability that the special result will be derived is relatively high, the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port is relatively easy, and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time. An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of is less than 1 (for example, a high-probability short-time gaming state),
The probability that the special result will be derived is relatively high, it is relatively difficult to accept the game ball to the second starting port, and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time. A specific gaming state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state.
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
In a gaming state in which it is relatively easy to receive the gaming ball into the second starting port (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state).
When the game ball was launched in the normal manner and accepted by the first starting port, the first special symbol was variably displayed, and the special result was derived, the special game was executed. By controlling the game state to the normal game state or the specific game state,
When the game ball was launched in the specific embodiment and accepted by the second starting port, the second special symbol was variably displayed, and the special result was derived, the special game was executed. It is characterized in that it is configured to control the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the gaming ball is launched in a normal manner even though the gaming state is relatively easy to receive the gaming ball into the second starting port, and the first special symbol is used. When the variable display is performed and a special result is derived, the profit degree for the player is relatively high after the special game is executed (the number of prize balls or the prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time). The expected value of the number is controlled to a specific gaming state (which is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state). Further, in a gaming state in which it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the game ball is launched in a specific mode, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and a special result is derived. After the special game is executed, the profit level for the player is relatively low (the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1). Is controlled by. That is, if the game ball is launched in a normal manner in a gaming state in which it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the benefit is that the game ball can be easily received into the second starting port. Although there is a demerit that it cannot be played, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to a specific gaming state. On the other hand, if the game ball is launched in a specific manner in a gaming state in which it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the benefit is that the game ball can be easily received into the second starting port. Although it is possible to enjoy the merit of being able to play, it can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state instead of a specific gaming state. In this way, which of the thrilling game with relatively high risk and high return and the stable game with relatively low risk and low return is to be executed is determined by the launch mode (right-handed or right-handed) of the game ball. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as giving a player a choice right by (left-handed).

In addition, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that the specific condition is applied when the first lottery is performed. It is not essential to be established (for example, to win a small hit). For example, in the first lottery, a mode in which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied but the probability that the specific condition is satisfied is 0 (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery is performed and the probability of winning a small hit is 0). ), And a mode in which the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is not performed (for example, a mode in which the small hit lottery itself is not performed) is included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In a gaming state in which it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the unit is when the game ball is launched in the normal mode and when the game ball is fired in the specific mode. It is characterized in that the ratio of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data to the number of shot balls per hour is substantially the same.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls per unit time when the gaming balls are launched in a normal mode and when the gaming balls are launched in a specific mode. Is substantially the same, the player can determine the launch mode of the gaming ball according to his / her desire without considering the advantages and disadvantages.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-25 are
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (eg, first starting port 5443 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner toward the game area.
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of a game ball to the first starting port.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery.
It is possible to accept a game ball that has not been accepted by the first starting port, and when the game ball is accepted, a predetermined number of prize balls or prize ball data is given to a specific winning opening (for example, a small hit winning opening in FIG. 282). 5400) and
A second starting port (eg, second starting port 440 in FIG. 282) capable of accepting a game ball launched in the particular mode (eg, right-handed) towards the gaming area.
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
When at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, the first condition (for example, a condition device) which is an execution condition of the special game advantageous to the player is obtained. The first condition satisfying means (for example, the main CPU 101) that satisfies only the first condition among the second condition (for example, the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device).
Temporary retention means (for example, the accessory device 3500 of FIG. 282) capable of allowing the game ball to enter based on the condition of the first condition and temporarily retaining the entered game ball. )When,
A specific opening (for example, the specific opening 3540 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving the game ball staying in the temporary retention means, and
When the game ball is accepted in the specific opening, the second condition satisfying means (for example, the main CPU 101) that satisfies the second condition and the like.
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player based on the condition that the first condition is satisfied and the second condition is satisfied.
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of "small hit" is derived), the specific movable member (for example, the small of FIG. 282) is derived. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that activates the hit shutter 6100) to execute a specific game that can be easily accepted into the specific winning opening.
The first state (for example, "high-accuracy time-shortening game state") in which the game ball is easily accepted into the first start port, and the game ball is more difficult to receive in the first start port than in the first state. A state control means (eg, main CPU 101) that can be controlled to either a second state (for example, a “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”) that is or is impossible.
Equipped with
The state control means may shift the state from the first state to the second state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first state (for example, when the determined time saving game is digested). It is configured to be possible and
The second starting port is between the time when the first condition is satisfied and the time when the second condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port, and in the second state. When the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the player, the game ball launched in the specific embodiment can be easily accepted by the specific winning opening, so that the prize ball for the number of shot balls per unit time can be easily received. It is characterized by being configured to increase the expected value of the number or the number of prize ball data.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first state in which the gaming ball is easily accepted into the first starting port, the gaming ball launched in a specific mode even if the specific movable member is operating. Is unlikely or unlikely to be accepted by a particular winning slot. On the other hand, in the second state where it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball to the first starting port, the game ball launched in a specific mode is accepted to the specific winning opening if the specific movable member is operating. Can be done. Further, in the state where the first condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first special symbol and the derivation of the special result, even if the game ball is accepted at the second starting port, it is special. The second special symbol is variably displayed so that a specific condition can be satisfied without deriving the result. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, the second starting port is reached on condition that the second condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied. When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball, the prize ball or prize ball data can be acquired as much as possible, and it is possible to increase the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time. It will be possible to provide a game machine with new playability such as.

In the gaming machine of (1) above, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that the specific game is executed when a specific condition is satisfied, but the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. When played, the specific game is executed with a probability (for example, 1/320) that is extremely lower than the probability that the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the specific game is executed (for example, 1/5). It is not intended to exclude the aspect to be done.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A storage means (for example, a main ROM 102) for storing at least a plurality of tables provided with a variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol, and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines at least a variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol by referring to any one of the plurality of tables.
Further prepare
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively small expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is prepared (for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258). A second table (for example, for a high start in FIG. 259) in which a determination table) and a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time are prepared. Fluctuation time determination table for special symbols),
At least remember
The variable display pattern determining means is
In the normal gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state"), the variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table, and the special game is executed. In the next gaming state (for example, "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state"), it is possible to determine the variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol with reference to the second table. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table, so that the variable display pattern is determined for a relatively long time. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, in the game state after the special game is executed, the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the second table, so that the second special for a relatively short time is determined. The variable display of the symbol is performed. Therefore, in the game state after the special game is executed, the execution frequency of the small hit game can be increased as compared with the normal game state, and in the normal game state, the execution frequency of the small hit game can be suppressed. Will be. Then, when the first condition is satisfied in the game state after the special game is executed, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port until the second condition is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to acquire prize balls or prize ball data and make it an unlimited state, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The temporary retention means is
It is characterized in that the time for temporarily retaining the entered game ball can be different each time.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the time during which the gaming ball is retained in the retaining means may differ each time. That is, since the time from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied is different each time, how much is the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time? It becomes difficult for the player to predict whether it will continue, and it will be possible to further enhance the game interest.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 63-26 are
A gaming machine to which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area, and
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of a game ball to the first starting port.
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery.
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area, and
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery.
A storage means (for example, a main ROM 102) for storing at least a plurality of tables provided with a variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol, and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines at least a variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol by referring to any one of the plurality of tables.
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived, the first condition, which is an execution condition of the special game advantageous to the player, is the first condition. (For example, the operation of the condition device) and the first condition satisfying means (for example, the main CPU 101) that satisfies only the first condition among the second conditions (for example, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device).
Temporary retention means (for example, the accessory device 3500 of FIG. 281) capable of allowing the game ball to enter based on the condition of the first condition and temporarily retaining the entered game ball. )When,
A specific opening (for example, the specific opening 3540 in FIG. 281) capable of accepting the game ball staying in the temporary retention means.
When the game ball is accepted in the specific opening, the second condition satisfying means (for example, the main CPU 101) that satisfies the second condition and the like.
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player based on the condition that the first condition is satisfied and the second condition is satisfied.
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of "small hit" is derived), the specific movable member (for example, the small of FIG. 281) is derived. The hit shutter 6100) is activated, and when a game ball is accepted, it is easy to accept a predetermined number of prize balls or prize ball data into a specific winning opening (for example, the small hit winning opening 5400 in FIG. 281). Specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game, and
Equipped with
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively small expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is prepared (for example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258). A second table (for example, for a high start in FIG. 259) in which a determination table) and a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time are prepared. Fluctuation time determination table for special symbols),
At least remember
The variable display pattern determining means is
A first pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining a variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol with reference to the first table in a normal gaming state, and at least the first. The second pattern determination that can determine the variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol with reference to the second table from the time when the condition of 1 is satisfied until the condition of the second condition is satisfied. Means (eg, main CPU 101),
Have,
The above based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port from the time when the first condition is satisfied to the time when the second condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port. It is characterized in that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is increased by increasing the execution frequency of the specific game.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table, so that the variable display pattern is determined for a relatively long time. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, from the time when the first condition is satisfied to the time when the second condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern to be used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the second table. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a relatively short time. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a relatively short time, until the second condition is satisfied. During that time, the frequency of execution of specific games based on the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port is increased, prize balls or prize ball data can be acquired as much as you want, and the number of prize balls or prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time. It will be possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as being able to increase the expected value of numbers.

In the gaming machine of (1) above, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that the specific game is executed when a specific condition is satisfied, but the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. When played, the specific game is executed with a probability (for example, 1/320) that is extremely lower than the probability that the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the specific game is executed (for example, 1/5). It is not intended to exclude the aspect to be done.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The temporary retention means is
It is characterized in that the time for temporarily retaining the entered game ball can be different each time.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the time for the gaming ball to be retained in the retaining means may be different each time. That is, since the time from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied is different each time, how much is the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time? It becomes difficult for the player to predict whether it will continue, and it will be possible to further enhance the game interest.

According to the inventions of Supplementary note 63-1 to Supplementary note 63-26, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[Appendix 64-1 to Appendix 64-4]
Conventionally, a gaming machine in which various winning devices such as a general winning opening and a starting opening are provided in a gaming area has been known. When a game ball fired at a game ball wins a prize in various prize-winning devices, a prize ball corresponding to the winning prize-winning device is paid out.

As this type of gaming machine, among the gaming balls launched in a specific area, the gaming balls that have entered the predetermined entrance are distributed and released toward the first place or the second place. A gaming machine provided with an apparatus and having different benefits when it is discharged toward a first place and when it is discharged toward a second place is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-047336). See publication).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-047336, the magnitude of the profit obtained when the machine is released toward the first place and the time when the machine is released toward the second place are different. In addition to the distribution of the flow route of the game ball released by the distribution device, it is also possible to distribute the profit.

However, in recent years, a gaming machine having further new playability has been desired.

The inventions of Appendix 64-1 to Appendix 64-4 have been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 64-1 is
A game board (for example, a transparent panel 172) in which a game area is formed, and
The game ball has a rolling surface on which the game ball can roll (for example, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 in FIG. 283), and the rolling surface is located behind the game board (for example, the large winning opening in FIG. 283). 5401 is a closed mode) and a special movable member configured to be operable between an advance position where the rolling surface is located in front of the game board (for example, the large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 283 is an open mode). (For example, shutter 6020 in FIG. 282) and
When the special movable member operates toward the advance position, a special winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 283) in which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface can be accepted.
The first flow path (for example, the first flow path 5901 in FIG. 283) and the second flow path (for example, the second flow path 5902 in FIG. 283), which are the flow paths of the game ball that were not accepted by the special winning opening. )When,
A discharge port (for example, an out port 57 in FIG. 283) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and a discharge port (for example, an out port 57 in FIG. 283).
An ordinary winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 560 in FIG. 283) capable of accepting a game ball flowing down the second flow path, and
When the game ball is accepted in the discharge port, the prize ball or the prize ball data is not given, and when the game ball is accepted at least in the special winning opening or the ordinary winning opening, the special winning opening and the ordinary winning opening are used. A prize-giving means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300 that pays out a prize ball according to a command from the main CPU 101) capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data in a specified amount to each.
When a special result is derived as a result of the game, the game ball can be easily accepted into the special winning opening by performing a round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advance position. Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing the special game
Equipped with
When the special movable member is in the normal position, the game ball flowing down the game area flows down the first flow path and also flows down.
When the special movable member operates from the advance position to the normal position while the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is the second It is characterized by being configured so that it can flow down the flow path.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the special movable member operates from the advanced position to the normal position while the rolling surface of the special movable member is rolling, the rolling surface is rolled. The game ball is configured to be able to flow down the second flow path. In addition, all or most of the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path are configured to win a prize in the normal winning opening. In this way, by simply devising the arrangement position of various structural members, a prize ball or prize ball data can be given based on the prize in the normal winning opening each time a round game is played, which is provided with new playability. It becomes possible to provide a game machine. Also, when a special game is executed, in addition to the prize ball or prize ball data given based on the prize in the special winning opening, the prize ball or prize ball data is given based on the winning in the normal winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special game execution means is
A round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advance position is executed over a plurality of round games.
In at least one of the plurality of round games, the normal position and the above are provided so that the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can be given a plurality of opportunities to flow down the second flow path. It is characterized by being configured to operate multiple times between the advance position and the advance position.

According to the game machine of (2) above, in the above-mentioned one round game, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is given multiple opportunities to flow down the second flow path, so that the normal winning opening is entered. The number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given based on the winning can be increased, and it becomes possible to further enhance the game entertainment.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 64-2 is
A game board (for example, a transparent panel 172) in which a game area is formed, and
The game ball has a rolling surface on which the game ball can roll (for example, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 in FIG. 284), and the rolling surface is located behind the game board (for example, the large winning opening in FIG. 284). 5401 is a closed mode) and a special movable member configured to be operable between an advance position where the rolling surface is located in front of the game board (for example, the large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 284 is an open mode). (For example, shutter 6020 in FIG. 284) and
When the special movable member operates toward the advance position, a special winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 284) in which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface can be accepted.
The first flow path (for example, the first flow path 5903 in FIG. 284) and the second flow path (for example, the second flow path 5904 in FIG. 284), which are the flow paths of the game ball that were not accepted by the special winning opening. )When,
When a predetermined movable member (for example, movable member 5602) is activated, a general winning opening (for example, general winning opening 560) capable of accepting a game ball flowing down the first flow path and a general winning opening 560.
When a game ball is accepted at least in the special winning opening or the general winning opening, a prize giving means (for example, a prize giving means) capable of giving a specified amount of prize balls or prize ball data to each of the special winning opening and the general winning opening. The payout / launch control circuit 300, which pays out the prize balls according to the command from the main CPU 101),
When a special result is derived as a result of the game, a game ball to the special winning opening is performed by performing a round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advance position over a plurality of rounds. A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a special game that facilitates acceptance of
A normal region (for example, the passage gate 49 in FIG. 284) through which a game ball flowing down the second flow path can pass, and
It is possible to operate the predetermined movable member based on the passage of the game ball to the ordinary area, and by operating the predetermined movable member, it is possible to accept the game ball to the general winning opening. Movable control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
Equipped with
When the special movable member is in the normal position, the game ball flowing down the game area is configured to flow down the first flow path so as not to reach the normal area.
When the special movable member operates from the advance position to the normal position while the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is the second It is characterized in that it is configured to be reachable to the ordinary region by flowing down the flow path.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the special movable member operates from the advancing position to the normal position, the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface flows down the second flow path and passes through the normal region. Therefore, the movable member operates between the round games so that the general winning opening is opened. That is, at least while the general winning opening is in the open mode due to the operation of the movable member, the special winning opening is closed, so that the right-handed game ball flows down the first flow path, and all or almost of it. Will win the general prize opening. In this way, simply by devising the placement position of various structural members, in addition to the prize balls or prize ball data paid out based on the prize in the special prize opening, the prize ball or prize based on the prize in the general winning opening. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability such as the addition of ball data. Further, when a special game is executed, in addition to the prize ball or prize ball data given based on the prize in the special prize opening, the prize ball or prize ball data is given based on the prize in the general winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 64-3 are
A normal starting area (for example, the passage gate 49 in FIG. 285) through which a game ball launched toward the game area can pass, and
A normal holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) that holds a predetermined number of normal starting memories based on the passage of the game ball to the normal starting area.
A normal lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a normal lottery for the normal start memory based on the establishment of the normal start condition so that the normal start condition is surely or roughly a predetermined result.
An ordinary symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variablely displays an ordinary symbol and derives the result of the ordinary lottery, and
By operating a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable member 5602 in FIG. 285), a general winning opening (for example, an open mode in which the game ball cannot be accepted and an open mode in which the game ball can be accepted) can be changed. , The general winning opening 560) in Fig. 285 and
A storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that stores a plurality of operation patterns as operation patterns of the predetermined movable member, and
When the variable display of the normal symbol is performed and a predetermined result (for example, a hit) is derived, the predetermined movable member is operated by any one of the plurality of operation patterns, and the closing mode is used. The movable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be changed to the above-mentioned possible opening mode,
When the general winning opening is in the open mode, the game ball is hardly accepted, and the special starting opening is acceptable only for the game ball in which the general winning opening is in the closed mode and is not accepted by the general winning opening. (For example, the second starting port 440) and
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery so that the outline is a specific result (for example, a small hit) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the special starting port.
A special symbol variable control means that performs variable display of a special symbol and derives the result of the special lottery, and
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed and a specific result is derived, a specific movable member (for example, the opening / closing member 5603 in FIG. 285) is activated to accept a game ball (a specific winning opening (for example)). For example, specific mouth 777) and
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening.
Equipped with
The normal starting condition is
As long as the normal start memory is held in the normal holding means, it is established on condition that the general winning opening is in the closed mode.
The storage means
The opening time from when the predetermined result is derived until the general winning opening is in the open mode, and the ending time from when the general winning opening is closed to when the normal starting condition is satisfied. A normal operation pattern in which both are relatively short (for example, the first pattern), and a special operation pattern in which at least one of the opening time and the ending time is relatively long (for example, the second pattern).
At least remember
The movable control means is
By always operating the predetermined movable member in the normal operation pattern, acceptance of the game ball into the special starting port is hindered, and when a special condition is satisfied (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is the second). Only when the pattern is determined), the game ball is accepted into the specific winning opening by operating the predetermined movable member in the special operation pattern so that the game ball is accepted by the special starting opening. It is characterized by making it possible.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the ordinary lottery, the result is always or roughly a predetermined result, so that the general winning opening is almost fully open except for the opening time and the ending time. When the general winning opening is in the open mode, almost all the game balls are accepted by the general winning opening, so that the acceptance of the game ball by the special starting opening is hindered. However, when a specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined movable member operates in a special operation pattern in which at least one of the opening time and the ending time is relatively long, so that the general winning opening is closed during that time. It is possible to accept the game ball to the special starting port. Then, a specific movable member operates based on the acceptance of the game ball to the special starting port, the game ball can be accepted to the specific winning opening, and the special game is executed, which is a new game that has never been seen before. It becomes possible to play a game by sex.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 64-4 are
When a predetermined movable member (eg, shutter 6310 in FIG. 286) is activated, a first special starting port (eg, FIG. 286 first starting port 5443) and
Movable to facilitate acceptance of the game ball into the first special starting port by operating the predetermined movable member based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit). Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A first lottery means capable of performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of a game ball into the first special starting port (for example, the main CPU 101).
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery, and
A second special starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 286) configured to be acceptable only to the game ball that was not accepted by the first special starting port.
A second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing a second lottery (for example, the first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second special starting port.
A second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery, and
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player is executed. )When,
When a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game (when entering the probability variation attacker), the game state after the special game is completed is changed to the specific game state in which the probability of deriving the special result is increased (for example, high probability time reduction). Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls the game state), and
The first state (for example, the electric support state) in which it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the first special starting port, and the second state in which it is relatively difficult to receive the game ball into the first special starting port. A state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any state (for example, a non-electric support state), and
Equipped with
The expected value that the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game (for example, the ease of entering the probabilistic attacker) is determined when the first lottery is performed and when the second lottery is performed. It is configured differently and
When the state control means is controlled to the first state (for example, a high-accuracy time-short game state), the game ball is relatively easily accepted into the first special start port, so that the first state is relatively easy to receive. 2 It is more difficult to accept the game ball into the special starting port than the first special starting port, and it is also difficult.
When the state control means is controlled to the second state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), it becomes relatively difficult to receive the game ball into the first special starting port. It is characterized in that the acceptance of the game ball into the second special starting port is configured to be easier than in the first state.

According to the game machine of (1) above, it is possible to change the probability of being controlled to a specific game state in which the probability of deriving a special result is increased without changing the launch mode of the game ball toward the game area. It is possible to provide a game-like property.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The expected value for satisfying the specific condition during the execution of the special game is configured to be higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed.
The state control means is
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times) in the first state, the state shifts from the first state to the second state. It is characterized by having a state transition control means capable of executing control.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times in the first state where it is more difficult to accept the game ball to the second special starting port than the first special starting port, the second It shifts to the second state where the acceptance of the game ball into the special starting port becomes easier than the first state. That is, when the state is changed from the first state to the second state, the frequency of the second lottery is higher than that of the first state. Since the expected value that a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game is higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed, it is difficult to derive the special result in the first state. Even so, the interest will be enhanced without discouraging the player.

According to the inventions of Supplementary note 64-1 to Supplementary note 64-4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having new playability.

[Other extended examples, etc.]

It should be noted that all the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments may be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. can.

In addition, each of the above-described embodiments, examples, and modifications, including the above-mentioned appendix, is an example. It goes without saying that the configurations shown in each embodiment, each embodiment and each modification can be partially replaced or combined in other embodiments, other embodiments and other modifications. stomach. That is, the components described in each embodiment, each embodiment, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

16 Liquid crystal display 24 Speaker 35 Power switch 49 Passing gate 101 Main CPU
103 RWM (main RAM)
104 Sub SPU
203 work RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 440 Second start port 540 Large winning opening 560 General winning opening 610 Shutter 662 Main button 664 Select button 5400 Small hit winning opening 6100 Small hit shutter

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by launching a game ball toward a game area.
A first starting port that can accept a game ball launched in a normal manner toward the game area,
The first lottery means for performing the first lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port, and
A first special symbol variable control means that performs variable display of the first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery, and
A second starting port that can accept a game ball launched in a specific manner toward the game area and is given a predetermined number of prize balls or prize ball data when the game ball is accepted .
The second lottery means for performing the second lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, and
A second special symbol variable control means that performs variable display of the second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery, and
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result is derived, a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player and a special game execution means.
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined movable member is operated and arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port, and when the game ball is accepted, the predetermined number is applied. A specific game execution means for executing a specific game that can be easily accepted into a winning opening to which a large number of prize balls or prize ball data are given, and
A game state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
An effect control means that can execute a predetermined effect,
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.
The game state control means is
In the normal gaming state where the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, but the prize is won. Before the game ball is accepted in the mouth, the game ball is accepted in the second starting port, and the acceptance of the game ball in the winning opening is hindered, so that the number of prize balls per unit time or the number of prize balls or An advantageous game state in which the expected value of the number of prize ball data is less than 1, and
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning opening becomes easier than in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched in the specific embodiment, the game ball is launched per unit time. The specific gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of launched balls is larger than either the normal gaming state or the advantageous gaming state, and
Can be controlled to any of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state at a timing that may differ each time when the advantageous gaming state is controlled.
The effect control means is
When the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, it is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the timing of transition to the specific game state by using the time devoted to the execution of the specific game. A game machine.

Images